Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology: Reason, Meaning and Experience

TRANSCENDING BOUNDARIES IN PHILOSOPHY AND THEOLOGY Presenting new opportunities in the dialogue between philosophy and theology, this interdisciplinary text addresses the contemporary reshaping of intellectual boundaries. Exploring human experience in a ‘post-Christian’ era, the distinguished contributors bring to bear what have been traditionally seen as theological resources while drawing on contemporary developments in philosophy, both ‘continental’ and ‘analytic’. Set in the context of two complementary narratives – one philosophical concerning secularity, the other theological about the question of God – the authors point to ways of reconfiguring both traditional reason / faith oppositions and those between interpretation / text and language / experience.

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology Series editors: Martin Warner, University of Warwick Kevin Vanhoozer, Trinity International University Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology is an interdisciplinary series exploring new opportunities in the dialogue between philosophy and theology that go beyond more traditional ‘faith and reason’ debates and take account of the contemporary reshaping of intellectual boundaries. For much of the modern era, the relation of philosophy and theology has been conceived in terms of antagonism or subordination, but recent intellectual developments hold out considerable potential for a renewed dialogue in which philosophy and theology have common cause for revisioning their respective identities, reconceiving their relationship, and combining their resources. This series explores constructively for the 21st century the resources available for engaging with those forms of enquiry, experience and sensibility that theology has historically sought to address. Drawing together new writing and research from leading international scholars in the field, this high profile research series offers an important contribution to contemporary research across the interdisciplinary perspectives relating theology and philosophy. Also in this series Divine Knowledge A Kierkegaardian Perspective on Christian Education David Willows Kierkegaard, Language and the Reality of God Steven Shakespeare Impossible God Derrida’s Theology Hugh Rayment-Pickard On Paul Ricoeur The Owl of Minerva Richard Kearney

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology Reason, Meaning and Experience

Edited by KEVIN VANHOOZER Trinity International University, USA MARTIN WARNER University of Warwick, UK

© Kevin Vanhoozer and Martin Warner 2007 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise without the prior permission of the publisher. Kevin Vanhoozer and Martin Warner have asserted their moral right under the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act, 1988, to be identified as the editors of this work. Published by Ashgate Publishing Limited Gower House Croft Road Aldershot Hampshire GU11 3HR England

Ashgate Publishing Company Suite 420 101 Cherry Street Burlington, VT 05401-4405 USA

Ashgate website: http://www.ashgate.com British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology: Reason, Meaning and Experience. – (Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology) 1. Faith and reason. 2. Knowledge, Theory of (Religion). I. Vanhoozer, Kevin J. II. Warner, Martin. 210 Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology: Reason, Meaning, and Experience / edited by Kevin Vanhoozer and Martin Warner. p. cm. Includes bibliographical references and index. 1. Philosophy and religion. 2. Theology. I. Vanhoozer, Kevin J. II. Warner, Martin. B56.T735 2007 201’.61–dc22 2006011954

ISBN-13: 978-0-7546-5318-9 (hbk) ISBN-13: 978-0-7546-5324-0 (pbk) Printed and bound in Great Britain by MPG Books Ltd, Bodmin, Cornwall.

Contents Notes on the Contributors Acknowledgements Introduction 1 Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology Martin Warner

vii ix 1 15

2 Once More Into the Borderlands: The Way of Wisdom in Philosophy and Theology after the ‘Turn to Drama’ Kevin J. Vanhoozer

31

Section One: Reason, Rationality and Traditions of Rationality

55

3 What is Secularity? Charles Taylor

57

4 Rational Religious Faith and Kant’s Transcendental Boundaries Chris L. Firestone

77

5 Boundaries Crossed and Uncrossable: Physical Science, Social Science, Theology Philip Clayton

91

6 The Logos, the Body and the World: On the Phenomenological Border Graham Ward

105

Section Two: Meaning, Language and Interpretation

127

7 The Question of God Today Nicholas Lash

129

8 Felicity and Fusion: Speech Act Theory and Hermeneutical Philosophy Dan R. Stiver

145

vi

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Section Three: Experience, Imagination and Mysticism

157

9 Experience Skewed David Brown

159

10 On Philosophers (Not) Reading History: Narrative and Utopia Grace M. Jantzen

177

11 What To Say: Reflections on Mysticism after Modernity George Pattison

191

Bibliography Index

207 225

Notes on the Contributors David Brown is Van Mildert Professor of Divinity in the University of Durham and a Fellow of the British Academy; he was formerly a Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford. His books include The Divine Trinity (1985), Continental Philosophy and Modern Theology (1987), Tradition and Imagination: Revelation and Change (1999), Discipleship and Imagination: Christian Tradition and Truth (2000) and God and the Enchantment of Place (2004). Philip Clayton is Ingraham Professor of Theology in Claremont Graduate University; he was formerly Principal Investigator of the ‘Science and the Spiritual Quest’ project at the Center for Theology and the Natural Sciences in Berkeley, California, Humboldt Professor in the University of Munich, and also winner of the Templeton Book Prize for the best monograph in the field of science and religion. His books include Explanation from Physics to Theology (1989), God and Contemporary Science (1997), The Problem of God in Modern Thought (2000), Mind & Emergence: From Quantum to Consciousness (2004) and (as editor) The Oxford Handbook of Religion and Science (2006). Chris L. Firestone is Associate Professor of Philosophy in Trinity College, Deerfield, Illinois, Trinity International University. His books include Theology at the Transcendental Bounds of Reason (forthcoming) and (as editor) Kant and the New Philosophy of Religion (2006). Grace M. Jantzen died from cancer while this volume was in preparation. She was Research Professor of Religion, Gender and Culture in the University of Manchester. Her books include God’s Body (1984), Power and Gender in Christian Mysticism (1995), Becoming Divine: Towards a Feminist Philosophy of Religion (1998) and Julian of Norwich: Mystic and Theologian (2nd edn 2000). At her death she was at work on an envisaged multi-volume study of the roots of violence in western culture, and the search for alternatives, entitled Death and the Displacement of Beauty; her Foundations of Violence (2004) is its first volume. Nicholas Lash is Norris-Hulse Professor Emeritus of Divinity in the University of Cambridge, and a former president of the Catholic Theological Association of Great Britain. His books include Theology on Dover Beach (1979), Easter in Ordinary: Reflections on Human Experience and the Knowledge of God (1988), The Beginning and the End of ‘Religion’ (1996), Believing Three Ways in One God: A Reading of the Apostles’ Creed (2003) and Holiness, Speech and Silence: Reflections on the Question of God (2004).

viii

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

George Pattison is Lady Margaret Professor of Theology in the University of Oxford; he was formerly Dean of King’s College, Cambridge. His books include Agnosis: Theology in the Void (1996), The End of Theology and the Task of Thinking about God (1998), Art, Modernity and Faith: Restoring the Image (2nd edn 1998), Anxious Angels: A Retrospective View of Religious Existentialism (1999) and Kierkegaard’s Upbuilding Discourses: Philosophy, Literature and Theology (2002). Dan R. Stiver is Professor of Theology in the Logsdon School of Theology, HardinSimmons University; he was formerly Associate Professor of Religious Philosophy in the Southern Baptist Theological Seminary, Louisville, Kentucky. His books include The Philosophy of Religious Language: Sign, Symbol, and Story (1996) and Theology after Ricoeur: New Directions in Hermeneutical Theology (2001). Charles Taylor is Board of Trustees Professor of Law and Philosophy, Northwestern University, and Professor of Philosophy and Political Science in McGill University; he is a Fellow of the British Academy and of the Royal Society of Canada, and was formerly Chichele Professor of Political Science and Social Theory in the University of Oxford. His books include Hegel (1975), Philosophical Papers (2 vols 1985), Sources of the Self: The Making of the Modern Identity (1989), The Ethics of Authenticity (1992) and Modern Social Imaginaries (2004). Kevin J. Vanhoozer is Research Professor of Systematic Theology in Trinity Evangelical Divinity School, Trinity International University; he was formerly co-Chair of the Systematic Theology Group of the American Academy of Religion, and Senior Lecturer in Theology and Religious Studies in the University of Edinburgh. His books include Biblical Narrative in the Philosophy of Paul Ricoeur (1990), The Drama of Doctrine: A Canonical–linguistic Approach to Christian Theology (2005) and (as editor) The Cambridge Companion to Postmodern Theology (2003), Dictionary for Theological Interpretation of the Bible (2005) and Hermeneutics at the Crossroads (2006). Graham Ward is Professor of Contextual Theology in the University of Manchester and Senior Executive Editor of Literature and Theology; he was formerly Dean of Peterhouse, Cambridge. His books include Barth, Derrida, and the Language of Theology (1999), Cities of God (2000), Cultural Transformation and Religious Practice (2004), Christ and Culture (2005) and (as editor) The Blackwell Companion to Postmodern Theology (2002). Martin Warner is Associate Fellow of the Department of Philosophy at the University of Warwick, where he was formerly Senior Lecturer and co-founder of the University’s Philosophy & Literature research and teaching programmes. His books include Philosophical Finesse: Studies in the Art of Rational Persuasion (1989), A Philosophical Study of T. S. Eliot’s Four Quartets (1999) and (as editor) The Bible as Rhetoric: Studies in Biblical Persuasion and Credibility (1990), The Language of the Cave (1992) and Religion and Philosophy (1992).

Acknowledgements The contribution by Nicholas Lash is an expanded version of the first chapter of his Holiness, Speech and Silence (Ashgate, 2004). An earlier version of the contribution by Charles Taylor entitled ‘Closed world structures’ appeared in Mark A. Wrathall (ed.), Religion After Metaphysics (Cambridge University Press, 2003). Material from the earlier papers is reproduced by permission of the authors and, in the latter case, of Cambridge University Press. We are grateful to Peter Larkin of the University of Warwick Library for bibliographical assistance.

This page intentionally left blank

Introduction

Two Strategies To transcend a boundary is neither simply to breach nor to ignore it; it is to surmount or otherwise go beyond that limit. With respect to conceptual boundaries there have traditionally been two strategies for achieving this. The first is at least as old as Aristotle, and is nicely exemplified in his own intellectual trajectory from the claim of the Eudemian Ethics (1217b25–35) that there can be no unitary science of being, that the boundaries between the different categories of being are in this respect insurmountable or untranscendable, to his attempt to develop just such a science (episteme) in the Metaphysics (see 1003a21–b19). It is by now widely recognized that this seminal development became possible through his increasing grasp of the potentialities for the dispelling of ambiguities of what has become known as ‘focal meaning’ (somewhat misleadingly assimilated by the Scholastics to analogy), where derivative uses of a term are related in principled fashion to a focal case, so a term like ‘being’ or ‘good’ is said ‘relative to one thing and to a single character’ (1003a33– 4; Owen’s translation, 1979: 17). This is a variant of his characteristic dialectical procedure whereby Aristotle sought to overcome puzzlement by reconceptualizing the problematic terrain in such a way that it became possible both to understand why apparently competing positions held the attractions they did and how they may still play a role in pointing to aspects of the phenomena that no adequate account should overlook. Kant appears to make an analogous move in his Third Critique, seeking to find a vantage point whereby the tensions between the first two Critiques, between theoretical and practical reason, may be resolved and hence, so Chris Firestone argues in this volume, the boundary between knowledge and faith transcended. While such a reading is no doubt controversial, the Hegelian dialectic is often regarded as a paradigm of such boundary transcendence, though it is indeed but one inflexion of the possibilities. Here the opposition of thesis and antithesis may be overcome in a higher ‘sublation’ (Aufhebung); the literal meaning of aufheben is ‘to lift up’ but it can also mean both ‘to cancel’ and ‘to preserve’, and in this context what is aufgehoben is transcended without being wholly discarded. In all such cases an attempt is made to develop a new conceptual framework in terms of which familiar intellectual boundaries may be seen in a new light, and thereby as less fundamental than they were previously thought to be. But there is also what may, with some reservations and with an eye to the incipient paradox, be termed a more ‘immanent’ strategy for transcending conceptual boundaries (though the two strategies cannot always be sharply separated). Instead

2

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

of the ambitious project of developing a new intellectual map, an attempt is made to make apparent and press against the limitations of the framework within which one is working, with an eye to suggesting the possibility and, usually, importance of what lies (or does not lie) beyond that limit. In literature and music we are familiar with those ‘limit texts’ that, operating at the limits of their genre, have been instrumental in reconfiguring the possibilities for their successors: Stravinsky’s Rite of Spring and James Joyce’s Ulysses come immediately to mind and, although its subversive potentialities have perhaps been less obviously exploited, the latter’s Finnegan’s Wake may be thought of as exploding the genre of the novel from the inside. On the broadest possible canvas, that of ‘all that is the case’, Wittgenstein’s Tractatus exemplifies this characteristically Modernist procedure: [T]he aim of the book is to set a limit to thought, or rather – not to thought, but to the expression of thoughts: for in order to be able to set a limit to thought, we should have to find both sides of the limit thinkable (i.e. we should have to be able to think what cannot be thought). It will therefore only be in language that the limit can be set, and what lies on the other side of the limit will simply be nonsense. (1961: § 1 & p. 3)

But this is to ‘view the world … [as] a limited whole’, ethics and aesthetics we note are transcendent to it, and ‘Feeling the world as a limited whole – it is this that is mystical’ (§§ 6.421 & 6.45), so it is hardly surprising that these very ‘elucidations’ are to be recognized as ‘nonsensical’; the reader ‘must transcend these propositions, and then he will see the world aright’ (§ 6.54). Such attempts are indeed problematic, for without the security of a revised conceptual framework enabling us ‘to find both sides of the limit thinkable’ they are vulnerable to Frank Ramsey’s famous jeer: ‘What we can’t say we can’t say, and we can’t whistle it either.’ (Ramsey 1931: 238) It is worth noting that by the time of the Philosophical Investigations Wittgenstein has dropped this sort of ‘immanent’ strategy for overcoming limits in favour of a set of procedures for helping us to see what for the Tractatus was an absolute limit as relative to a set of problematic assumptions – as a ‘false prison’ (Pears 1987–88). Nevertheless Ramseyan tough-mindedness can sometimes appear too easy, blocking the sort of authentic wrestling with the possibilities of human understanding we find in Nietzsche’s (grammatically expressed) aphorism: ‘I’m afraid we’re not rid of God because we still believe in grammar’ (1997: 21). Both the ‘reconceptualizing’ and the ‘immanent’ strategies for transcending boundaries – from without, as it were, and from within – are represented in this volume, including some attempts to combine them. All the contributors see current or recent ways of configuring theology, philosophy, their procedures, and/or the relation between them as defective, and a number see recent intellectual developments as providing resources for seeking to remedy some of those defects in ways that allow the boundaries between knowledge (or reason) and faith to be seen in a new light or otherwise transcended. Philip Clayton images such boundaries in terms of walls; Dan Stiver in terms of ditches (echoing Lessing’s ‘ugly, broad ditch’ between the ‘accidental truths of history’ and the ‘necessary truths of reason’, 1956: 53–5). But

Introduction

3

what is striking, and highly characteristic of the contemporary intellectual scene, is that however these boundaries or limits are conceived, while the most dialectical paper – Graham Ward’s exploration of the phenomenological limits – is in many ways the most purely ‘immanent’ one, the most favoured mode for seeking an ‘external’, reconceptualized, perspective on conventional boundaries is that of narrative. Alternative Perspectives Charles Taylor and Nicholas Lash provide complementary narrative, diagnostic, accounts of the contemporary intellectual scene as it bears on religious belief, and in the light of these propose alternatives to the received wisdom. In the case of Taylor it is in fact a counter-narrative, for his claim is that our ability adequately to understand contemporary secular western culture is impeded by a number of master narratives that ‘naturalize’ secularity. But these master narratives themselves have a history, and exploring how they came to interlock helps us to grasp how it has happened that far from intellectually water-tight ‘subtraction stories’, of the progress of science eliminating ‘transcendental’ myths to establish materialism and of a humane, autonomous moral identity and social order arising from the sloughing off of what since Kant has been termed the ‘transcendent’, have provided mutual support to sponsor a family of conceptual ‘world structures’, closed to the possibility of any reality ‘transcending’ (that is, surpassing or independent of) the ‘natural’ or material universe, or the categories of experience, and in such a way as to make them seem inevitable. What Kevin Vanhoozer describes as Kant’s ‘turn’ to the ‘subject’, with its experiential categories, was of seminal importance here. Contemporary secularization is thereby understood as mainly a recession of religion in the face of science, technology and rationality. Once held captive by such a picture, experience of the spiritual and the sacred becomes marginal at best. But recognition that such ‘closed world structures’ are themselves historically constructed helps denaturalize secularity, and recent philosophical developments have put in question the materials out of which they have been constructed. The closed boundary that tends to ‘blank out the transcendent’ ceases to be the limit of our world, but rather an all too human construction. This is a broadly philosophical narrative. Nicholas Lash provides a theological counterpart. In the early modern period, as part of the construction of modern moral identity, traditional ‘authorities’ were discarded in the search for certainty and power, and this involved a shift in imaginative and intellectual ambition. In seeking intellectual mastery of the world, ‘the word “god” came to be used, for the first time, to name the ultimate explanation of the system of the world’, and once it became felt that there was no need for this hypothesis modern ‘atheism’ was born. The term ‘atheism’ is put into scare quotes not simply because it, like ‘theism’, ‘monotheism’ and ‘polytheism’, was invented in the seventeenth century, but because so understood (at least if that ultimate explanatory principle is understood as a being of a certain kind) atheists turn out to have at least this in common with Christians,

4

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Jews and Muslims, ‘that none of them believes in gods’. Before modernity ‘gods’ were understood as whatever people worshipped, but description has usurped worship as the primary context for the use of the word. To use Taylor’s terminology, the developing secularization associated with closed world structures has in effect naturalized the transcendent in the very process of marginalizing it. In retrieving that earlier relational conception of the divine the boundaries between believer and unbeliever shift and, it is argued, we need to learn again that speaking appropriately of God is, while not impossible, difficult and even dangerous, ‘because appropriate speech brings to language appropriate relationship’, a relationship that in the case of God essentially involves responsibility for ‘truthful speech and action’. Lash notes that the story needs to be told differently in English- and Germanspeaking cultures, though the bifurcated narrative converges on the contemporary substitution of the language of description for the language of address as the primary grammar of the concept of God. In the former God became an (ultimately unnecessary) explanatory hypothesis in the scientific system of the world, but in the latter it was philosophy rather than physics that displaced theology. Theology is properly ‘response speech’, but German metaphysics from Kant onwards substituted ‘pure thought for prayerful reflection’. And in any full narrative of the development of the intellectual horizons of contemporary culture, as already noted, the Kantian influence is inescapable. His First Critique may be seen as developing the materials for a closed world structure bounded by the limits of the phenomenal, and yet his Second appears to open the possibility of breaching that boundary, of giving access to the noumenal. The tension thus set up (which Wittgenstein’s Tractatus echoes) is still with us. Chris Firestone tackles this tension head on. Drawing on recent Kantian scholarship, he too recounts a narrative, albeit one with a much narrower focus: that of the development of Kant’s critical philosophy. The traditional reading, which ‘puts a debilitating boundary line between knowledge and faith’, arises from giving primary weight to the First Critique and not taking sufficient account of the way that Kant’s understanding of these matters developed over time. (It would, after all, be unwise to seek to interpret Book Г of Aristotle’s Metaphysics to make it conform with the Eudemian Ethics.) On the proposed reading, Kant in his Third Critique indicates that we must go beyond theoretical and moral philosophy to considerations of teleology, aesthetics, poetics and religion in order to resolve the tensions arising from the attempt to harmonize his response to the question ‘What ought I to do?’ in the Second Critique with that to ‘What can I know?’ in the First, to stabilize the relations between practical and pure reason. Further, attention to the later writings makes it clear that in this project rational religious faith (where ‘religious’ is conceived in broadly Christian terms) plays a major role in enabling us to grasp what the Third Critique (1952: 176) describes as the ‘ground of the unity of the supersensible’ and thereby stabilize reason. On Firestone’s account, contemporary scholarship enables us to see that rational religious faith is Kant’s way of finally coming to terms with the transcendental needs of reason in a critically satisfying way, and the very dynamic of his thinking points forwards to contemporary possibilities. ‘Understanding Kant means transcending Kant’, and the

Introduction

5

retrieval of his final perspective opens the possibility of ‘completing the development of a transcendental theology consonant with what reason requires and what history demands’. So understood, Kant’s resistance to closed world structures can be seen as grounded in his understanding of the nature of reason itself. Such a proposal puts in sharp focus the criteria for interpreting and reinterpreting texts, and for seeking to ‘complete’ their projects. In what sense can understanding a text involve transcending it? For religions with authoritative scriptures this is a particularly delicate issue. And here Dan Stiver’s contribution is to the point. It has long been recognized that more needs to be considered than simply the standard meaning of the words with their grammatical constructions, for how they are taken may affect their meaning (one remembers Nicodemus’ literal-minded bafflement at being invited, as he saw it, to ‘enter the second time into his mother’s womb’, John 3:4). A new orthodoxy appears to be emerging in theology and biblical studies whereby a development of speech act theory to include texts is taken to provide the required framework, providing a principled account of the conventions in terms of which words are uttered and texts written. Further, by enabling us to take account not only of what is written, but of what is done in what is written, it throws light on the notoriously problematic, yet theologically central, notion of God speaking, for example commanding, assuring and promising through the words of Scripture. But this move sponsors its own limitations; it is in danger of relativizing all discourse to culturally available conventions and renders the interpretation of texts from authors or cultures about which our knowledge is defective virtually impossible. So understood, such an orthodoxy is in danger of becoming the hermeneutic equivalent of a ‘closed world structure’. To transcend its boundaries, Stiver argues, we need to have recourse also to perspectives associated with the hermeneutic tradition as reconfigured by Heidegger, Gadamer and Ricoeur. We need to take account of what is meaningful to us as well as what could have been significant at the time of the production of the text; we need to seek to fuse these two ‘horizons’. There are no hard and fast rules here, for even when we have some grasp of the available conventions we need to judge what has been done, perhaps creatively, with them; such judgement is to be understood as a form of ‘phronesis’, Aristotle’s term (originally deployed in ethics) for applying general rules to particular situations, for deliberating well. And such judgement needs to take account of the tacit ways in which beliefs and attitudes are embodied, which may require vivid and empathetic imagining. But this indicates that meaning may not be transparent to the consciousness of either author or reader, and ‘the hermeneutics of suspicion’ help us interrogate the possibilities of distortion provided by the available conventions, as well as by ideologies and vested interests. Charles Taylor’s counter-narrative to those that lie behind his ‘closed world structures’ may itself be seen as an exercise in the hermeneutics of suspicion. Thus the perspectives now made available by contemporary hermeneutic theory enable us to see the more limited framework as just that. By rooting texts in the broader context of human horizons, cultures, interests and readers, they provide us with ‘phronetic’ criteria to judge when we need go beyond conventional readings, when to engage in critique

6

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

as a part of interpreting them, and perhaps even make sense of the notion that the dynamic of a text may point us to forms of understanding unavailable to its author. With David Brown we move from the interpretation of texts to that of experience. Even among those whose world structures are not closed, there appears to be something of an impasse with respect to the possibility of that which transcends the physical universe breaking through, partially, in experience (not of course in its totality, otherwise it would have become immanent). The issue is often focused in the notion of ‘religious experience’. In contemporary debates within the analytical tradition of philosophy of religion it tends to be understood as constituting a specifiable, fairly narrow, range of experiences that may be regarded as religiously evidential. But in forms of theology strongly focused on the ‘otherness’ of God such a privileged status is characteristically denied, and attention directed to the literary hermeneutics of texts, such as those of the Bible, that purport to record such experiences (a move of course widely advocated in today’s intellectual community, strongly influenced by what Vanhoozer describes as a culture-wide intellectual ‘turn’ to language). On this account, properly speaking there are no isolatable elements of experience that can properly be designated ‘religious’. But neither approach is plausible. Authoritative sacred texts themselves allude to distinctive forms of experience as disclosing the transcendent, such as the vision of Jesus’ exaltation in the Gospels we call the Transfiguration; to flatten out their distinctiveness runs counter to what faithful literary hermeneutic interrogation of the texts displays. And the philosophers’ preoccupation with evidence tends to skew their models for interpreting such experience in terms of epistemically privileged categories such as perception (rather than, say, the sense of beauty) and of action (rather than just being). Worse, this sort of modelling of the evidential seems premised on the conviction that such experience should be taken as actual experience of a being of a specific kind, the sort Christians would call ‘God’, a conviction we have seen to be itself theologically inept, a function of closed world structures. The common, misleading, assumption is that religious experience is an absolute, an all or nothing affair, ideally without mediation through the senses or culture. However, no experience can escape mediation, and though the religious traditions teach that God may be found in the ordinary, not simply the strange or spectacular, we should note that experience can be understood as being from God without being of God: interpreting an event as an answer to prayer is very different from a simple sense of transcendent awe in the presence of a mountain landscape. These apparently opposed modes of misconstruing, or ‘skewing’, the phenomena point to the need to regain a perspective in which different and potentially conflicting aspects of experience may be built into a whole in any argument from religious experience, and ‘experiences of religious mystery’ may be recognized and ‘placed’ in a continuum that resists simple ‘evidential’ modelling but may yet point to an account of what might make such an experience possible and intelligible. While David Brown argues for a perspective in which ‘religious’ and ‘ordinary’ experience may be seen as part of a continuum, Philip Clayton reports the increasing recognition of continuities across the once sharp dichotomy between science and

Introduction

7

religion. Like Stiver, he reads the signs of the times positively, as indicating a breaking open of one of the key building blocks of Taylor’s hegemonic closed world structures, in that the received ‘subtraction story’ of the development of science has been losing ground. In the days of that story’s power, the boundary between science and religion represented the fundamental boundary of the modern period, but now the very distinction between them ‘has become a matter of debate’, and there is increasing recognition of their mutual dependence. The counter-movement started within the sciences themselves, when the recognition that the natural sciences are in part interpretative began to break down the boundary between the natural and social sciences, thereby giving rise to a new paradigm of science as the overcoming of puzzlement in place of that of grasping an object of study objectively. This account no longer presupposes a qualitative distinction between scientific and non-scientific rationality, and the possibility of drawing ‘clear lines of implication from main-line scientific work to some underlying metaphysical position’ is now widely accepted. Theology has significant features in common with all areas of enquiry, and religious struggles with fundamental questions are different more in degree than in kind from those of the social (and indeed aspects of the natural) sciences. Understanding our existence, Clayton maintains, is enhanced when all the sciences can work together with theologians and scholars of religion. Despite some notable nay-sayers, sniping across ‘the walls of the past’, he argues that a clear knowledge of the differences between theology and the sciences encourages a sense of their complementarity, and sees those walls as increasingly becoming ‘more tourist destinations than functional blocks to … incursions’. For Kant faith is a matter of the will or heart, and in the first instance associated with practical reason rather than the pure reason that undergirds the sciences. And for Christianity love is central, involving both Lash’s ‘appropriate relationship’ with God and engagement with one’s neighbour (Kant saw the Categorical Imperative as exhibiting the Golden Rule). This suggests that ‘God-talk’ should be understood primarily in dynamic and dramatic terms, a proposal developed by Kevin Vanhoozer. His proposed reconceptualization is developed in part cartographically, which the word ‘perspective’ seems to invite, but it also contains a strong narrative element. The ways in which one maps the varying boundaries between philosophy and theology, and their degrees of insurmountability, will turn significantly on the self-understanding of each discipline. These have of course varied over time and between practitioners, but as cultural products neither is immune to the surrounding intellectual currents, and it is noteworthy that within the recent past influential elements of each have been subject, in swift succession or even contemporaneously, to a number of reconceptualizations or ‘turns’: to the subject (most notably in Kant), to language (as noted in their different ways by both Stiver and Brown), to narrative (as exemplified by most of the foregoing accounts) and to ‘social practice’ (whose imprint, as we shall shortly see, may be found in Grace Jantzen’s contribution). The last three of these Vanhoozer groups together as exemplifications of the ‘hermeneutic’ imagination which he, like Stiver, understands in terms of phronesis, of deliberating well.

8

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Today, he suggests, we can see the potentiality for deepening the significance of these shifts of perspective in terms of yet another ‘turn’: to embodied action and, more specifically, to drama, such that theological doctrines state acts, not simply facts, and direct us to participate in these acts. One notes that Lash’s narrative of the substitution of the language of description, in relation to God, for a language of address that essentially involves relationship and hence appropriate action bears the mark of at least three of these ‘turns’. In contemporary analytic philosophy the theory of content (at once linguistic and mental) is increasingly seen as basic for an adequate understanding of subjectivity, with the subject modelled less in terms of the spectator or thinker than of the agent who relates to the world by acting in and on it. Indeed, it has become customary to speak of the ‘practical turn’ in this connection, for individuation of content essentially involves the ability to discriminate one ‘demonstrative’ thought from another, to discriminate between thoughts that enable us to refer to particular items and their properties (to this dining chair and to that one), and ‘the distinctive standard use of demonstratives is a use grounded in our capacity to act upon objects and, in turn, be acted upon by them’ (Luntley 1999: 343). For Vanhoozer such agency is essentially interactive and ‘dramatic’, with these categories having application beyond the understanding or construction of the self, so that both theology and philosophy may be reconceived in terms of participating in being-as-action, of ‘living well with others’, and theological doctrines understood in terms of directions for how rightly to relate to reality, a perspective which enables a further remapping, and in some cases transcendence, of received boundaries in the borderlands of theology. Pressing the Boundary ‘Now my hammer rages fiercely against its prison’, declared Zarathustra (Nietzsche 1969a: II, ‘On the blissful islands’, p. 111). A certain controlled rage may be thought to infuse Grace Jantzen’s invocation of those who have been marginalized by past and present ‘hegemonic discourses’ and her advocacy of the imagination’s ‘utopian function’. Crucial elements of Taylor’s dominant closed world structure, with its supposedly autonomous moral identity and social order, can be seen in her ‘autonarrative of traditional history, the complacent story (in the West) of progress, freedom and democracy, ideas often treated as universals’ (a treatment that helps, of course, close the structure). This story is seen as a form of ideology, and hence false consciousness, but rather than providing a large-scale counter- (or meta-) narrative in the style of Taylor she presses against its framework of presuppositions by drawing on disruptive elements of particularity still retrievable within it, including elements highlighted by recent work in feminist theology and philosophy, not least by pointing to the role in our self-understanding of the multiplicity of ways in which we tell our own life-stories. The inescapable role of birth within such a story, which necessarily involves others both in its actuality and in our ability to know anything of it, points

Introduction

9

to the human limits of individualism; we can die, but hardly be born, alone. Yet it is upon the stories of narratable selves that historical accounts must stand or fall. This casts light on western religious identity. The auto-narrative of the Israelites as we find it in the Bible has had an afterlife which, in combination with the narratives of Classical civilization, has profoundly shaped western consciousness, even in its secular forms; such notions as ‘progress’ and ‘development’ are secular variants of ‘salvation history’, constituting the goals of a family of Vanhoozer’s social practices. The dominant (gendered) version of this narrative is death-focused: salvation comes through the sacrifice of Christ and ‘men follow the Lord of Hosts to battle’; one is reminded of the traditional characterization of the Church on earth as ‘militant’. But another version is open to us, one that focuses on birth rather than death, with newness, creativity and hope, always in interconnection with other selves, each unique and irreplaceable. Salvation bespeaks atomistic individualism, rescue from an intolerable situation, not a change in the situation itself. But the model of ‘flourishing’ implies interconnection in a web of life, and is vitally reliant upon the body, and upon nourishment and reproduction. Both models are to be found in the biblical writings. That of flourishing is well focused in Jesus’ ‘I am come that they might have life, and that they might have it more abundantly’ (John 10:10). That of salvation has very largely displaced this, however, giving rise to ‘an ideology of dominance and the technologies and practices of violence, while natality, creativity, beauty and flourishing have been suppressed or ignored’. By listening to voices from the margins of biblical texts, and from the history of religion in the West, there remain resources for creativity, and the desire it expresses, for imagining and working towards newness. Retrieval of the alternative model helps enable us to recognize that ‘salvation’ and its secular counterparts are in these contexts used as metaphors – salvation is not ‘literal doctrine’ – and thus weakens the power of the pictures they sponsor to hold us captive. The body and desire also feature prominently in Graham Ward’s exercise in pressing the limits of phenomenology. As conceived by Husserl, the latter operates at a more basic level than that of the cultural narratives Jantzen seeks to reconfigure, for its work of ‘reduction’, investigating what is given in immediate intuition, aims at recovering the ‘primordial’, the ‘ultimate limit’. In this respect it has affinities with the project of the Tractatus, and as with that project it thereby points beyond itself, for pure description, free from interpretation, is a mirage. We cannot distil the experience of a phenomenon’s primordial givenness to consciousness from its representation to consciousness. A star is perceived differently by the pagan astrologist and the contemporary astronomer. Thus there have been repeated attempts to ‘reach beyond phenomenology’, yet the attempt to do this in theological terms is characteristically resisted, even resisted as ‘a transgression of phenomenology’s project’. But this objection, Ward maintains, is in itself such a transgression for it embodies the secular assumption that the horizons of the immanent are not themselves constituted by that which gives and transcends them; however, phenomenology aspires to a rigorous neutrality on such matters, and there is no good reason why the phenomenological method may not be employed as part of a theological analysis. This he undertakes

10

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

with respect to what it is to be embodied, incarnate (there is an affinity here with Vanhoozer’s ‘dramatic’ emphasis on embodied action), with specific reference to a phenomenological analysis of touch, seen as more fundamental than sight and as operating at the juncture between the corporeal and the spiritual. The body itself can have knowledge, which is tactile rather than conceptual and informed by desire (including erotic desire), which is itself informed by the way that body sensuously encounters and negotiates the thoughts and knowledges of other bodies. Further, touch cannot distance (unlike sight and hearing), ‘does not submit to a general vocabulary without ceasing to be what it is’, and thus communicates only to the other being touched. It may thereby be used to model both the intimacy of God’s presence, ‘God’s profound touch’, and the goal of contemplation, to know even as I am known. So understood, touch is an orientation towards being incarnate and it finds its true self-understanding in love. Bodies ‘strive towards a condition that the account of the Word made flesh narrativizes’, and thus it is the mystery of embodiment itself that moves us beyond phenomenology and towards the theology of phenomena. Through pressing the phenomenological project in terms of our embodied condition we find that ‘the limits (and beyond) of phenomenology are theological’. Combining the Strategies Distinguishing between strategies ‘from without’ and ‘from within’ for transcending boundaries can be a useful heuristic and expository device, but it should not be pressed too far. Aristotle was led to his reconceptualizations in part, at least, from finding (‘immanently’, as it were) that the available conceptual resources were constricting and hence distorting, and Nietzsche’s hammering against the prison walls of grammar enabled him to see himself as preparing for and announcing a new perspective, that of the ‘great noon’ (1968: Ecce Homo, ‘Dawn’, II), which he could grasp only imperfectly but sufficiently to discern that in the light of it ‘everything stood on its head’ (1968: Ecce Homo, ‘Twilight of the Idols’, I). For at least two contributions to this volume, attempting to enforce the distinction brings diminishing returns. With George Pattison we move from Husserl to Heidegger, who is used to provide an alternative perspective for the understanding of mysticism, which is then inflected by Dostoevsky. Thus far his paper exemplifies the first strategy. But the impetus for this challenge to a widespread contemporary consensus, dominated by Vanhoozer’s ‘linguistic turn’ whose role in theological accounts of ‘religious experience’ was noted by Brown, arises from the sense that the bounds of the linguistic prison that consensus sponsors are radically unstable, for the intentionality embodied in language points beyond itself to the matter that language ‘means’ or ‘intends’. The consensus appears to form part of a closed world structure in terms of which experiences are to be understood as generated and shaped by symbolic systems. In contesting this, Pattison considers Heidegger’s insistence that language and Being are not separable, and in this context invokes the latter’s ‘event of appropriation’ to help us see how ‘an absolute experience of nothingness’,

Introduction

11

while indeterminate with regard to conceptual content, may be appropriated by us in the form of a determinate structure of meaning. However, whereas for Heidegger the sole occurrence of language capable of recalling us to an awareness of being is found in the poetic word, speaking from beyond the orbit of quotidian affairs, for Pattison a novelist such as Dostoevsky can similarly speak to us, though polyphonically out of the very experience of modernity, in a way that requires our own engagement in the argument. Yet while Dostoevsky’s text rehearses the experience of modernity itself, it is not closed to the possibility of experiences that seem to come from beyond our present cultural horizons. The Heideggerian perspective, both in its poetic, Hölderlin-like, form – coming as it were out of the silence – and in its novelistic polyphonic version in terms of lived experience with others, enables us coherently to claim that in interpreting events that seem to befall us as experiences of something ‘from beyond’, we are not simply shuffling our linguistic tokens. In this respect at least, ‘we remain free to contest the world-view of our age’. In an intellectual context dominated by closed world structures, mysticism not implausibly tends to be located at the margins of discourse. Martin Warner’s attempt to redress the balance of the old forms of conceptual mapping engages with that context’s heartlands. His paper argues that when we attempt to think through the distinction between knowledge and belief, which since Kant has been taken as marking the most fundamental boundary between philosophy and theology, taking account of such theological perspectives as ‘knowledge by identification’, we find that it needs radical reconfiguration, not just as a matter of Kantian scholarship as with Firestone, but more generally. And in this reconfiguration we find that philosophy is itself a kind of writing (for Vanhoozer, indeed, it is a kind of drama) inescapably enmeshed in imaginative and rhetorical procedures, and that the ‘phronetic’ model of reasoning (championed by Stiver and Vanhoozer) enables us to see that some forms of interdependence between rational principle and subjectivity do not necessarily foreclose objectivity, and hence that the boundaries between reason, sensation, emotion and will attacked by Nietzsche (1997: 83) need themselves to be subjected to the hermeneutics of suspicion. The principles underlying any hermeneutic, however, need themselves to be interrogated, and here we find that attention needs to be paid to the broader contexts of thought and action of both interpreter and interpreted, and also – thereby radicalizing the claims of Stiver and Vanhoozer – that the idea that philosophers of language, biblical critics and other interpreters of religious texts, literary critics, legal theorists and theorists of hermeneutics should each work within distinct intellectual boundaries needs itself to be put in question. Such considerations could all be construed as ‘immanent’ forms of critique, seeking to show that in the contemporary context some of the most fundamental boundaries need to be at least rethought, but there is also the suggestion that these are not just reflections of contemporary concerns and that we may be able to retrieve elements of half-forgotten traditions of intellectual engagement, such as Pascalian finesse, which are subversive of these boundaries and provide perspectives for rendering such reconfigurations intelligible.

12

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Reconfiguration The very project of transcending boundaries in philosophy and theology invites attention to that which lies between the two. On Charles Taylor’s account a set of master, broadly philosophical, narratives have established a certain intellectual hegemony in significant parts of the academy, which have had the effect of ‘normalizing’ secularity more widely. The resulting family of interconnected closed world structures presents theology with a dilemma: either to operate in terms of secular norms, epistemological, historical, sociological, linguistic, hermeneutic and so on, or to insist on its own integrity at the cost of losing credibility in its engagements with the secular world – of having intellectual warrant for preaching only to the converted. The first horn of the dilemma effectively eliminates theology as a form of enquiry with its own integrity, its continuing existence becoming dependent on administrative structures: part ecclesiastical, part educational, part bibliographical. Theology’s boundary is ‘transcended’ only in the sense that Poland’s was transcended when its third partition removed it from the map. If we embrace the second horn, then philosophy’s concern is with reason and knowledge, theology’s with faith and revelation, and the boundary between them is insurmountable. Further, it is situated at the extreme limit of our closed world structure and theology is thereby thrust to its periphery. Vanhoozer’s paper seeks to escape the horns of this dilemma. Its presuppositions are, however, questionable, and its implications less than compelling, as we have seen. The narratives normalizing secularity, the ‘subtraction stories’ of science and morality, together with the more positive story of human progress giving rise to the contemporary social and economic order, are deeply flawed, historically and epistemologically; thus intellectually informed and rigorous interrogation of the making of the modern identity can disrupt their normalizing function. They are also open to theological critique, for several have religious roots and the defects of the stories are in part a function of defective theology. Thus the shift from a relational to a descriptive concept of God enabled the subtraction story of science, and unhealthy focus on the metaphor of salvation in Christian theology gave shape to the narrative of progress. Further, while Kant’s seminal articulation of the division between knowledge and faith is often read as providing intellectual warrant for the development of closed world structures incompatible with his thought, it seems that in the later phases of his critical philosophy he is feeling his way to a form of religious faith with grounds at once transcendental and rational. When we turn to the implications of such a closed world understanding of human experience it seems to fare no better. When philosophy presses its phenomenological boundaries it regularly finds the need to transcend them, and when the focus is on our embodied condition it is plausible to maintain that to do so it requires properly theological resources. And to the extent that the philosophy/theology divide sponsors that between science and religion, it is noteworthy that there is increasing recognition of forms of complementarity incompatible with closed world structures. While the papers that follow offer a number of different suggestions for reconfiguring the boundary between philosophy and theology, there is a general

Introduction

13

consensus that conceiving of it in traditional terms as a middle wall of partition is no longer sustainable. The other major boundaries that are addressed concern language, and in particular those between experience or text on the one hand, and interpretation on the other. With respect to texts, whether in philosophy or theology, the attempt to transcend that between interpreted and interpreter through ‘fusion’ of their respective horizons requires an element of critique (in principle of both horizons) if the one is not to be absorbed into the other. Such critique should ideally take account of a much broader horizon than simply that of the text, and also recognize the latter as an active force, not merely a passive object of study, such that the interplay between text and reader may be understood in dynamic, even dramatic, terms, making sense of the claim that to understand Kant may indeed be to transcend Kant. With respect to experience, the recognition that all forms of it are mediated has led some to subordinate experience to language, such that experiences are to be understood as generated and shaped by symbolic systems. Since these systems are functions of culture this is effectively a reinscription of a closed world structure, eliminating the need to take seriously the disruptive possibility that that structure might itself be subverted by experience, whether ‘religious’ or other. This is once again the partition of Poland strategy, overcoming a boundary by eliminating it. But while claims for extra-linguistic experience, where this is understood to be outside and beyond all cultural relativity, are no doubt unsustainable, so is linguistic idealism. We need so to conceive language as to allow for a certain mutuality between experience and interpretation, as we do in the case of texts; in doing so we may well need to go beyond our accustomed categories. Whether with respect to the boundary between language and experience, between interpretation and text, or indeed between philosophy and theology, it is worth enquiring what, other than bulldozing the boundary, might make mutuality between what lies each side of the divide possible and intelligible. Contemporary suspicion of established categories makes the enterprise opportune. Recent rethinking of rationality and of the status of scientific knowledge, together with developments in the philosophy of language and interpretation theory, point to the interconnections between dialectic, rhetoric and narrative in such a way as to reconfigure the roles of practice and of inwardness in our understanding of the world, together with the potentiality for transcending some of the traditional contrasts between knowledge and faith.

This page intentionally left blank

Chapter 1

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology Martin Warner

Knowledge and Belief ‘I know that my redeemer liveth’; Handel’s musical setting makes the stress unmistakable and, through the popularity of his oratorio, has made this affirmation resonate through the English-speaking world. But from the point of view of classic epistemology it would appear an odd sort of knowledge. In the context from which it is taken (Job 19:25) the words seem less an expression of justified true belief (the familiar tripartite definition, despite recurrent critique from Plato onwards) than of anguished hope against hope, hence the exclamation following the sentence of which the affirmation is a part, in the Revised Standard Version: ‘My heart faints within me!’ The translators of the New English Bible lose their nerve in a paraphrase: ‘But in my heart I know that my vindicator lives’; one is reminded of Austin’s ‘We all feel the very great difference between saying even “I’m absolutely sure” and saying “I know”’ (Austin 1961: 68). On Austin’s account ‘I know’ provides a warrant for others of a kind reports of psychological states do not; qualifying ‘I know’ with ‘in my heart’ looks suspiciously like taking away with one hand what is given with the other. It would hardly have suited Handel’s purposes. Of course the text here is notoriously corrupt, and Christian prefigurative commentary lies behind Handel and his librettist. What is clear is that Job’s developing hope that in some way God will prove to be just, despite all appearances, is given especial prominence and associated with the deepest awe. If paraphrase rather than translation is what is sought then there is much to be said for the New English Bible version; Job’s ‘knowledge’ about his goel (redeemer or vindicator) looks more like a fleeting insight (or of course flash of wishful thinking), partially foreshadowed but immediately lost to view, than even a settled conviction, let alone knowledge in the epistemologist’s sense, and the same goes for the associated claim (on some readings) that ‘without my flesh shall I see God’, lost sight of not just for the rest of the book but for centuries thereafter. In context, Job’s claim may express a psychological state but is hardly a reliable warrant for others. In subsequent religious tradition ‘believe’ has figured a good deal more prominently than ‘know’, while claims to knowledge or gnosis have often been treated with considerable reserve – the early Church, in particular, setting its face against ‘gnosticism’.

16

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Along these lines one might develop a familiar type of commentary. Knowledge requires justification, a suggestion going back to the proposal in Plato’s Theaetetus that it should be analysed in terms of true opinion with a rational explanation, justification or logos. But, as Plato’s Socrates pointed out, the problems of circularity here are difficult to avoid the moment one tries to analyse and clarify the status of ‘justification’ or ‘logos’. Often justification has been construed in foundationalist terms, and with increasing scepticism about the possibility of any ‘hard’ data that could act as a relevantly informative foundation doubts have developed about knowledge itself. If knowledge is a derivative notion whose derivation remains perpetually elusive, we are perhaps best advised to concentrate on more fundamental notions such as truth and the varieties of justification for belief (though some of course have resisted relegating knowledge to a derivative category). On such an account the religious emphasis on belief rather than knowledge has been prescient and the important issue lies in the forms of justification, if any, for religious belief or beliefs. From his perspective among the ashes, scraping his sores with a potsherd and convinced of his innocence, the justification of Job’s belief in the justice of God, it appears, seems remarkably weak, hence perhaps his hope against hope for a vindicator. To which there is, of course, an equally familiar riposte. One should discriminate between varieties of belief, and those associated with religious faith are importantly different from those central to classic epistemology, from the belief that Socrates is snub-nosed to the belief that Fermat’s last theorem is provable; faith in God is not to be construed analogously to the belief that the abominable snowman exists, or that a greatest prime number does not, or even that every event has a cause (on some accounts empirical, analytic and synthetic a priori beliefs or judgements respectively). Often the distinction is drawn between ‘belief that’, the province of the epistemologist, and ‘belief in’, that of personal relations and religious faith, with the claim that neither is reducible to the other. Of course this can hardly be a claim about surface grammar, since ‘Jones believes that the abominable snowman exists’ can be idiomatically rendered ‘Jones believes in the existence of the abominable snowman’ and vice versa; rather, this convenient if perhaps potentially misleading shorthand points to the claim that ‘an attitude to a proposition’ is radically different from ‘an attitude to a person, whether human or divine’ (Price 1969: 426). On such an account the favoured forms of ‘belief in’ involve forms of trust, in the reliability or faithfulness of that in which one believes (not only persons, a complication perhaps insufficiently noticed), and seeking justifications or tests for such belief may often be not merely inappropriate but even radically counterproductive, as in a number of Shakespeare’s plays; in religious terms: ‘Thou shalt not tempt (that is, test) the Lord thy God’. It is this sort of trust in God’s faithfulness, not justified (or unjustified) true (or false) belief, that Job here expresses. But perhaps this is a little too easy; denying knowledge to make room for faith has a suspiciously anachronistic, Kantian, ring. The various gnosticisms were, after all, not entirely without scriptural support, and it may be that it was (at least in part) their models of knowledge (often with Platonic overtones) that proved problematic in

Martin Warner

17

Christian terms rather than invocations of knowledge as such. ‘We know [oidamen, the same verb as in the Septuagint translation of Job’s affirmation] that we have passed from death into life’, writes St John, ‘because we love the brethren’ (1 John 3:14), and the impending regress is blocked with ‘By this we know that we love the children of God, when we love God and keep his commandments’ (5:2); again, he maintains, ‘By this we know love, that he laid down his life for us; and we ought to lay down our lives for the brethren’ (3:16). In each case a form of explanation, indeed warrant, is offered for that which is affirmed as known, but the type of logos or justification offered is rather different from those familiar from classic epistemology. The knowledge in question relates to correct interpretation: in the first case knowledge of one’s own status is warranted by one’s attitude and knowledge of one’s attitude is, in part, warranted by one’s behaviour; in the second case knowledge of the nature of love is provided by correct interpretation of another’s action, which together warrant a pattern of behaviour. Though the Greek should not be pressed too far, St John also seems to provide what is at least the suggestion of a contrast between belief and knowledge, ‘I write this to you who believe (pisteuousin) in the name of the Son of God, that you may know (eidete) that you have eternal life’ (5:13); the New English Bible offers ‘to assure you’ (Austin’s warrant) for ‘that you may know’. ‘Belief in’ being taken as given, the further knowledge or assurance is provided by his own letter which provides the recipients with criteria to test their own status: ‘let us not love in word or speech but in deed and in truth. By this we shall know that we are of the truth’ (3:18–19). Once again knowledge is related to attitude and action, which of course brings Johannine ‘knowledge’ close to Pauline ‘faith’. But, again like St Paul in the case of faith, such knowledge points beyond itself: ‘it does not yet appear what we shall be, but we know that when he appears we shall be like him, for we shall see him as he is’ (3:2). Rowan Williams’s commentary on this passage is to the point: ‘Knowledge of God is not a subject’s conceptual grasp of an object, it is sharing what God is, … knowledge by identification, loving union.… God is known in and by the exercise of crucifying compassion’ (St John’s ‘laying down his life’) and ‘if we are like him in that, we know him’ (Williams 1990: 14). Selective quotation from biblical texts is, of course, of little value in itself. What gives wider significance to such passages is the way that this model of knowledge of God has played a significant role in Christian (and indeed other monotheistic) theology and spirituality. What is essential to it is that such knowledge has an inescapably subjective element, more closely akin to personal knowledge than to knowledge of the truth of propositions: God is discerned in the context of a transformed pattern of life into which, phenomenologically speaking, it seems that one is drawn, rather than God’s existence and characteristics being deduced from sets of observations and concepts independent of the life of faith; John’s offer of assurance is ‘to you who believe’. St Augustine, in his influential Confessions, tells how he was led by his reading of ‘the Platonists’ to explore his own inwardness and there encountered ‘the immutable light higher than my mind’, but nevertheless found himself ‘far from you’ (Augustine 1992: VII x 16, p. 123) for ‘Where was the charity which builds on

18

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

the foundation of humility which is Christ Jesus? When would the Platonist books have taught me that?’ (VII xx 26, p. 130) God, for Augustine, makes himself known as he who ‘resists the proud’ through giving grace to the humble that seek to love God and neighbour; it was the experience of humiliation that enabled him to grasp ‘with what mercy you have shown humanity the way of humility in that your “Word was made flesh and dwelt among men”’ (IV xv 26; p. 66; Vii ix 13, p. 121), and led him to that central insight of the work ‘Da quod jubes et jube quod vis’, ‘Grant what you command, and command what you will’ (X xxix 40, p. 202, etc.), the repeated cry which sparked the Pelagian schism (in this respect Pelagian epistemology is far more Platonist). For Augustine nearness to God is the same as likeness to God, for ‘it is not by place, but by being unlike Him, that a man is afar from God’ (Augustine 1979: Ps. 95.2, p. 467; Ps. 94.2 in original, fuller, Latin text; see also Williams 1990: 84), so knowledge of him becomes possible only as one is drawn into his likeness. The model, once again, is neither knowledge by description nor even (in the ordinary sense) knowledge by acquaintance, but knowledge by identification, and the criteria for identification relate to the extent to which an individual’s life bears the marks of that which is known (in this case the marks of the life of the incarnate Word). Augustine is not alone. The Eastern Orthodox tradition similarly brings together knowledge and love of God. For St Gregory of Nyssa, for example, ‘The vision of God is discipleship’ (Williams 1990: 63). In St Gregory Palamas the Divine essence is wholly beyond us and the Divine energies are known only though our participation in them, by being experienced rather than through detached conceptualization; the goal of theosis or ‘deification’, involving transformation of the whole person, is that of union with the divine energies, not with the unknowable divine essence (which would point the way to pantheism). In the central tradition of Christian spirituality apophatic theology, the via negativa, is rarely far away. Even in St Thomas Aquinas the knowledge ‘by connaturality’ of contemplation, based on God’s presence in the self, is a form of darkness interdependent with love of God. Pascal’s ‘Memorial’ with its challenging ‘“God of Abraham, God of Isaac, God of Jacob”, not of philosophers and scholars’ (Pascal 1966: Fragment 913, p. 309) is part of a record of his own decisive spiritual experience which brought ‘Certainty, certainty’ of a sort very different from that sought by Descartes, characterized in the Pensées (Pensée 887; p. 300) as ‘useless and uncertain’. More recently Kierkegaard’s insistence on raising fundamental questions of truth in terms of ‘subjectivity’, which lies behind much twentieth-century existentialism, draws on this tradition. In these terms, one might argue, rather than remaining content with boundaries established by Kant (1958: B xxx, p. 29), who ‘found it necessary to deny knowledge, in order to make room for faith’, we might wish to re-inspect both concepts. Scrutiny of the concept of religious faith has become a familiar activity; the above suggests that there may be scope for reconsideration of that of religious knowledge as well. But perhaps not only religious knowledge, but knowledge more generally. For, philosophical preconceptions apart, it is not at all clear that individuals’ subjective states should be regarded as irrelevant to the knowledge of which they are capable, any more than mathematical, logical or scientific competence are irrelevant to the

Martin Warner

19

capacity to grasp complex theorems and scientific laws. The return to prominence of what has become known as ‘virtue ethics’ has revived interest in the Aristotelian insight that practical wisdom, or phronesis, requires appropriate experience and training, for ‘each man judges well the things he knows’ (Nicomachean Ethics, 1094b). Aristotle is here primarily thinking of normative matters (though the notion of phronesis has been taken up by modern hermeneutics, a matter to which we shall return) but if God is understood as ‘That than which no greater can be conceived’, to use St Anselm’s formula, theology is itself inescapably normative. However, on the Aristotelian account mere knowledge by acquaintance of ‘the actions that occur in life’ is of itself of little value; what matters is conjoining such experience with logos, a rational principle through which to interpret it; phronesis is embodied by the phronimos, the man of practical wisdom, for ‘regarding practical wisdom we shall get at the truth by considering who are the persons we credit it with’ (1140a), and to the extent that we identify with the phronimos by modelling our lives on his we become ethically wise – this is not just a matter of will and intellect but requires habituation and (ideally) training. Once again, the criteria for identification relate to the extent to which an individual’s life bears the marks of that which is known. If this is not to be entirely circular some specificity has to be given to the appropriate logos, and this Aristotle seeks to provide, but always in the context of human action and lived experience, which brings us back to that traditional account of knowledge sketched earlier, which requires logos as well as true belief. The obvious objection to reading the required logos in terms of any form of human subjectivity is that the logos element is supposed to add an objective, rational, element to the knowledge claim; if I know I cannot be, not merely am not, wrong, but human subjectivity is always fallible. The canons of rationality cannot be person (perhaps not even culture) specific. But as the phronesis model suggests, some forms of interdependence between rational principle and subjectivity do not necessarily foreclose objectivity, and recent recovery of other models of rationality, which have been marginalized in the modern period, reinforce the point – which returns us to Job. Reason, Will and Feeling One of the more striking features of the Book of Job, as we have it, is the way that it incipiently displays two competing models of rationality. The ‘comforters’ operate, effectively, in terms of familiar deductive patterns of argument. God is just and almighty, Job is suffering, therefore Job’s suffering is just; he should, therefore, repent the sin which has brought just suffering upon him. Job is sure that his suffering is innocent (the Prologue endorses this), and seeks understanding. Experience teaches Job the falsity of the traditional wisdom, and the chiding of his friends provides the goad that forces him on in his intellectual and emotional progress. The work presents a pattern of human development in such a way that it is possible for the reader to judge its credibility; this development culminates in an experience of the numinous that integrates its various strands and leads to a conviction of the presence in the

20

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

midst of innocent suffering of a God felt as making himself known through the evil, with questions of disavowal or affirmation being transcended in the consciousness of God’s presence with the sufferer. If the pattern displayed is psychologically credible, and it recurs throughout religious literature from Isaiah to Simone Weil, then it shows how a person may be brought by experience to such a conviction, and to the extent that Job’s experience appears to readers to resonate with their own it enables them to see how it could resolve their own perplexities. Thus far, in biblical terms, the work appeals to the ‘heart’. Of course, however much such a faith might resolve one’s perplexities, it cannot be accepted if it is self-contradictory or otherwise refuted; thus the work both tests it against the wisdom of orthodoxy, showing that in terms of faithfulness to the facts it is a better account, and sets out to guard against the charge of inconsistency (Warner 1989: ch. 4); the ordinary empirical and analytic norms are respected, but represented as inadequate. This inadequacy is instructive, though to explore this is to go beyond the thought world of the Book of Job. The ‘comforters’ are represented as deducing false conclusions from allegedly first principles. In contrast, the book takes an example of a relevant pattern of experience, and attempts to display its paradigmatic status by showing it coming recognizably to terms with fundamental human concerns in a manner that resolves both psychological and intellectual perplexity. Unless one is to rule out the relevance of religious experience altogether in the establishment of first principles in religion, such a method looks promising; how promising begins to emerge when we consider the establishment of first principles more generally, and here Aristotle is again a useful point of reference. For much of his corpus there is a threefold distinction between demonstration, dialectic and rhetoric; demonstration starts from first principles, but ‘dialectic is a process of criticism wherein lies the path to the principles of all inquiries’ (Topics A. 101a–b). This criticism employs both deduction and induction and takes its start from reputable opinions (which may of course be false); it characteristically explores conflicts between such opinions, or between them and the apparent findings of experience, and seeks to find a way of rethinking the issue in question in a way that explains such conflicts and thereby to provide a superior way of integrating and organizing human experience. This does not, of course, formally guarantee the truth of the ‘first principles’ that fall out from this process, but the process is not only subject to formal constraints since dialectic properly takes place in the context of debate between competent individuals cooperating in a genuine attempt to arrive at the truth, thereby ensuring that any doubtful move is subjected to criticism. Even this, one might think, can hardly be expected to establish without reasonable doubt the truth of first principles on which, for Aristotle, all science depends, and in any case his model of disinterested enquiry with no element of arguing for victory is hardly realistic, as Augustine long ago pointed out. Aristotle’s distinction between dialectic and rhetoric is, it appears, one of degree, turning on the level of expertise and type of motivation possessed by those involved, and what Gilbert Ryle (1949: 8) frankly called ‘persuasions of conciliatory kinds’, which Aristotle would have classified as rhetorical, have regularly played a role in dialectical debate.

Martin Warner

21

At the beginning of the modern period Descartes, for these and other reasons, rejected such dialectic and argued for the primacy of deductive demonstration, after the model of geometry. But his attempt to establish first principles in this way, most notoriously through the Cogito, have failed to carry conviction. Subsequent attempts have also proved problematic, leading in recent years to what has been termed ‘philosophical relativity’, where ‘the answer one prefers for a certain philosophical problem depends on what assumptions one has adopted in relation to that problem’ (Unger 1984: 5); alleged ‘first principles’ are person- or culture-relative. Pascal saw the weakness at once, describing Descartes’s ‘method’, as we have seen, as ‘useless and uncertain’. Complementing l’esprit géométrie, he maintained, is l’esprit de finesse (Pascal 1966: Pensée 512; pp. 210–12), which his Pensées in large part exemplify, and his analysis weaves together Aristotelian and biblical elements. It sketches a mode of reasoning other than the demonstrative to establish first principles, a mode which takes its starting-point from a number of diverse elements which themselves need to be subjected to critical scrutiny, and proceeds by attempting to bring out underlying principles that will reconcile apparent ‘contradictions’ among these elements. But this familiar Aristotelian picture is revolutionized by the introduction of the Augustinian theme of the centrality of the will, itself a version of the importance the Bible assigns to the ‘heart’; we are ‘thrown’ (jetée) into the body – Heidegger’s Geworfenheit (1962: sections 29 and 38) – embarqué as embodied beings with all that that involves (Pensée 418; pp. 149–50), thus any framework of thinking that centres round the ideal of detached contemplation is radically defective, and a perverse will is liable to give rise to perverse beliefs. Pascal’s procedure involves presenting a series of observations drawn from the most pervasive features of human life, including the fields of understanding, aspiration and feeling as commonly distinguished, and challenging the reader to recognize their uncomfortable accuracy, representative nature, and cumulative significance (see Warner 1989: ch. 5). It takes into account that feature of belief remarked on by Wittgenstein (1969: para. 141): ‘When we first begin to believe anything, what we believe is not a single proposition, it is a whole system of propositions. (Light dawns gradually over the whole.)’ Pascal presents the reader with a multitude of interrelated vignettes of the human condition and says, in effect, ‘This – doesn’t it? – bears such a relation to that’, and in response to the expected ‘Yes, but . . .’ we find sketched another cluster of phenomena that relate to the ‘but’, helping to strip away self-deception so long as we interrogate ourselves and our experiences honestly (as with Aristotelian dialectic, the procedure is ideally part of a cooperative endeavour). There are also religious perceptions designed to fit in with those other observations, so that we may be led to see how revelation completes our best fragmentary intimations in ways that satisfy the most deep-seated aspirations of our understanding and of our will; it brings out, that is, the ‘reasons of the heart’ (Pensée 423; p. 154). Thus far, one might think, the best that the procedure can deliver is culture-relative, but Pascal invites us to interrogate ‘all the religions of the world’ (Pensée 149; p. 76), and the context makes it clear that non-religious philosophies are included; any which fail to make sense of the full range of our apparently paradoxical experience are

22

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

to be rejected. His claim that Christianity alone does this is of course based on a very restricted range of alternatives, but the procedure is open-ended. It appears to presuppose, contra Rorty, the possibility either that ‘language does not go all the way down, or that … all vocabularies are commensurable’ (Rorty 1982: xxx), but in recent years a number of factors, several associated with the women’s movement, have restored interest in reopening the debate about cultural universals. Pascal’s procedure exploits a version of what Peirce (1934; vol. V, para. 189) identified as abduction: ‘The surprising fact, C, is observed; but if A were true, C would be a matter of course. Hence, there is reason to suspect that A is true’. Of itself abduction is little more than a heuristic tool, suggesting what may be the case, but if we can only find one place-filler for ‘A’ then that greatly increases its plausibility; this prima facie plausibility Pascal seeks to reinforce by means of detailed evidences drawn from history and a hermeneutically informed reading of Scripture. Abduction is a procedure familiar from the progress of the sciences, both natural and social, as Peirce was well aware. A suggestive use of the pattern has been developed in more recent philosophy of science. Thomas Kuhn’s influential claim that ‘competition between [scientific] paradigms is not the sort of battle that can be resolved by proofs’ (1970: 148) led some (such as Paul Feyerabend) to conclude that in scientific progress ‘anything goes’. Others, however, have sought to develop more sophisticated models of rationality, one of the most interesting of which is still that of Imre Lakatos, for whom those elements of continuity we find in science derive from the following out of research programmes which consist of methodological rules. In the progress of science there is a proliferation of research programmes, and where they come into conflict we can (though sometimes only with hindsight) distinguish between the manner in which they are developing, taking account both of their degree of empirical content and of how they fare in the testing of that content; in technical terms by the manner in which they balance theoretical with empirical ‘problem-shifts’ (Lakatos 1970). What to a ‘degenerative’ research programme are surprising facts, to its competing ‘progressive’ one is a matter of course. He extends this general account to metaphysics generally; we eliminate a metaphysical theory if it produces a degenerative shift in the long run and there is (construed in these terms) a better metaphysics to replace it. Careful comparison of this extended model with that of Pascal for avoiding the tendency to ‘believe … submissively and without reason’ (Pensée 149; p. 79) could well be rewarding. The abductive pattern is characteristic of finesse but, as elsewhere, it always needs supplementation. Pascal used it to defend what for him was ‘the true religion’, but Hume’s Dialogues Concerning Natural Religion, employing a variant of the finesse model, are concerned to show that there are a number of other hypotheses besides the ‘religious’ one according to which the ‘surprising’ factors adduced would be a matter of course, and that the only sense in which the ‘religious hypothesis’ has independent support is too empty to count as an explanation of the phenomena in question. Again Nietzsche, for whom Pascal was ‘the only logical Christian’ (1969b: letter 187), not only presents a seriously worked out alternative to the Pascalian but is prepared to do battle in the reading of history and Scripture, hence his anti-

Martin Warner

23

religious slogan ‘Historical refutation as the decisive refutation’ (Nietzsche 1982: para. 95). In this supplementation of abduction, the procedure familiar from legal reasoning of arguing from particular case to particular case, argument by analogy, plays an important role. John Wisdom, indeed, has urged that in the end all forms of legitimate reasoning can be analysed in terms of this ‘case by case procedure’, understood as ‘a presenting and representing of those features of the case which severally co-operate in favour of the conclusion,… – it is a matter of the cumulative effect of several independent premises, not of the repeated transformation of one or two’ (Wisdom 1953: 157; see also Wisdom 1991). The procedure is also familiar from those of translation and, more generally, interpretation, where comparison of one element with another in the light of wider hypotheses which are themselves checked against those elements (the famous ‘hermeneutic circle’) seeks to bring it about that ‘light dawns gradually over the whole’, a light that is nevertheless not self-authenticating and needs to be checked against the possibility of construing the text in another light. Indeed, Aristotle’s notion of ‘first principles’ here seems curiously out of place, too reminiscent of l’esprit géométrie; for l’esprit de finesse, as Pascal puts it, ‘the principles are so intricate and numerous that it is almost impossible not to miss some’ (Pensée 512; p. 211). On the broader stage represented by Pascal and Nietzsche the interpretation is not of a text but of human experience – it is hardly accidental that the contrast between l’esprit géométrie and l’esprit de finesse and that between Heidegger’s ‘exact’ and ‘strict’ thinking is so striking (1956: Postscript; 387) – and here what is required is a form of self-interrogation that seeks a unified understanding and ultimately finds inadequate ‘the separation of reason, sensation, emotion, and will’ (Nietzsche 1997: ‘Raids’, para. 49, p. 83); we need to look and see in each case what elements in this complex are appropriate in the endeavour to achieve reliable judgements. Perhaps the habitual self-deceiver is not as well placed as the genuine seeker to judge the merits of what Hume termed ‘the religious hypothesis’. The Book of Job still has its relevance. Language, Meaning and Interpretation The notion that serious thinking about the human condition ought to operate solely in terms of the standard logical canons has always been honoured more in the breach than the observance. The persuasive power even of Spinoza’s Ethics owes more to the quality of its imaginative vision than to its pretensions to operate ordine geometrico, and it may be doubted whether any significant work of philosophy has obeyed this self-denying ordinance; Ryle’s ‘persuasions of conciliatory kinds’ are endemic (even in Descartes where they often take the form of narrative). Recognition of the fact that philosophy is itself a kind of writing inescapably enmeshed in imaginative and rhetorical procedures has led some to impugn its pretensions to be a truth-seeking activity. The very notion of there being ‘truths’ of the human condition, particularly if conceived as relating to ‘the ultimate nature of reality’, on such accounts itself represents a kind of mirage brought about by failure to grasp the role of ‘metaphor

24

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

in the text of philosophy’ (the subtitle, of course, of Jacques Derrida’s ‘White mythology’; 1982: 207–71). Derrida himself was too subtle to press the case this far, for recognition that ‘persuasions of conciliatory kinds’ play an essential dialectical, and not merely rhetorical, role in philosophy should only lead us to collapse the difference between literature and philosophy if the conventional picture of philosophy as a ‘rigorous’ discipline, with ‘rigour’ defined in terms of deduction, holds us captive; in this respect Derrida was a free spirit. However, Richard Rorty, with whom he is sometimes bracketed, invokes just this picture when he contrasts ‘rigorous argumentation – the procedure characteristic of mathematics’ with ‘the inconclusive comparison and contrast of vocabularies … characteristic of literary culture’ (Rorty 1982: xli). Paradigmatic for literary culture is hermeneutics, the attempt to understand the practice of interpretation, which is itself locked into the ‘hermeneutic circle’; in such a practice ‘the acquisition of truth dwindles in importance’ (Rorty 1980: 365; see also 318), but it is only as such a practice that such future as remains for philosophy lies. The plausibility of this programme rests on the assumption that the only ‘rigorous’ method for attaining truth is some approximation to the Cartesian, but if the Pascalian alternative is allowed, and if all philosophical argument – even that of Spinoza – is inevitably to be assessed in part by such criteria as capacity to ‘illuminate experience’ and so on, then we should analyse these criteria, integrate them into our overall account of rationality, and seek to discriminate the more rigorous from the less. The other side of this project to diminish the role of truth-seeking in philosophy by aligning it with ‘literary culture’, of course, is the assumption that the latter is not itself truth-seeking, and this is at least challengeable. M. H. Abrams, for example, argued, well before Rorty, that its ‘judgements are not arbitrary’, but are subject to broad criteria to do with coherence, adequacy, penetration, distortion and disinterestedness: ‘Although such a mode of discourse is rarely capable of rigidly conclusive arguments, it possesses just the kind of rationality it needs to achieve its own purposes’ (Abrams 1972: 53). It should not be taken for granted that truth, or at least the avoidance of falsity, is not among these purposes. Against this, it may be urged that if hermeneutics is paradigmatic then literary culture itself is locked in some version of the hermeneutic circle, and this circularity disables the credibility of any such truth-seeking. However, this claim is problematic, even granted the supposed paradigm status of hermeneutics, for at least two reasons. First, it needs to be shown that the circular procedure is necessarily vicious. The circle in question represents our inability to understand a whole (for example a text) without understanding its parts, nor the parts without understanding the whole, but both in interpreting or translating texts and in learning a language this circle is hardly disabling. We start with hypotheses that we test against others; if we are construing a section of a text we take account of the consequences of that construal for other sections and for our grasp of the whole, and we test that grasp against the detail of the passages. More generally, we bring prejudgements to any interpretation, but these only degenerate into prejudices if we are not prepared to allow experience to

Martin Warner

25

modify them (see Gadamer 1993: 265–307). Right from the start, proponents of the patterns of argument we have been exploring have insisted on the importance of such preparedness; Aristotle distinguished ‘contentious’ argument from true dialectic in terms of the genuineness of the participants’ concern to arrive at the truth, and his phronesis is only attainable for ‘those who desire and act in accordance with a rational principle’ (logos; Nicomachean Ethics 1095a). Gadamer’s classic work on hermeneutics, indeed, sees Aristotelian phronesis as exemplary in the interpretative enterprise; his analysis ‘offers a kind of model of the problems of hermeneutics’ (324). Of course, as Gadamer insists, we need to relate that which is to be interpreted to our own situation, as ‘rational principles’ have to be brought into relation to the range of actions available to us in the ethical case; but this does not show that we cannot get our prejudgements badly wrong, and where this is possible it is difficult to see why truth and falsity have somehow become unimportant. Second, it may be queried whether interpretation is indeed necessarily circular. Two familiar ways of breaking the circle have been proposed, one with reference to the text, the other with reference to its author or context. Paul Ricoeur has proposed the model of a ‘hermeneutic arc’, one side of which is firmly grounded in features of the text that relate to the protocols of the language in which it is written, which may be ascertained in a non-circular, more ‘scientific’ manner; any interpretation that disregards these is defective (Ricoeur 1981b). The implications for the pattern of argument proposed by Pascal are apparent enough; perhaps not all those features of human experience to which he points are interpretation- or even culture-relative. Others have laid more stress on the possibility of the author’s intention providing constraints on the range of defensible interpretations, while seeking to avoid falling into the notorious problems associated with what has been called the ‘intentional fallacy’. In some cases, at least, it appears that what was intended has a bearing on how one should read; those who read Defoe’s ‘The Shortest Way with the Dissenters’ had him imprisoned and literally pilloried when they discovered he had written it as a satire, rather than resting content with insisting that his intentions were irrelevant to how it should be read. Even Derrida, not usually aligned with this camp, proposes a typology in which ‘the category of intention will not disappear; it will have its place, but from that place it will no longer be able to govern the entire scene and the entire system of utterances’ (1982: ‘Signature, event, context’, 326). The notion of ‘utterance’, indeed, lies behind much of this way of thinking. Broadly speaking, those who insist on the autonomy of the text see meaning in terms of a complex of rules or other interdependent items that can normally be identified independently of context of utterance: la langue is independent of parole, semantics of pragmatics (the misreaders of Defoe understood his pamphlet’s meaning but mistook its force); on the influential Saussurian projection these items are construed in circular fashion. Their opponents decline to separate meaning from force so readily, arguing that meaning subserves communication and that meaning has ultimately to be analysed in terms of the capacity to communicate through speech acts or other forms of utterance. Some go further and see an ethical dimension here;

26

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

refusal to attend to the meaning of the author is to treat the latter as a means rather than an end. So far as the principles of interpretation are concerned, St Augustine seems at first sight firmly to align himself with both camps at once. ‘All of us are trying to find and grasp the meaning of the author we are reading’, he maintains (1992: XII xviii 27, p. 259) but, given that one mode of expression can be understood in a number of different ways, as an expositor of Scripture ‘I would choose to write so that my words would sound out with whatever diverse truth each reader was able to grasp’ rather than set down one true meaning which excludes the others (XII xxi 42, p. 271). Further, in the case of the Pentateuch it is much more difficult to determine ‘This is what Moses meant’ than ‘Whether Moses meant this or something else, this is true’ (XII xxiv 33, p. 263), but fortunately the link with intention can profitably be cut altogether, for ‘what evil is it if an exegesis … is one shown to be true … even if the author … did not have that idea?’ (XII viii 27, pp. 259–60) Augustine’s magnificent intellectual journey, across what is now a no-man’s-land between rival camps, was rendered coherent by reference to the Holy Ghost as the true author of Scripture, as were a number of the other complex hermeneutic systems of the same period. One may interpret a scriptural text in a way unthought of by, perhaps even inconceivable to, its human author to the extent that it is proper to suppose that its divine author intended it; without some such move it is indeed difficult to defend a good deal of New Testament prefigurative interpretation of the Old. It is now more than a century since Dilthey showed in a famous essay how hermeneutic debates within the Church have, in significant part, developed the categories and set the terms within which much modern debate about interpretation proceeds. Nevertheless, biblical critics who have lost any significant faith in the Holy Ghost, and literary critics who disavow any concern for the veracity of the texts they seek to interpret, finding themselves unable to recreate analogues of those ancient syntheses that gave point to the practice of interpretation, have often remained oddly reluctant to break with the traditional categories and concepts. Time has brought its revenges. In Dilthey’s day one was urged to read the Bible ‘as literature’, but today literature is often read as though it were the Bible – with different critics championing one aspect of an older unity against another. Sartre (1967: 157) claimed with some bravado to have ‘caught the Holy Ghost in the cellars and flung him out of them’, but admitted that ‘atheism is a cruel long-term business’, and among major recent and contemporary figures perhaps only Derrida has taken with full seriousness the difficulty and radical nature of the changes in our thinking required by any resolute attempt to discard or ‘deconstruct’ our hermeneutic traditions – traditions which he saw as being riddled with the ‘metaphysics of presence’. Whether Derrida was correct in his analysis of this metaphysics, or indeed in his distrust of it, is of course disputable. Indeed, the difficulty involved in understanding human communication if we make such radical shifts may suggest that attempting to fling the Holy Ghost out of the cellars is a misconceived enterprise. Perhaps those ancient hermeneutic systems still have something to teach us.

Martin Warner

27

As a means of breaking the hermeneutic circle appeal to the author’s intention, human or divine, might be thought to be of limited value, since our access to an author’s intention is typically itself hermeneutic in nature, often primarily through the words to which we are attending. However, we also need to look beyond the words to the ‘form of life’ (Wittgenstein 1958) out of which a text or utterance came, that broader context on which each one of us is embarqué and on which Pascal and Heidegger have insisted. In the broader context of the interpretation of human experience, with which Pascalian finesse and Heidegger’s ‘strict’ thinking are primarily concerned, the colour may even flow back from the textual. Ricoeur, for example, has argued that our existence as beings in time seeking understanding inevitably leads us to seek to ‘extract a configuration from a succession’ (Ricoeur 1981c: 278), his model for narrative thinking, and hence to understand our lives and ourselves in terms of narrative (Ricoeur 1991a); the analogue of his ‘hermeneutic arc’, which in the case of texts relates to the protocols of language, here relates to human universals concerning human understanding. In pressing the primordial role of narrative he is far from alone, though the case can certainly be contested, and it is arguable that our most illuminating models for understanding narrativity are textual. On the narrower front of the interpretation of texts, some extra-textual control seems desirable because, as Augustine noted, texts can be understood in a number of different ways. In recent years this has led to the notion of different ‘interpretative communities’ providing that control, making the meaning of a text community relative, but this sits uneasily with the continuity between texts and other linguistic products and acts; it is as if one could as a matter of logic only preach (or at any rate write texts) to (or for) the converted, an approach encouraging the distortion of those ‘language games’, with their forms of life, that are seen as alien or objectionable – Wittgenstein’s (1979) charge against Sir James Frazer’s The Golden Bough. The problem might be thought to be at least partly overcome where either there is some form of recognizable affinity between forms of life (such as that I invoked, with a psychological twist, in the case of the Book of Job), or there are traditions linking the form of life out of which utterances and texts arise and a given interpretative community (as in my treatment of St John’s ‘knowledge’). In the case of the Bible one might think that the latter is provided by the Church, a very traditional move; one difficulty with it, of course, is that there are rival interpretative communities claiming to be part of the Church, to which one might respond that there are nevertheless certain coordinates (such as the historic Creeds) to which the overwhelming majority subscribe, and these provide important controls on interpretation. But here the hermeneutic circle seems to re-emerge, for the Creeds have been interpreted in different ways; if the same words can be used to different effects one may even ask whether, for example, today’s feminist theologian worships the same God as a fifthcentury Egyptian ascetic. As Rowan Williams (2002) has argued, such questions cannot be answered by reference to the words alone; we need to explore how the words in each case are related to the lives of those who have used them.

28

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

And this of course brings us deep into the difficulties of religious language, the attempt to speak of that which is not open to detached conceptualization. Kierkegaard wrote of the need for ‘indirect communication’here, and recent thinking about language has thrown some light on indirection of communication in communicative contexts generally, not just the religious. What Paul Grice has identified as ‘implicatures’ subserve those radically context and relevance dependent inferences by means of which we, often quite properly, understand texts and people to be conveying more than they actually say. In the case of metaphors, for example, part of the point of not meaning what one literally says is to encourage those addressed to imagine one item or complex in terms of another. Often when the affinities and oppositions of two or more uses of an expression used in literal discourse are different there are different but analogous meanings (hence we can drop stitches, friends and hints without merely equivocating over the word ‘drop’), and where analogous extensions are metaphorical many of the affinities and oppositions of the one are carried over to the other. As James Ross has argued, key concepts here are those associated with context, inertia and force. Some types of utterance are so associated with a particular range of contexts that their utterance in a particular one drives the hearer or reader to reinspect the current context or to reinterpret the utterance; linguistic inertia leads one to attempt to construe the words according to the standard patterns with which one is familiar, but when the verbal or other context renders such construals unacceptable, the phenomenon of linguistic force comes into play to force adaptations of meaning (Defoe’s pamphlet would be a case in point). Now in some cases skill in action may be necessary for a full grasp of the discourse, it is ‘craftbound’, and here the basic vocabulary is anchored to ‘benchmark situations’; since ‘religion is taught to modulate living . . . and living in God . . . is the object of the craft of Christian doing’ (Ross 1981: 167) its discourse too is craftbound, and here scriptural narratives act as benchmarks, able to ‘structure and stabilize the central meaning relationships’ (158). On this account the intertextuality of religious discourse is broken by the relation to practice, and nothing bars treating certain benchmark stories (of the Crucifixion and Resurrection, for example) as having extra-linguistic reference; further, by providing the anchors of benchmark situations, with their associated sentences and narratives, sufficient content is given to the notion of initial context for linguistic inertia to have a role to play in providing controls on scriptural interpretation and perhaps even the development of doctrine – the phenomenon of implicature serving to prevent the notion of ‘inertia’ being taken too unimaginatively. Indirect communication through language, whether figurative or other, need not be unprincipled, for it can be understood as an extension of familiar linguistic phenomena. It is not only in the case of religion that we need to explore how words are related to the lives of those who use them.

Martin Warner

29

Transcending Boundaries The above has provided only an outline sketch of some of the interconnected contexts in which traditional boundaries within and between philosophy and theology increasingly seem outgrown. In an important sense this is a function of recent intellectual developments, but I have been concerned to bring out the way that some of these at least have made us better able to hear again a range of voices that have long been marginalized, and take them into our intellectual economy. Epistemologists may find it helpful to look more closely not just at ‘personal knowledge’, but at ‘knowledge by identification’ as found in religions, Christian and other; this in turn may put in question not simply the Kantian dichotomy between knowledge and faith, but also such over-familiar oppositions as those between ‘knowledge that’ and ‘knowledge how’, and perhaps even ‘belief that’ and ‘belief in’. Such considerations relate to recent rethinking of rationality itself; the divisions between reason, will and feeling, themselves remnants of faculty psychology, are highly porous, and the ways that choices can be wise and feelings apt point to normative elements in rationality as such (see Gibbard 1990). I have sketched Pascal’s anti-Cartesian model (which is but one among others) as having fruitful scope for development, putting in question Rorty’s dichotomy between ‘rigorous argumentation’ and ‘hermeneutics’. Hermeneutics could itself benefit from taking account at one and the same time both of its historical religious (together of course with its legal) roots and of recent attention to the broader contexts within which language is set; the idea that philosophers of language, biblical critics and other interpreters of religious texts, literary critics, legal theorists and theorists of hermeneutics should each work within distinct intellectual boundaries may well be approaching its sell-by date. What new intellectual shapes will emerge from these and other attempts to redraw or transcend the intellectual boundaries we have inherited it is unsafe to predict. Perhaps one might echo Nietzsche’s exclamation (1974: para. 343), though without his self-stultifying exclusion of the religious dimension: ‘perhaps there has never yet been such an open sea!’ Further Reading Abrams, M.H., ‘What’s the use of theorizing about the arts?’, in M.W. Bloomfield (ed.), In Search of Literary Theory, Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1972, 2–54 Gadamer, H.-G., Truth and Method, trans J. Weinsheimer and D.G. Marshall, London: Sheed & Ward, 1993 Grice, H.P., ‘Logic and conversation’, in his Studies in the Way of Words, Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1989, 22–40

30

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Lakatos, I., ‘Falsification and the methodology of scientific research programmes’, in Criticism and the Growth of Knowledge, eds I. Lakatos and A. Musgrave, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1970, 91–196 Price, H.H., Belief, London: Allen & Unwin, 1969 Ross, J.F., Portraying Analogy, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1981 Warner, M., Philosophical Finesse: Studies in the Art of Rational Persuasion, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1989 Williams, R., The Wound of Knowledge, London: Darton, Longman & Todd, 1990

Chapter 2

Once More Into the Borderlands: The Way of Wisdom in Philosophy and Theology after the ‘Turn to Drama’ Kevin J. Vanhoozer

For Jews demand signs and Greeks seek wisdom, but we preach Christ crucified, a stumbling block to Jews and folly to Greeks, but to those who are called, both Jews and Greeks, Christ the power of God and the wisdom of God. (1 Cor. 1:22–24)

I. Introduction: Into the Borderlands In his 1961 inaugural lecture to the Norris-Hulse Chair of Cambridge University, Donald MacKinnon spoke of the ‘borderlands’ of theology, an appropriate topic and title given his lifelong concern with the problems of metaphysics and christology that lie on the ‘frontiers of intelligible discourse’ (MacKinnon 1968: 32). His many forays into the borderlands, his sustained attention to particulars, especially as rendered in literature, and rigorous commitment to combining metaphysical analysis with existential imagination, all make MacKinnon a fit guide for the present expedition. According to Kant, what lies beyond the frontiers of intelligible discourse is (by definition) transcendence. To the extent that theology avoids the question of truth concerning references to the transcendent, we are ‘doomed in the end to evacuate Christian faith of any serious intellectual content’ (MacKinnon 1968: 30). Christianity thus involves discourse on ultimate reality (metaphysics), and this means ontology, that part of philosophy concerned ‘to provide a systematic account of the concepts used in discussion concerning any subject-matter’ (P.T. Geach, so MacKinnon 1987: 73). We can only articulate the uniqueness of Jesus’ Incarnation, understood as a divine ‘act of assumption’ (MacKinnon 1987: 178) by which the eternal enters into the temporal, in metaphysical terms (MacKinnon 1987: 172; cf. Cross 2002). C.F.D. Moule addresses the relation of metaphysics to theology in a Festschrift presented to MacKinnon by posing two distinct questions: (1) does the New Testament employ philosophical language? and (2) is philosophical language necessary when it comes to defining the implications of what the New Testament seems to say? (Moule 1982: 1–11). Moule notes that on occasion the NT authors employ ontological language (for example, Col. 1; Heb. 1:3) and that Jesus himself makes an ontological claim at John 8:58: ‘before Abraham was, I am’. Jesus’ question, ‘Who

32

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

do you say that I am?’, drives us to the borderlands of ontology to the extent that we cannot identify him without implicitly assuming something about his nature. Moule concludes: ‘However sparingly the New Testament borrows the language of that country beyond the frontier, students of the New Testament discover themselves to be in some sense its citizens’ (Moule 1982: 10). MacKinnon also believed that philosophers such as Kant were ‘deeply in bondage’ to generalized forms of expression; Kant’s work ‘is suffused with hostility to the particular’ (MacKinnon 1968: 25). Even if the particularity of Jesus Christ presents ‘awkward material’ to the philosopher, however, that is no excuse not to do justice to Jesus’ historical particularity. If christology is a ‘human intellectual response to the overwhelming fact of the ministry, crucifixion and resurrection of Jesus’ (MacKinnon 1968: 64), then some form of christology – the attempt to understand why Jesus is or is not the Christ, and what it means for Jesus to be Christ – is inevitable, even for the philosopher. Christology necessarily involves historical fact and metaphysics alike: we are fudging if we allow ourselves to suppose that we do not recognize a distinction between the actual and the non-actual, between the eruption of Vesuvius and the murder of Caesar on the one side, and the birth of Venus from the foam, and the exploits of St. George with his dragon, on the other; and it is a matter of crucial importance for Christian belief that the resurrection of Jesus belongs with the former, and not with the latter. (MacKinnon 1968: 77)

Taking the concrete history of Jesus seriously means, for MacKinnon, attending to the metaphysical implications of particulars. The most stubborn particular, one that resists easy ontological categorization, is the cross of Jesus Christ. MacKinnon is suspicious of theological systems that proceed to resurrection too fast: ‘there is no escape from contingency’ (MacKinnon 1968: 81). The truth of the Gospel is not merely theoretical but historical. It follows that Christian theology may be ‘much more than it realizes the victim of the victory won in the person of Plato by the philosophers over the poets, and in particular the tragedians’ (MacKinnon 1968: 100). Tragedy, not theory, is the genre that most closely corresponds to the subject matter of theology itself. MacKinnon would no doubt approve of T.R. Wright’s claim that literature’s task is ‘to explore, to complicate and to enrich the apparent security of theological concepts’ (Wright 1988: 13) by attending to particularities. Here, for example, is MacKinnon on Hamlet: ‘It can hardly be denied that our understanding of such notions as responsibility, free-will, decision are enlarged, even transformed … by the dramatist’s most subtle exploration of the Prince’s personal history’ (MacKinnon 1968: 50). The purpose of the present essay is to examine how categories drawn from drama can transcend the traditional disciplinary boundaries of philosophy and theology, especially as these concern the personal history of the Prince – not of Denmark but of Peace.

Kevin J. Vanhoozer

33

II. On the Borderlines: Transcending which Boundaries? The notion that we can transcend boundaries presupposes that there are borders and boundaries to begin with. Is it legitimate to cross the lines separating theology and philosophy, lines drawn not in the sand but in society, academy and church? There is a difference between transcending illegitimate boundaries and transgressing legitimate borders. What kind of boundaries need to be transcended and what kind of boundaries, if any, need to be respected? An ontological boundary: The creation versus the Creator Perhaps the most important boundary that needs to be respected is that between God the Creator and the created world. Thinkers as disparate as Aquinas, Barth and Heidegger all affirm what Kierkegaard terms ‘the infinite qualitative difference’ between God and creaturely reality. Heidegger, for instance, posits an ontological difference between Being and beings and criticizes the ‘ontotheological’ constitution of metaphysics that makes of God an ingredient of a metaphysical system. The living God of revelation should not be confused with God as ‘first cause’ of a metaphysical system: ‘if the only impetus to the practice of theology were the attempt of cosmologists and philosophers to offer theoretical explanations of certain features of the cosmos or humankind, then theology would play a very minor role in the contemporary world’ (Wolterstorff 2005: 81). Pascal similarly insists on the distinction between the God of the philosophers and the God of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob. Walter Kasper redirects Feuerbach’s critique at theists for whom God is simply a projection of their best metaphysical thoughts and goes so far as to speak of the ‘heresy of theism’ (Kasper 2000: 295). A more polemical way of staking the ontological boundary, then, is to draw a distinction between the reductionistic conceptual ‘idols’ of metaphysics and the conceptual ‘icons’ that derive from God’s self-revelation in Christ (Marion 1991b). So one way of avoiding idolatry is to adopt a methodological distinction between the God of philosophical theism and the triune, biblical God (Moore 2003: 30). An epistemological boundary: The genius versus the apostle Perhaps the most common way of conceiving the modern boundary between philosophy and theology trades on Kant’s determination of the limits of knowledge. According to Kant, all knowledge begins in human – which is to say, spatio-temporal – experience. We experience the world via sensory intuitions that the mind organizes according to its default rational categories. The result is a boundary between the world as it appears to us (phenomena) and the world as it really is (noumena), between that which is spatio-temporally structured and that which is not, between that to which our concepts apply and that to which they do not (Wolterstorff 2000: 159). Because (for Kant) God does not appear in human experience as such, Godtalk (theology) falls beyond the pale of intelligible human discourse.

34

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Kierkegaard’s ‘On the difference between a genius and an apostle’ construes the limits somewhat differently. The ‘genius’ is typically the one who reaches the truths of reason the fastest. Socrates is for Kierkegaard the epitome of the philosophical genius. Kierkegaard locates Socrates, Kant and other geniuses on the side of immanence and asserts that philosophers can never know more than their own minds. By contrast, the apostle – one sent – knows something the genius cannot know, something transcendent, but only because he has been told by an authoritative source (for example, the Holy Spirit; cf. Matthew 16:17). The apostle is not irrational just because he believes something on the basis of testimony (so Coady 1992). It is significant that Jesus, too, was ‘one sent’ – sent from the Father. Hence, though Socrates and Jesus may both assert ‘There is eternal life’, only Jesus knows what he is talking about, says Kierkegaard, for only Jesus has it on reliable authority. Jesus was not a genius: to say ‘There is eternal life’ is not profound. The point is that it is as one sent from God that Jesus says it (Kierkegaard 1940: 156–7). While both Kant and Kierkegaard affirm an epistemological boundary, then, on this account only Kierkegaard allows for the possibility of transcending it. An ethical–eschatological boundary: The other versus the Wholly Other According to Emmanuel Levinas, it is precisely philosophy’s emphasis on epistemology that leads it to violate what is ultimately an ethical boundary, namely, the respect for the other. Philosophy – in Levinas’s terms, ‘Greek think’ – is a violent intellectual procedure that reconciles differences and oppositions by reducing them to aspects of a single, comprehensive vision: ‘The labor of thought wins out over the otherness of things and men’ (Levinas 1989: 78). Philosophical discourse, to the extent it employs ‘totalizing’ conceptual schemes, becomes ‘a violence which we do to things’ (the words are Foucault’s [1982], but their spirit is Levinasian). And not to things only, but to God and the Word of God as well. The name Jesus Christ ‘is not a system representing a unified experience of a unified thought; it is the Word of God itself’ (Barth 1975: 181). Theology must do justice to its peculiar subject matter, the self-revelation of God, a reality that is wholly other than what human beings normally think and experience. Barth’s socalled ‘dialectical’ theology is an attempt to speak of the gracious and contingent divine in-breaking to the world in the person of Jesus Christ. If, as Levinas contends, ethics seeks to do justice to the other, how much more does philosophy have a responsibility not to totalize the wholly other? Theology’s mandate is to bear witness to God’s free and loving action, a freedom to which no a priori conceptual scheme can do justice. For Barth, then, the boundary that demarcates human religious experience and theology proper is not ethical but eschatological; it is a matter of another, eternal

Kevin J. Vanhoozer

35

order interrupting the present world order. It is the boundary that distinguishes this world from the world to come, ousia from parousia.1 III. The Two Ways: Stating the Missions; Charting the Turns Ultimately we may do better to think of the difference between philosophy and theology in terms not of distinct spaces or ‘limit’ statements but of distinct activities and ‘mission’ statements: philosophical and theological statements respectively pursue two distinct yet variously related missions, each concerned with, among other things, clarifying, providing guidance and truth-telling – in short, with the search for wisdom and understanding. Mission statements The apostle Paul is in no doubt about the mission of the theologian: to preach the Gospel, the wisdom of God made flesh in Jesus Christ. As to philosophy’s mission, I take my cue from the etymology of the term itself: the love (philia) of wisdom (sophia). Socrates’ mission began with his commissioning by the oracle at Delphi, where he learned that the confession of ignorance is the beginning of wisdom.2 Socrates stands for philosophy’s attempt to cultivate the way of wisdom, to grasp the truth about the meaning of the whole by means of unaided reason.3 Philosophers seek, with Socrates, to understand the cosmos and the place of human beings in it; Christian theologians, following the apostle Paul, seek to understand the cross and the benefits of being ‘in Christ’. Socrates says, ‘the unexamined life is not worth living’; Paul retorts, ‘the unexamined Christ is not worth preaching’. What we have here are two distinct yet related discourses: the philosopher (and genius) says how the world goes; the theologian (and apostle) says how the Word goes. The discourses are related because each ultimately pertains to understanding the real world in which humans dwell and seek to live well, yet they are also distinct: the one works with universal human experience, the other binds itself to the authority of the canonical Scriptures that attest Christ.

1 This boundary is related to the one of which T.S. Eliot speaks which, in his opinion, delineates a difference more fundamental than that between male and female, white or black – namely, the difference between those who believe in divine revelation and those who do not (in Baillie and Martin 1937). 2 At his trial, Socrates claims to be ‘god’s gift to Athens’ (Plato, Apology 30d7–e1). I contrast the missions of Socrates with Jesus in my ‘The trials of truth’ (Vanhoozer 1999). 3 Gunton views the attempt to engage the meaning of the whole as a religious enterprise (Gunton 1996: 300).

36

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Charting the turns: Adventures in philosophy and theology To speak of philosophy and theology as distinct types of discourse, each with its own mission, is to highlight what distinguishes them from one another. Charting their respective histories, by contrast, tends to show how both philosophy and theology have been affected by the same broader cultural and intellectual developments. What Alain Badiou says of philosophy’s status as a concrete universal – a message addressed to all from a situated time and place – pertains to theology as well: ‘Philosophy is … both a universal aim of reason and, simultaneously, one that manifests itself in completely specific moments’ (Badiou 2005: 67). Both theology and philosophy, for example, have had their Greek and German ‘moments’. Despite their typological dissimilarities, then, philosophy and theology share certain ‘chronotopic’ similarities.4 Each has been affected by the Enlightenment and by Kant’s ‘turn to the subject’. One helpful way of mapping the relation of philosophy and theology, then, is by charting these epoch-making turns and seeing how the two disciplines respond to them. A ‘turn’ is in fact a revolution, a decisive paradigm shift that alters the way thinkers in many disciplines view themselves and the world.5 Kant likened his famous turn to the subject to a Copernican Revolution: as Copernicus showed that the earth revolves around the sun rather than the sun the earth, so Kant showed knowledge to be a matter of the world’s conformity to the mind rather than the mind to the world. We turn now to examine three further revolutionary turns: to language, narrative, and practice. Each in its own way turns away from (that is, transcends) the traditional epistemological boundary that divided faith from reason. It would therefore behove us to see how these turns in intellectual and cultural history have opened up new possibilities for relating philosophy and theology. I pursue this brief cartographic exercise in dialogue with Badiou’s recent attempt to trace what he calls the ‘adventure of French philosophy’ in the latter half of the twentieth century (Badiou 2005). Badiou helps us to see the various turns as reactions to the prior ‘turn to the subject’ and to identify the axis on which these subsequent turns revolve as poised between ‘life’ and ‘concept’. The human subject is at once an existing organism and a conceptual thinker; this dual emphasis accords well with MacKinnon’s concern to relate metaphysical analysis and existential imagination, a concern to which we shall return in due course. According to Badiou, all contemporary French philosophy engages with the heritage of the German Enlightenment in a search for ‘a new relation between concept and existence’ (Badiou 2005: 70).

4 By ‘chronotope’ I mean a way of speaking and thinking that prevails in a specific place and time (the term itself comes from Bakhtin). The novel, for example, may be the quintessential nineteenth-century European form of consciousness. 5 In their introduction to The Interpretive Turn, the editors state that ‘It is now popular to mark shifts in philosophical method and preoccupation as “turns”’ (Hiley et al. 1991: 1).

Kevin J. Vanhoozer

37

The turn to language: A new cultural geographic boundary? The first great turn away from Descartes’s autonomous knowing subject and Kant’s transcendental knowing subject is the turn to language. Twentieth-century thinkers from a variety of disciplines now see language as the medium in which both thought and existence live and move and have their being. Philosophy, says Paul Ricoeur, begins from ‘the fullness of language’ (Ricoeur 1974: 288), theology from what we might call ‘the fullness of the Word’. The turn to language acknowledges something prior to and deeper than the subject, something – a structure, a system of differences – that serves as a framework for human reason and experience, for concepts and existence alike. The turn to language has in fact led in two different directions: the Anglo-American or ‘analytic’ and the ‘Continental’. What is important to note is that this new divide transcends the disciplinary boundaries: there are analytic philosophers and analytic theologians on the one hand and Continental philosophers and theologians on the other. To what does this distinction actually refer? Badiou’s categories – ‘concept’ and ‘life’ – provide a first approximation. For Anglo-American ‘analytic’ thinkers, language is a medium for thought, and the task of philosophy and theology is to clarify thought, in ordinary and in biblical language respectively. For Continental thinkers, by contrast, language is a medium for existence and the task of philosophy and theology is to explore, and emancipate, existence by interpreting, situating and deconstructing language. According to Richard Rorty, analytic and Continental thinkers have different aims: ‘getting things right’ (the ambition of science) versus ‘making things better’ (the ambition of sociocultural critique) (Rorty 2003). The distinction is not only theoretical but names an institutionalized intellectual faultline on either side of which one can find rival journals, conferences and university departments. In short: ‘analytic’ versus ‘Continental’ has become a boundary within a boundary, separating philosophers from philosophers and theologians from theologians.6 Analytic thinkers ‘prize such intellectual virtues as expository clarity and argumentative rigor’ (Quinn 1996: 49) and employ techniques of philosophical analysis in their work (Harris and Insole 2005: 3–4). With respect to theology they see themselves as engaged in a rather traditional form of ‘faith seeking understanding’ that expresses itself more concretely as a quest for consistency, rationality and truth with regard to theistic beliefs (Quinn 1996: 54). Analytic thinkers believe they have got beyond Kant and beyond positivism and hence are able, through careful examination of the concept, to attain knowledge of ‘God’. Indeed, Robert Adams compares analytic theism to ‘a sort of scholasticism, in the logically disciplined, socially interactive manner of making progress on details that largely constitutes its wissenschaftlich character’ (Adams 1996: 80). Continental thought tends to respect the boundary erected by Kant that forbade what for him was an unequal yoking of ‘knowledge’ and ‘metaphysics’. They tend to be text- rather than problem-oriented, focusing on the writings of certain thinkers 6

For a helpful survey of this disciplinary landscape, see Loades 2005.

38

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

(for example, Kant, Hegel, Heidegger, Nietzsche). The analytically inclined find this tendency to offer commentary rather than argumentation frustrating in the extreme. Yet this is simply the Continental way: to approach problems textually and contextually (Critchley 1998: 8–9). The awareness of context – of cultural, historical and social situatedness – is a hallmark of the Continental style: ‘the gain of the Continental tradition is that it allows one to focus on the essential historicity of philosophy as a practice and the essential historicity of the philosopher who engages in this practice’ (Critchley 1998: 10). Continental thought has often been stronger outside philosophy departments than within them, flourishing especially in the groves of literary and social theory (Critchley 1998: 5). Members of each group are often quick to stereotype, and sometimes demonize, the other. The one complains: ‘insufficiently rigorous in logic and argumentation!’; the other shouts back: ‘insufficiently aware of history and culture!’ Self-serving caricatures by each party of the other ultimately serve no one and are particularly insidious when they feed into ideological distortions of national temperaments (Critchley 1998: 4).7 I dare say phenomenologists and even certain deconstructionists employ rigorous methods. Derridean deconstruction is nothing if not the devil in the details. Continental thinkers, for their part, are often baffled by the epistemological confidence of analytic thinkers, particularly in regard to their ability to gain knowledge of God (Wolterstorff 2000: 153) and by their taking metaphysical realism for granted: ‘“Theism” is an abstraction dealing with second-order questions that are not closely connected to the living practices of religion’ (Evans 1996: 62).8 Not all analytic thinkers check their traditions or their particularity at the academy’s door, however, as if one could philosophize as a merely generic human being. Plantinga sees no contradiction in beginning with the fiduciary framework of Christianity on the one hand while maintaining the rationality of his Christian beliefs on the other, hence his Warranted Christian Belief. Nowhere is this particular boundary on more conspicuous display than in the discussion between philosophers of religion in the American Philosophical Association and their counterparts in the American Academy of Religion (Wainwright 1996).9 Walter Lowe speaks of two types of philosophy of religion: the one (call it ‘A’ for ‘analytic’) makes frequent appeal to logic and sees itself as a kind of science; the other (‘non-A’) is far more attentive to the particularities of experience and practice. ‘A’ wants to clarify the concept of God; ‘non-A’ ‘evinces more interest in religion than in God’ (Lowe 1996: 31). ‘Non-A’ is therefore preoccupied with issues 7 For an interesting suggestion that both analytic and Continental philosophical traditions are therapeutic, though each employs its own techniques, see Sandbothe 2003. 8 Evans himself disputes this characterization, maintaining that theism, so conceived as an exercise in conceptual analysis, simply tries to clarify and examine beliefs that inform the lives and practices of believers. 9 In general, members of the APA are ‘more likely to identify themselves as analytic philosophers in the Anglo-American tradition, and those in the AAR as hermeneutic philosophers in the Continental tradition’ (Proudfoot 1996: 71).

Kevin J. Vanhoozer

39

of culture and multiculturalism that are matters largely of indifference to ‘A’. ‘A’ seeks to demonstrate the rational intelligibility of theistic belief and thus employs logical argument as its preferred literary genre; ‘non-A’s’, concerned more with the particularities of religious life, ‘tend to stress the idea that religion is a socially constructed cultural product’ (Quinn 1996: 55) and to write in the genre of edifying discourse (Proudfoot 1996). This APA/AAR encounter represents a peculiarly North American equivalent of the adventure of concept and existence. Yet the analytic–Continental fault-line persists through the other turns as well. The turn to narrative: Literary forms and historical traditions ‘One could not displace the concept without inventing new philosophical forms’ (Badiou 2005: 72). The singular alliance between literature and philosophy – which Badiou deems as ‘one of the most striking characteristics of contemporary French philosophy’ – has significance far beyond France. The turn to narrative has affected Anglo-American analytic and Continental philosophers and theologians alike.10 Why narrative? One reason is that thinkers in many disciplines have come to see narrative, like language, as the medium in which humans live and move and have their being (see Hauerwas and Jones 1989). Stephen Crites speaks of the ‘narrative quality of experience’ (Crites 1989), Alasdair MacIntyre of the narrative shape of human action (MacIntyre 1989), and Paul Ricoeur of narrative as the form of language best suited to articulating human temporality (Ricoeur 1988) and identity (Ricoeur 1992). Narratives sustain the particular identity over time not only of individuals but of communities, hence their association with historical tradition. Personal identity is largely constituted by one’s place in an ongoing story. Human beings are not merely ‘in’ history but exist ‘as’ history: ‘life’ must be narrated if it is to be grasped as a meaningful whole. Interestingly enough, Nicholas Wolterstorff observes that what makes a philosopher an analytic philosopher is not the commitment to rigorous thought and clarity of expression, as the popular view would have it, but rather ‘that he places himself within a certain story line of philosophy in the twentieth century’ (Wolterstorff 2000: 152). Analytic philosophy of religion stands in the tradition shaped by Locke, whereas its Continental counterpart stands in the tradition shaped by Kant. In Wolterstorff’s opinion, it was largely eighteenth-century thinkers who believed ‘that religion should be rationally constructed on the basis of our shared human nature’ (Wolterstorff 2000: 166). Contemporary analytic thinkers (at least, the Reformed and Roman Catholic among them) do not fit this stereotype; they attempt to philosophize on the basis of their respective particular traditions. The turn to narrative is but another way of speaking about the rejection of the requirement that in order to be rational we have ‘to extricate ourselves from our particular traditions

10 Though one would not know it by consulting the reference works edited by Audi 1999 or Honderich 1995, neither of which has an entry for ‘narrative’.

40

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

and frameworks of convictions so as to conduct ourselves as generic human beings’ (Wolterstorff 2000: 167). Narrative provides a space in which ‘there is no longer a formal differentiation between concept and life’ (Badiou 2005: 73). The cognitive significance of narrative has been recognized by many in different disciplines. Ricoeur views narrative as a unique and irreducible cognitive instrument that is able to ‘configure’ – to synthesize in the form of a unified plot – a heterogeneity of otherwise unrelated persons, places and events and, as such, is the distinct form of historical understanding (Ricoeur 1984). MacIntyre contends that progress in epistemology is a matter of constructing and reconstructing ever more adequate narratives (MacIntyre 1989). Historical traditions thus become the bearers of a properly narrative reason because all rationality is tradition-based (MacIntyre 1988). With regard to narrative, it may be better to speak not of the ‘turn’ but of the ‘return’ of literary form. Martha Nussbaum has written extensively on the significance of literature for ethical understanding: ‘Literary form is not separable from philosophical content, but is, itself, a part of content – an integral part, then, of the search for and the statement of truth’ (Nussbaum 1990: 3). Similarly, in the realm of theology, David Tracy views the return of literary forms as a reaction to modernity’s bondage to a single form – the propositional – and to its concomitant attempts to name God in terms of a particular ‘ism’ (Tracy 1994). Narrative is a pre-eminent biblical form for identifying both Jesus Christ (Frei 1974) and the triune God (Jenson 1997: 42–60). Indeed, it is the cradle of theology for doctrine is largely the interpretation of the biblical narrative (McGrath 1990: 52–66). Indeed, from one point of view theology is precisely a matter of ‘using the texts to think with’ (Watson 2000: xiii). The turn to practice: Culture and collective action Narratives generate traditions that in turn perpetuate certain practices. A ‘practice’ is ‘a dense cluster of ideas and activities that are related to a specific social goal and shared by a social group over time’ (Bass 2002: 2–3). Analytic philosophy, as we have just seen, is a tradition whose members are committed to maintaining the practices that constitute its identity, and the virtues that make for excellent practice (Quinn 1996: 49). Similarly, ‘the touchstone of philosophy in the Continental tradition might be said to be practice . . . our historically and culturally embedded life in the world as finite selves’ (Critchley 1998: 12). The difference between the APA and AAR can thus be seen in terms of two ‘tribal cultures’ with different intellectual environments and social locations in the academy (Quinn 1996: 43). Theologians have also made the turn to practice: ‘knowing the triune God is inseparable from participating in a particular community and its practices – a participation which is the work of God’s Holy Spirit’ (Buckley and Yeago 2001: 1). It follows that ‘it is the concrete context of ecclesial practice that constitutes the framework of reflection within which agreements and disagreements over various methodological strategies … are contained’ (Buckley and Yeago 2001: 4). Note

Kevin J. Vanhoozer

41

that the human subject on this view is not primarily a thinker – a locus of mental representations – but an agent who relates to the world by acting in and on it. Philosophers and theologians who relocate the standards for speech, thought and action from universal rational criteria to the logic implicit in their local institutional practices, whether academic or ecclesial, may be said to have made the ‘cultural– linguistic’ turn (see Lindbeck 1984: 32–41 and Vanhoozer 2005a: 10–11). ‘Getting it right’ in this context is neither a matter of corresponding to the way things are nor of ‘making things better’, but rather of ‘conforming to grammatical and social rules’ of a particular culture. The interpretative turn: Two (or more) kinds of biblical hermeneutics This last turn is not really a separate event so much as a way of summing up the preceding. Badiou sees what I have described as three turns as more or less coordinated moves to rearticulate the relation of concept to life through a production of new forms and a new political engagement: ‘It is the novelty of this relation between the philosophical concept and the external environment that constitutes the broader innovation of twentieth-century French philosophy’ (Badiou 2005: 71–2). Though Badiou does not put it in these terms, it is fair to say that the relation of concept and life that he traces through the twentieth century is a thoroughly hermeneutical adventure. Here, too, we must distinguish between analytic and Continental styles of hermeneutics, each of which has its philosophical and theological representatives. Theology is clearly an interpretative discipline, philosophy less so. There is a growing consensus, however, among thinkers in the humanities, social sciences and natural sciences alike, that traditional options in epistemology have been superseded by hermeneutical questions: what is interpretation?, what makes one interpretation better than another?, if interpretative practices do not presuppose universal rational standards, is it community relativism all the way down? (Hiley et al. 1991: 2) While the interpretative turn ‘has benefited from the interpretive practices of such disciplines as literary criticism, cultural anthropology, jurisprudence, historiography, and feminist theory’ (Hiley et al. 1991: 1), there is perhaps no better measure of a philosophy or a theology than the way it approaches the interpretation of the Bible. The advantage in using Scripture as a hermeneutical litmus test is that biblical interpretation involves convictions about nature and human being as well as about God. The distinguishing traits of many a philosophy and theology quickly become apparent when their proponents set about reading the Bible.11 This is true even on the descriptive level, quite apart from evaluations about orthodoxy and the like. Assumptions concerning God, world and self quickly reveal themselves in and through the process of textual commentary. ‘By their interpretative fruits shall ye know them.’ The practice of biblical interpretation may therefore be the best concrete location in which to bring boundaries of philosophy and theology to light, and even to transcend them (or not). 11 I learned this while working on the philosophy of Paul Ricoeur (Vanhoozer 1990), but it has been confirmed many times since.

42

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Anthony Thiselton has convincingly documented the effect philosophical presuppositions have had on biblical hermeneutics (Thiselton 1980). Different theological assumptions have a similar effect (Vanhoozer 2005b). Moreover, the analytic–Continental distinction affects philosophical and theological hermeneutics alike. The focus of Continental hermeneutics is focused human being (‘life’), historicity and understanding. Biblical interpretations owing more to Continental thought tend to view the text either as an expression of human experience (e.g., Bultmann’s notion of faith as ‘Christian self-understanding’) or as a means for transforming or enlarging human existence (for example, Ricoeur on the ‘new being’ displayed ‘in front of the text’, Ricoeur 1991b: 95–8). Biblical interpretation for Ricoeur is a regional instance of a general hermeneutic where the task of interpretation is to display the kind of being-in-the-world refigured by the text. To be sure, the biblical world-of-the-text is unique in that it names ‘God’ in relation to the story of Israel and of Jesus Christ, yet Ricoeur insists that events such as the exodus and resurrection point not to past facts so much as present existential possibilities for the reader (Vanhoozer 1990: 230–66). In contrast, for analytically inclined philosophers and theologians, biblical interpretation is largely a matter of exposition and clarification of thought. In this tradition, exegesis is largely an explicatory practice. Wolterstorff acknowledges the tendency of analytic thinkers to focus on arguments (concept) rather than experience (life) and recommends that philosophers of religion in this tradition devote more attention to the lived experience of religion, especially to ‘the reading and interpreting of canonical scriptures’ – a topic to which analytic thinkers have paid too little attention in his opinion (Wolterstorff 2000: 169). It shows. Analytic thinkers have a predilection for sentence-long discourse. If the pathology of Continental biblical interpretation is the tendency to reduce God-talk to talk about human subjectivity, the analytic pathology is the tendency to distil propositions from texts in order to evaluate their cogency. It is an open question, then, whether analytic philosophy can do justice to the particularity and plurality of the Bible’s diverse literary forms and thus avoid the interpretative crime that Wordsworth’s lines chillingly depict: ‘Our meddling intellect / Mis-shapes the beauteous forms of things: – / We murder to dissect’ (Wordsworth 1969: ‘The Tables Turned’, 377).12

12 This is a concern related to that expressed by Harriet Harris, namely that analytic philosophy curbs the philosophical ambition of philosophers by narrowing their focus and detaching their discipline from people’s driving concerns, not least for help in gaining wisdom for living (Harris and Insole 2005: 15).

43

Kevin J. Vanhoozer

IV. Phronesis and the ‘Turn to Drama’ ‘All philosophy is in Shakespeare.’13

If ‘the unexamined life is not worth living’, surely the unexamined life of Jesus Christ is not worth following. ‘Examining’ life means negotiating the relationship between concept and existence, a transaction that involves transcending boundaries not only between philosophy and theology but between concepts and other forms of discourse as well. The so-called ‘ancient quarrel’ between poets and philosophers has recently entered a fascinating new phase (Nussbaum 1990). Here we may recall MacKinnon’s suggestion that theology may be ‘the victim of the victory won in the person of Plato by the philosophers over the poets, and in particular the tragedians’ (MacKinnon 1968: 100). The present section proposes that both philosophy and theology follow MacKinnon’s lead and turn to drama. Indeed, the turn to drama represents an exciting new chapter in the adventure of ‘concept’ and ‘life’ as these come together in the notion of the subject as an actor acting with others on the world stage. A dramatic proposal: Transcending boundaries via phronesis What I am calling ‘the turn to drama’ embraces and transcends the previous turns to language, narrative, practice and interpretation, and hence provides new resources for philosophy and theology alike. In the first place, a drama involves doing things (drao – ‘to do’) with words and physical movements. Of special significance is the recognition that ‘saying’ is a form of ‘doing’, for language is often the primary dramatic medium; many dramas consist largely of dialogical action. Second, dramas, like narratives, have plots. Dramas, however, show rather than tell; the theatre speaks the language of action. Third, ‘the turn to drama’ gives a practical twist to the notion of theoria, returning it to its original home in the theatre. Whereas for Greek philosophers theoria pertains to contemplation of eternal truths (‘beholding’ with the mind’s eye), for the Greek poets and tragedians beholding tragedies transforms the heart (catharsis). The audience is not abstracted from but caught up in the action; the very notion of interactive theatre thus breaks down the theory/practice barrier. Finally, the turn to drama casts the interpretative turn in a new light by encouraging us to see the outcome of hermeneutics not in terms of propositions but of performance (cf. Hiley et al. 1991: 10–13). Drama involves speech, story, practice, and it demands that we act with others with whom we share a particular situation. It is precisely because of their ability to help us make sense of particular situations that Nussbaum commends forms of literature such as the novel to ethics and philosophy. I want to say something similar about drama: drama is a form of understanding that fosters and facilitates concrete 13

Levinas, as cited by Ford 1989: 128.

44

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

rather than abstract reflection. Drama combines concept (what Stanislavski calls the ‘super-objective’ or main idea of the play) and existence in a way that is both fresh yet ancient. To determine what is fitting to say or do in a particular situation requires wisdom, not simply information, and a dramatic paradigm, not simply theoretical principles. The turn to drama is all about the working out and testing of convictions in the crucible of everyday life. As such, drama brings concepts and existence together as ingredients in judgements. A judgement is neither a statement of a theoretical truth nor an expression of mere subjectivity, but rather a form of practical reasoning about what to say and do in specific contexts. What the turn to drama therefore brings to the fore is phronesis: practical reason, the process of ‘deliberating well’ about how to realize the good in particular situations. The turn to drama transcends old boundaries between philosophy and theology by reframing the discussion in terms not of faith versus reason but of rival forms of phronesis. Aristotle appeals to phronesis to specify what is unique about ethical reasoning. Gadamer appropriates phronesis for hermeneutics, on the ground that ‘Understanding is … a special case of applying something universal to a particular situation’ (Gadamer 1993: 312). What the turn to drama adds to this notion of phronesis is the theme of understanding as performance. Understanding must be demonstrated in right action. Practical reasoning embodies one’s implicit understanding of why we are here and what we are to do – one’s grasp of the meaning of the whole. The turn to drama is thus a turn to wisdom, the ability to grasp meaningful patterns, solve practical problems and live well in the world (Kekes 1980, esp. ch. 5). Neither philosophy nor theology can afford to stay on the level of theoretical science. Continental thinkers in particular reject scientism and its false assumption ‘that the scientific or theoretical way of viewing things … provides the primary and most significant access to ourselves and the world’ (Critchley 1998: 13). The priority that Heidegger assigned to the practical view of the world as ready-to-hand is similar to the dramatic view of the world, and of human being-in-the-world, as ready-tospeak and ready-to-do. The turn to drama in philosophy: Living well with others in the world According to Badiou, philosophy is itself a ‘militant’ practice that does not merely reflect upon politics but seeks to transform it (Badiou 2005: 76). Continental thinking, as we have seen, is meant to be an edifying discourse that does not simply leave things where they are but criticizes them. The turns to language, narrative and practice highlight the importance of interpretation and hence the importance of deciding ‘how then shall we live?’ The awareness of the contingency (or as Derrida would say, the deconstructibility) of our ways of doing things thus gives

Kevin J. Vanhoozer

45

14

rise to crisis. Indeed, one responsibility of the philosopher is to be a ‘civil servant of humanity’ (Husserl 1970a: 17) – especially by producing crises that awaken a critical consciousness that something now has to be done. Ricoeur’s late writings on identity and imputability illustrate the turn to drama in philosophy. Indeed, Ricoeur’s corpus proves a fertile proving ground for observing the effects on philosophy of all the turns we have hitherto considered. There is a foreshadowing of the turn to drama even in Ricoeur’s early work in which he describes human existence as ‘the desire to be’ and ‘the effort to exist’ (Ricoeur 1969). One reflects on human being not through direct inspection, as it were, but through a hermeneutical reflection on the ways in which the subject expresses its existence in words and acts. The self ‘realizes’ and ‘recognizes’ itself in and through its lived performance, a performance that is decisively informed by the particular drama – that vision of the meaning of the whole of life – to which one is committed (Ricoeur 2005). What became increasingly central in Ricoeur’s thought was the notion of the doing rather than the knowing subject: the ‘I can’ or capable self who is able to speak and act (Ricoeur 1992). Ricoeur uses the category of narrative to speak of the self’s identity, which does not belong to the category of events or facts but of action. The self is essentially not so much a ‘what’ as a ‘who’: an agent with a cohesive history of its speech and actions. Yet the self is not who it is without those others who contribute to its story. Acting and interacting with others, often through speech, is of course the stuff of drama.15 The call of the other to the self represents what improvisers, in the context of the theatre, call an ‘offer’. Anything one does is a kind of offer that invites others to respond. To ‘accept’ an offer is to join in the action; to ‘block’ the action is to prevent it from developing. Because the self exists not as an island but as an archipelago, there is no end of others making offers. Is the other another human being, or the Wholly Other (Ricoeur 1992: 355)?16 Regardless of how one answers this question, the task of philosophy and theology alike is phronetic – discerning how one’s convictions are best lived out with others in particular situations (Mandry 2004: 75). The turn to drama in theology: Living well with others in the world before God Christianity is not primarily a system of beliefs or even a moral system but a way of life oriented by the hope that in Jesus Christ is indeed the way, the truth and the good life. At the heart of Christianity are claims concerning a series of divine words and 14 Critchley sees the theme of crisis running like Ariadne’s thread through a host of Continental thinkers (1998: 12). 15 Ricoeur sees phronesis as necessary precisely because of the possibility of ‘a tragedy of action’ (Ricoeur 1992: 274) occasioned by the tension between universal moral claims and particular ethical situations. 16 It is probably not too far off the mark to suggest that, for Ricoeur, the difference between philosophy and theology is that the latter conceives of human existence as a gift.

46

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

divine acts: a ‘theo-drama’ (Balthasar 1988). MacKinnon’s intuition about the subject matter of theology is correct: ‘If the Christian faith is true … its truth is constituted by the correspondence of its credenda with harsh, human reality, and with the divine reality that met that human reality and was broken by it … At the foundation of the faith there lies a deed done … what these [theological] interpretations seek to represent is the act that sets our every essay in conceptualization in restless vibration' (MacKinnon 1979: 21–2). To say the divine Word became flesh is to confess the Word become chronotopic, located at a particular time and place. The life of this embodied word is the stuff of drama, for the Word speaks and acts with and for others. Indeed, the Word is ‘God with us’ and ‘God for us’. The life of faith is a response to this divine offer in word and deed, promise and passion. Significantly, the earliest theological reflection sought to clarify the divine dramatis personae and produced the doctrine of the Trinity. All reflection, whether philosophical or theological, begins in first order language and life. The Bible is the narrative that identifies ‘who’ God is in terms of the communicative acts of Father, Son and Spirit. In modern times, theologians have tended to view the Bible as revelation, a category that has been co-opted in debates about epistemology, rationality and epistemic criteria. Better to see Scripture as a script, the normative specification of the Gospel, made up of a plurality of voices and a diversity of communicative acts. Theology on this view is ‘faith seeking theo-dramatic understanding’, where understanding involves both a grasp of what God has said and done, in creation and pre-eminently in Christ, and a grasp of what we must say and do in order rightly to fit in with the action (Vanhoozer 2005a: 236–7). One gains understanding through having one’s capacity for judging (and this involves reason, imagination, emotion and volition alike) formed and transformed by the ensemble of canonical practices that constitute Scripture. Note that the turn to drama highlights the manner in which biblical interpretation is ultimately a matter of performing the Scriptures (Lash 1986: 37–46). Doctrine gives direction to individuals and the church for fitting participation – right performance – in the ongoing drama of redemption (Vanhoozer 2005a: 100– 110). This drama concerns the arrival of the kingdom of God in Jesus Christ and is ultimately oriented to living well with others before God to God’s glory. Theology serves the church in its role as an enacted parable of the kingdom by helping it to see the world, and itself, sub specie theodramatis. Doctrine, as a species of dramatic direction, thus resembles phronesis more than theoria. Theological phronesis is all about determining what shape these goods – and the Gospel itself – ought to take in specific situations. Doctrine is a form of practical wisdom that aims at certain theo-dramatic goods: the salus of the individual; the shalom of the community; the glorification of the shema or name of God.

Kevin J. Vanhoozer

47

V. Following Doctrinal Direction: Between Drama and Metaphysics Doctrine is direction for fitting participation in the drama of redemption as it continues to be played out in new contextual scenes. How do things stand between this ‘faith seeking theo-dramatic understanding’ approach to theology on the one hand and philosophy on the other? Does the directive theory of doctrine privilege the analytic or the Continental tradition? What follows from the notion of ‘fitting participation’, central to the directive approach, for epistemology and metaphysics? In the first place, the turn to drama transcends old faith–reason boundaries and represents a new stage in what Badiou (2005: 67) terms the ‘adventure of philosophy’ to the extent that dramatic phronesis frames the relation between life and concept in a fresh new way. With regard to implications for epistemology and metaphysics, however, everything seems to hinge on the definition of doctrine and its implications: ‘A realistic construal of a religious doctrine is relatively univocal as to the main function of the doctrinal affirmation: it is meant to state a fact. An antirealist construal denies that, and opens a question as to what is the main function of the doctrinal formula’ (Adams 1996: 85–6). What would MacKinnon say: is my directive theory of doctrine a discourse on reality or has it wandered from the borderlands into the metaphysical badlands, where no ontology ever blooms? The world-stage well lost? The pragmatist critique Let us begin with the notion of following directions. The metaphor of the map commends itself because actors in the theo-drama follow a script (Scripture) into new contexts. The Bible is a canonical atlas, composed of different kinds of maps (for example, literary genres) that together chart out the way of truth and life (Vanhoozer 2005a: 294–9). It is important to see the map as an interpretative framework, not an objective representation of ‘how things really are’. Maps are not mirrors of reality and there is no such thing as a universal, all-purpose map; rather, every map serves specific purposes and is selective in what it represents.17 One might argue that dramaturgy is even less inclined towards realism to the extent that its directions are not intended to be representations of ‘where (and what) things are’. Such is the pragmatist critique: if doctrines are dramatic directions, then theology’s task is not providing believers with true beliefs about the way things are but of helping people to navigate the Christian way. While it is ironic to suggest that the cartographic metaphor of following directions leads to the loss of the world – for what else are maps mapping? – this is precisely Rorty’s position. On his view, what we call truth claims are just useful devices that get us where we want to go. Critics of Lindbeck’s cultural–linguistic theology make a similar point. In Lindbeck’s regulative account, ‘getting it right’ is less a matter of corresponding to the way things are than of conforming to a particular set of grammatical and social 17 For recent works on the question of representation and truth in cartography, see MacEachren 2004 and Andrews 2001.

48

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

rules. Lindbeck likens doctrines to grammatical rules for correct speech: ‘secondorder rather than first-order propositions [that] affirm nothing about extra-linguistic or extra-human reality’ (Lindbeck 1984: 80). The danger is that theology becomes a species of ethnography whose task is simply to describe how one particular community talks; doctrine then becomes an instrument for socialization into an ecclesial community. As to Scripture, Lindbeck’s notion of intratextual truth gets us no further than intrasystematic fittingness: the biblical narrative is internally coherent but it does not correspond to the external (extrasystematic) world. An utterance is intrasystematically true, says Lindbeck, when it coheres not only with the biblical text but with the ‘total relevant context’, which is to say, the Christian form of life (Lindbeck 1984: 64). Lindbeck himself links the two senses of ‘following directions’ – the cartographic and dramaturgical – when he compares using maps to performance. The context is his discussion of truth: while doctrines themselves may not make propositional truth claims, religion as a whole – the language and the form of life for which doctrine gives the rules – when actually lived ‘may be pictured as a single gigantic proposition’ (Lindbeck 1984: 51). Similarly, maps become true propositions ‘only when actually utilized in the course of a journey’ (Lindbeck 1984: 51). The converse also holds: even if a map is in error with regard to its scale of distances and topographic markings, ‘it becomes constitutive of a true proposition when it guides the traveller rightly’ (Lindbeck 1984: 52).18 Because maps can be misread, Lindbeck is unwilling to bestow the epithet ‘propositional truth’ on the documents themselves. The cartographic proposition is for Lindbeck not a property of the text itself but of its use. For the realist, however, a problem arises when maps that are in error are nevertheless said to be ingredient in a true proposition.19 ‘Truth’ for Lindbeck is a ‘success’ term, where success is measured in terms of pragmatic efficacy. While realists expect the truth to be profitable, profit alone is not the measure of truth. Doctrinal maps are not true because they work; they work (if they work) because they are true. Lindbeck confuses cartographic perlocutions (use) with cartographic locutions and illocutions (representations and directions). A related worry about the status of theological truth has been raised with regard to the so-called ‘moderate postmodern trajectory’ of phronesis (Guarino 1993: 42). Is there place in a phronetic conception of doctrine as direction for discipleship for a cognitive understanding of doctrinal statements as truth claims as well? Must doctrines be either directive or referential? The realist’s concern is that the turn to phronesis ‘cannot sustain the referential and final nature of truth which seems essential to revelation theology’ (Guarino 1993: 54). 18 Some sort of residual correspondence view seems to be at work in Lindbeck’s notion of maps being ‘in error’. 19 J.B. Harley, who is by no means a naive realist when it comes to cartography, nevertheless says that maps ‘state an argument about the world and they are propositional in nature’ (cited in Andrews 2001: 18).

Kevin J. Vanhoozer

49

The turn to drama and phronesis need not lead to this pragmatist cul-de-sac. The prior question, however, is: ‘What’s wrong with seeing doctrine as a map that gets us to our destination despite its errors and inaccuracies?’ I am reminded of my own attempt at forging short-cuts in my secondary school calculus class. My formula produced the right answer more often than not. My maths instructor, rightly sensing that something important was at stake, urged the rest of the class not to follow me into differential no-man’s-land. He then produced a page-long demonstration showing why ‘Vanhoozer’s Law’ would eventually generate wrong answers: because it ‘worked’ for the wrong reason. Theologians who conceive of their task as ‘faith seeking understanding’ will not be content merely to end up in the right place for the wrong reason, without knowing how or why. This way neither wisdom nor understanding lie. A directive account of Christian doctrine will remain committed to the project of metaphysics – saying ‘what is’ – because of its emphasis on fitting participation. The ‘fit’ is not simply a matter of what works but of what ‘befits’ the way things are. In addition, the notion of fittingness serves as an indispensable critical principle without which speech and practices would be prone to various kinds of ideological distortion. The meaning of the drama of redemption may not be reduced to my, or my community’s, performance of it. On the contrary, metaphysics is the discourse about the underlying intelligible structure of our commitments, ‘what constitutes them as more than arbitrarily willed options’ (Williams 1995: 6). Embedded in our most important practices are metaphysical beliefs, convictions about the way things are. Metaphysics remains necessary, then, not as an abstraction from but precisely as a critical reflection on practice. On the dogmatic location of metaphysics In terms of the older subject/object dichotomy, metaphysics pertains to the objective content (reality) that theories and doctrines strive to grasp and represent. Metaphysical categories such as ‘substance’, ‘essence’, ‘nature’, ‘form’ and ‘matter’ were thought to cut reality at its very joints. In terms of the present essay, however, the ultimate reality to which theology corresponds is dramatic: a whole and complete action. Both philosophy and theology, viewed in light of the turn to drama, offer directions to their respective disciples on how to ‘live well in the world with others’. Moreover, both parse ‘living well in the world’ in terms of ‘fitting participation’ in some kind of unified activity or process. Some see the process as entirely naturalistic – for example, the neo-Darwinian ‘drama of evolution’. Is theology thus only a regional instance of a general metaphysic? I want to say about metaphysics what Ricoeur says about hermeneutics: though biblical interpretation appears to be a regional instance of philosophical hermeneutics, it so happens that theological hermeneutics ‘presents features that are so original that the relation is gradually inverted’ (Ricoeur 1991b: 90). The ‘qualities’ in question are particularities of the history of Jesus Christ.

50

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Doctrine gives direction to disciples on the way. Is this direction a matter of metaphysics or morality? It is both: the way of wisdom transcends the dichotomy between a merely theoretical metaphysics and a merely practical morality. The directive theory of doctrine thus requires some reference to reality – call it ‘theodramatic correspondence’ or ‘theodramatic realism’ – where reality is defined not merely in terms of God’s being but in terms of God’s work (for example, the created order) and in terms of God’s triune being-in-act. Theology aims at promoting theodramatic correspondence: a way of speaking, thinking and living that is not only ‘according to the Scriptures’ but a way that is ‘according to’ the real – God’s creative, communicative and recreative activity, as revealed in the history of Jesus Christ. In the spirit of MacKinnon, we must say that the Gospel is at once theodramatic and metaphysical. A ‘theodramatic metaphysics’ provides a systematic account of the categories needed to describe what God has done to renew all things in Christ through the Spirit. Doctrines are not only statements of what is – and what is coming to be – but directions for how rightly to relate to it, directions for bringing practice into correspondence with the divine in the creative and recreative action of the triune God. To speak of Jesus’ history as ‘theodramatic’ is to offer a ‘thick description’ that makes use of the category of divine action. Here I need to underline two points: (1) what happens at the level of theodrama requires new categories and concepts (for example, divine work, divine action, creation, redemption) in order to avoid reducing what emerges at this level to mere epiphenomena of lower-level processes; (2) what happens at the level of theodrama is no less real than what happens at, say, the levels of physics, chemistry and biology (see Peacocke 1993 and McGrath 2002). In directing us to participate fittingly in the theodrama, then, doctrine orients us to a higher level of reality. ‘In Christ’: Towards a christological metaphysic Doctrines state acts, not simply facts, and direct us to participate in these acts. Theodramatic categories assume metaphysical status because they describe a level of the real without which our descriptions of the world and what happens in it would be too thin (that is, reductionist).20 Jesus is the clue to transcending boundaries between philosophy and theology because it is through an examination of his life that we come to understand the drama of universal history and the being-in-act of God.

20 Though I cannot press the case here, I believe that divine action is no less metaphysically disadvantaged as a category than human action. Theodrama here functions as a categorial principle, a principle that allows us to understand some aspect of reality in a different way or at a deeper level, a principle without which we should understand not more but less: ‘Metaphysical theories are not testable in the same way as scientific theories, but then metaphysical pronouncements differ in their logical character from scientific pronouncements. … It is overall understanding that the metaphysician seeks to provide, not merely understanding in a particular area’ (Walsh 1963: 187).

Kevin J. Vanhoozer

51

It was Kant who analyzed the schema of the concept ‘real’ in terms of ‘existence in time’. Jesus’ existence in time is thus a good place to examine his reality. The strangeness of Jesus’ concrete reality is rooted in ‘the way in which he lived uniquely as the frontier of the familiar and the transcendent’ (MacKinnon 1987: 180). Jesus’ historical time is connected to the pre-existence of the Logos as well as to the time of the risen and ascended Christ. In short, Jesus’ being-in-time – his person, prayers and practices – is bound up with the life of the triune God. The actions of the triune God in the history and fate of Jesus Christ are expression in time of God’s eternal being. Though Christian theology acknowledges Jesus Christ as the supreme locus of God’s being-in-act, the Christian theodrama encompasses others who also participate in the life of the triune God when the Spirit unites them in Christ to the Father. To engage in the theodrama is to participate not in a Platonic Greek universal but in a Pauline Jewish particular: the form of the historical life of Jesus Christ, itself a function of divine energies and agencies. So doctrinal direction is not a matter of pragmatism, but of participation. Disciples participate not in the ‘being’ or substantival nature of God so much as in the being-in-act of God: the event of triune self-communication and communion. In directing disciples to participate rightly in the theodrama, then, doctrine involves metaphysical presuppositions and implications, to which I can here only gesture. Union with Christ by the Spirit is the operative notion ‘by which we are taken up to participate in (and be transformed by) God’s trinitarian life and love’ (Canlis 2004: 184). Participation in Christ is not merely symbolic but involves a real ‘union’, in particular an incorporation into his death and resurrection, of which baptism is the sign and seal (Calvin Institutes IV.15.1–6). It is not a matter of being swallowed up into his divine nature but of sharing Christ’s life through the Spirit. Humanity thus participates in divinity without subverting the ontological boundary that distinguishes the Creator from creation. To be ‘in Christ’ is the apostle Paul’s preferred designation for right participation in the theodrama. It is also a thick description of Christian identity: ‘if any one is in Christ, he is a new creation’ (2 Cor. 5:17). Such participation in Christ does not entail abstracting ourselves from the world but engaging in a ministry of reconciliation and loving the proverbial ‘others.’ To be ‘in Christ’ is to give a thick, theodramatic description of human agency and human capabilities. Ricoeur’s hermeneutics of the ‘I can’ needs to be completed by his namesake the apostle Paul’s ‘I can do all things through Christ who strengthens me’ (Phil. 4:13). As God and humanity participate in Christ, so too does the world: ‘in him all things were created … and in him all things hold together’ (Col. 1:16–17). Indeed, the ‘super-objective’ of the whole theodrama set forth in Christ is a plan ‘to unite all things in him, things in heaven and things on earth’ (Eph. 1:12). Stanley Grenz thus speaks of an ‘eschatological realism’ (Grenz and Franke 2001: 266–73). Though union and communion are future goals, the future is upon us: we are already united with God in Christ through the Spirit. This is the Christian ‘metadrama’ for which doctrinal direction provides practical understanding and to which it corresponds.

52

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

VI. Conclusion. Two Types of Practical Wisdom: A Pairing or Parting of Ways? ‘Jewgreek is greekjew. Extremes meet.’ (James Joyce, Ulysses 1968: 622)

In a celebrated image, Paul Tillich contrasts two types of philosophy of religion: the way of meeting a stranger (viz., God as supreme Being) and the way of overcoming estrangement (viz., God as Being-itself) (Tillich 1959). A similar contrast may help us to distinguish two types of practical wisdom. Is the dialogue between philosophy and theology more like meeting a stranger or ought we to work towards overcoming estrangement? Perhaps the better image would be to see the two disciplines personified in the two disciples on the road to Emmaus ‘talking with each other about all these things that had happened’ (Luke 24:14). Even Karl Barth spoke of the philosopher as the ‘companion’ of the theologian (Barth 1986: 80). Both the philosopher and the theologian are after understanding: a way of bringing ‘concept’ and ‘life’ together in order to make sense of the whole. Barth also notes that neither one, as a human being, is in a position ‘to speak down from heaven’ (Barth 1986: 80). Nevertheless, the ‘one whole Truth’ to which the theologian is committed – the truth of creation, incarnation and redemption summed up in the name and narrative of Jesus Christ – concerns a ‘mighty act of condescension’ (Barth 1986: 85). By contrast, the philosopher begins by reflecting on the whole of human experience and seeks to reach transcendence ‘from below’. While they both may be headed towards Emmaus, then, there is some dispute about the correct route. The philosopher, even after the event of Jesus Christ, appears ‘to walk the path from the human being to God’ (Barth 1986: 89). Despite this difference, Barth urges the philosopher and the theologian not to stray so far apart that they lose sight or go out of earshot of one another, for it is possible to learn from the other and be guided on a step along one’s own way without having to change paths (Barth 1986: 91). The theologian admires the philosopher ‘as a prudent expositor of [the creation’s] self-understanding and self-description’ (Barth 1986: 92). The philosopher is ‘worldly-wise’ and so helps keep the theologian ‘earthed’. Yet the theologian is ‘wordly-wise’ and so plays the role of Hamlet to the philosopher’s Horatio with the reminder that ‘There are more things in heaven and earth … / Than are dreamt of in your philosophy’ (Shakespeare, Hamlet Act I, scene v). Colin Gunton depicts the relation of theology and philosophy as that of ‘indispensable opponents’ (Gunton 1996). Theology’s concepts are accountable to particular historical claims – the drama of Jesus’ passion – in a way that philosophy’s are not. Nevertheless, Gunton credits theology’s philosophical dispute with Gnosticism with the emergence of the doctrine of creation out of nothing. Both disciplines want to say something about the kind of world we live in, and theology ‘articulates its statements in a struggle with philosophy for the same Lebensraum’ (Gunton 1996: 305). What was implicit in Scripture – the doctrine of creatio ex nihilo; Act 1 of the theodrama – would have remained so had it not been for a philosophical dispute.

Kevin J. Vanhoozer

53

Such examples lead me to resist the notion that dialogue between philosophy and theology ought to result in a ‘fusion of horizons’, for this in effect means the collapse of two horizons or voices into one. I prefer a Bakhtinian approach that insists on the importance of ‘outsideness’: ‘In order to understand, it is immensely important … to be located outside the object … It is only in the eye of another culture that foreign culture reveals itself fully and profoundly’ (Bakhtin 1986: 7). Outsideness is not an obstacle to understanding but the condition of a deeper, creative understanding – an understanding that grasps what would otherwise remain potential or implicit. Bakhtin thus explains the phenomenon that Gunton has observed: concerning the doctrine of creatio ex nihilo, for example, philosophy’s outsideness was the condition for theology’s creative understanding. The description of MacKinnon as ‘an inside “outsider”’ (Roberts 1989: 2) who refused premature foreclosures of the conversation between philosophy and theology takes on special significance after Bakhtin. MacKinnon well knew that the philosopher is kin with others who make ‘protesting raids upon the theologians’ cherished homeland’ (MacKinnon 1968: 54). The dialogue between philosophy and theology thus resembles the game of kabbadi. In a rectangular dirt area divided into two halves, individual players from each team make occasional ‘raids’ into the other side. Any player they touch is ‘out’ and must leave the game. There is a catch: players making raids must say ‘kabbadi’ repeatedly without taking a breath until they return to their own side. If they fail to return or run out of breath, they are out of the game. Theologians can raid the philosophers’ territory as well, appropriating various topics for their own purposes and debating topics such as the nature of the world, knowledge and morality. Of course, theologians must say not kabbadi but Kyrie, for if their discourse fails to give epistemic primacy (Marshall 2000: 45–6) to the story of Jesus Christ, as norm both for the story of humanity and of God, they are out of the game. While the turn to drama allows us to transcend old boundaries, it need not and does not follow that all boundaries be abandoned. With regard to philosophical and theological phronesis, then, I cannot simply say that ‘opposites meet’. On this point, the present proposal is closer to Paul than to James (Joyce). To collapse all boundaries between philosophy and theology would be to collapse the one into the other, resulting not in creative but impoverished understanding. A little outsideness is not a bad thing. In the final analysis, it is persons – the actors in the drama – who demonstrate understanding and embody what wisdom they have, and it is persons who must transcend boundaries. Some make raids; others, who hold dual citizenship, make legal passage. And then there are the nomads, like myself, who hold dual citizenship in Athens and Jerusalem yet nevertheless make their earthly home in neither city exclusively, preferring rather to dwell, with others in the diaspora, in the borderlands: on the philosophical plains at the foot of Mount Zion. Here I stand – philosophically, metaphysically. Theologically I can do no other.

54

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Further Reading Badiou, A., ‘The adventure of French philosophy,’ New Left Review, 35, Sept–Oct 2005, 67–77 Hiley, D.R., Bohman, J.F., and Shusterman, R. (eds), The Interpretive Turn: Philosophy, Science, Culture, Ithaca, NY, and London: Cornell University Press, 1991 Lindbeck, G.A., The Nature of Doctrine: Religion and Theology in a Postliberal Age, Philadelphia, PA: Westminster, 1984 MacKinnon, D.M., Borderlands of Theology and Other Essays, Philadelphia, PA, and New York: J.B. Lippincott Company, 1968 Nussbaum, M.C., Love’s Knowledge: Essays on Philosophy and Literature, Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press, 1990 Ricoeur, P., From Text to Action: Essays in Hermeneutics, II, trans. K. Blamey and J.B. Thompson, Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press, 1991 Vanhoozer, K.J., The Drama of Doctrine: A Canonical–linguistic Approach to Christian Theology, Louisville, KY: Westminster John Knox, 2005 Wainwright, W.J. (ed.), God, Philosophy and Academic Culture: A Discussion between Scholars in the AAR and the APA, Atlanta, GA: Scholars Press, 1996

SECTION ONE

Reason, Rationality and Traditions of Rationality Few would confine the notion of rational discourse to that which strictly follows the canons of deductive or inductive logic, not least because premises have to come from somewhere, inductive criteria need to be validated in non-circular fashion, and what counts as reduction to ‘absurdity’ tends in the interesting cases to be problematic, even culture-specific. Our concepts of what count as reason and rationality, and hence of their scope, are functions of intellectual and broader cultural traditions (which is not to deny that some may be preferable to others), several of which are addressed in the papers that follow. Charles Taylor points to the ways that historical contingencies have led to the widespread acceptance in the West of a set of narratives that have together served to make secular perspectives seem ‘natural’, to provide norms by reference to which claims for the reality of that which transcends the physical world seem less than rational. The resulting ‘closed world structures’, that is, ways of experiencing and understanding the world that are closed to the possibility of the ‘transcendent’, are however themselves a product of history rather than nature, and excavating their history casts doubt on their claims, even in their own terms, to be themselves rational. Chris Firestone takes up what is arguably the decisive intellectual ‘moment’ in this history, Kant’s denial of the possibility of knowledge of the transcendent in order to make room for faith. For Kant’s account of the categories of the understanding as engaging only with what is ‘immanent’ in experience (the ‘phenomenal’) has led many to dismiss what lies beyond it (the ‘noumenal’) as beyond the frontiers of rational, even intelligible, discourse. Firestone argues that careful attention to the development of Kant’s thinking shows that such dismissals are unsustainable, for the space required in Kantian terms for faith turns out to be grounded in the nature of reason itself, without reference to which reason is radically unstable. Philip Clayton’s focus is on the continuing reshaping of some of these intellectual traditions, with particular reference to those setting a sharp boundary between science and religion. One of the most powerful of Taylor’s secularizing narratives is that whereby the progress of science is seen as a function of the elimination of ‘transcendental’ myths in order to become fully rational. The history here is no

56

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

doubt questionable, but Clayton is more interested in that narrative’s contemporary unsustainability for modelling science itself. The recognition that even the natural sciences are in part interpretative has progressively led to a rethinking of the nature of their rationality in a way that at least softens the distinction between the natural and the social sciences; but the resulting reconceptualization of science as the overcoming of puzzlement no longer presupposes a qualitative distinction between scientific and non-scientific rationality, making it worthwhile for scientific and religious struggles with puzzles raised by fundamental questions to be brought into more positive relations with each other – a potentiality which is already being widely exploited. Graham Ward addresses the phenomenological tradition, as developed by Husserl, which has helped to form contemporary ‘Continental’ philosophy. It seeks to investigate what is immediately ‘given’ in experience but, as in the case of the natural sciences, the quest for ‘pure’ description of what is given turns out to be a wild goose chase, for description cannot be separated from interpretation. Phenomenology therefore points beyond itself to interpretative frames, and here the theological frame proves fruitful when one focuses on what is given in that most basic aspect of embodied experience, the sense of touch. It is the mystery of embodiment itself, in theological terms the mystery of incarnation, that moves us beyond phenomenology and towards the theology of phenomena.

Chapter 3

What is Secularity? Charles Taylor

How did this secular age come about? And what exactly is this age whose development I’m trying to explain? There are all sorts of ways of describing it: separation of religion from public life, decline of religious belief and practice. But, while I’ll touch on these, I’m interested in another facet of our age: belief in God, or in the transcendent in any form is contested; it is an option among many; it is therefore fragile and for some people in some milieux very difficult, even ‘weird’. Five hundred years ago in our civilization, this wasn’t the case. Unbelief was off the map for most people, close to inconceivable. But that description also applies to the whole of human history outside the modern West. What had to happen for this kind of secular climate to come about? (1) There had to develop a culture which marks a clear division between the ‘natural’ and the ‘supernatural’, and (2) it had to come to seem possible to live entirely within the natural. I believe that (1) was something striven for, but (2) came about at first quite inadvertently. But before presenting my own views, I want to remark that the transformation represented by (1) + (2) is one of the most important and remarkable in human history. It is unprecedented for a civilization to make this kind of ‘secular’ turn. It is an explanandum calling out for a convincing historical account. Now I think that our attempts to come to grips with this question are obscured and impeded by a very powerful master narrative, or family of such narratives, which is even hegemonic in some parts of the academy. These narratives have the effect of making the secular turn look less remarkable than it is; they in a sense ‘normalize’ or ‘naturalize’ it. I will try in the following pages to identify key features of this narration, using the key terms ‘death of God’, and ‘subtraction story’. I hope that both a picture of this kind of narrative and of the alternative that I propose will emerge. My aim is to account in particular for phase (2); that is, I want to explore the constitution in modernity of what I will call ‘closed’ or ‘horizontal’ worlds. I mean by this shapes of our ‘world’ in Heidegger’s sense which leave no place for the ‘vertical’ or ‘transcendent’, but which in one way or another close these off, render them inaccessible, or even unthinkable. This has become ‘normal’ for us. But we can bring out again how remarkable this is if we take a certain distance from it, jump back five hundred years in our western civilization (aka Latin christendom), as I indicated above. At that time, non-belief in

58

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

God was close to unthinkable for the vast majority;1 whereas today this is not at all the case. One might be tempted to say that in certain milieux the reverse has become true, that belief is unthinkable. But this exaggeration already shows up the lack of symmetry. It is truer to say that in our world a whole gamut of positions, from the most militant atheism to the most orthodox traditional theisms, passing through every possible position on the way, are represented and defended somewhere in our society. Something like the unthinkability of some of these positions can be experienced in certain milieux, but what is ruled out will vary from context to context. An atheist in the Bible belt has trouble being understood, as often (in a rather different way) do believing Christians in certain reaches of the academy. But, of course, people in each of these contexts are aware that the others exist, and that the option they can’t really credit is the default option elsewhere in the same society, whether they regard this with hostility or just perplexity. The existence of an alternative fragilizes each context, that is, makes its sense of the thinkable/unthinkable uncertain and wavering. This fragilization is then increased by the fact that great numbers of people are not firmly embedded in any such context, but are puzzled, cross-pressured, or have constituted by bricolage a sort of median position. The existence of these people raises sometimes even more acute doubts within the more assured milieux. The polar opposites can be written off as just mad or bad, as we see with the present American culture wars between ‘liberals’ and ‘fundamentalists’; but the intermediate positions can sometimes not be as easily dismissed. What I want to try is to articulate some of the worlds from within which the believing option seems strange and unjustifiable. But this articulation involves some degree of abstraction – indeed, three kinds of abstraction, with the corresponding dangers. First, what I shall really be describing is not worlds in their entirety, but ‘world structures’, aspects or features of the way experience and thought are shaped and cohere, but not the whole of which they are constituents. Additionally, I will not be describing the world of any concrete human beings. A world is something which people inhabit. It gives the shape of what they experience, feel, opine, see, and so on. The world of the cross-pressured is different from that of the assured. But what I’m doing is trying to articulate certain world-types (‘ideal types’, in a quasi-Weberian sense), which may not, will almost surely not, coincide with the totality of any real person’s world. Third, the articulation involves an intellectualization; one has to get at the connections in lived experience through ideas, and very often ideas which are not consciously available to the people concerned, unless they are forced to articulate them themselves through challenge and argument. Nevertheless, this effort I believe is very worthwhile because it enables us to see the way in which we can be held within certain world structures without being aware that there are alternatives. A ‘picture’ can ‘hold us captive’, as Wittgenstein (1958)

1

See Lucien Febvre’s The Problem of Unbelief in the Sixteenth Century (1982).

Charles Taylor

59

2

put it. And by the same token, we can gain insight into the way two people or groups can be arguing past each other, because their experience and thought is structured by two different pictures. What I want to try to lay out is world structures that are closed to transcendence. All of these arise during the slow development in Latin christendom and its successor civilization of a clear distinction between what came to be called the ‘natural’ and the ‘supernatural’, as two separate levels of reality. This kind of clear demarcation was foreign to any other civilization in history. There have always been distinctions between, for instance, the sacred and the profane, higher beings and worldly beings, and so forth, but in the ‘enchanted’ worlds that humans have inhabited in earlier times, these two kinds of reality were inextricably interwoven. The sacred was concentrated in certain times, places, acts or persons. The natural/supernatural distinction implies a great sorting out, in which the ‘natural’ becomes a level which can be described and understood on its own. This is the precondition for going the further step, and declaring this the only reality. The ‘supernatural’ can be denied only from a firm footing in the ‘natural’ as an autonomous order. So I want to look at some closed world structures (CWS), and try to draw from them some of the features of modern experience, or inability to experience the spiritual, the sacred, the transcendent. Of course, this term ‘transcendent’ makes sense most clearly within a world in which natural and supernatural are distinguished; it is what ‘goes beyond’ the natural. It would have been hard to explain this concept to a mediaeval peasant, or it would have slid quickly into other concepts (for example, the realm of God, as against that of the Saints). But we have to use some terms to discuss these issues, and they are bound to make sense in some epochs and not others. So I use one that does make sense to us. Our time is full of struggle and cross-purposes on this issue of the transcendent. We are opposed, sometimes bitterly and strongly; but we also often are speaking past each other. I’m hoping that a study of some key CWS will cast some light on the differences and also on the cross-purposes. I want to look ultimately at four, but with very unequal treatment. I will give special attention to the third in the series (in the order of their introduction, not the order of their arising). That’s because I think that it is in an important sense the most significant and also the least explored or understood. CWS 1: Here I want to introduce the structure of modern epistemology, which I am taking not only as a set of theories which have been widespread, but also at the level of a structure in my sense; that is, an underlying picture which is only partly consciously entertained, but which controls the way people think, argue, infer, make sense of things. At its most blatant this structure operates with a picture of knowing agents as individuals, who build up their understanding of the world through combining and relating, in more and more comprehensive theories, the information which they 2

‘Ein Bild hielt uns gefangen.’ Philosophical Investigations, para. 115.

60

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

take in and which is couched in inner representations, be these conceived as mental pictures (in the earlier variants) or as something like sentences held true in the more contemporary versions. Characteristic of this picture are a series of priority relations. Knowledge of the self and its states comes before knowledge of external reality and of others. The knowledge of reality as neutral fact comes before our attributing to it various ‘values’ and relevances. And, of course, knowledge of the things of ‘this world’, of the natural order, precedes any theoretical invocation of forces and realities transcendent to it. The epistemological picture, combining as it does very often with some understanding of modern science, operates frequently as a CWS. The priority relations tell us not only what is learned before what, but also what can be inferred on the basis of what. There are foundational relations. I know the world through my representations. I must grasp the world as fact before I can posit values. I must accede to the transcendent, if at all, by inference from the natural. This can operate as a CWS, because it is obvious that the inference to the transcendent is at the extreme and most fragile end of a series of inferences; it is the most epistemically questionable. And indeed, granted the lack of consensus surrounding this move, as against earlier steps in the chain (for example, to ‘other minds’), it is obviously highly problematic. Now I introduce the epistemological picture in order to bring out some features of the way CWS operate in our time, the way they are on the one hand contested and on the other maintain themselves. The contestation of the epistemological picture is a familiar theme. But referring to Heidegger and Merleau-Ponty as paradigm cases of the refutation of epistemology, we can see that this view has been comprehensively turned on its head. (1) Our grasp of the world does not consist simply of our holding inner representations of outer reality. We do hold such representations, which are perhaps best understood in contemporary terms as sentences held true. But these only make the sense that they do for us because they are thrown up in the course of an ongoing activity of coping with the world, as bodily, social and cultural beings. This coping can never be accounted for in terms of representations, but provides the background against which our representations have the sense that they do. (2) As just implied, this coping activity, and the understanding which inhabits it, is not primarily that of each of us as individuals; rather we are each inducted into the practices of coping as social ‘games’ or activities, some of which do indeed, in the later stages of development, call upon us to assume a stance as individuals. But primordially, we are part of social action. (3) In this coping, the things which we deal with are not first and foremost objects, but what Heidegger calls ‘pragmata’ – things which are the focal points of our dealings, which therefore have relevance, meaning, significance for us, not as an add-on but from their first appearance in our world. Later, we learn to stand back and consider things objectively, outside of the relevances of coping. (4) In later Heidegger these significances include some which have a higher status, structuring our whole way of life, the ensemble of our significances. In the formulation of ‘das

Charles Taylor

61

Geviert’, there are four axes to this context in which our world is set: earth and sky; human and divine. Although all those who follow something like this deconstruction of epistemology do not go along with this fourth stage, it is clear that the general thrust of these arguments is to utterly overturn the priority relations of epistemology. Things that are considered as late inferences or additions are seen to be part of our primordial predicament. There is no getting behind them, and it makes no sense to contest them. The ‘scandal of philosophy’ is not the inability to attain to certainty of the external world, but rather that this should be considered a problem, says Heidegger in Sein und Zeit. We only have knowledge as agents coping with a world, which it makes no sense to doubt since we are dealing with it. There is no priority of the neutral grasp of things over their value. There is no priority of the individual’s sense of self over the society; our most primordial identity is as a new player being inducted into an old game. Even if we don’t add the fourth stage, and consider something like the divine as part of the inescapable context of human action, the whole sense that it comes as a remote and most fragile inference or addition in a long chain is totally undercut by this overturning of epistemology. The new outlook can be built into a new CWS, but it doesn’t offer itself as a CWS in the same direct and obvious way as the epistemological picture did. We can learn something general about the way CWS operate, suffer attack and defend themselves from this example. From within itself, the epistemological picture seems unproblematic. It comes across as an obvious discovery we make when we reflect on our perception and acquisition of knowledge. All the great foundational figures – Descartes, Locke, Hume – claimed to be just saying what was obvious once one examined experience itself reflectively. Seen from the deconstruction, this is a most massive self-blindness. Rather what happened is that experience was carved into shape by a powerful theory which posited the primacy of the individual, the neutral, the intra-mental as the locus of certainty. What was driving this theory? Certain ‘values’, virtues, excellences: those of the independent, disengaged subject, reflexively controlling his own thought-processes, ‘self-responsibly’ in Husserl’s famous phrase. There is an ethic here, of independence, self-control, self-responsibility, of a disengagement which brings control; a stance which requires courage, the refusal of the easy comforts of conformity to authority, of the consolations of an enchanted world, of the surrender to the promptings of the senses. The entire picture, shot through with ‘values’, which is meant to emerge out of the careful, objective, presuppositionless scrutiny, is now presented as having been there from the beginning, driving the whole process of ‘discovery’. Once you shift to the deconstructing point of view, the CWS can no longer operate as such. It seemed to offer a neutral point of view from which we could problematize certain values – for example, ‘transcendent’ ones – more than others. But now it appears that it is itself driven by its own set of values. Its ‘neutrality’ appears bogus. Put another way, the CWS in a sense ‘naturalizes’ a certain view on things. This is just the way things are, and once you look at experience, without preconceptions, this

62

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

is what appears. ‘Natural’ is opposed here to something like ‘socially constructed’; and from the deconstructing point of view, you have to tell a quite different story of the rise of this outlook. It isn’t just that one day people looked without blinkers and discovered epistemology; rather this is the way things could be made to look from within a new historical formation of human identity, that of the disengaged, objectifying subject. The process involves a re-invention, a recreation of human identity, along with great changes in society and social practices. There is no simple stepping out of an earlier such identity into the pure light of bare nature. It is a feature of our contemporary CWS that they are understood by those who inhabit them in this naturalizing way. It also follows from this that those who inhabit them see no alternative, except the return to earlier myth or illusion. That’s what gives them their strength. People within the redoubt fight as it were to the last, and feeblest, argument, because they cannot envisage surrender except as regression. The naturalizing emerges in a kind of narration they proffer of their genesis, which I want to call a ‘subtraction story’. But to develop this idea I should move to another, richer CWS, or constellation of CWS. It is what people often gesture at with an expression like the ‘death of God’. Of course, this expression is used in an uncountable range of ways; I can’t be faithful to all of them, nor even will I be simply following the originator of the phrase (though I think my version is not too far from his),3 if I say that one essential idea which this phrase captures is that conditions have arisen in the modern world in which it is no longer possible – honestly, rationally, without confusions, or fudging, or mental reservation – to believe in God. These conditions leave us nothing we can believe in beyond the human – human happiness, or potentialities, or heroism. 3 The ‘death of God’ reference is from The Gay Science, para. 125. Later on, Nietzsche says: ‘Man sieht, was eigentlich über den christlichen Gott gesiegt hat: die christliche Moralität selbst, der immer strenger genommene Begriff der Wahrhaftigkeit, die Beichtväterfeinheit des christlichen Gewissens, übersetzt und sublimiert zum wissenschaftlichen Gewissen, zur intellektuellen Sauberkeit um jeden Preis. Die Natur ansehn, als ob sie ein Beweis für die Güte und Obhut eines Gottes sei; die Geschichte interpretieren zu Ehren einer göttlichen Vernunft, als beständiges Zeugnis einer sittlichen Weltordnung und sittlicher Schlussabsichten; die eignen Erlebnisse auslegen, wie wir fromme Menschen lange genug ausgelegt haben, wie als ob alles Fügung, alles Wink, alles dem Heil der Seele zuliebe ausgedacht und geschickt sei: Das ist numehr vorbei, das hat das Gewissen gegen sich, das gilt allen feineren Gewissen als unanständig, unehrlich, als Lügnerei, Feminismus, Schwachheit, Feigheit’ – ‘One can see what it was that actually triumphed over the Christian god: Christian morality itself, the concept of truthfulness that was taken ever more rigorously; the father confessor’s refinement of the Christian conscience, translated and sublimated into a scientific conscience, into intellectual cleanliness at any price. Looking at nature as if it were proof of the goodness and care of a god; interpreting history in honour of some divine reason, as a continual testimony of a moral world order and ultimate moral purposes; interpreting one’s own experiences as pious people have long interpreted theirs, as if everything were providential, a hint, designed and ordained for the sake of the salvation of the soul – that is over now; that has conscience against it; every refined conscience considers it to be indecent, dishonest, a form of mendacity, effeminacy, weakness, cowardice.’ (Nietzsche 2001: para. 357) It will be clear later on where my interpretation agrees with Nietzsche’s.

Charles Taylor

63

What conditions? Essentially, they are of two orders: first, and most important, the deliverances of science; and then, secondarily, the shape of contemporary moral experience. To take up the first, perhaps the most powerful CWS operating today, the central idea seems to be that the whole thrust of modern science has been to establish materialism. For people who cling to this idea the second order of conditions, the contemporary moral predicament, is unnecessary or merely secondary. Science alone can explain why belief is no longer possible in the above sense. This is a view held by people on all levels, from the most sophisticated ‘We exist as material beings in a material world, all of whose phenomena are the consequences of physical relations among material entities’ (Lewontin 1997: ‘Billions and billions of demons’, 28) to the most direct and simple: Madonna’s ‘material girl, living in a material world’. Religion or spirituality involves substituting wrong and mythical explanations, explaining by ‘demons’ (Lewontin’s article again, quoting from Carl Sagan). At bottom it’s just a matter of facing the obvious truth. This doesn’t mean that moral issues don’t come into it. But they enter as accounts of why people run away from reality, why they want to go on believing illusion. They do so because it’s comforting. The real world is utterly indifferent to us, and even to a certain degree dangerous, threatening. As children, we have to see ourselves as surrounded by love and concern, or we shrivel up. But in growing up we have to learn to face the fact that this environment of concern can’t extend beyond the human sphere, and mostly doesn’t extend very far within it. However, this transition is hard. So we project a world that is providential, created by a benign God. Or at least, we see the world as meaningful in terms of the ultimate human good. The providential world is not only soothing, but it also takes the burden of evaluating things off our shoulders. The meanings of things are already given. So religion emanates from a childish lack of courage. We need to stand up like men, and face reality. Now the traditional unbelieving attack on religion since the Enlightenment contains not only this accusation of childish pusillanimity, but also an attack on religion as calling for terrible self-mutilation, actuated by pride. Human desire has to be checked, mortified. And then this mortification is often imposed on others, so that religion is the source of a terrible infliction of suffering and the visiting of severe punishment, on heretics and outsiders. This shows that the unbelieving critique of religion is more complex and many-tracked than I'm dealing with here; but on one very widespread version of this critique, the basic reason for resisting the truth is pusillanimity. Unbelief has the opposite features. The unbeliever has the courage to take up an adult stance, and face reality. He knows that human beings are on their own. But this doesn’t cause him just to cave in. On the contrary, he determines to affirm human worth, and the human good, and to work for it without false illusion or consolation. So he is counter-mortification. Moreover, he has no reason to exclude anyone as heretic; so his philanthropy is universal. Unbelief goes together with modern (exclusive) humanism.

64

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

So goes one story. The crucial idea is that the scientific–epistemic part of it is completely self-supporting. That’s something the rational mind will believe independent of any moral convictions. The moral attributions to one side or the other come when you are trying to explain why some people accept and others resist these truths. The connection between materialist science and humanist affirmation comes because you have to be a mature, courageous being to face these facts. As to why mature courage embraces benevolence, which figures here in the portrait of this humanism, the answer can simply be that left to ourselves we do want to benefit our fellow humans; or that we have developed this way culturally, and we value it, and we can keep this going if we set ourselves to it. From the believer’s perspective, all this falls out rather differently. We start with an epistemic response: the argument from modern science to all-around materialism seems quite unconvincing. Whenever this is worked out in something closer to detail, it seems full of holes. The best example today might be evolution, sociobiology, and the like. But we also see reasonings of this kind in the works of Richard Dawkins, for instance, or Daniel Dennett. So the believer returns the compliment. He casts about for an explanation why the materialist is so eager to believe very inconclusive arguments. Here the moral outlook just mentioned comes back in, but in a different role. Not that, failure to rise to which makes you unable to face the facts of materialism; but rather that, whose moral attraction, and seeming plausibility to the facts of the human moral condition, draw you to it, so that you readily grant the materialist argument from science its various leaps of faith. The whole package seems plausible, so we don’t pick too closely at the details. But how can this be? Surely, the whole package is meant to be plausible precisely because science has shown.... and so on. That’s certainly the way the package of epistemic and moral views presents itself officially; that's the official story, as it were. But the supposition here is that the official story isn’t the real one; that the real power that the package has to attract and convince lies in it as a definition of our moral predicament. This means that this ideal of the courageous acknowledger of unpalatable truths, ready to eschew all easy comfort and consolation, and who by the same token becomes capable of grasping and controlling the world, sits well with us, draws us, that we feel tempted to make it our own. And/or it means that the counter-ideals of belief, devotion, piety, can all too easily seem actuated by a still immature desire for consolation, meaning, extra-human sustenance. What seems to accredit the view of the package as epistemically driven are all the famous conversion stories, starting with post-Darwinian Victorians but continuing to our day, where people who had a strong faith early in life found that they had reluctantly, even with anguish of soul, to relinquish it because ‘Darwin has refuted the Bible’. Surely, we want to say, these people in a sense preferred the Christian outlook morally, but had to bow, with whatever degree of inner pain, to the facts. But that’s exactly what I’m resisting saying. What happened here was not that a moral outlook bowed to brute facts. Rather it gave way to another moral outlook.

Charles Taylor

65

Another model of what was higher triumphed. And much was going for this model: images of power, of untrammelled agency, of spiritual self-possession (the ‘buffered self’). On the other side, one’s childhood faith had perhaps in many respects remained childish; it was all too easy to come to see it as essentially and constitutionally so. Of course, the change was painful, because one could be deeply attached to this childhood faith, not just as part of one’s past, but also to what it promised. But even this pain could work for the conversion. It has been noted how many of the crop of great Victorian agnostics came from Evangelical families. They transposed the model of the strenuous, manly, philanthropic concern into the new secular key. But the very core of that model, manly self-conquest, rising above the pain of loss, now told in favour of the apostasy.4 So I am less than fully convinced by the major thrust of the ‘death of God’ account of the rise of modern secularity; its account in other words of the modern conditions of belief. What makes belief problematical, often difficult and full of doubts, is not simply ‘science’. This is not to deny that science (and even more ‘science’) has had an important place in the story; and that in a number of ways. For one thing, the universe which this science reveals is very different from the centred hierarchic cosmos which our civilization grew up within; it hardly suggests to us that humans have any kind of special place in its story, whose temporal and spatial dimensions are mind-numbing. This, and the conception of natural law by which we understand it, makes it refractory to the interventions of Providence as these were envisaged in the framework of the earlier cosmos, and the connected understanding of the biblical story. Seen in this light, ‘Darwin’ has indeed ‘refuted the Bible’. For another thing, the development of modern science has gone hand in hand with the rise of the ethic of austere, disengaged reason I invoked above. But all this still doesn't amount to an endorsement of the official story, that the present climate of unbelief in many milieux in contemporary society is a response to the strong case for materialism which science has drawn up during the last three centuries. Of course, a strong reason for my lack of conviction here is that I don’t see the case for materialism as all that strong. To state just why would take me much too far afield, and lead me away from the enquiry I want to pursue. But I acknowledge that this is a loose end in my argument which I won’t be able to tie up. I hope however that this lacuna in my case can be partly compensated for by the plausibility of the explanation I offer in place of the official account, and which sees the attraction of materialism arising not so much from the conclusions of science as from the ethic which is associated with it. But, one might object, why shouldn’t bad arguments have an important effect in history, as much if not more than good arguments? In a sense, this objection is well taken; and in a sense, therefore, the official story is also true. Since lots of people believe that they are atheists and materialists because science has shown these to

4

See for example Stefan Collini’s studies of ‘English pasts’ (1999).

66

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

be irrefutable, there is a perfectly good sense in which we can say that this is their reason. But an explanation in terms of a bad reason calls for supplementation. We need an account of why the bad reason nevertheless works. This is not necessarily so, of course, in individual cases. Individuals can just take some conclusion on authority from their milieu. Just as we laypeople take the latest report about the micro-constitution of the atom from the Sunday paper, so we may take it on authority from a Sagan or a Dawkins that Science has refuted God. But this leaves still unexplained how an authority of this kind gets constituted. What makes it the case that we laypeople, as also the scientific luminaries, get so easily sucked into invalid arguments? Why do we and they not more readily see the alternatives? My proffered account in terms of the attraction of an ethical vision is meant to answer this deeper question. I am not arguing that an account of someone’s action in terms of erroneous belief always needs supplementation. I may leave the house without an umbrella because I believe the radio forecast to be reliable, and it predicted fair weather. But the difference between this kind of case and the issue we’re dealing with here is first, that the weather, beyond the inconvenience of getting wet today, doesn’t matter to me in anything like the same way, and second, that I have no alternative access to this afternoon’s weather than the forecast. This latter is not simply true in the question of belief in God. Of course, as a layperson, I have to take on authority the findings of paleontology. But I am not similarly without resources on the issue whether what science has shown about the material world denies the existence of God, because I can also have a religious life, a sense of God and how He impinges on my existence, against which I can check the supposed claims to refutation. I want to draw the Desdemona analogy. What makes Othello a tragedy, and not just a tale of misfortune, is that we hold its protagonist culpable in his too ready belief of the evidence fabricated by Iago. He had an alternative mode of access to her innocence in Desdemona herself, if he could only have opened his heart/mind to her love and devotion. The fatal flaw in the tragic hero Othello is his inability to do this, partly induced by his outsider’s status and sudden promotion. The reason why I can’t accept the arguments that ‘science has refuted God’, without any supplement, as an explanation of the rise of unbelief is that we are on this issue like Othello, rather than the person listening to the forecast as he hesitates before the umbrella stand. We can’t just explain what we do on the basis of the information we received from external sources, without seeing what we made of the internal ones. All this doesn’t mean that a perfectly valid description of an individual’s experience might not be that he felt forced to give up a faith he cherished because the brute facts of the universe contradicted it. Because once you go this way, once you accept unbelief, then you will probably also accept the ideology that accords primacy to the external sources, which depreciates the internal ones as incompetent here, indeed, as likely sources of childish illusion. That’s how it now looks ex post

Charles Taylor

67

facto – and how it looked to Othello. But we who have seen this happen need a further account of why Desdemona’s testimony wasn’t heard. Thus, once one has taken the step into unbelief, there are overwhelming reasons why one will be induced to buy into the official, science-driven story. And because we very often make these choices under the influence of others, on whose authority we buy the official story, it is not surprising that lots of people have thought of their conversion as science-driven, even perhaps in the most dramatic form. Science seemed to show that we are nothing but a fleeting life-form on a dying star; or that the universe is nothing but decaying matter, under ever-increasing entropy, that there is thus no place for spirit or God, miracles or salvation. Something like the vision which Dostoevsky had in the museum in Basle before the Dead Christ by Hans Holbein, of the absolute finality of death, which convinced him that there must be something more, might easily have the opposite effect, of dragging you down and forcing an abandonment of your faith. But the question remains: if the arguments in fact aren’t conclusive, why do they seem so convincing, where at other times and places God’s existence just seems obvious? This is the question I’m trying to answer, and the ‘death of God’ doesn’t help me here; rather it blocks the way with a pseudo-solution. So my contention is that the power of materialism today comes not from the scientific ‘facts’, but has rather to be explained in terms of the power of a certain package uniting materialism with a moral outlook, the package we could call ‘atheist humanism’, or exclusive humanism. But this doesn’t bring me to the end of my search; rather, the further question arises: how in turn to explain something like the power of this package? Here’s where we might invoke the second level of the ‘death of God’ account, the one which starts from our contemporary moral predicament. The conclusion here is the same as with the argument from science, that we can no longer rationally believe in God; but the starting-point is now the ethical outlook of the modern age. Now it is true that a great deal of our political and moral life is focused on human ends: human welfare, human rights, human flourishing, equality between human beings. Indeed, our public life, in societies which are secular in a familiar modern sense, is exclusively concerned with human goods. And our age is certainly unique in human history in this respect. Now some people see no place in this kind of world for belief in God. A faith of this kind would have to make one an outsider, an enemy of this world, in unrelenting combat with it. Thus one is either thoroughly in this world, living by its premisses, and then one cannot really believe in God; or one believes, and one is in some sense living like a resident alien in modernity. Since we find ourselves more and more inducted into it, belief becomes harder and harder; the horizon of faith steadily recedes.5 Now this adversarial picture of the relation of faith to modernity is not an invention of unbelievers. It is matched and encouraged by a strand of Christian hostility to the 5 Friedrich Nietzsche, The Gay Science, para. 125, the famous passage about the madman who announces the death of God, also makes use of this horizon image.

68

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

humanist world. We have only to think of Pius IX, fulminating in his Syllabus of 1864 against all the errors of the modern world, including human rights, democracy, equality, and just about everything our contemporary Liberal state embodies. And there are other, more recent examples, among Christians as well as believers in other religions. But this convergence between fundamentalists and hard-line atheists doesn’t make their common interpretation of the relation of faith to modernity the only possible one. And it is clear that there are many people of faith who have helped to build and are now sustaining this modern humanist world, and are strongly committed to the modes of human well-being and flourishing that it has made central. Once again, the ‘death of God’ account leaps to a conclusion which is far from being warranted. It is possible to see modern humanism as the enemy of religion, just as it is possible to take science as having proved atheism. But since the conclusion is in neither case warranted, the question arises why so many people do so. And that brings me back to the central issue I’ve been raising. This moral version of the ‘death of God’ account seems plausible to many people, because they make an assumption about the rise of modernity, which helps to screen from them how complex and difficult this quest is. The assumption is what I have called ‘the view from Dover Beach’: the transition to modernity comes about through the loss of traditional beliefs and allegiances. This may be seen as coming about as a result of institutional changes, for example mobility and urbanization erode the beliefs and reference points of static rural society. Or the loss may be supposed to arise from the increasing operation of modern scientific reason. The change may be positively valued – or it may be judged a disaster by those for whom the traditional reference points were valuable, and scientific reason too narrow. But all these theories concur in describing the process: old views and loyalties are eroded. Old horizons are washed away, in Nietzsche’s image. The sea of faith recedes, following Arnold. This stanza from his Dover Beach (1979: 256, lines 21–8) captures this perspective: The Sea of Faith Was once, too, at the full, and round earth’s shore Lay like the folds of a bright girdle furled. But now I only hear Its melancholy, long, withdrawing roar, Retreating, to the breath Of the night-wind, down the vast edges drear And naked shingles of the world.

The tone here is one of regret and nostalgia. But the underlying image of eroded faith could serve just as well for an upbeat story of the progress of triumphant scientific reason. From one point of view, humanity has shed a lot of false and harmful myths. From another, it has lost touch with crucial spiritual realities. But in either case, the change is seen as a loss of belief.

Charles Taylor

69

What emerges comes about through this loss. The upbeat story cherishes the dominance of an empirical–scientific approach to knowledge claims, of individualism, negative freedom, instrumental rationality. But these come to the fore because they are what we humans ‘normally’ value, once we are no longer impeded or blinded by false or superstitious beliefs and the stultifying modes of life which accompany them. Once myth and error are dissipated, these are the only games in town. The empirical approach is the only valid way of acquiring knowledge, and this becomes evident as soon as we free ourselves from the thraldom of a false metaphysics. Increasing recourse to instrumental rationality allows us to get more and more of what we want, and we were only ever deterred from this by unfounded injunctions to limit ourselves. Individualism is the normal fruit of human self-regard absent the illusory claims of God, the Chain of Being, or the sacred order of society. In other words, we moderns behave as we do because we have ‘come to see’ that certain claims are false – or on the negative reading, because we have lost from view certain perennial truths. What this view reads out of the picture is the possibility that western modernity might be powered by its own positive visions of the good – that is, by one constellation of such visions among available others, rather than by the only viable set left after the old myths and legends have been exploded. It screens out whatever there might be of a specific moral direction to western modernity, beyond what is dictated by the general form of human life itself, once old error is shown up (or old truth forgotten). For example, people behave as individuals because that’s what they ‘naturally’ do when no longer held in by the old religions, metaphysics and customs, though this may be seen as either a glorious liberation or a purblind enmiring in egoism, depending on our perspective. What it cannot be seen as is a novel form of moral self-understanding, not definable simply by the negation of what preceded it. In terms of my discussion a few pages ago, all these accounts ‘naturalize’ the features of the modern, liberal identity. They cannot see it as one, historically constructed, understanding of human agency among others. On this ‘subtraction’ view of modernity, as what arises from the washing away of old horizons, modern humanism can only have arisen through the fading of earlier forms. It can only be conceived as coming to be through a ‘death of God’. It just follows that you can’t be fully into contemporary humanist concerns if you haven’t sloughed off the old beliefs. You can’t be fully with the modern age and still believe in God. Or alternatively, if you still believe, then you have reservations; you are at least partly, and perhaps covertly, some kind of adversary. But of course, as I have argued at length elsewhere (Taylor 1989), this is a quite inadequate account of modernity. What has got screened out is the possibility that western modernity might be sustained by its own original spiritual vision – that is, not one generated simply and inescapably out of the transition. But this possibility is in fact the reality. The logic of the subtraction story is something like this: once we slough off our concern with serving God, or attending to any other transcendent reality, what we’re left with is human good, and that is what modern societies are concerned with. But

70

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

this radically under-describes what I’m calling modern humanism. That I am left with only human concerns doesn’t tell me to take universal human welfare as my goal; nor does it tell me that freedom is important, or fulfilment, or equality. Simply being confined to human goods could just as well find expression in my concerning myself exclusively with my own material welfare, or that of my family or immediate milieu. The in fact very exigent demands of universal justice and benevolence which characterize modern humanism can’t be explained just by the subtraction of earlier goals and allegiances. The subtraction story, inadequate though it is, is deeply embedded in modern humanist consciousness. It is by no means propounded only by the more simplistic theorists. Even such a penetrating and sophisticated thinker as Paul Bénichou (1948: 226) subscribed to a version of it in his Morales du grand siècle: ‘L’humanité s’estime dès qu’elle se voit capable de reculer sa misère; elle tend à oublier, en même temps que sa détresse, l’humiliante morale par laquelle, faisant de nécessité vertu, elle condamnait la vie.’6 Modern humanism arises, in other words, because humans become capable of sloughing off the older, other-worldly ethics of asceticism. Moreover, this story is grounded in a certain view of human motivation in general, and of the well-springs of religious belief in particular. This latter is seen as the fruit of misery and the accompanying self-renunciation is ‘making a virtue of necessity’. Belief is a product of deprivation, humiliation and a lack of hope. It is the obverse of the human desire for flourishing; where we are driven by our despair at the frustration of this desire. Thus human flourishing is taken as our perennial goal, even though under eclipse in periods of misery and humiliation, and its content is taken as fairly unproblematic, once one begins to affirm it. We see here the outlines of one version of an account of modern secularity, which in its general form is widely and deeply implanted in modern humanist culture. It tends to have four connected facets: (1) the ‘death of God’ thesis that one can no longer honestly, lucidly, sincerely believe in God; (2) some ‘subtraction’ story of the rise of modern humanism; (3) a view on the original reasons for religious belief, and on their place in perennial human motivations, which grounds the subtraction story. These views vary all the way from nineteenth-century theories about primitives’ fears of the unknown, or desire to control the elements, to speculations like Freud’s, linking religion to neurosis. On many of these accounts, religion simply becomes unnecessary when technology gets to a certain level: we don’t need God any more, because we know how to get it ourselves.7 These theories are generally wildly and implausibly reductive.

6 ‘Man appreciates his own worth from the time he sees that he is able to make inroads against poverty. He tends to forget, along with his material distress, the humiliating ethics by which he condemned life, making a virtue of necessity.’ (Bénichou 1971: 251) 7 There is a more sophisticated version of this in Steve Bruce, Religion in Modern Britain (1995: 131–3).

Charles Taylor

71

They issue in (4) a take on modern secularization as mainly a recession of religion in the face of science, technology and rationality. As against the nineteenth century, when thinkers like Comte confidently predicted the supersession of religion by science, as did Renan: ‘il viendra un jour où l'humanité ne croira plus, mais où elle saura; un jour où elle saura le monde métaphysique et moral, comme elle sait déjà le monde physique’8 (quoted in Denèfle 1997: 93-4), today everybody thinks that the illusion has some future; but on the vision I'm describing here it is in for some more shrinkage. These four facets together give an idea of what modern secularization often looks like from within the humanist camp. Against this, I want to offer a rather different picture.9 In order to develop this alternative picture, I want to explore another domain of CWS, which I think is more fundamental. This is the domain in which the moral self-understanding of moderns has been forged. I would want to tell here a longish story. But in its main lines, my account centres on the development of an ascending series of attempts to establish a Christian order, of which the Reformation is a key phase. These attempts show a progressive impatience with older modes of postAxial religion in which certain collective, ritualistic forms of earlier religions existed in uneasy coexistence with the demands of individual devotion and ethical reform which came from the ‘higher’ revelations. In Latin christendom, the attempt was to recover and impose on everyone a more individually committed and Christocentric religion of devotion and action, and to repress or even abolish older, supposedly ‘magical’ or ‘superstitious’ forms of collective ritual practice. Allied with a neo-Stoic outlook, this became the charter for a series of attempts to establish new forms of social order, drawing on new disciplines (Foucault enters the story here), which helped to reduce violence and disorder and to create populations of relatively pacific and productive artisans and peasants, who were more and more induced/forced into the new forms of devotional practice and moral behaviour, be this in Protestant England, Holland, or later the American colonies, or in counterReformation France, or the Germany of the ‘Polizeistaat’. My hypothesis is that this new creation of a civilized, ‘polite’ order succeeded beyond what its first originators could have hoped for, and that this in turn led to a 8 ‘A day will come when humanity will no longer believe, but when it will know; a day when it will know the metaphysical and moral world, as it already knows the physical world.’ [eds] 9 If I can manage to tell this story properly, then we will see that there is some, phenomenal, truth to the ‘death of God’ account. A humanism has come about which can be seen, and hence lived, as exclusive. And from within this, it can indeed seem plausible that science points us towards a materialist account of spirit. The ‘death of God’ is not just an erroneous account of modern secularity on a theoretical level; it is also a way we may be tempted to interpret, and hence experience, the modern condition. It is not the explanans I am looking for, but it is a crucial part of the explanandum. In this role, I am very far from wanting to deny it.

72

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

new reading of what a Christian order might be, one which was seen more and more in ‘immanent’ terms (the polite, civilized order is the Christian order). This version of Christianity was shorn of much of its ‘transcendent’ content, and was thus open to a new departure, in which the understanding of good order (what I call the ‘modern moral order’) could be embraced outside of the original theological, Providential framework, and in certain cases even against it (as with Voltaire, Gibbon, and in another way Hume). Disbelief in God arises in close symbiosis with this belief in a moral order of rights-bearing individuals, who are destined (by God or Nature) to act for mutual benefit; an order which thus rejects the earlier honour ethic which exalted the warrior, as it also tends to occlude any transcendent horizon. We see one good formulation of this notion of order in Locke’s Second Treatise. This ideal order was not thought to be a mere human invention. Rather it was designed by God, an order in which everything coheres according to God’s purposes. Later in the eighteenth century, the same model is projected on the cosmos, in a vision of the universe as a set of perfectly interlocking parts, in which the purposes of each kind of creature mesh with those of all the others. This order sets the goal for our constructive activity, in so far as it lies within our power to upset it, or realize it. Of course, when we look at the whole, we see how much the order is already realized; but when we cast our eye on human affairs, we see how much we have deviated from it and upset it; it becomes the norm to which we should strive to return. This order was thought to be evident in the nature of things. Of course, if we consult revelation we shall also find the demand formulated there that we abide by it. But reason alone can tell us God’s purposes. Living things, including ourselves, strive to preserve themselves. This is God’s doing. God having made Man, and planted in him, as in all other Animals, a strong desire of Self-preservation, and furnished the World with things fit for Food and Rayment and other Necessaries of Life, Subservient to his design, that Man should live and abide for some time upon the Face of the Earth, and not that so curious and wonderful a piece of Workmanship by its own Negligence, or want of Necessaries, should perish again …God . . . spoke to him, (that is) directed him by his Senses and Reason, …to the use of those things, which were serviceable for his Subsistence, and given him as means of his Preservation. … For the desire, strong desire of Preserving his Life and Being having been Planted in him, as a Principle of Action by God himself, Reason, which was the Voice of God in him, could not but teach him and assure him, that pursuing that natural Inclination he had to preserve his Being, he followed the Will of his Maker. (Locke 1698: I.86)

Being endowed with reason, we see that not only our lives but that of all humans are to be preserved. And in addition, God made us sociable beings. So that ‘every one as he is bound to preserve himself, and not quit his Station wilfully; so by the like reason when his Preservation comes not in competition, ought he, as much as he can, to preserve the rest of Mankind’ (Locke 1698: II.6; see also II.135 and 2000 para. 116).

Charles Taylor

73

Similarly Locke reasons that God gave us our powers of reason and discipline so that we could most effectively go about the business of preserving ourselves. It follows that we ought to be ‘Industrious and Rational’ (1698: II. 26). The ethic of discipline and improvement is itself a requirement of the natural order that God had designed. The imposition of order by human will is itself called for by his scheme. We can see in Locke’s formulation how much he sees mutual service in terms of profitable exchange. ‘Economic’ (that is, ordered, peaceful, productive) activity has become the model for human behaviour, and the key for harmonious coexistence. In contrast to the theories of hierarchical complementarity, we meet in a zone of concord and mutual service, not to the extent that we transcend our ordinary goals and purposes, but on the contrary, in the process of carrying them out according to God’s design. This understanding of order has profoundly shaped the forms of social imaginary which dominate in the modern West: the market economy, the public sphere, the sovereign ‘people’. This is the key entry point to modern secularity. Within this somewhat stripped down notion of Providence and divinely sanctioned order, one which made ordinary human flourishing so central, it became more and more conceivable to slide towards forms of deism, and ultimately even atheist humanism. The order which was first seen as providential could be then located in ‘Nature’ (this was not a big step, since God created Nature), and then later further relocated as one of the effects of ‘civilization’. As such it becomes connected with narratives of its genesis in history, out of barbarism and religion.10 ‘Polite’ society involves the evolution out of earlier phases in which war was the paramount activity to a mode of life in which commerce and production are the most valued activities. The economic dimension assumes crucial importance. At the same time, it requires the evolution of religious forms that accept this paramountcy of this kind of order in society. Seen from this perspective, religion could be portrayed as a threat to this order. We see this in the critique offered by Gibbon and Hume, for instance. Key terms of opprobrium were: ‘superstition’, by which was meant continuing belief in an enchanted world, the kind of thing which modern Reform Christianity had left behind it; ‘fanaticism’, by which was meant the invocation of religion to justify violations of the modern moral order, be they persecutions, or any other type of irrational, counterproductive behaviour; and ‘enthusiasm’, by which was meant the claim to some kind of special revelation, whereby one could once more challenge the norms of the modern order. One might say that ‘superstition’ was the speciality of Catholics and ‘enthusiasm’ of extreme Protestant sects; but ‘fanaticism’ was a sin of which both were capable. The rooting of the Enlightened critique in this modern idea of moral order can be seen again if one looks at the two lists of virtues which Hume provides in the 10 I have drawn on the very interesting discussion of John Pocock in his Barbarism and Religion, 1999.

74

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Enquiries: those he considers properly virtues and the ‘monkish’ ones for which he has no use (see especially Hume 1998). We can see how this understanding of civilized order and ‘polite’ society could function as a CWS, if not excluding all religion at least ruling out as unacceptable ‘fanatical’ forms of it. Ensconced within this understanding of order, and situated in the narratives of its genesis, certain other forms of life appear as ‘barbarian’, and (at least certain forms of) religion as unacceptable. Here we have one of the most powerful CWS in modern history. Religion was to be severely limited, even in some versions banned, because it ran against the natural order itself. From within the acceptance of this order as the end of history, nothing could seem more obvious and secure, even if this could also accommodate milder positions which espoused deism, or some carefully controlled and parsimoniously dosed religion. This is a very widespread CWS in our time, except that it has been radicalized to marginalize the intermediate positions available in the eighteenth century, like Voltairean deism. And we can also see how this CWS exists in a kind of relation of mutual support and symbiosis with the others evoked above. The modern conception of social order, starting with individuals, reinforces and is reinforced by the primacy of the ego in epistemology. The stance of disengaged reason is also essential to the range of disciplines by which a social reality was built in which the norms of the order – disciplined and productive individuals whose activity tends to mutual benefit – can seem a plausible description of ‘human nature’. For from within this perspective the modern moral order is fully ‘naturalized’. It is the way humans are, and were meant to be. Indeed, disengaged scientific understanding, the highest ideal of epistemology, is one of the achievements of ‘civilization’. At the same time, the narrative of the emergence of polite civilization confers the status of adulthood on those who inhabit it, in relation to the immaturity of barbarians and the superstitious, or enthusiastic, or fanatic. It therefore helps to anchor the various CWS of the ‘death of God’ and, indeed, gives its full weight to the moral superiority of adulthood from which the ‘refutation’ of religion by science draws much of its strength. But it was also this CWS of polite civilization which inspired the most bitter controversies. Because this understanding of order was and is hotly contested; and this from a host of directions. Some saw it as insufficiently inspiring and uplifting; others as poisoned by forms of discipline which repress and crush the spontaneous or the emotional in us; still others as rejecting true human sympathy and generosity in condemning ‘enthusiasm’. But others again rejected it because it turned its back on violence, and hence heroism, and hence greatness; because it levelled us all in a demeaning equality. We find some of this latter kind of reaction in Tocqueville, for instance; but most famously in Nietzsche. As this latter name reminds us, the remarkable thing about this wave of protests, which begins in the latter half of the eighteenth century, is that they each can be taken in more than one direction. The sense of the moral order as unliveable and reductive could either lead back to a more full-hearted religion (for example, Wesley, the

Charles Taylor

75

Pietists), or it could lead beyond to modes of unbelieving Romanticism. Similarly, the ‘tragic’ dimension could be invoked for a return to a real sense of human sin; or it could justify a rejection of Christianity as the original historical source of modern morality, the trail blazed by Nietzsche. Again, dissatisfactions with existing forms could lead to more radical and utopian versions of order, as we see with Jacobinism, later communism and Marx; or it could justify abandoning it, as with the Catholic Reaction after 1815; or again, in a quite different way, with Nietzsche. So while the modern ideal of moral order can be the centre of one of the most influential CWS of modern society, the attempts to criticize it, to denounce its self‘naturalization’, can also be a source of new and more profound CWS. After all, the source whence the expression ‘death of God’ flows into general circulation is The Gay Science. Modern culture is characterized by what we could call the ‘nova effect’, the multiplication of more and more spiritual and anti-spiritual positions. This multiplicity further fragilizes any of the positions it contains. There is no longer any clear, unambiguous way of drawing the main issue. But a crucial reference point in this swirling multiplicity is the modern idea of order; in the sense that our stance to that is an important defining characteristic of our position, as much as our stance, positive or negative, on transcendence. The dimension in which interesting new positions have arisen is that which combines severe criticism of the order with a rejection of the transcendent. This is where we find what we might call the ‘immanent Counter-Enlightenment’, following Nietzsche (see Taylor 2000), as well as new ways of invoking paganism against Christianity. This is as old as the Enlightenment in one sense: Gibbon clearly had some sympathy for what he saw as the sceptical, very unfanatical ruling class of Rome, puzzled by the rush to martyrdom of this obscure sect of Christians; Mill spoke of ‘pagan self-assertion’; Peter Gay (1977) has even described the Enlightenment as a kind of ‘modern paganism’. But we find more recently attempts to rehabilitate precisely what was suppressed by monotheism. There is a discourse of ‘polytheism’ (Calasso, Spinosa), which profoundly rejects the notion of a single, dominant moral code, an essential feature of the modern moral order. One can even hope to erect a novel CWS on this basis. Among these new forms, Heidegger deserves a mention. I said above that he is one of those who have contributed to undoing not only the CWS of epistemology, but also that of scientism and the belief that ‘science has shown’ that there is no God. He even has a place for ‘the gods’ in some sense in his notion of das Geviert. And yet there seems to be a rejection of the Christian God here; or at least some unwillingness to allow that the Christian God can ever escape the dead end of ontotheology: ‘auch der Gott, wenn er ist, ist ein Seiender.’11 I have been trying to explore the modern landscape of belief/unbelief, in the main by laying out some of the principal world structures which occult or blank out the transcendent. The main intellectual struggle around belief and unbelief turns on the 11 (‘The god also is, when he is, a being.’) Quoted in Jean-Luc Marion, Dieu sans l’être, 1991a: 105. I have found Marion’s discussion of this issue extremely enlightening.

76

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

validity/invalidity of these CWS. It is clear that modern society generates these, but not in any consistent fashion. Some of them can define our horizon only through our rejecting others. Many of them have already shown that they are grounded on a false and over-hasty naturalization. The crucial question at stake in the debate is, are they all similarly invalid? It may be beyond the reach of any single set of arguments to show this. And even if it were determined, it wouldn’t by itself decide the question whether there is a God or not, whether there is transcendence. But it could open this issue for a more active and fruitful search.12

Further Reading Berger, P.L., The Sacred Canopy: Elements of a Sociological Theory of Religion, New York: Doubleday, 1969 Bruce, S., God is Dead: Secularization in the West, Oxford: Blackwell, 2002 Heidegger, M., Being and Time, trans J. Macquarrie and E. Robinson, Oxford: Blackwell, 1962 Taylor, C., ‘Overcoming epistemology’, in his Philosophical Arguments, Cambridge, MA, and London: Harvard University Press, 1995, 1–19 Wittgenstein, L., Philosophical Investigations, trans. G.E.M. Anscombe, Oxford: Blackwell, 1958

12 An earlier version of this paper, entitled ‘Closed world structures’, appeared in Mark A. Wrathall (ed.), Religion After Metaphysics, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003.

Chapter 4

Rational Religious Faith and Kant’s Transcendental Boundaries Chris L. Firestone

Introduction The traditional approach to interpreting Immanuel Kant understands his philosophy to put a debilitating boundary line between knowledge and faith. So complete is this separation in the Critique of Pure Reason that a realist religious faith is thought to lack any meaningful grounds in reason whatsoever.1 According to the traditional approach, faith is effectively dead on arrival in Kant’s critical philosophy. Knowledge and understanding are built on the firm foundation of the phenomenal realm; theology and speculation are built on the shifting sands of the noumenal realm. Discursive human reasoning is capable of pursuing truth only via facts about nature, not via faith in supersensible things. Theology, under traditional Kantian strictures, can find no sure footing in either the sensible or the supersensible. God is part of the noumenal realm, and humans (including theologians) are part of the phenomenal realm, and thus humans cannot think or say anything intelligible about God. The gap is too big, too deep, and the bridge that would be required to traverse such a gap is simply too immense for reason to fathom. In fact, the gap is impossible to bridge. References to God in Kant’s philosophy, if that philosophy is to be consistent, are taken merely to be references to an idea or postulate – an intellectual fiction good for the moral life of the one entertaining the idea, but nothing more. In the light of traditional approaches to Kant, theologians have limited options. They can in good conscience choose from among atheism, agnosticism, non-realism and deism. Although it is true that God cannot be an object of knowledge for Kant in the sense that no intuition is synthetically sufficient to the concept of God, the knowledge/ faith dichotomy, contrary to what traditional interpreters consistently portray, is not exhaustive of the possible grounds for theology in Kant’s philosophy. Work on Kant over the last forty years has suggested that traditional interpreters have misjudged the value of the transcendental dimension of Kant’s philosophy, and, by extension, undervalued the potential for Kant’s philosophy of religion to establish rational 1 Initial citations of Kant’s writings contain the full title of the relevant work. Subsequent citations adopt standard abbreviated forms. For example, the Critique of Pure Reason is cited as the first Critique, the Critique of Judgement is cited as the third Critique, and Religion within the Boundaries of Mere Reason is cited as Religion.

78

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

grounds for religious faith. Traditional interpreters limit the contribution of Kant’s philosophy of religion to his critical philosophy either by directing its implications narrowly towards the institution of moral non-realism or by removing God from the discussion altogether, identifying Kant’s religious faith with Enlightenment deism. Rarely noted, however, is the fact that properly critical concepts such as space and time, the twelve categories, pure (as opposed to empirical) cognition, freedom, the moral law, purposiveness and aesthetics are, in Kant’s estimation, significant contributors to human understanding, and crucial features in the determination of what we can know about the transcendental nature of reason and what we must believe about the world if it is to make sense. The difficulty with understanding the transcendental contribution of Kant’s philosophy to theology is that Kant’s estimation of these matters developed over time. Our understanding of how they relate critically to one another likewise requires that we take the time to consider in some measure the fullness of Kant’s arguments. Reason critically analysed is reason in transition. When considering the full counsel of Kant’s writings on religion and theology, what we recognize to be true prima facie of reason is that, for Kant, its transcendental boundaries are multi-dimensional. Moving from the question, ‘What can I know?’, to the question of, ‘What ought I to do?’, is transcendentally equivalent to moving away from the forms of intuition and conception that separate the known and the unknown to freedom and the moral law as the transcendental constituents of right action. Kant sets up the additional question, at the outset of the Critique of Judgement, of whether or not a second transition is needed to answer the question of hope satisfactorily in light of the problems inherent in the fact–value divide. To understand Kant’s critical excavation of the transcendental bounds of reason as anything like a completed process, what Kant seems to indicate to his readers is that they must go beyond theoretical and moral philosophy to considerations of teleology, aesthetics, poetics and religion. Only in this way can we understand the final intellectual frontier of metaphysics on Kant’s critical terms. Such an understanding of Kant’s project, I suggest, is the only way to make a smooth transition from the critical analysis of knowledge and duty to an equally critical answer to the question of hope. The trajectory of this line of reasoning will ultimately lead to my claim that Kant’s critical excavations of the transcendental boundaries of reason reach their crescendo in his classic text on religion, Religion within the Boundaries of Mere Reason. This is not a claim that I can defend here, for it would require more space than the pages allotted to me.2 For this present essay, I would like to defend a related but more modest claim, namely that a movement is currently underway away from the theologically pessimistic understanding of Kant on religion and theology (what I have termed ‘the traditional interpretation’), and towards a more theologically affirming understanding. In support of this claim, I will point to recent work on Kant and present five motifs that make up the seminal 2 The claim is, however, defended at length in a book I am presently preparing for the Ashgate series on ‘Theology at the Transcendental Bounds of Reason’.

Chris L. Firestone

79

features of this movement. I will briefly sketch some of the arguments for these motifs and present them as having significant value to theologians concerned with understanding the resources for theology at the transcendental boundaries of reason. The Current Situation in Kant-studies Over the last two centuries, much work has gone into the process of criticizing, rejecting, transcending or otherwise coming to terms with Kant’s philosophical strictures on religion and theology. Comparatively little work, however, has been done to advance our understanding of the transcendental grounds for religion and theology as they are found in what Kant calls ‘rational religious faith’. In Kant’s Moral Religion (1970: 1), Allen Wood writes, ‘Much careful and fruitful labor has been devoted to the analysis of the subtle argumentation of Kant’s epistemology and moral philosophy; but his philosophical outlook as a whole, his view of the world and man’s place in it, is often grotesquely caricatured’. Wood then challenges the traditional Kant establishment to do more: ‘there is an area of Kant’s philosophical thought – itself badly neglected by responsible scholarship – which though no less demanding on the reader than most of his writing, does give us a more or less direct access to Kant’s outlook as a whole. … This area of thought is Kant’s investigation of rational religious faith.’ (Wood 1970: 1–2) Since Wood’s call for more responsible scholarship, numerous interpreters have stepped forward with insights (and many with full-fledged interpretations) unpacking Kant’s notion of rational religious faith and what they take to be its positive implications for contemporary discussions of religion and theology. I won’t take the time here to recount all the many interpretations that have contributed to this movement; suffice it to say that a detailed accounting of these interpretations is given in the ‘Editor’s Introduction’ to Kant and the New Philosophy of Religion (Firestone and Palmquist 2006: 1–39). What I hope to do here instead is put this movement into historical context and break down some of its major themes and fundamental components. Scanning through the literature over the last one hundred years, it would appear that there are as many interpretations of Kant’s significance for religion and theology as there are affirmative interpreters of Kant. This has created a conflict of interpretations in the literature that has splintered the dissemination of Kant’s work and made it difficult to discern the shape of the whole of his philosophy. The theologically pessimistic view of Kant gains currency from the fact that, though always under attack from what seem to be overwhelming forces, the conceptual territory it occupies is never overrun and inhabited because there has never been a unified, theologically affirmative force capable of replacing the power and influence of the traditional regime.3 3 The story goes something like this: one interpreter makes convincing arguments against the traditional approach to Kant and forwards a new interpretation of Kant meant to supplant the worn out standard. Opponents to that interpretation then surface out of the

80

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Internal disagreements of the past have made it appear as though there is no single, identifiable version of Kant’s philosophy of religion ready-made to overcome the traditional one and few prospects of there ever being one. Even though theologically affirmative approaches represent the growing majority of Kant interpretations, these interpretations are not necessarily compatible with the doctrinal interests of theology and not always friendly to one another. It is the conflict of interpretations that, at this point in time, seems to be the principal impasse in the way of a more welcoming reception of Kant in theological circles. This problem, however, is now showing signs of finally being overcome. While disagreements and family squabbles still persist, what has become increasingly clear is that motifs are beginning to emerge within the affirmative camp of Kant interpreters that provide guidelines for interpreting Kant on which virtually all within this camp can agree. There is a critical mass of interpreters beginning to gather in various research groups throughout the Englishspeaking academy developing research programmes and projects (including seminars and conferences) based on these affirmative motifs.4 Fuelling this development is an emerging consensus that, in the context of these motifs, Kant’s philosophy of religion does provide affirmative grounds for theology. These affirmative grounds are not just additions to the formal components of Kant’s theoretical or practical philosophy, but transcendental grounds for an existentially robust faith in God rooted in the question of hope. A realist faith in God is now being seen by many as not only compatible with the later developments in Kant’s thinking on rational religious faith, but also the inescapable entailment of Kant’s entire approach to the philosophy of religion. The remainder of this essay is an attempt to unpack some of the most important motifs within this emerging consensus. I will outline four of them. It should be noted that these motifs are matters of Kant interpretation rather than maxims for the discipline of theology. As we will see, however, there is overlap between the two fields, and it is by way of this overlap that Christian theology and Kantian traditional camp. Rather than a debate ensuing between theological and a-theological interpreters, other theologically affirmative interpreters join forces with a-theological interpreters to demonstrate the weaknesses of the proposed interpretation. What ends up happening is that new interpretations proliferate, never providing a unified alternative to the traditional standard. The tradition stands not because of its exegetical or explanatory merit, but because it is unified and undaunted, and cannot easily be synthesized with the many theologically affirmative accounts of Kant’s philosophy in the literature. The problem, of course, is that the success and staying power of the traditional interpretation has had an adverse impact on conventional understandings of Kant’s philosophy of religion and the theological reception of Kant’s philosophy based on them. 4 As this essay is being prepared to go to print, I am aware of at least two working groups and a major conference devoted to theologically affirmative interpretations of Kant’s philosophy of religion. A portion of this essay was read as a paper presentation for a session sponsored by the Evangelical Philosophical Society at the American Academy of Religion Annual Conference (2005). The session was entitled, ‘What Can Christian Theologians Learn from Kant?’ The Society of Christian Philosophers devoted an entire conference to this topic in May of 2006.

Chris L. Firestone

81

philosophy are able to find common ground. I would encourage readers who are as yet undecided about the prospects of revisiting Kant to resist the temptation of dismissing too quickly the utility of some or all of these motifs. At minimum, I hope to show that there is much to be gained by engaging Kant’s work, even if at the end of the day we find his principles, for whatever reason, to be unpalatable. As a final measure meant to strengthen our resolve in giving Kant another look, I will conclude this essay by suggesting a fifth motif that, if accurate, both defuses any concern that Kant’s philosophy is fundamentally antithetical to theology and points the way forwards to a healthy relationship between the two of them. Kantian Motif Number One – Religious Faith is Necessary for Rational Stability Within Kant’s philosophical system, a deep divide exists between facts and values, one that threatens to undermine the consistency of the entire philosophical programme. The first Critique provides Kant’s transcendental account of knowledge about nature and the conditions within reason that make this knowledge possible, and the second Critique does the same with regard to freedom and the moral law as necessary conditions for the possibility of right action. Both Kant and his interpreters have noted the instability of this account of rationality given the fact–value divide that emerges when these two great spheres are considered together as driving features of a single philosophical worldview. At the outset of the third Critique, for example, Kant writes: There must, therefore, be a ground of the unity of the supersensible that lies at the basis of nature, with what the concept of freedom contains in a practical way, and although the concept of this ground neither theoretically nor practically attains to knowledge of it, and so has no peculiar realm of its own, still it renders possible the transition from the mode of thought according to the principles of the one to that according to the principles of the other (176).5

In the third Critique and the writings on religion that follow it, Kant is acutely aware of the difficulties posed by the fact–value divide and outlines a plan for their resolution. In the 1920s, Clement Webb was among the first in English-speaking Kant-studies to argue that this gap in Kant’s system requires a religious solution. It was his position that Kant makes a concerted effort to bridge this gap in his philosophy of religion. Unity in Kant’s philosophy, according to Webb, ‘was essentially unattainable by the method of Science’, and pure practical reason was little help either. Webb asserted that the essential bridge in Kant’s philosophy ‘was apprehensible by faith, or, in 5 Except in the case of the third Critique, quotations of Kant are taken from The Cambridge Edition of the Works of Immanuel Kant. For the third Critique they are taken from Meredith’s Oxford translation. I cite Kant’s writings next to the quotation using the German pagination as it appears within these editions.

82

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

other words, belonged to the sphere of Religion’ (Webb 1926: 2–3). Rather than develop third Critique resources to bridge this gap, Webb turned to Kant’s Religion text in conjunction with his moral philosophy. More recently, Ronald Green has taken up and developed this strategy. He draws a close connection between the unity of Kant’s philosophy and religious faith by characterizing the logic that supports the fact–value divide as the chief source of conflict in Kant’s philosophy. Like Webb, he describes it as principally a moral problem, characterizing it as a conflict between prudential reasoning (or moral reasoning in an employed theoretical context) and impartial reasoning (or moral reasoning in a formal practical context). Elsewhere (Firestone 1999) I have noted the exegetical weaknesses of this position, which I will not rehearse here. My point is only that the fact–value divide question drives Kant towards considerations of feeling, hope and meaning, and ultimately to a robust treatment of rational religious belief itself. Michel Despland, in his Foreword to Kant and the New Philosophy of Religion, refers to this tension and the efforts by Kant to ameliorate it with religious faith. He writes, The first and properly foundational tension [in Kant’s philosophy] is that found in the joint impact of The Critique of Pure Reason and The Critique of Practical Reason. Firm limits are set for knowledge. Noumena are distinct from phenomena. … These arguments are momentous and have understandably given rise to canonical views of the Kantian philosophy: they provide a solid and indispensable framework for all readers. (Firestone and Palmquist 2006: xii)

In the next paragraph, Despland continues, ‘Kant however moved beyond this framework, or, rather, pressed vigorously against the limits it established’. He goes on to point out recent work in French emphasizing the Critique of Judgement, Kant’s third instalment of the Critical Trilogy, as providing crucial and as yet underdeveloped resources for overcoming the potentially stifling effects of Kant’s fact–value divide. This work in French corresponds to a similar movement in the Anglo-American context emphasizing the importance of wholeness for Kant’s philosophical programme and the crucial role of the third Critique in establishing it. The third Critique, which is divided into distinct but closely related halves, presents a two-staged approach for overcoming the fact–value divide. In the first stage, feelings of beauty and sublimity spearhead Kant’s project of unifying reason. According to Kant, these feelings provide the rational resources (what he calls a sense of ‘purposiveness’) through which facts and values achieve a measure of harmony. Even though this purposiveness is felt, it is never captured by the human intellect. In the third moment of a judgement of beauty, for example, humans experience a sense of ‘purposiveness without a purpose’. This ‘aesthetic judgement’ is complemented in stage two by human reflection on meaning and purpose. The highest object of this reflection is the summum bonum or highest good. This poetic concept, however, is never constitutive of an aesthetic judgement. Instead, it is the natural byproduct of discursive reflection as rational creatures contemplate the meaning of the world in

Chris L. Firestone

83

light of the facts of experience and values inherent in the moral life. Kant calls this process ‘teleological judgement’ and reckons it to provide the appropriate launchingpad for a robust treatment of rational religious faith. In this way, the third Critique carries on with a transcendental building process meant to stabilize the relationship between facts and values and initiate a critical approach to philosophy of religion. When morality is understood formally, it is selfsufficient – that is, ought implies can. But when moral reasoning is employed in the theoretical context of actual experience, issues revolving around the transcendental account of the moral disposition of human beings and its relationship to divine directives take centre stage. In Kant’s estimation, the transcendental consideration of hope leads ineluctably to the position that radical human depravity is the natural condition of human beings. This realization becomes, for Kant, the principal challenge to the stability of reason. For this reason, the question of hope is fundamentally a religious question, and becomes the final conundrum towards which Kant’s entire philosophical programme points. John Hare (2006: 76) puts his finger on the basic issue: ‘if a person does have reverence for the moral law, then without God she is in what I call “the moral gap.” … [M]y view is that if she cannot produce a working alternative to theism in bridging this gap, her position will be unstable in just the same way Kant said Spinoza’s was. She will not be able to make consistent her beliefs about what she can do and what she should do’. Hare understands the essential core of Kant’s account of religious faith to have a three-part structure – high moral demand, human depravity and the need for divine assistance. According to Hare (1996: 7), ‘[Kant] raises the problem of the moral gap vividly, because he places the moral demand on us very high and recognizes that we are born with a natural propensity not to follow it’.6 Rational religious faith is Kant’s way of finally coming to terms with the transcendental needs of reason in a critically satisfying way. Where feeling harmonizes the fact–value divide to the satisfaction of reason empirically considered, faith does so to the satisfaction of reason morally considered. Hope regulates this harmony by requiring rational flexibility in the face of our ever-changing concepts and experiences. More could be said on this point. For my purposes here, it is important merely to note that, for Kant, religious faith plays a crucial role in the quest to excavate reason completely. In terms of motif, it is clear that, for Kant, religious faith is necessary for rational stability. Considering reason as a whole, the fact–value divide and its religious analogue human depravity become radically destabilizing features; they produce moral guilt, remove moral hope, and lead reason down the retrograde path of moral nihilism, not instability.

6 He goes on to argue that ‘[Kant’s] solution is to appeal to the possibility of assistance by God’ (Hare 1996: 38).

84

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Kantian Motif Number Two – Religious Faith is Properly Grounded on Values, not Facts Kant’s fundamental conviction is that facts, considered on their own, are always nondescript. What I mean by this is that facts don’t tell stories; they don’t tell us what they mean. Facts, for Kant, are something like statements about the world formulated when sense datum and rational concept are synthetically brought together in the judgement of reason. When reason then employs these facts discursively, they can be used to either prove or disprove a variety of metaphysical propositions. Theologians, Kant thinks, are often faced with the temptation to prove their convictions about metaphysical matters by using facts as a foundation for argumentation. Such a strategy serves as a bulwark against those who would oppose faith. The problem with these proofs, however, is that similar proofs can almost always be articulated so as to yield conclusions in direct opposition to the theologian’s claims. Kant identifies several pairs of arguments in such opposition and dubs them ‘Antinomies of Reason’. We can, argues Kant, prove that the world had a beginning in time and had no beginning in time; that every composite substance in the world consists of simple parts and does not consist of simple parts; that freedom is both a part and not a part of the causal nexus of nature; and that there is and is not an absolutely necessary being that belongs to nature (first Critique: A426–60/B454–88). Something is going wrong with reason when it presses itself into these kinds of contradictions. Rather than continuing to marshal evidence on one side or the other of these debates, or seeking some grand synthesis of these positions, Kant would have us turn towards an analysis of the apparatus being employed in the arguments – what he calls ‘bare reason’. Bare reason is reason unemployed. It is the object of the transcendental question, ‘What are the necessary conditions for the possibility of experience?’ As Kant turns towards an analysis of bare reason, he finds that dogmatic theologians are usually the first to object to his findings, and, interestingly enough, they often do so by illegitimately reasoning from empirical facts to metaphysical truths. The arguments for God’s existence are Kant’s principal example. The problem, according to Kant, is that these proofs are an attempt – pardon the American football metaphor – to run a kind of theological ‘end-around’ reason. They posit an image of God supposedly rooted in indubitable reasoning about the world without first attempting to understand what trace of the image of God is manifest in human reason alone. Kant’s so-called demolition of the traditional arguments for God’s existence in the first Critique is among the most documented aspects of Kant’s thought in theological circles. What is not nearly as well documented is the argumentative context in which this demolition takes place. Kant uses his analysis of the arguments for God’s existence not as a means to dismiss theology, but to point out the shortsightedness of reason and to map out a plan for establishing theology on a more secure foundation. Admittedly, this plan is somewhat convoluted and underdeveloped within the first Critique, and, for this reason, is often overshadowed by Kant’s chastening of theology. Nevertheless, Kant is insistent that theologians do themselves no favours

Chris L. Firestone

85

by attempting to prove the existence of God. For those who favour employing the arguments for God’s existence as a primary means of support for faith, the strength and security of their faith often depends on the strength and security of these arguments. Even if an argument could be made to prove God’s existence, this would not be a good thing in Kant’s estimation. It would have at least two very negative consequences: (1) we would have to keep the details of this argument in mind lest we waver at the first of many challenges along life’s way, and (2) faith, as we typically think of it, would be dead. The ‘stepping out’ of faith would have to be replaced by a type of certainty or ‘knowledge’. Kant’s dictum, that he wants to deny knowledge to make room for faith, is a perennial matter of dispute in the world of Kant-studies. What is this faith and where is the room prepared for it by the critical philosophy? This is something like the Holy Grail for those interested in Kant’s philosophy of religion. Some think a statement denying knowledge for the sake of faith is a contradiction in terms. Peter Byrne, for example, takes the denial of knowledge to be a simultaneous denial of the possibility of faith. According to Byrne (1979: 335), ‘If one rules out knowledge of God as impossible in principle then one also rules out the possibility of faith, where this entails believing or thinking that God exists’. Most, however, think Kant’s statement makes sense, but that a requirement for understanding Kantian faith is moving beyond the first Critique. The traditional interpretation, to its credit, usually allows for moral faith, but only in a weak sense of ‘faith’. The faith that Kant made room for was merely the moral postulates of the practical philosophy. Kant’s doctrine of God, on this view, is not atheistic or deistic (as it would have to be for someone like Byrne), but instead non-realistic. The recent tide of affirmative interpretations of Kant is united in opposition to both these caricatures of Kant. Kant wants to deny the strict knowledge of all metaphysical claims in favour of a critically instantiated faith at the transcendental boundaries of reason. His philosophy makes room for a realist religious faith, but, to see exactly how, one must first understand the transcendental nature of reason and follow the development of Kant’s thinking all the way to his writings on religion. In the first Critique, it is Kant’s concern that we not get ahead of ourselves by circumventing the philosophical need for critical reflection on the nature and aptitudes of reason. Not only does reason run out of resources to prove God’s existence as it moves deeper and deeper into analytic reflection, it does so necessarily by the very nature of reason itself. For Kant, faith is a matter of the will or heart, and it is for this reason that values, and not facts, are the appropriate foundation for religious faith. The entire religious question will finally turn on this issue in Kant’s worldview. This is why Kant, in Book One of Religion, argues that humans have a radically evil disposition, and, in Book Two, that the meaningfulness of the world and our place in it is dependent on faith in the transcendental provision of God’s Son. Belief in God and God’s work on our behalf is the only way we can have moral hope, thinks Kant. No amount of empirical proof is sufficient to engender genuine religious faith. Only an irrefragable conviction in God’s high moral standards, human moral insufficiency and God’s ultimate deliverance stabilizes reason.

86

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Kantian Motif Number Three – Religious Faith is Properly Augustinian, not Pelagian One of the most common objections to Kant’s philosophy of religion is that it promotes a religion of works rather than grace. Such an interpretation is part and parcel of what many traditional interpreters take to be Kant’s own. On this reading, Kant’s Religion is thought to be best understood from the vantage-point of Kant’s moral philosophy. This strategy for reading Kant is common parlance in the halls of power in the field of Kant-studies. It presupposes that Kant’s philosophy of religion is, in other words, fundamentally Pelagian. What this means is that interpreters understand Kant’s philosophy of religion to be centred on the autonomous individual and the intrinsic power of his or her personal moral resources. Kant, on this reading, celebrates the stoic quest to live a good life – a life that at the end of the day has but the naïve hope of being found well pleasing to God. Kant’s philosophy of religion is taken to defend this moral fecundity of human persons, so much so that individual human beings can become the stoic heroes of their own stories. Numerous essays have emerged in recent years presenting an impressive catalogue of evidence and argumentation pointing out the weaknesses of this position and the real importance of divine grace and belief in divine action to the entire thrust of Kant’s philosophy of religion. In Kant and the New Philosophy of Religion, for instance, Philip Rossi points to the work of Jacqueline Mariña as a good recent example. According to Rossi’s analysis of Mariña, the Augustinian character of Kant’s account of grace contains a key element – namely, ‘an acknowledgement of the function of grace for the general orientation of the human will prior to making any specific choice’ (Rossi 2006: 114). Later, he writes, ‘Mariña’s argument against considering Kant to be a Pelagian draws attention to the universal function of grace in constituting the unconditioned moral worth of humans whereby God establishes a relation with us “before any act on our part”’ (117). Rossi takes Mariña’s account of grace to be what he terms ‘a relational’ way forwards beyond those interpretations that would see Kant’s philosophy of religion to be either Pelagian or somehow based upon arbitrary reward. Rossi’s account of grace is one of a growing number finding their way into the recent literature.7 Nathan Jacobs and I have for the past few years been working on an interpretation of Kant’s Religion that takes Kant to be moving decisively away from the moral individualism of his practical philosophy to a kind of transcendental Platonism based on logical developments in his transcendental theology between the Critique of Pure Reason and his later writings on religion.8 The exact nature of this movement 7 Recent discussions of what I am calling the Augustinian character of Kant’s thought include Jacqueline Mariña, ‘Kant on grace: a reply to his critics’ (1997), John E. Hare, ‘Augustine, Kant, and the moral gap’ (1999), David Sussman, ‘Kantian forgiveness’ (2005), and Frederick C. Beiser, ‘Moral faith and the highest good’ (2006). 8 See the companion essays by Nathan Jacobs, ‘Kant’s prototypical theology’, and Chris L. Firestone, ‘Making sense out of tradition: Theology and conflict in Kant’s philosophy of religion’ (2006).

Chris L. Firestone

87

is expressed in various places in Kant’s writings from the first Critique right through to Religion, but is particularly evident in his Lectures on Metaphysics. There, Kant appears to be presenting the case that faith is most properly associated with what he calls ‘pure cognition’. Pure cognition is the ability of reason to get something in mind or simply to have an idea at all. Once we have God in mind, we have the possibility of developing a faith in God that is both consonant with what we already know about reason and ourselves, and open to what God might have to say about himself. From this vantage point, Kant’s analysis of moral hope develops beyond simple moral individualism into a religious universalism in which a critical approach to the metaphysics behind God’s relationship to humankind can take place at the transcendental boundaries of reason. Kant’s movement away from moral individualism in his later writings is simultaneously a movement towards a more Augustinian approach. When this aspect of Kant’s thought is recognized and applied to our understanding of Religion, many of the problems pointed out by the traditional interpreters of Kant simply dissolve. Kantian Motif Number Four – Religious Faith is Properly Christian, not Generic Some readers may be surprised to learn that a robust transcendental christology resides in Kant’s philosophy of religion. I know I was when, after years of reading Kant, I first started putting all the pieces of Kant’s argument for religion together outside of the context of what traditional interpreters were saying about it, and reexamining his writings on religion with more optimistic theological lenses. Kant sows the seeds for rational religious faith in his moral philosophy, but the growth of these seeds into an actual philosophy of religion is not fully apparent until Religion. For theologically affirmative interpreters of Kant, Religion constitutes Kant’s transcendental examination of the conditions for moral hope and the true measure of all philosophies of religion that purport to be Kantian. I do not have the space to develop this point here, but I would draw the reader’s attention to two aspects of Kant’s argument in Religion that, if seriously considered, should go some way towards convincing the sceptic that Kant’s position is in a significant sense amenable to the term ‘Christian’. First of all, having made the case in Book One of Religion that human beings possess a ‘propensity’ to deviate from the moral law called ‘radical evil’, Kant provides his famous solution to this human depravity in Book Two by bringing together divine grace and a Christic figure he calls the ‘prototype of perfect humanity’. Jacobs (2006) calls this feature of the text ‘Kant’s prototypical theology’. At the apex of Kant’s philosophy of religion stands a Christ-like figure in whom we must believe if we are to have moral hope. Only by believing in the divine–human prototype of humanity or what Kant calls ‘humanity in its full moral perfection’ can we hope to overcome the depravity understood to be inherent in our being when nature and freedom are considered simultaneously. It must be remembered that, for

88

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Kant, this analysis of rational religious belief is transcendental and thus prior to experience. It is rooted in what Kant calls ‘pure cognition’ and the programmatic quest to understand the nature of the human moral disposition in light of the question of moral hope. In Book Three, Kant adds to his prototypical theology a corporate vision of moral hope where redeemed humans (that is, those adopting the prototype’s disposition as their own) band together in the form of the Church. Kant’s idea is that moral hope can only be achieved if human beings work together in order to progress towards the ideal of an ethical commonwealth or Kingdom of God. Beside this prototypical theology and the related ecclesiastical vision, we find Kant’s philosophy of religion to be amenable to the term ‘Christian’ in another significant way. In Book Four, Kant employs his previously established prototypical theology and understanding of the Church as a litmus test meant to ferret out the positive and negative features of the Christian faith. According to Kant, the positive features of Christianity, including its doctrines of the corrupt disposition, the need for a dispositional revolution, the prototype, and so on, ought to be exalted and held in esteem. Kant has a very high view of Jesus (whom he calls ‘the Teacher of the Gospel’) and the early Christian church. Although Kant’s view of Christ and the Church is purely philosophical (a position consonant with the pure tenets of his chosen vocation), together they form the basic make-up of Kant’s most robust treatment of the transcendental grounds for rational religious belief. They are also the main features of what he calls ‘New Testament Christianity’. The doctrines promoted by the ‘Christians’ of the early church are what comprise the essence of Christianity critically construed and mark it historically as the first ever universally valid religion. The doctrines essential to Christianity, Kant argues, are identical with those of rational religious faith. They make up the core of true religion and are the measure of what is peripheral to true religion. They also provide the appropriate foundation for the comparative study of religious faiths. For Kant, rational religious faith must be essentially ‘Christian’ in orientation by promoting the doctrines of rational religious faith previously mentioned, for without these essential components no faith can stabilize reason and provide human beings with a lasting hope.

Concluding Hermeneutic Postscript Kantian Motif Number Five – Religious Faith is the Appropriate Response to the Conflict of Human and Divine Perspectives To my mind, Kant’s motif of a necessary conflict of perspectives between philosophy and theology provides an epistemic framework for approaching Kant’s work that empowers theologians of all makes and models to utilize his philosophy constructively. Elsewhere, I have argued that present in Kant’s philosophy of religion is a basic understanding of the relative perspectives of philosophy and theology (Firestone 2000). According to Kant in his final publication, The Conflict of the Faculties, ‘The biblical theologian proves the existence of God on the grounds that

Chris L. Firestone

89

He spoke in the Bible, which also discusses his nature … [and] must … count on a supernatural opening of his understanding by a spirit that guides to all truth’ (7:24). When Kant writes of theology in Conflict, he understands theology to be a field of enquiry where God’s Word and Spirit are believed to constitute the standpoint of authority. In contradistinction, ‘the philosophical faculty must be free to examine in public and to evaluate with cold reason the source and content of this alleged basis of doctrine’ (7:33). When Kant writes of philosophy, he understands it to be a field of inquiry where reason and freedom constitute the standpoint of authority. If this is right, then Kant’s philosophy of religion is not the end of the discussion over what a properly Kantian philosophy of religion must look like. It is more like a statement of where Kant stood in faith given his analysis of reason in an era decisively influenced by the Gospel of Christ. The transcendental boundaries of reason are the place where this religious conflict takes place, and the location where, ultimately, faith under the Kantian rubric either stands or falls. Kantian theologians of the past have intuitively known this to be true of Kant’s philosophy, and so, in establishing the discipline of theology in response to Kant’s philosophy, have chosen to develop the grounds for theology in ways that transcend Kant. As Paul Tillich writes, ‘In my student years, there was a slogan often repeated: Understanding Kant means transcending Kant. We all try to do this.’ (Tillich 1967: 70) In this process, some theologies become farther removed from Kant than others and may not prove, at the end of the day, to be definable comfortably as Kantian theologies at all. For example, transcendental Thomism in the sense of Karl Rahner or Bernard Lonergan comes to mind. On the other hand, some theologies get so close to Kant that it is not always easy to discern on what basis they offer a theological perspective that substantively transcends the theological implications of Kant’s moral and aesthetic philosophy. Here, John Hick’s moral theology and Gordon Kaufman’s contemplative theology might be cited as examples. A theology grounded on Kant’s transcendental boundaries maintains tension between the disciplinary perspectives and yet must be firmly rooted in a top–down revelatory schema. Only in this way can it hope to engage Kant’s philosophy in conflict and compel it to do more – perhaps by becoming more consistent or offering ever more compelling answers to the perennial questions of human existence. Theology proper, according to Kant, is rooted in the faith that God has spoken and the conviction that what God has said and done, as it is written, provides a trustworthy perspective on reality. This does not mean, however, that theology provides an independent source of information about God that threatens to undo reason and the vocation of philosophy. Just as anything known is, for Kant, the product of the synthesis of intuitions and concepts, everything believed in rationally must be rooted in the moral and cognized for the sake of hope. For Kant, theology must be upheld, not because it promises religious data that cannot be gleaned from reason, but because theology promises to awaken reason and hasten the day when rational religion will reign supreme (see Firestone 2006). What Conflict provides Kant’s philosophy of religion with is a context for completing the development of a transcendental theology consonant with what reason requires and what history

90

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

demands. Rather than promoting stagnation by putting theology into a theoretical, moral, aesthetic or religious box, Kant places his philosophy of religion into the dynamic and moving environment of the university. The resulting conflict of the disciplines promotes the evolution of theology for the sake of truth, and this according to the rational stability religious faith can afford. Rational religious faith, for Kant, is rooted in the transcendental needs of reason, but is not arbitrary or nonrealistic. Instead, it is grounded in eternal moral values that, according to his analysis in Religion, must lead to faith in God’s grace and the transcendental provision for humanity of God’s perfect Son. Such is the starting-point of rational religious faith at the transcendental boundaries of reason.

Further Reading Davidovich, A., Religion as a Province of Meaning: The Kantian Foundations of Modern Theology, Minneapolis, MN: Fortress Press, 1993 Despland, M., Kant on History and Religion, Montreal: McGill-Queen’s University Press, 1973 Firestone, C.L., and Palmquist, S.R. (eds), Kant and the New Philosophy of Religion, Indianapolis, IN: Indiana University Press, 2006 Galbraith, E.C., Kant and Theology: Was Kant a Closet Theologian?,San Francisco, CA: International Scholars Publications, 1996 Hare, J.E., The Moral Gap: Kantian Ethics, Human Limits, and God’s Assistance, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1996 Michalson, Jr., G.E., Kant and the Problem of God, Oxford: Blackwell,1999 Reardon, B.M.G., Kant as Philosophical Theologian, London: Macmillan, 1988 Wood, A.W., Kant’s Moral Religion, Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1970

Chapter 5

Boundaries Crossed and Uncrossable: Physical Science, Social Science, Theology Philip Clayton

I Something there is that doesn’t love a wall, That sends the frozen-ground-swell under it, And spills the upper boulders in the sun, And makes gaps even two can pass abreast …1

Modernity was the great period of boundary-drawing. Finally having access to solid data, Galileo, Kepler and Newton were able to give increasingly reliable formulations of natural law. Possessing these laws led them and others to an increasing sense of the power of the natural scientific method. With this new-won sense of power came the obvious need for science to declare its independence from the constraints of the Christian worldview. What in the sixteenth to eighteenth centuries was played out in fundamental physics and cosmology was played out in biology in the mid–nineteenth century, and in the human sciences a few decades later. Until Darwin, researchers in anatomy, zoology and medicine could acknowledge the ordering, providential hand of God in the biosphere while engaging in their science with de facto independence. But Darwin was drawn to careful empirical research of differing reproductive success based on the adaptation of individuals and species to their environments. The evidence showed that variations which were random relative to the selection process produced the full range of phenotypical differences that we observe in nature. Not only were divine interventions not necessary to explain the data; traditional ideas of a pre-orchestrated nature actually conflicted with the biological account of the evolution of the biosphere. From this point on the biological sciences had to proceed as independent fields of enquiry. In 1888 Émile Durkheim published ‘Suicide et natalité. Étude de statistique morale’ (‘Suicide and the birth rate: A study in moral statistics’), followed in 1897 1 Robert Frost, ‘Mending Wall’, Collected Poems, Prose and Plays (1995). Subsequent extracts are from the same poem.

92

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

by his epoch-making Le Suicide, étude de sociologie. By linking data from what appeared to be two distinct areas of human experience, Durkheim sought to show that these most personal of decisions – whether to give birth, and whether to end one’s own life – were actually due to ‘distinctly social causes, or if one prefers moral causes’2. Noting that ‘birth rates constitute social facts’ (Durkheim 1994 [1888]: 130), Durkheim declared them the domain of an independent, objective area of study, which he would later dub sociologie. As Ken Morrison notes, ‘Instead of viewing birth rates as a function of some organic disposition (e.g., fertility) he demarcates them as social subject matter and this brings them under the rubric of “ruling social customs and ideas in society” … Birth rates are not, then, imposed by organic necessity as common sense would assert, but are social facts to the extent that they point to underlying practices to which individuals comply’.3 With ‘Suicide et natalité’, then, the social sciences were launched on an independent trajectory similar to physics and biology. The result of these various revolutions, it seemed, was to move humans from a position of ontological primacy, and our planet from a position of cosmological centrality. Both were replaced by the frightening immensity of infinite worlds, by a universe without a centre, and by a blind process of natural selection, ‘red in tooth and claw’, which (critics complained) left no place for the glory of God and little place for the glory of man and woman. One by one, then, in a progression that moved increasingly close to home, the major areas of study were spun off from the unified ‘medieval synthesis’ (such as it was) and began their modern existence as separate fields of enquiry, beholden to no authority outside themselves. Not only had theology lost its primacy in studies of the physical world, the biosphere and the human person, it had been banned from crossing the boundaries that constituted these new fields of study as empirical sciences. Moreover, with each new developing science the challenge for theology appeared to grow greater. Thus the unbroken regularity of Newton’s laws raised outcry because they left no place for a unique occurrence like the Resurrection – or, for that matter, for any miraculous occurrence.4 But this severely limited the hand of God, who was no longer able to act ‘with signs and miracles’ to witness to the divine power. The same response, if anything in more virulent form, arose in response to Darwin. Now not only were miraculous acts ruled out, but providential guidance became suspect and the ontological uniqueness of the human person as a soul-impregnated being was rejected. The continuity thesis of Man and Ape was just as hard to take as the demotion had been in Newton’s case. 2 Durkheim, ‘Suicide and the birth rate,’ in D. Lester (ed.), Emile Durkheim’s Le Suicide: One Hundred Years Later ([1888] 1994), 132. 3 Ken Morrison, review of Robert Alun Jones, The Development of Durkheim’s Social Realism, in Canadian Journal of Sociology Online (March–April 2000), at , visited 24 February 2005. 4 Newton himself did not accept the opposition as a consequence of his ‘natural philosophy’, but by the time of Laplace few of his followers shared his optimism in the concordance of miracles and the new physics.

Philip Clayton

93

Of course the picture is more complicated than the sketch just offered. But the basic lines of the sketch are accurate nonetheless. Gradually the dividing walls between theology and the sciences grew higher. Here, however, it was not just theology, the endangered side, that built lines of defense; science, the party generally viewed as the stronger side, also devoted great energy to the fortifications. Not only were the quasi-scientific explanations sometimes offered by theologians roundly rejected, but even distinctly non-empirical accounts, such as theistic evolution, came under fire as epistemically suspect. De facto, the scientists were following a strategy sometimes associated with the Maginot Line, famously described by Clausewitz: ‘If you entrench yourself behind strong fortifications, you compel the enemy to seek a solution elsewhere’. The only difference was, all the domains that mattered to explaining the world seemed to be located on the science side of the boundary. In one sense, then, the boundary between science and religion represented the fundamental boundary of the modern period.5 It was set already in Bacon’s famous castigation of the ‘Idols of the Theatre’: Lastly, there are idols which have immigrated into men’s minds from the various dogmas of philosophies, and also from wrong laws of demonstration. These I call Idols of the Theatre; because in my judgment all the received systems are but so many stage-plays, representing worlds of their own creation after an unreal and scenic fashion. Nor is it only of the systems now in vogue, or only of the ancient sects and philosophies, that I speak: for many more plays of the same kind may yet be composed and in like artificial manner set forth; seeing that errors the most widely different have nevertheless causes for the most part alike. … And there is yet a third class [among the Idols of the Theatre], consisting of those who out of faith and veneration mix their philosophy and theology and traditions; among whom the vanity of some has gone so far aside as to seek the origin of science among spirits and genii. (Bacon 1868: Part I, sections 41ff.)

But boundary-drawing is rarely the activity of one side alone. While science fought to preserve the sanctity of its methods, the Church fought just as hard to preserve the sanctity of its content. From Luther and Calvin to Barth and Cornelius Van Til, theologians worked to formulate their own proprietary standards and criteria, effectively protecting sacra doctrina from incursions and critiques from the other side. At its strongest, this boundary-building affirmed, with Barth, that there could be no Anknüpfungspunkt, no point of contact whatsoever, between theological proclamation and scientific reflection. Boundary-drawing and what Hans Albert (1985) has called ‘immunization strategies’ – the immunization of one’s claims from outside criticism – often go hand in hand.

5 For detailed histories of the interactions between science and religion see David C. Lindberg and Ronald L. Numbers, eds, God and Nature: Historical Essays on the Encounter between Christianity and Science (1986); idem, When Science and Christianity Meet (2003); John Hedley Brooke, Science and Religion: Some Historical Perspectives (1991); John Hedley Brooke and Geoffrey Cantor, Reconstructing Nature: The Engagement of Science and Religion (2000); and John Hedley Brooke, Of Scientists and their Gods (2001).

94

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

II I let my neighbor know beyond the hill; And on a day we meet to walk the line And set the wall between us once again. We keep the wall between us as we go. To each the boulders that have fallen to each…

If modernity was the epoch of drawing boundaries, defining areas of study and spinning off sub-disciplines, postmodernity is the epoch of transgressing these boundaries. Interestingly, the order of advance is now proceeding in exactly the opposite direction. First the clear boundaries between the human and the biological sciences came under fire, for reasons we will explore in a moment. Then the methodological distinctions between the ‘rigorous’ and the non-rigorous natural sciences were cast into question by philosophers of science and others. Finally, in recent years even the fundamental distinction between science and religion has become a matter of debate. At its most extreme, at the hands of post-structuralist thinkers like Jacques Derrida, the drawing of all boundaries whatsoever emerges as an arbitrary act. Of course, when all boundaries are transgressed, the very notion of boundary is deconstructed. It will be our task to evaluate this radical claim and, if possible, to chart a safe course between boundary-mania on one side and boundary-phobia on the other. Now there are many ways to transgress boundaries, many ways to (attempt to) undercut or detour around sharp separations. Still, there is a clear difference between transgressing boundaries and ignoring them. The latter approach, which takes the boundaries we have been surveying and defines them out of existence altogether, is in some ways the more disturbing: it deconstructs boundaries without doing the work of deconstruction. Janus-like, it wears two faces, the one claiming, in effect, that there is no science, the other that there is no (viable) religion. In its first form – which unfortunately is gaining in cultural influence in the USA today – this strategy takes all of modern science to be merely the expression of an atheistic worldview. Thus, advocates can claim, the details of scientific data and theories can be dismissed outright, because they are merely expressions of a mistaken worldview – just as, say, the intricacies of Zoroastrian cosmology can be freely dismissed by those who do not accept the fundamental dualism built into its worldview. For example, it is sometimes said that the methods and results of evolutionary biology or neuroscience simply do not touch the Christian: since Christians know that the underlying worldview is mistaken, they are not required to pay attention to scientific conclusions. In its second form, the strategy holds that science has transgressed no boundaries in dismissing religion, since metaphysics in general, and religion in particular, never was a significant (epistemic) force to begin with. All questions are scientific questions; indeed, every meaningful statement that can be made is an empirical statement. As a theory of meaning – the so-called verificationist theory – this stance has been as exhaustively falsified as any position in the history of western thought; as an anti-metaphysical stance, however, it continues to hold some

Philip Clayton

95

sway in scientific circles. Nota bene: this strategy does not transgress boundaries as much as it collapses them. Both strategies are manifestations of the same underlying move, which is a subtle (and sometimes not so subtle) form of imperialism: since the other does not exist as a genuine other, no negotiations with the other are necessary and no genuine dialogue is possible. Ironically, we now see that the ultimate transgression of boundaries is to deny that there were any boundaries to begin with: no real difference, no genuine other that one needs to understand, no opponent to battle with and vanquish. In contrast to such approaches, I shall argue that there are real boundaries to be analyzed, real contrasts to be understood, real walls to be broken down. The deeper answer to the boundaries question is to acknowledge difference – even irreconcilable and permanent difference – yet in such a way that the two halves of the difference are co-constituted by their relationship with the other. This recognition of mutual dependence colours both sides, each in its own way. With this result we reach my core thesis in this particular paper: what it means to ‘be religious’ today has everything to do with the similarity of religion and science and with the impossibility of defining (and living) religion today apart from its only-too-visible other, science, together with the myriad technologies that it has spawned, from the Nikes on our feet to the cellphones on our ears. Yet this recognition is a two-edged sword: what it is to ‘be scientific’ is also influenced by the origins of science in religion; and the burning scientific conclusions of our day continue to raise equally burning religious questions.

III There where it is we do not need the wall: He is all pine and I am apple orchard. My apple trees will never get across And eat the cones under his pines, I tell him. He only says, ‘Good fences make good neighbors’…

The triad of terms in my subtitle is significant: the renegotiation of boundaries between the physical sciences and metaphysics or theology has everything to do with recent work in the social sciences. To boil a long story6 down to a single twopart observation: it is difficult, in light of recent work in the history and sociology of science, to deny that the natural sciences are in part interpretative; post-Kuhnian philosophy of science includes an irreducibly hermeneutical dimension. But the social sciences, it appears, remain distinct from the natural sciences: while the latter are characterized by a ‘single hermeneutic’ – an interpreting agent explaining a noninterpreting world – the social sciences are characterized by a ‘double hermeneutic’ – an interpreting agent now attempts to explain the actions of ‘objects of study’ who 6 See my Explanation from Physics to Theology: An Essay in Rationality and Religion (1989), esp. chs 3 and 5.

96

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

are themselves also subjects involved in constructing their own interpretations of the world and of the experimenters themselves. As Anthony Giddens (1976: 158) notes, the social scientist faces ‘a pre-interpreted world where the creation and reproduction of meaning-frames is a very condition of that which it seeks to analyze’. For a particularly evocative and challenging example of how the boundary between natural and social sciences is first transgressed and then reinstated, consider the work of the anthropologist Clifford Geertz. Geertz’s classic The Interpretation of Cultures appears allied with Giddens’s thesis: Believing, with Max Weber, that man is an animal suspended in webs of significance he himself has spun, I take culture to be those webs, and the analysis of it to be therefore not an experimental science in search of law but an interpretive one in search of meaning … construing social expressions on their surface enigmatical. (Geertz 1973: 5)

Human cultural constructs are built up out of ‘a multiplicity of complex conceptual structures, many of them superimposed upon or knotted into one another, which are at once strange, irregular, and inexplicit, and which [the ethnographer] must contrive somehow first to grasp and then to render’ (Geertz 1973: 10). Nor is any deductive science of culture possible: ‘social actions are comments on more than themselves; . . where an interpretation comes from does not determine where it can be impelled to go’ (Geertz 1973: 23). Indeed, the very idea of abiding structures is suspect in sociology or anthropology: The view of culture, a culture, this culture, as a consensus on fundamentals – shared conceptions, shared feelings, shared values – seems hardly viable in the face of so much dispersion and disassembly; it is the faults and fissures that seem to mark out the landscape of collective selfhood. Whatever it is that defines identity in borderless capitalism and the global village it is not deep-going agreements on deep-going matters, but something more like the recurrence of familiar divisions, persisting arguments, standing threats, the notion that whatever else may happen, the order of difference must be somehow maintained. (Geertz 2000: 250)

The trouble is, the pieces of social explanations, ‘the elements concerned, the dots or the tiles, are neither compact nor homogeneous, simple nor uniform. When you look into them, their solidity dissolves, and you are left not with a catalogue of well-defined entities to be arranged and classified, a Mendelian table of natural kinds, but with a tangle of differences and similarities only half sorted out’ (Geertz 2000: 249). What holds for pieces holds for lines: ‘the line between (Moroccan) culture as a natural fact and (Moroccan) culture as a theoretical entity tends to get blurred’ (Geertz 1973: 15). This fact leads Geertz to emphasize the analogy between anthropology and art: ‘the line between mode of representation and substantive content is as undrawable in cultural analysis as it is in painting’ (Geertz 1973: 16). In short: ‘the whole point of a semiotic approach to culture is … to aid us in gaining access to the conceptual world in which our subjects live so that we can, in some extended sense of the term, converse with them’ (Geertz 1973: 24).

Philip Clayton

97

Geertz is by no means alone here: virtually all the advocates for a clear boundary between the natural and social sciences, going back to Wilhelm Dilthey, the father of interpretative social science in the late nineteenth century, have argued similarly. What comes as a shock, then, is to realize that Geertz does not in fact draw the sharp boundary that one would expect; the ‘double hermeneutic’ does not get the last word. Against the jarring backdrop of grinding expectations Geertz draws exactly the opposite conclusion: There is no reason why the conceptual structure of a cultural interpretation should be any less formulable, and thus less susceptible to explicit canons of appraisal, than that of, say, a biological observation or a physical experiment. (Geertz 1973: 24)

In this context, as in others, Geertz emphasizes the difficulty of the task of ethnography. But he grants no qualitative difference, no sharp boundary, between this intellectual task and those of the natural sciences. The social scientist may have further to go, but it is not because her task is inherently different from her colleagues in biology or physics: The meanings that symbols, the material vehicles of thought, embody are often elusive, vague, fluctuating, and convoluted, but they are, in principle, as capable of being discovered through systematic empirical investigation – especially if the people who perceive them will cooperate a little – as the atomic weight of hydrogen or the function of the adrenal glands. (Geertz 1973: 362–3)

How can this be? Hasn’t Geertz questioned the very line ‘between mode of representation and substantive content’(Geertz 1973: 16)? When the classical boundary between natural and social science, Naturwissenschaft and Geisteswissenschaft, is transgressed, we shall see, both sides are transformed, and a new paradigm for knowledge emerges. Herein lies the point of Geertz’s comments. No longer can we be satisfied with the conception of a ‘great divide’ between the natural and social sciences, as if they were two great continents standing opposed to one another: ‘one driven by the ideal of a disengaged consciousness looking out with cognitive assurance upon an absolute world of ascertainable fact, the other driven by that of an engaged self struggling uncertainly with signs and expressions to make readable sense of intentional action’ (Geertz 2000: 150). Instead, Geertz perceives a loose assemblage of differently focused, rather self-involved, and variably overlapping research communities in both the human and the natural science … an archipelago, among the islands of which, large, small and in between, the relations are complex and ramified, the possible orderings very near to endless. (Geertz 2000: 150)7

7 Interestingly, in making his case in this section Geertz draws not only on Charles Taylor and Wilhelm Dilthey, but also on the neurologist Gerald Edelman and the physicist Richard Feynman. The point is important: the case can be made from both sides; no secret hegemony of the social sciences is intended here.

98

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

What matters most here – especially for the science–religion relation, as we shall see in a moment – is the nature of this new paradigm of knowledge. According to this model, the claim to attention of any science does not depend on its grasping an object of study objectively or definitely or absolutely. Rather it rests ‘on the degree to which [the scientist] is able to clarify what goes on in [faraway] places, to reduce the puzzlement – what manner of [persons] are these? – to which unfamiliar acts emerging out of unknown backgrounds naturally give rise’ (Geertz 1973: 16). Puzzlement, and the quest to overcome puzzles – this is the common core of all ‘scientific’ work under the new model. Indeed, Geertz argues, this is what ties together the various once-dichotomized disciplines: ‘Whatever differences in method or theory have separated us, we have been alike in that: professionally obsessed with worlds elsewhere and with making them comprehensible first to ourselves’ (Geertz 2000: 83). The common quest for understanding is the anthropological foundation on which all subsequent scientific activity (of whatever kind) is built. In some sense, the scientific quest is a necessary concomitant of the quest for self: it is ‘the gaps between me and those who think differently than I’ – or, we might add, the gaps between me and the things that are different from me – that ‘define the real boundaries of the self’ (Geertz 2000: 77–8, quoting Arthur Danto). IV Before I built a wall I’d ask to know What I was walling in or walling out, And to whom I was like to give offence. Something there is that doesn’t love a wall, That wants it down…

So what does all this suggest about the religion–science relationship? The formal answer is not difficult to state: at least in the West, we are by and large in a third phase of the relationship, having moved beyond the ‘unified worldview’ stage and the Maginot Line phase, the phase of wall-building. The third phase involves the recognition of common properties; old boundaries are first transgressed and then habitually crossed, though without dissolving all difference between the two territories. As usual, of course, the devil is in the details. In the medieval synthesis there could be no tension between theology and science, or what was then called ‘natural philosophy’ (philosophia naturalis). God was the source of the natural order and its sustainer at every moment, and the principles manifested in the natural world had to be grounded in the supernatural world, in the being and nature of God. Theology was thus the queen of the sciences, and each particular area of study was one of her handmaids. The modern period, by contrast, was defined by the progressive peeling-off of individual sciences one by one from the medieval synthesis. To be a distinct natural science just was to be defined by a particular set of methods and a particular area of study – in short, by the autonomy (non-theology-dependence) of that particular science. To speak today only of a grand

Philip Clayton

99

metaphysical synthesis without acknowledging the methodological autonomy of the sciences would be to miss the significance of this irreversible history and perhaps to leave out an essential feature of the scientific study of the world. During the period of cold war between theology and the sciences, the only synthesis one could conceive was the downward reduction of the disciplines that study more complex natural entities to the disciplines that study the particles and forces that underlie and explain complex phenomena. In the cold-war period, science was literally defined by being ‘boundaried off’ from religion. One might be inclined to argue that nothing has really changed. Those who defend the doctrine of continuing detente, such as Stephen J. Gould (1999), (wrongly) advocate a stalemate between opposing powers with no common ground: science studies the natural world and religion the realm of the supernatural; science answers how-questions, religion why-questions; science is concerned with fact, religion with value; to religion is assigned (as Hume once said) the Before and the After, whereas science is responsible for explaining all that lies in between. But too much data speaks against this answer for it still to be convincing. The (verificationist) attempt to define all metaphysical questions as meaningless proved to be a dismal failure. The so-called ‘formalist’ attempts to uniquely specify the logic of scientific explanation were unable to give unique expression to a distinctive logic (see Clayton 1989: ch. 2), just as, a few decades earlier, attempts to formulate the ‘principle of demarcation’ between science and metaphysics were unable to defend an in-principle distinction between the two.8 Treatments of the rationality of science influenced by Thomas Kuhn’s The Structure of Scientific Revolutions – and their number is legion – no longer presuppose a qualitative distinction between scientific and non-scientific rationality (though it is also true that very few of these treatments actually equate the rationality of these two separate spheres of human activity). And what was once a cardinal sin – to draw clear lines of implication from mainline scientific work to some underlying metaphysical position – is now the topic of dozens of conferences and a continuous output of books by scientists, philosophers of science, philosophers of mind, theologians and others (see, for example, Clayton 2004). These developments provide good reason to doubt whether the old ‘warfare model’ still offers an adequate response to today’s situation. But if we are not still locked in our respective trenches, facing the enemy’s bayonets across a desolate no-man’s-land, what is this new situation? If science and theology cannot be definitively boundaried off one from the other, can they be identified, leaving all boundaries behind? There are a few treatments that make this suggestion, though they are generally not written by theologians.9 As I’ve already argued, it’s not possible to regain our pre-modern innocence: there can be no turning

8 Most famously, Karl Popper, The Logic of Scientific Discovery (2nd edn 1980) and Conjectures and Refutations: The Growth of Scientific Knowledge (1969). 9 See Paul Feyerabend, Against Method: Outline of an Anarchistic Theory of Knowledge (1975); Fritjov Capra, The Tao of Physics (1975).

100

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

back to an age when science did not yet exist in its present form and the only real battle was at the level of clashing worldviews. Up until now, theology has been boundaried off in two diametrically opposed ways. Theists have often claimed that theology’s uniqueness stems from the fact that it alone recognizes the self-revelation of God; hence the disciplinary integrity of theology lies in its willingness to respond to this revelation.10 Non-theists generally claim that theology is unique because it has no clearly defined object of study, with the result that – unlike the sciences but like other metaphysical systems – its very autonomy as a discipline must remain a matter of dispute. According to these opponents, whereas the sciences are concerned with real objects in the world, theology merely projects human attributes onto a non-existent object (God), a nonexistent origin (creation ex nihilo) and a non-existent future (the Second Coming for Christians, the coming of Messiah for Jews, the entrance into Paradise for Muslims). What the Geertzian perspective does for the social sciences – preserving their distinctive subject matter, yet also revealing the fundamental symmetry that ties them to the natural sciences – it can do also for theology. Geertz allows us to see beneath the two combating construals of theology, the one hostile and the other apologetic, to the features that theology shares with all areas of enquiry. The resulting analysis is important, I believe, for understanding boundaries that exist but are not inviolate. Recall that for Geertz all sciences share the feature of allowing the self to define itself, and to act, by bringing a certain order into chaos – an order that is at the same time a recognition of really existing structures that precede the self. (That some of these structures are electrons, others cells, and others institutions, languages, norms and prohibitions, represents a crucial distinction but not a dichotomy.) Each discipline is ‘an archipelago, among the islands of which, large, small and in between, the relations are complex and ramified, the possible orderings very near to endless’ (Geertz 2000: 150). Each one is part of the broader effort to reduce human puzzlement in light of what we as individual subjects encounter. The same is true for religion, indeed with a vengeance. When we struggle with the religious question, the question of the ultimate meaningfulness of the universe and of our existence within it, we find ourselves located somewhere in an archipelago of islands, with various pieces spread out before us in no particular order. The difference of this archipelago from the other ones has to do with the level of generality of the questions and the level of variability among the answers. The data with which physicists are concerned show little variation across cultures: inert gases act the same, no matter what language the laboratory workers speak. Cultural dynamics are much stronger in the social sciences: although certain human features do reappear across cultures, many social interactions are highly sensitive to cultural 10 Thomas F. Torrance, Theological Science (1969) and The Ground and Grammar of Theology (1980). Torrance’s view is derived from Karl Barth and echoed in the recent volume by Alister E. McGrath, A Scientific Theology, vol. 2: Reality (2002); see my review of this work in Theology Today, 61 (2004:121–2).

Philip Clayton

101

and historical location. (If you are not sure about this, try burping loudly at the end of a meal in different cultural contexts.) Religious questions evoke even greater variability; the differences are compounded by several orders of magnitude. Here one wonders whether there are any shared features in modes of reflection across persons and cultures. Obviously, religious or theological reflection does occur across cultures, and certain motifs (Jungian archetypes?) seem to reappear in diverse cultural contexts. But whether there is a common core to human religious beliefs and responses will remain highly contested into the foreseeable future. Certainly comparative religious studies in the last, say, four decades has done more to highlight differences than it has to reveal a common core, a philosophia perennialis common to all persons at all times. V He moves in darkness as it seems to me – Not of woods only and the shade of trees. He will not go behind his father’s saying, And he likes having thought of it so well He says again, ‘Good fences make good neighbors’.

It would be most ironic to conclude an essay on transgressing boundaries with an attempt to lay out the true and final boundaries between science and theology, and even more ironic to attempt to rebuild the rock buttresses that once supported theology’s impregnable mighty fortress. Let us ask instead, what might it mean to inhabit the territory of theology in an age when the walls of the past are more tourist destinations than functional blocks to any incursions by scientists? At this point a limitation of the metaphor we have been using emerges. The phrase ‘transgressing boundaries’ applies only to the transition phase: for many years the boundaries were inviolate, and then at some point they begin to be crossed. When a boundary is crossed for the first time, or when only a few persons manage to cross it, we say that it is transgressed. One thinks, for example, of the period when few could cross the former ‘Iron Curtain’, when the wall between East and West Berlin was all but inviolate. But when the people of East Berlin streamed to the once sacred space next to the wall on the evening of 9 November 1989; when the border guards, overwhelmed by the numbers and lacking any clear orders from higher up, chose not to enforce the old boundary; and when the people began streaming through the now opened gates into West Berlin – at that point everything changed. Fifteen years later there is still a ‘west’ and an ‘east’ in Berlin, and not all differences have disappeared. But no boundary is ‘transgressed’ when today one walks up Unter den Linden and through the Brandenburg Gate. The situation for theology is analogous. Religious questions will never be identical to scientific questions; the distinction, one assumes, is permanent. But the movements back and forth between the two areas of human experience have become increasingly common, and one may safely predict that the trend will continue.

102

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Someday, one may hope, it will be natural for scientists to encourage the pursuit of religious questions and religious belief, just as it will be natural for theologians to encourage the scientific exploration of the natural world. A clear knowledge of the differences between the two territories encourages a sense of their complementarity. Where their tasks are discrete, no competition can emerge; where they offer competing answers to similar questions, it becomes our task to adjudicate their differences in the most rational manner possible. ‘Good fences make good neighbors’. The poignancy of Frost’s poem lies in its recognition of differences that do not divide. Fences are useful because humans are generally at home in one territory or another. But since movement between territories is crucial for human intercourse and understanding, the ideal fence allows egress and ingress. In such cases the fence marks the transition from one territory to another without blocking the movement: ‘There where it is we do not need the wall: / He is all pine and I am apple orchard.’ Understanding human persons is enhanced by cooperative work between natural and social scientists; it is undercut by warfare between the two groups of scientists. Similarly, understanding our existence in the world is enhanced when all the sciences can work together with theologians and scholars of religion. A generation or two ago scholars and laypeople began massing towards the boundaries of what were then warring nations. Certainly there were casualties among the first groups to cross, and some today remain the victims of gunfire issuing from the ‘hotspots’ that still lie along the border. But by and large the days of total war are past. In numerous books and journals one can observe the dismantling of the remaining fortifications, so that in many areas of the theology–science discussion it is no longer necessary to speak of ‘transgressing boundaries’ at all. Sometimes the interactions are constructive and productive; at other times participants continue to struggle with differences of language and method that make interactions strained. But the discussion is now far enough that one can see why the remaining attempts to (re)build unscalable walls – from whichever side the effort is initiated – are doomed to eventual failure. It is not a romantic wish but a sober prediction that the resources of collaboration and cooperation will become increasingly available to inhabitants of both territories. Further Reading

Brooke, J.H., Science and Religion: Some Historical Perspectives, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1991 Clayton, P., Explanation from Physics to Theology: An Essay in Rationality and Religion, New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1989 _____ , Mind and Emergence: From Quantum to Consciousness, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004

Philip Clayton

103

Geertz, C., Available Light: Anthropological Reflections on Philosophical Topics, Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2000 Lindberg, D.C., and Numbers, R.L. (eds), God and Nature: Historical Essays on the Encounter between Christianity and Science, Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, 1986 Peacocke, A., Theology for a Scientific Age: Being and Becoming – Natural, Divine, and Human, enlarged edn, London: SCM, 1993 _____ , Paths from Science Towards God: The End of All Our Exploring, Oxford: Oneworld, 2001

This page intentionally left blank

Chapter 6

The Logos, the Body and the World: On the Phenomenological Border Graham Ward

A Necessary Prolegomenon Phenomenology practises a teleology aimed at recovering the primordial. From its earliest examinations with Husserl, phenomenology as a philosophical project that takes seriously the end of metaphysics announced by Nietzsche has been submitting intuitions and their access to intentions to further and further reductions. The work of reduction, investigating what is given in immediate intuition, is always attempting to prescribe the ultimate limit, a transcendental a priori. In The Idea of Phenomenology, Husserl’s defines this ultimate in Kantian terms; phenomenology ‘questions things [Sachen] themselves (Husserl 1999: 35). In doing so, it conceives of a transcendental ego, something of an empty space, as that which makes possible the consciousness by which intuitions are grasped. But when we arrive at The Crisis of European Sciences Husserl presents the new principle of ‘starting purely from natural worldlife, and by asking after the how of the world’s pregivenness [der Vorgegebenheit der Welt]’ (1970a: 154).1 Heidegger, indebted to Husserl’s account of the Umwelt for his own understanding of In-der-Welt-sein, then, reaches beyond phenomenology with his attempt to think the call of Being and the ontological difference. Levinas reached beyond phenomenology with his thinking of alterity and a radical exteriority in which the other (autre) and the call of its Saying ruptures all phenomenality and ontology. Merleau-Ponty (1964: 186) reached beyond phenomenology, particularly in his late work, with moves beyond immanence discerned in painting, and points to a work of the eye that opens ‘the soul to what is not soul’, intimating an invisibility beyond the visible.2 Marion, while insisting (particularly in Réduction et donation) that he does not transgress the proper boundaries of phenomenality laid down by Husserl,

1 [Die Krisis der europäischen Wissenschaften und die transzendentale Phänomenologie: Ergänzungsband Texte aus dem Nachlass 1934-1937, Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic (1993: 157)]. Marion’s concern to locate his own investigations into givenness within the phenomenological project as conceived by Husserl takes some pains to detail Husserl’s earlier musings on givenness. See especially the first three sections of Book 1 of Being Given: Toward a Phenomenology of Givenness (2002). 2 Such is the criticism of both him and Chrétien by Dominique Janicaud in Phenomenology and the ‘Theological Turn’: The French Debate (Janicaud et al.: 2000).

106

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

nevertheless makes a phenomenological reduction to a primordial givenness. This givenness is both defended and further explored in his Etant donée, developing the notion of ‘saturated phenomena’ that are in excess of either intuition or intention. Furthermore, he draws attention to a call that proceeds from such givenness. With the exception perhaps of Levinas, none of these struggles to think the limits (and beyond) of phenomenology are theological. Marion may be misguided to believe his own phenomenological work is not assuming a faith commitment, but he certainly insists that phenomenology and theology are separate enterprises. Nevertheless, it seems somewhat strange, given this history of phenomenological investigation always attempting to reach beyond itself, that Dominique Janicaud insists the ‘theological turn’ is a transgression of phenomenology’s project. For transgression is built into the very structure of the project. Furthermore, in calling phenomenology to attend once more to its former rigour within the horizons of immanence, Janicaud assumes a tight boundary establishes such horizons and nothing lies outside them. To move beyond such a horizon is to take a hermeneutical turn, that is, to name such a beyond a theological mode of transcendence. Thus is violated a fundamental axiom: ‘The phenomenologist is neutral, in the sense that he or she is open to the thing itself, without any other teleological prejudice than the ideal of rational and scientific truth.’ (Janicaud et al. 2000: 48) But there are at least two questionable presuppositions in this line of thinking: one philosophical and the other ideological. First, philosophically, it is presupposed that the phenomenological investigation is not itself hermeneutical or transcends any of the hermeneutical procedures. The second, ideologically, assumes the self-evident truth of the scientific worldview in which ‘neutral’ observers can investigate from a neutral distance the things (in the Husserlian sense of Sachen) before them. What is assumed then is the secular; that the horizons of the immanent are not themselves constituted by that which gives and transcends them. For a more rigorous neutrality, as in an agnosticism, would be unable, rationally, to decide whether an investigation into what was immanent might or might not open further conditions for the possibility of the horizon. Why should, a priori, the immanent be an end in itself, a bad infinite (in Hegel’s term)? We need to follow through these two presuppositions in a little more detail to understand what is at stake here and recognize why, as Janicaud himself seems to accept, ‘phenomenology is less a doctrine than a source of inspiration and less a school than an abundance of heresies’ – heresies issuing from ‘the contradictions in Husserl’s own oeuvre’ (Janicaud et al. 2000: 96). The question of the relationship between phenomenology and hermeneutics turns us towards an examination of intuition; and the question concerning the horizon of immanence and its possible transgression requires that we examine the belief that phenomenology conducts a philosophical investigation that is non-metaphysical.

Graham Ward

107

Intuition and Interpretation Intuition is fundamental; without it there is no phenomenological project. And all intuitions have content; indeed it is this content that reduction works upon. No intuition can, therefore, lack representation. The Sache is given in the intuition. Its intention is apperceived; grasped through the reduction. Husserl recognized the intimate relation between what we perceive and our representation of it, between our apprehension of the sensible and the meaning that adheres to it, between the noematic and the noetic. But phenomenology as a rigorous science was conceived as describing that which appears and gives itself to us; the performance of the reduction was a descriptive act rather than an interpretative one. This becomes important for the legitimacy of the ‘theological turn’ in phenomenology, for, according to Janicaud (and Derrida with respect to Levinas) the theological interprets the manifestation of the phenomenon, names it theologically (as given by God, as revelation, as the infinite other). The theologian hence ruptures, by such an interpretation, the immanent horizons of the phenomenological investigation, moving beyond the phenomenon itself. The philosophical difficulty here is how to distil the experience of the phenomenon’s appearance, its givenness to consciousness (even embodied consciousness), from its representation to consciousness. In other words, how to achieve a pure description that is free from interpretation. Both Heidegger and Wittgenstein concur that we do not simply see; we see as. Can the nature of that as ever concern simply a descriptive process? In an important essay entitled ‘Self-Interpreting Animals’, Charles Taylor begins by demonstrating how much of our experience involves descriptions that in turn compose judgements about the world (1985: 47). Things have ‘import’ for us. That is why we register and experience them, and why, in turn, that import tells us something about the kind of people we are (58). Reasoning is then ‘embedded in feeling’ (62), and concerns itself with interpretation. Language facility is also then bound up with these feelings and their interpretation. Language is constitutive of our emotional experience and interprets such experience. So, Taylor concludes, ‘interpretation plays no secondary, optional role, but is essential to human existence’ (76). Now while Taylor in no way wishes to espouse a linguistic idealism – that there is nothing out there but what language constructs; a purely immanent project indeed – it becomes impossible to distinguish between description and interpretation. Description is interpretation. For phenomenologists to maintain, as a fundamental principle, a distinction between a description of what is given to consciousness and an interpretation implies that the language of conscious representation is transparent with respect to the world it perceives. This is an inflection of the Kantian distinction (and ambiguity3) between ‘things in themselves’ and the categories that construct these things for us. What is at stake here is the positing of a primordial and neutral representation of the world, that intuition grasps. In fact, as Ricoeur (2000: 129) observes, intuition becomes the prisoner of such a primordial representation: ‘And 3

On this ambiguity see Stephen Priest, Merleau-Ponty (1998: 260–61).

108

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

if one takes intentionality to be the prisoner of representation, then one would have to say that the feelings and dispositions evoked above [the feelings and dispositions that can be qualified as religious] mark the beyond of the intentionality imprisoned by its representative limit.’ If there is no representative limit, no opening onto what is beyond representation – the feelings and dispositions that can be qualified as religious, for example – then phenomenology risks a profound nominalism. Merleau-Ponty was alert to this risk. For in accepting that the ‘elementary event is already invested with meaning’ (Merleau-Ponty 1962: 11), he distinguishes between the ‘starting point’ (which ‘admits of no philosophy other than that of nominalism’, 18) and ‘perception … understood as interpretation’ (42). Intuition is not a prisoner of representation but intimately bound to an interpretation of the world; an interpretation that must admit of other possibilities for the investment of meaning. By understanding description as interpretation one does not reduce the world to its representation, but opens it for that which escapes any one representation. The question arises with the ‘theological turn’ in phenomenology as to what the difference would be between the necessary and legitimate perception as interpretation, intention always bound up with representation, and the theological as an unnecessary and illegitimate hermeneutic. Take this observation by Jean-Louis Chrétien (2000: 150), who, while respecting that phenomenology cannot prove God’s existence, nevertheless wishes to examine religious phenomena phenomenologically: ‘The invisible before which man shows himself can range from the radical invisibility of the Spirit to the inward sacredness or power of being visible itself, like a mountain, a star, or a statue.’ The star (we will avoid the complexities of phenomenology and the aesthetics of reception) will be perceived differently and therefore as a phenomenon will belong to a different intentional field, if the one perceiving it is a contemporary astronomer or a pagan astrologist. Granting the necessary bracketing of personal convictions, to become completely transparent to oneself is impossible such that the kinds of reduction performed will nevertheless be related to sets of values and presuppositions that see that object as that kind of object. The most profound ideology is that which is most hidden, most invisible. The very possibility of an epoché that abstracts the phenomenon from its historical and cultural conditions, foundational for Husserl’s turn to examining intentional acts of consciousness, is impossible to achieve. The moon I perceive, Blake pined for and Olympias worshipped is not the same phenomenon to consciousness and so different intentional structures with respect to the noema and noematic will be given. What I am voicing here, then, is a disquiet over the assumed possibility of the phenomenologist to a ‘neutrality’; a neutrality based upon an alleged possibility of distinguishing description from interpretation. For the sake of clarity, it might be useful to distinguish between descriptive and explanatory interpretations – though since both are acts of ‘giving an account of’ no clear line can divide them. But there is a difference between my describing the appearance of a certain phenomenon in a particular way and my subsequently trying to give an account of why the phenomenon appears in that way. This is important in the borderlands of phenomenology and theology, as we will see. I may give an account of the body

Graham Ward

109

by conducting a phenomenological investigation into touch. But then to make the move from this account of the body to, say, a doctrine of the Incarnation in which Christ’s embodiment becomes the benchmark by which all forms of embodiment are measured marks a shift from a descriptive to an explanatory mode of interpretation. Phenomenology and Metaphysics Phenomenology has always found it difficult to shake off metaphysics. Its concern with that which makes an appearance appear, whether it is examined in terms of what is given to consciousness to be conscious of or whether it is examined in terms of that which gives Sachen in their self-manifestation, means phenomenology battles to define itself as neither idealism nor realism, solipsism nor positivism, purely epistemology not ontology, pure immanence not transcendence. Phenomenology throughout handles metaphysical categories and, as phenomenologists have frequently found, the work of reduction moves towards that which is irreducible. The ultimate irreducibility is figured in any number of religious or quasi-religious terms. One example will suffice. Take Merleau-Ponty’s important lecture to the Société française de philosophie in 1946 – just after the publication of The Phenomenology of Perception. He concludes the lecture on the primacy of perception, his early investigation into the transcendent within the immanent, the invisible in the visible, with a direct comparison between phenomenology and the Christian worldview: Nietzsche’s idea of the death of God is already contained in the Christian idea of the death of God. God ceases to be an external object in order to mingle with human life, and this life is not simply a return to a non-temporal conclusion. As Malebranche said, the world is unfinished. My viewpoint differs from the Christian viewpoint to the extent that the Christian believes in another side of things where the ‘renversement du pour au contre’ takes place. In my view this ‘reversal’ takes place before our eyes. And perhaps some Christians would agree that the other side of things must already be visible in the environment in which we live.4

Now this remarkable statement that begins with distinguishing phenomenology from Christianity only to reframe both projects – and surely Chenu’s theological understanding of materiality and de Lubac’s understanding of nature would concur with Merleau-Ponty’s final conclusion – was picked up in the discussion that followed. There Merleau-Ponty announces a corollary of his argument: ‘As to mystical experience, I do not do away with that either.’ (1964: 35) Indeed, he cannot 4 The Primacy of Perception (1964: 27). The reference to Nicholas Malebranche is significant. Merleau-Ponty became so fascinated with this seventeenth-century philosopher who wrote about the theological conditions for sensibility that he spent two further years working on him. For a highly interesting account of the impact of Malebranche’s theological empiricism on Merleau-Ponty see Judith Butler, ‘Merleau-Ponty and the touch of Malebranche’ (2005).

110

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

– but then this returns us exactly to the question of who a priori can decide whether with such an experience we are treating ‘the effective passage to the absolute’ (and therefore a mode of transcendence) or ‘only an illusion’ (and therefore a mode of immanence) (1964: 35)? In fact, throughout Merleau-Ponty’s work he was never quite able to tame the Catholic imagination that expressed itself in terms of the ‘incarnate subject’, the ‘metaphysical structure of the body’, the ‘pre-existent Logos [a]s the world itself’ and phenomenology’s task as revealing the ‘mystery of the world’. In his last published essay, ‘The Visible and the Invisible’, about which much has been written, Merleau-Ponty insists he is not treating ‘an absolute invisible … but the invisible of this world’ (1968: 151). In this way he distinguishes between transcendence per se (announced in Levinas’s understanding of the infinite and the wholly other) and intentional transcendence (that given to consciousness from a phenomenon exterior to that consciousness). Nevertheless, the use of religious or quasi-religious language opens the question of a politics of closure. One can admit, as Husserl does explicitly in #58 of Ideas, that absolute transcendence or the transcendence of God must be excluded from the study of phenomenology, which treats only ‘a field of pure consciousness’ (1931: 134). For God is not an object in this world; or a proper name for that matter. But if we take Gregory of Nyssa’s (1979: 333) view that ‘The term “Godhead” is significant of operation, and not of nature’, who can draw the line between absolute and intentional transcendence? Who can strictly announce that the invisible is only the invisible of this world? From the preceding analyses it would seem reductive not to allow that the phenomenological method can be employed as part of a theological analysis. I say part, for given the strictures of the approach – its examination of the manifestation of things, how they are rendered meaningful as such – the things themselves cannot be transcended; though the enigma that they pose in their manifestation can become apparent. This ‘enigma’ can open onto theological questions. I admit the theological might then be used to ‘explain’ or ‘interpret’ these phenomena and such explanations would move beyond the phenomenological project as descriptive. But my point is that the ‘enigma’ of their appearance is implicated in a demand, Marion and Chrétien would say ‘call’, for such ‘explanations’. Of course, this then opens itself up to the question of the hermeneutical circle – I am reading these phenomena in terms of the enigmatic status that they might have with a theological framework that would suspend the material in its positivist sense. But I would argue here that: (1) given phenomenology cannot divorce itself from hermeneutics (at the level of description), as we saw above, it can never extract itself from the hermeneutical circle anyway. Hopefully, the conductor of the phenomenological investigation continually keeps this circle in mind and addresses the questions such circularity demands. (2) reductions performed with respect to the particular phenomenon being investigated should provide credible analytical descriptions such that the theological account of them can be understood as a logical inference, even if such inference lies beyond phenomenology itself. (3) reduction in the phenomenological project has continually been concerned with pushing beyond the epistemological to the ontological to reveal the enigma of the world.

Graham Ward

111

A Phenomenological Analysis of Touch In what now follows I wish to undertake a phenomenological investigation into being embodied, what Merleau-Ponty would express as ‘incarnate’, through a phenomenological analysis of touch. I want to orientate this investigation with a statement made by John Damascene in his treatise De Fide Orthodoxa, when he states that sensations of the world, acts of intellection and the stirring of desire all involve ‘movements of the soul’ (John Damascene 1973: II, 11.22.46, 248). The Greek word is kinemapsuches and it is indebted to Aristotle.5 I want to suggest – contrary to all dualisms of mind and body, psyche and soma – that it is an investigation into the operations of the soul and the senses (particularly touch) that will deliver to us an understanding of the body. The soul is a subject that Aristotle claimed was one of the most difficult to investigate yet one of the most valuable entities to be investigated. Aristotle’s own analysis, in De Anima, remains important to later Christian conceptions, as Aquinas’ large commentary on the text testifies.6 In fact, the text is being revisited today by a number of contemporary moral and analytical philosophers concerned with overcoming the mind/body dualisms bequeathed by various Cartesians7 – though wrestled against vigorously, if in the end vainly, by Descartes himself. What Aristotle has to say about the soul is instructive and we shall build upon it. First of all, while there is no identity there is a profound relationship between the soul and the body such that all ‘the affections [pathai] of the soul involve the body’ (403a16);8 affections are, in an older translation, ‘enmattered’. Even intellection that might be thought to operate independently of the body does not, because to understand requires imagination and there can be no imagining without the body. As Aquinas concludes: ‘Understanding, then, it seems, does not occur where there is no body’ (Thomas Aquinas 1994: 8; ad I 403a), though later I wish to reverse the 5 Aristotle distinguished between motion, kinesis, and actuality or energeia. They were not dualistic concepts but constituted two poles of a spectrum. ‘Energeia’ was the perfection or realization of all that was potential. ‘Kinesis’ was the movement that moved all things towards their formal (in the Aristotelian sense of ‘form’) completion. The form is the ‘logos of the essence’ (Physics II.3.194b27). See L.S.A. Kosman, ‘Aristotle’s definition of motion’ (1969). 6 Commentary on Aristotle’s De Anima: St. Thomas Aquinas (Thomas Aquinas 1994). In a somewhat similar manner – though the vocabulary differs from both Aristotle and Aquinas – Maurice Merleau-Ponty has examined the way that ‘every thought known to us occurs to a flesh’. See his essay ‘The interwining – the chiasm’ in The Visible and the Invisible (1968: 146). Other Christian theologians whose reflections upon the soul took the form of commentary upon Aristotle’s De Anima include Albertus Magnus, Cajetan and Suarez. A number of French phenomenologists, after Merleau-Ponty, have also returned to Aristotle’s text – Rémi Brague and Jean-Louis Chrétien among them. 7 See Martha C. Nussbaum and Amélie Oksenberg Rorty (eds), Essays on Aristotle’s De Anima (1992) and Christopher Shields, ‘Some recent approaches to Aristotle’s De Anima’ (1993). 8 I refer throughout to Hamlyn’s translation.

112

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

direction of this thinking and suggest all understanding affects the body. Aristotle himself suggests this when he goes on to exemplify in a manner that recalls the citation from John Damascene: ‘Being angry is a particular movement of the body of such and such a kind’ (403a24, see also 408b5). For Aristotle, ‘the soul, therefore, will be the actuality of the body’ (412a16) where actuality is related to potentiality as form to matter. The soul is the body’s essential whatness. Secondly, the soul is the origin of movement where sensation, appetite and thought are each considered movements with respect to the soul (415b8).9 The body is not then self-moving and autonomous. Rather it participates in motions, engaging in them passively and actively.10 The soul as the origin of motion is both unmoved and always in motion (408b29). It is ‘unmoved’ because it is stirred into moving by objects that it recognises as desirable.11 Third, the soul is not the mind; cognitive operations take place within, and are governed by, the soul. So that throughout the treatise Aristotle refers to the soul’s actuality consisting in its possession of knowledge. It is the ‘enmattered’ soul that knows; knows in a more profound because more inclusive way than the mind alone knows. The soul’s knowledge is also the body’s knowledge. Let us pursue this line of thought because I want to suggest the body is always immersed in a field of intentions that the mind frequently only recognizes later, and that this is the fundamental level at which the body operates intersubjectively. We might speak here of the body’s knowledge, recognizing that I am not talking about knowledge as a body of facts. In Britain, increasingly, education is being reduced to just this – the impartation of information where information can be quantified as a commodity. That is simply head-knowledge; knowledge as representation. It is not irrelevant to the condition I am pursuing, but it is not identical to it. The knowledge I am speaking of is more like the knowledge a sportsperson has with respect to the position of his or her body to a ball, a bat, another competitor. It is frequently said of Tim Henman that he is too intelligent to be a great player and so often his mind rather than his instincts rules his playing. For professional experience has shown that a body that has been highly trained and disciplined in a certain sport knows of itself where it must be in order to win or perform to its very best. The knowledge I am speaking of then has much to do with performance, on the one hand, and relation on the other. Knowledge occurs within a relational process called knowing. It is an 9 Aristotle here is following Plato, who also viewed motion as properly belonging to the soul. See Phaedrus, 245c ff. See also Laws, 897, where Plato also recognizes motion as not primarily about physical forces (as in Newton), but as emotional and intellectual. It is in and through such motions that there is participation in the Forms, and therefore in the Good as the highest Form. 10 My understanding of motion in Plato, Aristotle and Christian theology in indebted to Simon Oliver’s immensely interesting study, Philosophy, God and Motion (2005). 11 ‘The “motion” of the soul is the energeia of “seeing” or “understanding” an object as significant so as then to initiate kinesis’ (Oliver 2005: 47). See also D.J. Furley, ‘Selfmovers’ (1994). As Oliver (2005: 49) recognizes, with Aristotle difference becomes the fulcrum for motion such that all bodies are caught up in matrices of interactive relations. As such, motion is ecstatic.

Graham Ward

113

active condition. Knowledge here is both an intuiting and a practising, a coming to know and a practical ‘knowing how to’ that issues from being trained in how to do it. Nobody simply knows how to cook; and to cook so that flavours and textures of foods distinctively offset each other takes practice. Knowledge is inseparable, then, from experience and socialization; it is always a ‘knowing how to’. So I might say I know Arthur Schnizler wrote a collection of short stories published in 1925 and entitled Die Frau des Richters, but what I suggest is happening is that I am actually saying I know how to use the term ‘short story’, the numbers composing a date, and recognize a name, Arthur Schnizler, with respect to authoring this work. I know how to employ three forms of speaking in a grammatical unit. I am saying no more than Wittgenstein said here, but unlike Wittgenstein I want to relate this knowing to the enmattered soul and the field of intentions that are intrinsic to intersubjective living. Knowledge becomes a performance demonstrating that one knows how to. But it is also only relational. That is, that performance takes place within the context of other performances and in response to these other performances. Knowing, then, is implicated in economies or movements of response, exchange and declaration. It is continually caught up in communicating and in the communications of others. Even when asleep the ensouled body communicates – by how it lies, turns, moans, snores or is simply still. It communicates with respect to others, in answer to others, as a declaration to others. I am not some monadic centre of my knowing and my knowledge; I am immersed in a transcorporeal exchange of knowledges in which sensing is always simultaneously sensibility. That is what I mean by a field of intentions. I am caught up in an interactive knowing that issues from micro acts of interpretation that concern what the body is in contact with and that become necessary, inevitable, because I am placed within intricate webs of communication. In a final and elliptical essay on the phenomenology of the body, Maurice MerleauPonty writes of how ‘my own body’s “invisibility” can invest the other bodies I see. Hence my body can assume segments derived from the body of another, just as my substance passes into them.’12 In this transcorporeality the ensouled body is already politicized; for its knowing is politicized – that is, its knowing only issues from that ensouled body’s being an active participant in a larger social grouping. Its knowing is always political because it is always relational.13 So much then for the manner in which the enmattered soul exists politically. How does the appetitive relate to this ontologized, and politicized, epistemology? The soul is indivisible, as Aristotle demonstrated. The indivisibility of the soul suggests that desire cannot be divorced from sensation and thought; that desire is actualized only with respect to sensation and thought. Aristotle observes that where there is ‘sense-perception, then also [there is] imagination and desire [orexis]. For where 12 ‘Eye and mind’, trans. Carleton Dallery in The Primacy of Perception (MerleauPonty 1964: 168). 13 Obviously such relational knowing is also implicated in ethics because of its continual involvement with others.

114

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

there is sense-perception, there is also both pain and pleasure, and where these are, there is of necessity also wanting [epithumia]’ (413b16). Orexis is a general word for longing in which there are three forms of desire: passion (thumia), wishing (boulesis) and wanting (epithumia).14 Aristotle views only ‘wishing’ to be associated with the rational part of the soul; passion and wanting are subrational but nevertheless associated with thinking because of the role played by the imagination (433b5). We will develop this line of thinking later. For now, what is central is that desire is not a source; it is a condition. If the condition of the soul is both the origin of motion and always in motion, this motion is related to the soul’s desiring. What is desired is actuality, the complete realization of their form in the body. All things move, for Aristotle, towards their true topos or condition in the world (Physics VIII.4). Kinesis is then related to desire (III.10.a17–20). Aristotle does not employ the term eros15 (although Plato uses epithumia to denote sexual desire), but as the notion of desiring was associated with the Christian command to love from at least the time of Origen,16 so we find in Christian theology much support for the idea of the soul 14 See Hamlyn in his edition of Aristotle’s De Anima (1993: 92). 15 It is well known that in the Nichomachean Ethics, Aristotle speaks of friendship or philia (Books 8 and 9). He outlines three different teloi for philial-love – pleasure, usefulness and virtue – which give rise to three modes of behaviour. One might think that these forms of friendship might be connected with the different modes of desiring and kinesis: thumia and epithumia with pleasure (hedonia) and usefulness, which are inferior forms of philia, and the more rational boulesis with the virtuous form of philia. But, in fact, the main verb throughout for desiring is boulomai. Sometimes he uses the middle voice of ephiemi or the more acquisitive form of desiring in orego, but references to epithumia are rare (Book 9.v.3). Earlier he quite explicitly informs us that pleasure (eudaemonia) is not itself a motion (I.7). It is an aspect of energeia, a realization, an end in itself. Pleasure is not then a dynamic aspect of desire – as it is for Plato in Symposium. But Aristotle does not examine this association, and, unlike Plato, he nowhere investigates the difference between philia and either eros or agape. In fact, in Books 8 and 9 although phileo is dominant he uses both agapao and erao as synonyms (8.i.6; 8.iii.1; 9.xii.1), and under philia includes erotikos and erastos (8.iii.5; 8.iv.1; 9.i.2; 9.v.3). 16 See Origen’s Commentary on the Song of Songs (1957: 63–71) for an argument in favour of the use of eros by Christian theologians to discuss both God’s own loving and the Christian’s love of God (made possible on the basis of God as the origin of all possible loving). Origen refuses here to view eros as simply an acquisitive and appetitive desire. As in Plato’s Lysis and Phaedrus (though not in the Symposium), eros is recognized as ecstatic, demanding the forgetting of self, and excessive to utilitarian ends. In his own Commentary on the Songs of Songs, Gregory of Nyssa (1960: 383) goes even further, speaking of eros as the intensification or realization of agape: ‘The bride is wounded by a spiritual fiery shaft of desire (eros). For agape which is aroused is called eros.’ A detailed study of eros in the Platonic and the early Christian traditions can be found in J.M. Rist, Eros and Pysche (1964) and Catherine Osborne, Eros Unveiled: Plato and the God of Love (1994). Both of these authors are critical of the influential study Agape and Eros by Anders Nygren (1982). See also James Barr, ‘Words for love in Biblical Greek’ (1987) for a series of insightful observations on agape, eros and philia. Barr concludes significantly, ‘though eros is used in disapproved

Graham Ward

115

as the seat of transformative and ecstatic love. It is evident in the work of Gregory of Nyssa, Augustine, Pseudo-Dionysius, Bernard of Clairvaux and many of those mediaeval commentators on Canticum Canticorum.17 The soul is not the source of desire; to desire is written into the nature of what it is to be ensouled, to participate in the world as one who senses, thinks and creatively responds to what is continually being given. Desire is to be educated, not erased in Christian praxis and one cannot desire without a body; as one cannot think without a body.18 Let me relate this understanding of desire back to my earlier sketch of what it is to know and suggest the body’s knowledge is intimately associated with the movements of desire. If the body’s knowledge is constituted in and through its negotiations with other bodies and is intimately associated with desire, then the economies of response that I outlined above, those fields of intention, are caught up in complex movements of desiring. As such, desire is then both politically informed and politically informs. Desire is produced and desire is a work that produces. There is a canny scene in Star Trek: The Next Generation where the android Data is captured by the Borg that illustrates my point here. The queen of the Borg reads a strong determination of Data’s desire to experience life as a real (conceived as sensate therefore emotional) human being. She stages this desire for him by electronically mapping onto Data’s arm a piece of human skin. The camera closes in for a shot of the taut piece of skin, white (this is Hollywood), pimpled, covered in tiny golden hairs. The queen of the Borg blows softly across these hairs. ‘Do you feel that Data?’ she asks, in a voice as warm and deep as seduction itself. ‘Was that good for you, Data?’ she asks, quickly associating sensation with erotic appetite, her blowing lightly on the hairs of the flesh with orgasm. Desire, sensation and thought are inseparably associated here in operations that move across the subjectivities of two bodies. Data’s desire to be an affective human is reproduced for him as a desire for sexual satisfaction. This, of course, is another of Hollywood’s ideologies. But the point I am wishing to make is only that the body’s knowledge is informed by desire while desire is also informed by the way that body sensuously encounters and negotiates the thoughts and knowledges of other bodies. Desire, that fosters determinations for how the body will act, will itself be disciplined by that body’s erotic contexts, this in no sense sets it apart from philia and agapesis, which are typically used also in theologically positive relations’ (1987: 10). 17 For an overall examination of commentaries on Song of Songs, see Denys Turner, Eros and Allegory (1995a). For an excellent reappraisal of ‘desire’ in Gregory of Nyssa, see Martin Laird, ‘Under Solomon’s tutelage: The education of desire in Homilies on the Song of Songs’ (2002); he points out how important it is ‘to be aware of a certain lack of consistency in Gregory’s vocabulary of desire’ (521). For a concise account of ‘desire’ in Bernard, see Pierre Dumontier, Saint Bernard et la Bible (1953: 39–43). 18 Challenging some earlier readings of the call to apatheia, Morwenna Ludlow observes with respect to Gregory of Nyssa that ‘Apatheia is … not the absence of desire but freedom from any materialistic impulse or passion’, Universal Salvation: Eschatology in the Thought of Gregory of Nyssa and Karl Rahner (2000: 58). The education of materialistic impulses does not deny but intensifies appreciations of embodiment.

116

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

engagement in the world. As such politics is always an impassioned affair; and the movements of desire, sensation and thought within the soul means the politics of the body’s knowledge is continually under revision. Of course this observation too would have come as no surprise to Plato – whose Republic is founded upon the city as structured according to the human soul; nor Aristotle, who in Nicomachean Ethics conceived politics to be inseparable from phileo; nor Perikles, who urged that citizens ‘should fall in love with’ the city, employing – in his Funeral Oration – the erotic term for lovers, erastai;19 nor Augustine, who represented the city of God as a specific social form organized according to an orientation of desire towards God. A certain analogy governs the relationship between the enfleshed psyche and the gathering and negotiation of knowledges in the polis. What I am suggesting here is that entwined physical, rational and spiritual growth and nourishment of the ‘enmattered soul’ is determined by the body’s negotiations with other bodies. If the body’s knowledge is erotic (as in affective), then such knowledge is not only relational, it is tactile. It is at this point that we encounter the role of touch. Aristotle observes, ‘those living things that have touch also have desire’ (414b6). The ensouled flesh comes to an understanding of itself through touch.20 Aristotle insists, ‘without the faculty of touch none of the other senses exists’ (414b33) and ‘in respect of touch [human beings are] accurate above all others. For this reason [we are] also the most intelligent of animals’ (421a16). Aquinas’ commentary on Aristotle here is important because of the manner in which the faculties of the senses are often hierarchized, not only in Christian theology, but perhaps through Christian theology in philosophy more generally (even phenomenology). Yet it might seem that mental capacity corresponded rather to excellence of sight than of touch, for sight is the more spiritual sense, and reveals better the differences between things.21 Still, there are two reasons for maintaining that excellence of mind is proportionate to fineness of touch. In the first place touch is the basis of sensitivity as a whole; for obviously the organ of touch pervades the whole body, so that the organ of each of the other senses is also an organ of touch, and the sense of touch by itself constitutes a being as sensitive. Therefore, the finer one’s sense of touch, the better, strictly speaking, is one’s sensitive nature as a whole, and consequently the higher one’s intellectual capacity. For 19 Thucydides, History of the Peloponnesian War (1954: 149). See also Richard Sennett for an extended analysis of the relationship between the Greek polis, desire and nakedness in Flesh and Stone: The Body and the City in Western Civilization (1996: 31-67). 20 For a comprehensive survey of touch in Aristotle, see Cynthia Freeland, ‘Aristotle on the sense of touch’ (1992). 21 The priority of ‘sight’ as the most spiritual sense has a long history in Greek and Christian thought that concerns the nature of light. Sight is related to fire, whereas touch is related to the earth. Light is related to divine illumination and so, for Augustine, it is light that enables the soul to understand at all. It is the key to the intellectual grasp of what is given in the senses (see De Genesi ad litteram, III.5–6; Migne 1844–62: PL, XXXIV). Enlightenment thinking, as Foucault’s examination of the episteme of the gaze reveals, is dominated by the visual.

Graham Ward

117

a fine sensitivity is a disposition to a fine intelligence. (Thomas Aquinas 1994: 152–3; ad II 421a16–26)

The second reason for the importance of touch is that ‘fine touch is an effect of a good bodily constitution or temperament’ such that ‘those whose touch is delicate are so much the nobler and the more intelligent’.22 This is a very important comment because it ontologizes touch. Touch operates at the juncture between the corporeal and the spiritual. It is more fundamental than sight – that is associated with the epistemological. In fact, we might infer from this that touch is our finest sensibility for apprehending the divine. It is the most immediate of our perceptions since ‘touch alone seems to perceive through itself’ (435a11). By this I do not imply that God can be directly touched or even directly apprehended. God is not corporeal. I merely suggest the possibility that our profoundest because most immediate understandings of what it is to be incarnate are intuited through touch; where, first, divine spiritual presence (and our participation in it) becomes inseparable from physical existence and where, second, we are most affected (transformed) by such an intuition. Through touch there is contact and through contact there is nourishment (or, if the contact is abusive, malnourishment) and nurturing (or violation). Either way, through touch there is movement within the soul such that the whole person is caught up in the circulations of desire – the desire of the other as well as that person’s desire for the other.23 Aquinas calls this ‘the mover moved’.24 The ‘intuition’ involved is not blind (in the Kantian sense of intuitions without concepts being blind). For since there are forms of desire in both the rational and the irrational parts of the soul, according to Aristotle and Aquinas, and ‘movement always … involves imagination and desire’ (432b13), then imagination and desire, touch and movement are related. Aristotle ‘includes imagination under intellect’, Aquinas observes (Thomas Aquinas 1994: 244). In fact, intellect and desire are the two forces of movement within the soul and, evidently, not entirely distinguishable because continually crossed by the operations of the imagination.25 Contemplation requires images (432a3); so contemplation 22 (Thomas Aquinas 1994: 153). For the theological importance of touch for Aquinas, see John Milbank and Catherine Pickstock, ‘Truth and touch’ in Truth in Aquinas (2001: 60– 87), and for the theological implications of touch, see John Milbank, ‘The soul of reciprocity part two: Reciprocity granted’ (2001). See also Jean-Louis Chrétien, ‘Body and touch’ (2004). 23 See De Anima 433a9–443b21 on the faculty of desire as it relates to motion. Aquinas (1994: 244), in what constitutes a refutation of Lacan’s (and Žižek’s) claims, ‘It is absurd to say that desire is for the sake of desiring; desire is essentially a tendency to “the other”.’ 24 Thomas Aquinas 1994: 246–7; ad III 433b14–21: ‘The mover moved is the desire itself; for whatever desires is moved inasmuch as it desires, desire itself being a certain act or movement in the sense that we give the term “movement” when we apply it to activities that are consequent upon actuality (prout motus est actus perfecti), such as sensing and understanding.’ Later Aquinas outlines how this movement of desire is ‘circular’. 25 ‘[I]ntellect only moves anything by virtue of appetition’; ‘the final motive-force derives from the soul itself acting through the appetitive power.’ (Thomas Aquinas 1994: 245; 246).

118

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

concerns movement, desire and an intuition that is imagined, imaged. ‘The soul never thinks without an image’ (431a8); and such thinking is inseparable from being affected physically even if the intellect can distinguish itself from the fleshly (and judge it) (429a29). If, then, such intuition, contemplation, imagination, movement and desire depend upon touch, then the ensouled flesh is not monadic. It only realizes itself in community; in political and erotic communities or ekklesia. Let me clarify here the mode of touch that I am treating and what I am investigating in this treatment. First, I am not concerned here with forms of contact. Aristotle’s attention to touch in De Anima has been criticized for its ‘exclusive concentration on passive rather than active touching’26 or ‘contact sense’. I am far from sure this is a correct evaluation of Aristotle, but it serves to emphasize that the treatment of touch here is exclusively concerned with active touching. In German one can distinguish between two types of body, Koerper, that is inert, and Leib, that is not. Koerper can refer to the physical bodies of people or animals and can be extended metaphorically to speak of the body of a text (Textkoerper), for example. Leib, on the other hand, bears several interrelated senses. First, it is the precondition for perception. As such it is the German translation of what Merleau-Ponty calls ‘body’ – that site of crossing between the seeing body and that which is seen, the touching body and that which is touched. Self-reflexivity is the very condition for Leib. Secondly, Leib refers on a social level to the complex matrix of relations and circumstances in which individual bodies are implicated. As such it is only because of this body (as Leib) that community becomes possible. The body as Leib is political because the body as Leib lives (bios) whereas the body as Koerper subsists (zoe).27 Thirdly, Leib is, theologically understood, the dwelling-place of the soul. This examination of touch, then, concerns bodies in the German sense of Leiber. Furthermore, it is concerned with the active touching between persons.28 In the active touching between persons we are examining the intentional structure of touching. I use ‘intention’ in a way developed by Husserl in the fifth of his Logical Investigations – the experience of an object of my directed attention (Gerichtetheit), an object made meaningful for me (Husserl 1970b: vol. 2, 533–659, particularly 552–96). These intentions are constitutive of the experience of the perception (apperception) and there is an indeterminancy about them intrinsic to what is being presented as such. Intentional experiences involve interpretative relations and may become the basis upon which volitional intentions to act are made by an agent, but are prior to such intentions. Intentional structures, as Husserl wrestled to point out, are complex and multi-layered. An examination of such structures attempts to 26 Freeland 1992: 230. See also Jean-Louis Chrétien’s excellent examination of Aristotle on touch, ‘Body and touch’ (2004). He agrees that Aristotle is not talking about ‘contact’ (116–17), rather ‘Touch is the perpetual place of exchange’ (117). 27 For an important discussion of the politics of bios and zoe and the logic of sovereignty that seeks to produce a biopolitical body, see Giorgio Agamben, Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life (1998). 28 One could examine intentional touch between persons and animals, for example; though one would have to define how ‘intentions’ are ascribed to forms of animal behaviour.

Graham Ward

119

clarify some of these layers. The intentional structure of touching cannot simply be examined from the point of view of the one touching. For it is the nature of this mode of touch (and Aristotle was certainly aware of this) to affect whatever is touched – as the example of Jesus’ response to the haemorrhaging woman makes plain. As a swimmer one quickly comes to recognize an accidental ‘brush’ against another swimmer and a touch whose intentions are, in some subtle way, communicated (that is, delivered and received). Those intentions can take on various communicative shadings – sexual suggestion, aggressive warning, competitive edge and so on. The context is important: both bodies are exposed, each to the other. The nakedness renders them both open to the world, vulnerable to suggestion. What is important for this analysis, and returns us to the object of this investigation into touch, is how a ‘recognition’ of the intentional structure of that touch is produced. What is the operation of such knowledge, what are its effects, and what are the implications of both that operation and its effects for a theological anthropology? These are some of the questions I wish to examine. In the pool much is communicated between two swimmers about each other, but without words or often distinctive gesturing (for the swimming proceeds through a steady rhythm of strokes that neither wishes to disrupt). Nevertheless temperament, present mood, past training, ability and even levels of intelligence are all communicated through mutual observation (which has always an element of voyeurism about it). Jean-Louis Chrétien (2004: 130) speaks of how ‘The flesh listens. And the fact that it listens is what makes it respond’. The addition of intentional touch, though, dramatizes this communication. It is this dramatization that is being investigated below. Origen in Contra Celsum (1953: I.48) writes: ‘And they touched the Word by faith so that an emanation came from him to them which healed them … [Jesus’] truly divine touch.’ He refers to 1 John 1:1 in which the ‘Word of life’ is apprehended or ‘handled’ by three senses: hearing, seeing and touching – handling ‘the Word of life’. 1 John continues that there is a bearing witness that can take place by describing what the followers of Christ have seen and repeating what they have heard. These acts of representation also disseminate a power that will bring those who picture and hear them into a fellowship, a participation that is ultimately Trinitarian (1 John 1:3). But what the witnesses cannot communicate is their touching Christ; for representation distances and renders into a general vocabulary that which was personally experienced. And touch individuates by a bringing into contact and proximity. Touch cannot distance and does not submit to a general vocabulary without ceasing to be what it is. Touch communicates only to the other being touched. It cannot communicate to a third party. A third party may witness touch and draw inferences about it, but she has not entered into what was being communicated in the touch. Touch can be described in terms of pleasure, pain, pressure, warmth and so on, but that which has been brought into being by the touching cannot be brought into being through the representation of that touch. Touch intimates; it does not speak. Speaking of the child’s early tactile experience, the psychologist Katz (1925: 160), uses the term ‘prehension’ [Eindruck]. The intimacy it creates communicates not a knowledge but a knowingness; an intentionality that expects a response. It brings this knowingness

120

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

into existence not as creation from nothing but as the realizing of the singularity of that which exists. It announces that it is I, in my very corporeal individuality, who is knowing (rather than who knows) you in your very corporeal individuality. As such, this singularizing is a bringing forth from an indifference, an indeterminancy, an anonymity. It is not a bringing to identity, for identity is too strong a word for what is only intimated. Rather, it is a bringing into relation because of an intimation of difference. This relational difference is recognized only in a belonging, only in the interchange that in intimating something brings about a transformation in what is perceived and understood in and between the touching and the touched; though the substance of this transformation is only realized in a subsequent reflection. I would, then, modify what Maurice Merleau-Ponty (for whom also embodied perception is a locus of mystery and enigma) observes about touch and perception when he writes: The moment perception comes my body effaces itself before it and never does the perception grasp the body in the act of perceiving. If my left hand is touching my right hand, and if I should suddenly wish to apprehend with my right hand the work of my left hand as it touches, this reflection of the body upon itself always miscarries at the last moment: the moment I feel my left hand with my right hand, I correspondingly cease touching my right hand with my left hand. But this last-minute failure does not drain all truth from that presentiment I had of being able to touch myself touching: my body does not perceive, but it is as if it were built around the perception that dawns through it. (Merleau-Ponty 1968: 9)

Merleau-Ponty, here as elsewhere in his work, while wishing to move beyond the dualism of mind and body, nevertheless draws a distinction between the body and reflection in which perception is already cognition and prejudgement. This is a model of perception founded upon seeing29 and I would accept what both Heidegger and Wittgenstein have taught us that we ‘see as’. But I suggest that in touch the body does not efface itself. There is an intimation of its very corporeality; as if the body is brought into being by that touch. In fact, in his earlier work Phenomenology of Perception, Merleau-Ponty points exactly to that when he writes that in touch, ‘I do not only use my fingers and my whole body as a single organ, but also, thanks to this unity of the body, the tactile perceptions gained through an organ are immediately translated into the language of the rest. … Each contact of an object with part of our objective body is, therefore, in reality a contact with the whole of the present or possible phenomenal body’ (1962: 369). And so I would correct Merleau-Ponty’s later phrase, writing: ‘my body does perceive and is built around that perception’. The body perceives itself in relation and knows the nature of that relation. If Merleau-Ponty misses that, it may well be because in the left hand touching the right

29 Chrétien views Merleau-Ponty as making touch fit into his understanding of sight, ‘Body and touch’ (2004: 100–101).

Graham Ward

121

there is no other; both hands are mine. They are ‘one sole organ of experience’.30 There is what he elsewhere calls the crisscrossing ‘of the touching and the tangible’ (1962: 133), but the touching does not enter a field of intentions and an economy of response, because there is no eros.31 Consider a different kind of touching of oneself in which there is eros: masturbation. Here the body is effaced and there is no experience of ‘touching myself touching’, for a distance is opened up by fantasy, erotic scenarios into which the body is inserted; not the physical body but one of the many fantasized bodies we live with. Fantasy consumes the body’s perceptions. The body cannot be intimate with itself. Though it can pleasure itself, it cannot singly enjoy the pleasuring of itself without withdrawing from the fantasized scene that supports the pleasuring. The body cannot intimate things to itself.32 The eros that is conjured in masturbation has first to project and maintain a body image elsewhere. It has to manufacture a distance, an exteriority, for itself such that touching and being touched can take place. If then the body comes to a sense of itself as different, as singular, as a unity through touch, the economy of that response is governed by desire. Desire issues in a play of nearness and separation, availability and inaccessibility, masking and revealing. If desire can only be desire through an economy of distance, then the 30 Merleau-Ponty 1962: 141. In his late essay ‘The intertwining – the chiasm’ (in The Visible and the Invisible, 1968), very briefly Merleau-Ponty broaches again the question of ‘touching the hand of another’ and coins, elliptically, the term ‘intercorporeality’. But the model of what he calls ‘the circle of the touched and the touching, the touched takes hold of the touching’ (141) is founded upon a synergy in which because the organs of my body communicate with each other therefore a transitivity is founded from one body to another (143). In the handshake, then, where each experiences being touched in touching, I ‘touch in it the same power to espouse the things that I have touched in my own’ (141). In this there is a transcending of difference as my movements ‘address themselves to the body in general and for itself’ (143). His account of incorporeal touching is, as he himself claims, curiously locked into the logic of Narcissus. My own account emphasizes that touching and being touched by a sentient other goes beyond reflexivity. There is a sense in which Merleau-Ponty’s own vocabulary performs a transcendence that he does not investigate beyond an allusive Spinozistic monism; he uses descriptors like ‘magical’, ‘mystery’, ‘enigma’, ‘surpassing’ and ‘miracle’. Even ‘vision’ in the late essays takes on the gravity of disclosure, revelation and epiphany. He never manages to shake off his Catholic imagination, but he does not reflect upon it either. 31 Desire arrives late in the economy of perception for Merleau-Ponty. In ‘The interwining’, he describes ‘the patient and silent labour of desire’ (1968: 144) that follows touching and is related to articulation. We see this move in much more detail in Phenomenology of Perception, where, in the development of his phenomenology of the body, ‘The body in its sexual being’ (1962: 178–201) he lays the foundation for ‘The body as expression, and speech’ (202–32). Although Merleau-Ponty suggests in that volume (178) that an analysis of ‘desire or love’ will enable us to understand ‘the birth of being for us’, he views desire as a mode of affectivity, not, as I suggest, the condition for affectivity itself. 32 Chrétien concludes, ‘Self-touch cannot be the truth of touch’, ‘Body and touch’ (2004: 118).

122

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

economy of response is intertwined with an unfolding of distances, differences, exteriorities that pass in and out of interiorities. This movement in and out, separation and penetration,33 is not only the heart-beat of the economy of response; it is an exchange, a giving and reception, and a communication. One recalls that the word ‘intimate’ in its verbal form comes from the Late Latin verb intimo – to flow into (Julius Solinus, AD250), to communicate to the spirit (Tertullianus AD160–240), to put into, but also by AD400 to narrate, tell, describe, relate. Its adjectival form comes from the earlier Latin intimus – innermost or most secret. It is used by Cicero (43BC) to describe a form of relationship, even a close friend. One might also add, a little more felicitously, a relation to in-timeo, where timeo means to dread, to fear, and the prefix in negates that experience. I add this last conjectural possibility because intimacy is always ringed with fear, even when it most excludes, and this is part of the way in which desire and distance are interrelated. For intimacy demands the body’s openness, its vulnerability. The calibre, or profundity of the giving or reception, depends upon recognizing the possibilities of fear, of dread, and negotiating them. The negotiation involves a suffering because I am not the other, and intimacy, while fearing absorption by the other, also suffers the longing for an integration. In Emily Brontë’s Wuthering Heights, at the climax of an argument between Catherine Earnshaw and Nelly Dean concerning Cathy’s obsession with Heathcliff, Cathy shouts out, ‘I am Heathcliff!’ (Brontë 1965: 122) But she is not and that is both her triumph, as a character who epically takes her place at Heathcliff’s side, and her tragedy. Intimacy causes a tearing apart, to expose the suffering of longing. Distance, difference are figurations of longing (long-ing) – without them there would be stasis. Intimacy and distance then require flows, movements, operations and economies. Aquinas provides us with a theological account of this state of things when discussing the divine governance of creation: Thus this God does work in every worker, according to these three things. First as an end. For since every operation is for the sake of some good, real or apparent; and nothing is good either really or apparently, except insofar as it participates in a likeness to the Supreme Good, which is God; it follows then that God Himself is the cause of every operation as it ends. Again, it is to be observed that where there are several agents in order, the second always acts in virtue of the first: for the first agent moves the second to act. And thus all agents act in virtue of God Himself: and therefore He is the cause of action in every agent. Thirdly, we must observe that God not only moves things to operate, as it were applying their forms and powers to operation … but He also gives created agents their forms and preserves them in being. Therefore He is the cause of action not only by giving the form which is the principle of action, as the generator is said to be the cause of movement in things heavy and light; but also as preserving the forms and powers of

33 Merleau-Ponty observes, ‘my own body’s “invisibility” can invest the other bodies I see. Hence my body can assume segments derived from the body of another, just as my substance passes into them’, ‘Eye and mind’ trans. Carleton Dallery in The Primacy of Perception (1964: 168).

Graham Ward

123

things … And since the form of a thing is within the thing [est intra rem], and all the more as it approaches nearer to the First and Universal Cause, and because in all things God Himself is properly the cause of universal being which is innermost of all things [quod inter omnia est magis intimum rebus], it follows that in all things God works intimately [in omnibus intime operatur]. (Thomas Aquinas 1964–81: vol. 14, Ia.105.5. responsio [author’s translation, eds])

We will return to this passage. Distance here has only to do with spatiality in so far as spatial images are used to conceive it. But distance cannot be reduced to some mathematical measurement separating two bodies in some pure or idealized space. Bodies can be in close proximity, touching, even interpenetrating, and yet nevertheless distance is experienced. Distance cannot in fact become an identifiable object. Perhaps the closest we get to distance as such is the identification of difference. The distance is intimated to those differences that compose it. This distance is implicated then in a common participation, a common recognition of exteriority: I am not the other; the other is not I; the other is not reducible to or measurable by me; and I am not reducible to or measurable by the other. What is intimated in this distance is an excess; the mystery of alterity. Every representation made of this distance must fail if the aim of such representation is to define. For there is no place from which an exhaustive representation is possible, no neutral locus – which again appeals to an ideal, mathematically conceived spatiality. Even the notions of exteriority and interiority lose their meaning as neither subject has access to this distance outside of participating in it. The memory of that participation may attempt to re-present it – but at best it will be an echo of the experience bouncing back from the walls of a single consciousness. It is not that the distance escapes representation; in fact, it demands representation because the distance constitutes a command to communicate. Distance precedes and haunts all communication. But what is intimated in this distance exceeds chains and combinations of signifiers. At best it can imbue signs with a semantic plenitude – like the phrases ‘I know you’ or ‘You know me’, spoken by those participating in what Jean-Luc Marion describes as an ‘intimate alterity’ (1977: 199). These phrases are bridges of suspending steel that open up the distance, sway in the wind, and expand and contract with the rise and fall of temperature. The knowledge of distance and its negotiation as it arises in intimacy, is a knowledge of difference-in-relation. But, again, this is not a conceptual knowledge, for ‘the relation’ itself is rendered indefinable in this distance. The relation is always in play, always under construction. Like the distance itself, the relation is never there as an object as such. This is not a conceptual knowing; it is a bodily knowing that is received, given and lived prior to any reflection. The reflection cannot erase the traces of what the body has received, given and lived. In fact, it is these traces that call forth reflection, or rather meditation or what the prayerful understand as contemplation.

124

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

We must distinguish here between reflection, as Merleau-Ponty, after Husserl, understands it, and contemplation.34 For it is in this distinction that the theology of embodiment (and touch as the most fundamental mode of coming to an understanding of being embodied) announces itself most clearly. Following Descartes, to reflect is always to grasp one’s own knowing (cogito ergo sum), to recognize it as such. Reflection conceptualizes and therefore represents certain states and conditions to itself. Its movement is circular in the way phenomenologists since Hegel have recognized the dialectic of In-Itself and For-Itself. To contemplate is to transcend the circularities of reflection; for it is a movement towards the other – a movement that is facilitated, even solicited, by that other. It is to be drawn to the other, who is drawn to you. It is a movement without concepts – though images may be used in the first instance (as with an icon). As the goal of reflection is understanding; so the goal of contemplation is a mutual discerning – to know even as I am known. There is not a content to this knowledge. The knowing is a condition of being, a condition in the Johannine texts that is often described as abiding (meno – to stay, to stand, but transitively to await, to expect). Intimacy is mutual abiding, what in John’s Gospel is described as the centre of Messianic relationality – I in you and you in me. This relationality participates in and reveals the logic of the Incarnation. As the Prologue to the Gospel of St John describes it through a complex combination of prepositions: ‘he came into [eis] the world. He was in [en] the world, and the world came to be [egeneto] through him [di’autou]’ (John 1:9-10). Christ indwells that which is already in Christ – the world that was made through him. And so the only-begotten of God begets. The one who, as Origen expounded it,35 is eternally generated by the uncreated God creates, and then indwells his creation. In this sense we can speak of God’s profound touch; the intimacy of His presence as that which touches through maintaining our very existence as an emanation of His own essence. This is at the heart of Aquinas’ understanding of divine operations above in which he employs the adjectival form of ‘intimo’. He also explicitly relates the intimacy with the cognates of the verb – to flow into, to communicate to the spirit. In Summa Contra Gentiles he observes: ‘one finds a diverse manner of emanation of things [diversus emanationis modus invenitur in rebus], and, the higher a nature is, the more intimate to the nature is that which flows from it [et quanto aliqua natura est altior, tanto id quod ex ea emanat, magis ei est intimum].’36 Gregory of Nyssa (1960: 324) in his Eleventh Homily on the Song of Songs describes this intimacy as the ‘perception of his presence [aesthesis parousias]’, a perception or feeling (aesthesis) in which the remoteness of the uncreated ousia of God effects in the soul a profound closeness. If this tension 34 We can associate this difference with the difference between ‘understanding’ and ‘discernment’. With discernment and contemplation (rather than understanding and reflection) a religious metaphysics begins to take shape; in this case, a Christian epistemology. 35 De Principiis, I,2,2 (See Origen 1936). 36 Summa Contra Gentiles (1975: IV.11.1). Latin text available at http://www. corpusthomisticum. org

Graham Ward

125

of intense proximity and distance is the very nature of human beings created in the image of God, it issues from the logic of the Incarnation. Salvation is to become enfolded within this enfolding logic – to attain the condition of being incarnate as the Word is incarnate or what Gregory and others termed theosis. More clearly, human beings have to participate in becoming flesh as He became flesh. Human beings are not truly themselves, are not truly flesh, until they have become flesh as He became flesh. We are, then, seeking a body; through intimacy we seek an intimacy with that source of the ‘emanation of things’. It is a body being prepared for us. According to Paul’s letter to the Ephesians,37 it is ‘his body, the fullness [to pleroma] of him that fills all in all’ (Ephesians 1.23). It is a condition of enfleshment that is eschatological – a resurrection body, a new kind of embodiment that in its very singularity indwells or is, to use a term coined by Merleau-Ponty, ‘transcorporeal’. Giorgio Agamben describes this condition as being at ‘ease’: ‘The Provençal poets (whose songs first introduce the term into Romance languages in the form of aizi, aizimen) make ease a terminus technicus in their poetics, designating the very place of love. Or better, it designates not so much the place of love, but rather love as the experience of takingplace in a whatever singularity.’ (Agamben 1993: 24) Touch is an orientation towards being incarnate and it finds its true selfunderstanding in love. Even the touch involved in violence towards, in abuse of, oneself or the other, is a call for love, a recognition of its absence. To cut oneself is an attempt to attain some recognition of an embodiment that seems constantly to be under threat of disappearing. It is the mark of the wish to feel again; the recognition of being in a frozen state, without desire. Touch is always an action, an activity – as distinct from seeing which is more passive and at my command. As Merleau-Ponty (1962: 369) observes: ‘In visual experience, which pushes objectification further than does tactile experience, we can, at least at first sight, flatter ourselves that we constitute the world, because it presents us with a spectacle spread out before us at a distance, and gives us the illusion of being immediately present everywhere and being situated nowhere’. Seeing invokes the possibility of pure separation, of exteriority, of rampant individualism, of social atomism, of the society of the spectacle. But touch, adhering as it does ‘to the surface of the body’, disrupts the ‘spectacle’ as ‘spectacle’. Theologically understood, it disrupts the production of idols – it forestalls reification by the instauration of an economy, a movement, an action. It is at this point that touch is related to flows, for the movement described above as the economy of response (that is inseparable from touching and loving) is a profoundly kenotic movement – the emptying of one towards the other, that is ongoing and endless.

37 I am aware of the arguments that range among commentators as to whether this letter can in fact be attributed to Paul, but the arguments have no bearing on the christology announced in this letter.

126

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Conclusion It may seem almost paradoxical to suggest it, but this essay argues that that which moves us beyond phenomenology and towards the theology of phenomena is the corporeal, is the mystery of embodiment itself. This is, then, an essay on incarnation. It views incarnation as twofold. First, incarnation is God made flesh in Jesus Christ. Second, incarnation is our flesh being enfolded in the Word. Incarnation is not only the Word entering fully the condition of being human, it is also the human entering fully into the Word. Phenomenology as a human science investigating the immanent cannot proceed from the first of these premises. If it could then it would be offering itself as another form of ontotheology. Indeed, it would be offering a proof for the existence of God. But it can proceed with an examination of the second premise – that is, with an account of the mystery of flesh. This is not a new investigation. Merleau-Ponty, Henry and Chrétien each offer phenomenological investigations into being embodied. But where this investigation differs from theirs is in offering an account of the body rooted in a phenomenology of touch and desire. My argument throughout this investigation is that the body is always a transgressive site. The essence of its irreducibility lies in its continual endeavour to transcend itself. With Augustine in mind, we could say, its permanent restlessness seeks a rest, a condition of being, that it cannot find within itself but recognizes as defining its own humanness. In other words, bodies strive towards a condition that the account of the Word made flesh narrativizes. Further Reading Chrétien, J.-L., ‘Body and touch’, in his The Call and the Response, trans. A.A. Davenport, New York: Fordham University Press, 2004, 83–131 Janicaud, D. et al., Phenomenology and the ‘Theological Turn’: The French Debate, trans. B.G. Prusak, New York: Fordham University Press, 2000 Marion J.-L., Being Given: Toward a Phenomenology of Givenness, trans. J.L. Kosky, Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, 2002 Merleau-Ponty, M., Phenomenology of Perception, trans. C. Smith, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1962 Thomas Aquinas, Commentary on Aristotle’s De Anima, trans. K. Foster, OP, and S. Humphries, OP, Notre Dame: Dumb Ox Books. 1994

SECTION TWO

Meaning, Language and Interpretation The language we use through various and subtle means helps shape the way we interpret phenomena and give our actions and experience meaning. However, it is ‘language’ in a large sense of the term, including not simply vocabulary and grammar but the ways we do things with words, and indeed without words. Duelling is impossible in a world where the appropriate vocabulary is not in place and there are no analogues of the speech act of insulting someone. Further, there are forms of acting and performing, such as those invoked earlier in this volume by Kevin Vanhoozer, that have their own analogues of language. It is the bearing of these interconnections on the ways we may configure theology, philosophy and their boundaries that are the focus of the contributions to this section. Nicholas Lash focuses on the ‘logical grammar’ of the word ‘God’. As part of the constitution of modernity ‘gods’, which until then were understood to be whatever people worshipped, became instead beings of a certain kind. From a theological perspective worship of any such being might be thought to verge on the blasphemous. This usurpation of the grammar of worship by that of description has led to a deformation of the concept of God; in Buber’s terminology from I-Thou to I-It. We need to retrieve that earlier relational conception of the divine, recognizing that in doing so the boundaries between believer and unbeliever shift, and learn again that speaking appropriately of God is, while not impossible, difficult and even dangerous, since appropriate speech brings to language appropriate relationship. Dan Stiver is concerned with the methodology of interpretation of what is said and written. We need to take account of the vocabulary and syntax of the language in question, and also of the conventions available at the time for speech acts and their analogues, but beyond this we need to learn from recent developments in the tradition of philosophical hermeneutics, using vivid and empathetic imagining to integrate what is meaningful to us with what could have been significant at the time of writing or speech, bearing in mind the tacit and sometimes self-deceiving ways in which beliefs and attitudes are embodied. Since meaning may not be transparent to the consciousness of any of the relevant parties, we may need to interrogate the possibilities of distortion provided by past and present conventions, as well as by ideologies and vested interests. Lash’s critique of the contemporary meaning of ‘God’ may plausibly be seen as just such an exercise of the ‘hermeneutics of suspicion’.

This page intentionally left blank

Chapter 7

The Question of God Today Nicholas Lash

What Does God Look Like? I remember a conversation, over forty years ago, with a friend, a retired primary school teacher. She was very angry. Her grand-daughter, aged six or seven, had just come back from school, in some distress. An idiotic teacher had told the class to draw a picture of God. The school was in Marlow, a small town on the Thames, some thirty miles upstream from London. The little girl had drawn a picture of a swan, sailing serenely along among the rushes. The teacher, on seeing it, berated her, complaining: ‘That’s not what God looks like!’ All one’s sympathies, of course, are with the child – who had, presumably, provided what, in today’s jargon, we might call an ‘icon’ of majesty and beauty. But what, one wonders, was the teacher looking for? What did she think God looks like? This might seem to be a foolish question because, since God is generally agreed to be invisible, there is presumably nothing whatsoever that God could ‘look’ like. And yet, however much we emphasize that everything we say of God is metaphorically said; however much we insist that the holy mystery which we call ‘God’ absolutely outstrips not merely our imagination but our understanding; when people talk of God – whether they do so as atheists, agnostics or devout believers, or whether as Christians, Jews, Muslims or Hindus – they usually suppose themselves to have some idea of what they are talking about. And, whatever one is talking about, if one has got some idea of what one is talking about, then – however general, vague, confused that idea may be – there is some sort of story one could tell about it; some picture one could paint, however broad the brushstrokes that one used. What, then, might God look like? Here is another parable, from Salley Vickers’s novel about Venice and the Book of Tobit, Miss Garnet’s Angel. Tobias is talking to his guide Azarias (better known to the reader, although not yet at this point in the story to Tobias, as the archangel Raphael): ‘“Azarias”, I said: “You told me once I may find out who or what you worshipped when we got to Ecbatana. Might you tell me now?” “How would courage and truth and mercy and right action strike you?” “But those are not gods!” I protested. “Tobias, for heaven’s sake, what do you think a god looks like when he works in men?”’ (Vickers 2001: 327–8) That exchange suggests, first, that, when thinking about God or (shall we say) considering what God looks like, we should be thinking about what people worship and, second, that, when thinking about what people worship, we should perhaps

130

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

be thinking not so much about ‘things’ – objects, entities, individuals – but rather about occurrences, activities, patterns of behaviour. Courage and truth and mercy are displayed (or not displayed) in the ways that we behave, in what we do. More generally, it is only through what we do and undergo that what we are is shown and known. We should not, perhaps, rule out the possibility that something similar may be true of God. A few years ago, a survey was conducted among seventeen-year-olds in the Czech Republic. Only one per cent of those interviewed were skinheads, but eight per cent knew what skinheads were about. Only fifteen per cent said that they were Christians. Readers presuming that to be bad news should brace themselves for worse: the percentage of those interviewed who knew what Christianity was about was – fifteen! We underestimate at our peril the comprehensiveness of the ignorance of Christianity in contemporary western cultures. At least the teenagers of Prague seemed to know that they did not know what Christianity is about. My guess is that, for most people in Britain, ignorance takes the more intractable form of supposing that ‘everybody knows’ what Christianity is, and that ‘everybody knows’ that it is false: at best, a fairytale less engaging than The Lord of the Rings; at worst, a child’s comforter clung to by those lacking the courage to face the bleakness of existence. This state of affairs has not, of course, come about overnight. Here is Cardinal Newman writing, as an old man, in 1882, to a friend: [The] primary and special office of religion men of the world do not see, and they see only its poverty as a principle of secular progress, and, as disciples and upholders and servants of that great scientific progress, they look on religion and despise it.… I consider then that it is not reason that is against us, but imagination. The mind, after having, to the utter neglect of the Gospels, lived in science, experiences, on coming back to Scripture, an utter strangeness in what it reads, which seems to it a better argument against Revelation than any formal proof. ‘Christianity’ [it says] ‘is behind the age’. (Newman 1976a: 159–60)

Reason, Imagination and the Importance of Theology ‘It is not reason that is against us, but imagination.’ That is the point. The ways in which we ‘see’ the world, its story and its destiny; the ways in which we ‘see’ what human beings are, and what they are for, and how they are related to each other and the world around them; these things are shaped and structured by the stories that we tell, the cities we inhabit, the buildings in which we live, and work, and play; by how we handle – through drama, art and song – the things that give us pain and bring us joy. What does the world look like? What do we look like? What does God look like? It is not easy to think Christian thoughts in a culture whose imagination, whose ways of ‘seeing’ the world and everything there is to see, are increasingly unschooled by Christianity and, to a considerable and deepening extent, quite hostile to it.

Nicholas Lash

131

In such a situation, continuing to hold the Gospel’s truth makes much more serious and dangerous demands than mere lip-service paid to undigested information. Unless we make that truth our own through thought, and pain, and argument; through prayer and study and an unflinching quest for understanding, it will be chipped away, reshaped, eroded, by the power of an imagining fed by other springs, tuned to quite different stories. And this unceasing, strenuous, vulnerable attempt to make some Christian sense of things, not just in what we say, but through the ways in which we ‘see’ the world, is what is known as doing theology. And yet, in my experience, most Christians in Britain take a different view. I never cease to be astonished by the number of devout and highly educated Christians, experts on their own ‘turf’ as teachers, doctors, engineers, accountants or whatever; regular readers of the broadsheet press and at least occasional browsers through the Economist or the New Statesman, the New Scientist or the Times Literary Supplement; visitors to the theatre who usually read at least one of the novels on the Booker shortlist, who nevertheless, from one year to the next, never take up a serious work of Christian theology and probably suppose The Tablet to be something that you get from Boots the chemist. It is, of course, perfectly true that erudition, or even literacy, are not necessary conditions of that aspect of holiness which is Christian wisdom. Nevertheless, ignorance is never virtuous, nor is the refusal to engage all the resources of the mind and heart at the service of faith’s quest for understanding. It is difficult to avoid the conclusion that devout and educated Christians who refuse to acquire a theological competence cognate to the general level of their education simply do not sufficiently care about the truth of Christianity to seek some understanding of that Word through whom all things are made, into whose light we have been called, and which will set us free. Having given quite a lot of thought as to why it is that the study of theology is as comprehensively marginalized from educated public discourse as it is in most western countries, and being quite willing to concede that theologians must bear some share of the responsibility for this, I believe that some of the deeper reasons are to be sought in a systemic failure of the Christian churches to understand themselves as schools of Christian wisdom: as richly endowed projects of lifelong education. What follows is a very broad-brush sketch of how, as I see it, this marginalization of theology has come about in western culture during the past four centuries, and the impact that the process has had on Christian understanding. I shall do this under three heads: ‘Changing the Subject’, ‘The Changing Nature of God’ and ‘The Changing Nature of Belief in God’. My focus will be purely formal or, as disciples of Wittgenstein might say, ‘grammatical’. Such an account, restricting itself to consideration of the ways in which the word ‘god’ has been used, and notions such as ‘belief in God’ construed, will contribute little, directly, to an account of mainstream Christian understanding of the way God is and acts (although, at the end, I will briefly indicate how such an account might go).

132

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Changing the Subject It sometimes happens, in the history of a word or phrase, that what was once what we might call the ‘home territory’ of its usage, its primary or central sense, atrophies or weakens until some quite other sense (which, in the beginning, either did not exist at all or was, at most, entirely marginal) moves centre stage, takes over and makes itself at home. And, when this happens, it will often be very difficult, perhaps impossible, straightforwardly or spontaneously to recapture, or even to imagine, the way in which the expression was originally used. Consider, for example, the word ‘invention’. When this word first appears in English, some time in the fourteenth century (the first occurrence listed in the Oxford English Dictionary dates from 1350), it carries the same sense as the Latin verb – invenio, invenire – which it translates. Invention is a matter of coming upon something, discovering or finding it. Within two hundred years, other senses have been derived from this: by the 1530s, for example, it is possible to invent something, find it, come upon it, without ever leaving one’s armchair – simply by working it out or making a plan. Occasionally, the usage is pejorative: to charge someone with ‘inventing’ something may, by the mid-sixteenth century, be to accuse them of making it up, of telling lies – in Coverdale’s translation of 1535, Susanna defends herself against the elders: ‘I never did any such things, as these men have maliciously invented against me.’ (Daniel 13:43) And it is this originally marginal, derived sense, or something very like it, which moved to centre stage, to the extent that, if someone who knew nothing of the history of the expression came across an old-fashioned liturgical calendar, they would be baffled by the Church’s celebration of ‘The Invention of the Cross’. What on earth, they might well wonder, was Helena, mother of the Emperor Constantine, up to? How could a woman, even one of royal blood, who died some two hundred years after the Crucifixion, possibly have ‘invented’ the Cross of Christ (except in the sense that few historians, these days, would be quite sure that she found it)? In this case, the usurpation of the home territory of the meaning of ‘invention’ by a later sense originally entirely derivative and marginal has done no great harm: we have plenty of other ways of expressing the process of coming upon things, finding or discovering them (although there is perhaps a sense in which Christopher Columbus ‘invented’ America). But, to move from an actual to a fictional example, imagine a state of affairs in which the word ‘love’, and all its cognates, had ceased to be used, by anyone, to say things like ‘I love you’ or ‘We love each other’ – expressions (originally the primary and central uses of the word ‘love’) which those using them had known how dangerous it was to use them carelessly; had known how vulnerable the users were to the risks of their misuse. Imagine, that is to say, a situation in which the word ‘love’ was now only used, as it were, at a distance, in the derived and secondary territory of reported speech. In stark contrast to the risks – to one’s identity, responsibility and history – of serious, self-involving use of the simple confession ‘I love you’, think

Nicholas Lash

133

how little is invested by the speaker in a statement such as ‘Queen Victoria deeply loved Prince Albert’. If, per impossibile, it were ever thus to happen that the primary and central confessional, self-involving, uses of the word ‘love’ and its cognates were to be rendered practically and imaginatively almost irrecoverable, human existence would have been thereby devastatingly, perhaps terminally, impoverished. It might seem as if this example is so far-fetched as not to have been worth concocting (or inventing!). And yet, I now want to argue that something not entirely dissimilar has happened, in western cultures, during the past four hundred years, to the word ‘God’. Few changes in the character, or structure, of the ways in which we understand, imagine, think about ourselves, the world, its history and all that’s in it have been more comprehensive, or had more far-reaching consequences, than the change from late mediaeval to early modern western culture. At one level, we can tell the story of the change as a shift in imaginative and intellectual ambition. Finding themselves in the dark, on a long and dangerous journey, mediaeval people tried to find out where to go and how to get there. Seeking their way home (for they knew themselves to be in exile), the intellectual dimension of their quest can be summed up as a search for understanding. And the search for understanding is, for all people and at all times, an endless search: whoever you are, and however wise and learned you may be, there is always infinitely more that you might try to understand. Early modern man (and, in the context of this thumbnail sketch, I doubt if any feminist who knows a little history would object to the expression) was in search of certainty and power. He wanted firm ground beneath his feet (his own feet, because standing on one’s own two feet, without assistance from unreliable so-called ‘authorities’, became, increasingly, part of his ambition) and, as it were, a mountainpeak on which to stand. He sought an explanation of the world, its intellectual mastery. Explanation, unlike understanding, if successful comes to an end. Explanations are stories of causes and effects. Why is there a damp patch on the ceiling? Because water is dripping through from the floor above. Why is there water dripping through? Because that blasted child let the bath overflow. End of story. End of explanation. Problem solved. Even in these supposedly ‘postmodern’ times, the totalitarian ambition of ‘complete’ explanation, of a comprehensively explanatory ‘theory of everything’, of becoming, intellectually, ‘masters of the universe’, still lingers on in certain scientific circles.1 Where does God come into all this? During the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, the word ‘god’ came to be used, for the first time, to name the ultimate explanation of the system of the world. And, when it was in due time realized that the system of the world was such as not to require any such single, overarching, 1 See, for example, the closing pages of Stephen Hawking, A Brief History of Time (1988), although Professor Hawking seems recently to have moderated his ambition on rediscovering Gödel’s Theorem.

134

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

independent, explanatory principle, the word ‘god’ was dispensed with, and modern ‘atheism’ was born.2 The Changing Nature of God Against this general background of the comprehensive transformation from premodern into modern culture, I now turn to what I have called ‘the changing nature of god’. My argument, in a nutshell, will be that ‘gods’ which, before modernity, were understood to be whatever people worshipped became, instead, beings of a particular kind – a ‘divine’ kind, we might say. And there are analogies between this usurpation of worship by description as the ‘home territory’ of uses of the word ‘god’ and my fictional parable of what might one day happen to uses of the word ‘love’. (Incidentally, if ‘gods’ are now beings of a particular kind, then Christians, Jews, Muslims and atheists all have this, at least, in common: that none of them believes in gods.) For most of our history, then, ‘gods’ were what people worshipped. I do not mean that people worshipped things called ‘gods’; I mean that the word ‘god’ simply signified whatever it is that someone worships. In other words, the word ‘god’ worked rather like the way in which the word ‘treasure’ still does. A treasure is what someone treasures, what someone highly values. And I can only find out what you value by asking you and by observing your behaviour. Some people value reputation, some a quiet life. The point is that there is no class of objects known as ‘treasures’. There is no use going into a supermarket and asking for six bananas, a loaf of bread, two packets of soap and three treasures. Valuing is a relationship: treasures are what we value. Similarly, ‘gods’ are what people worship, have their hearts ultimately set on. I can only find out what you worship, what your gods are, by asking you and by observing your behaviour. And, these days, it is almost certain that the gods you worship will not be named by you as gods. Most of us are polytheists, inconsistently and confusingly worshipping ourselves, our country, ‘freedom’, sex or money. There is no class of objects known as ‘gods’. Worshipping is a relationship: gods are what we worship. Even at this stage in the story, two notes of caution need to be sounded. In the first place, there are, of course, degrees of valuing: you can value something very highly indeed, or you can value it a little. Are there, similarly, degrees of ‘worshipping’? In point of terminology, clearly the answer is ‘Yes’, otherwise people in local government would spend a great deal of time confusing the Creator and Redeemer of the world with the local mayor (addressed formally as ‘your worship’). And so, every tradition comes up with ways of distinguishing the worship due to the unknown and holy mystery confessed to be Creator and Redeemer of the world from the various forms of reverence, estimation, acknowledgement of worth (‘worth-

2

See Michael Buckley, At the Origins of Modern Atheism (1987).

Nicholas Lash

135

ship’) differently due to creatures. The worship due to God, of course, goes far beyond mere reverence. It is, in its ambition, the total and absolute surrender of the self, acknowledgement of sheer contingency: ourselves and all things given back to the eternal giving which they express and celebrate. The great religious traditions of the world are best understood as schools, contexts of education, the participants in which help each other thus to worship, while yet not worshipping any thing: not the world, nor any constituent fact or feature of the world; not any individual or ideal; not any nation, dream, event or memory. My second cautionary note concerns a disturbing carelessness that is widespread in contemporary writing on the subject of religion. We live in a society the intellectual movers and shakers of which increasingly take it for granted that only children and the simple-minded still believe in God (Christianity is, as Newman said, deemed to be ‘behind the age’). Nevertheless, when writing about cultures other than their own, these educated secularists will tell you a great deal about other peoples’ ‘gods’. Indians, especially, are said to worship many gods. Notice the racism implicit in this description: most Indians, it implies, are either infantile or simple-minded. And yet it is questionable whether the Sanskritic tradition has ever, in fact, advocated polytheism.3 (The term ‘polytheism’ was first coined, in the seventeenth century, by an English Protestant, as a way of indicating that Indian ritual practices were really no better than the superstitions of Catholicism!) In other words, if the first point to be made is that the fundamental and primary uses of the concept of God are relational – ‘gods’ are what we worship – the second point to be made is that elementary courtesy, to say nothing of concern for truth, requires us to pay continually discriminate attention as to which words well translate as ‘god’ and which do not, and as to which patterns of behaviour do and do not count, and in what sense, as instances of ‘worship’. (A similar problem arises from the insouciance with which English-speaking people in the nineteenth century presumed that there must some word in every other language which corresponded to the sense which the word ‘religion’ had newly come to acquire. Thus the Sanskrit word ‘dharma’ was mistranslated as ‘religion’ and intractably deep misunderstanding between Indians and English-speaking westerners was guaranteed. See Lash 1996: 22–3). The confusion arises, of course, because those who write so carelessly about other peoples’ gods simply take for granted that the word ‘god’ names a natural kind, a class of entity. There are bananas, traffic lights, human beings and gods. Or perhaps not: on this account of how the word ‘god’ works, ‘theists’ are people who suppose the class of gods to have at least one member; ‘monotheists’ those who maintain that the class has one, and only one, member; and ‘atheists’ are those who think that, in the real world, the class of ‘gods’ is, like the class of ‘unicorns’, empty. (It should not, by now, surprise the reader to learn that all these words – ‘atheism’, ‘theism’, ‘monotheism’, ‘polytheism’ – were first invented in the seventeenth century.) 3 See Julius Lipner, The Hindus: Their Religious Beliefs and Practices (1994: 305); cf. Nicholas Lash, The Beginning and the End of ‘Religion’ (1996: 52).

136

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

One further complication: as the ‘primary grammar’ of the concept of God shifted from the relational language of praise and worship, of address, to the derived and secondary territory of description, the situation unfolded rather differently in English- and in German-speaking culture. In Britain, by coming to name the ultimate explanatory principle of the system of the world, ‘god’ ceased to be the subject of what Thomas Aquinas had called ‘holy teaching’, and became, instead, a topic in ‘mechanics’ or, as we would say these days, physics – the scientific study of the system of the world. In German culture, things went rather differently, the Germans being less interested in machinery than in deep thought. German metaphysics, from Kant to Heidegger, became an immensely impressive exercise in substituting philosophy for theology, pure thought for prayerful reflection. Way back in the eleventh century, St Anselm had written two small books: one called Monologion or ‘monologue’, the other Proslogion or ‘dialogue’, ‘response-speech’. Philosophy is of the first kind, theology of the second. Many of the great modern German thinkers supposed themselves to be developing the traditions of Christian thought into the circumstances of the modern world whereas they were, in fact, subverting it, substituting for theology a quite different enterprise. In 1807, Hegel published his Phänomenologie des Geistes. A 1977 translation rendered this as Phenomenology of Spirit, whereas, in 1931, an earlier translator had preferred Phenomenology of Mind. Was Hegel trying to give expression to the history of thought, or was he trying to realize the history of God? Or did he, perhaps, presume these two histories to be identical? There are so many words around – words such as ‘absolute’ and ‘spirit’; ‘the sublime’, ‘transcendence’, ‘power’ and ‘being’ – the large and misty use of which disguises from our view the depth of the gulf separating the monologues of modern metaphysics from those endlessly demanding, strenuously self-involving exercises in prayerful reflection which have characterized, in different ways, the theologies of the great religious traditions of the world. When talking about God, what difference does it make to spell it with a capital or a lower-case initial letter? Not a lot, one would have thought: bread and butter are still butter and bread, whichever word comes at the beginning of the sentence. What has happened, of course, is that we have got into the habit of imagining that ‘God’ (with a capital ‘G’) is the proper name of the object of our worship. Common names are names of members of a class: ‘tree’ names all the things that count as trees. Proper names are names proper to individual members of a class: all readers of this text are human beings but I am, I think, the only Nicholas Langrishe Alleyne Lash. But the incomprehensible and holy mystery we worship is not, I have been urging, a member of any class. Each of the great religious traditions of the world has had its own procedures for protecting us from the illusion that the Holy One can be thus pinned down, classified, given a proper name. When Moses stands before the burning bush and asks, ‘If I go to the Israelites and tell them that the God of their forefathers has sent me to them, and they ask me his name, what I shall say?’, he receives an answer

Nicholas Lash

137

which more or less boils down to ‘Mind your own business!’ (Exodus 3:13–14) (It is, incidentally, this mysterious reply, sometimes translated as ‘I am who I am’, which Aquinas quotes at the beginning of the discussion usually known as ‘the Five Ways’, in which his aim is not, as modern philosophy misleadingly puts it, to ‘prove that God exists’, to establish that there is a god, but rather to consider the sense in which ‘existence-talk’ is or is not appropriate here. Denys Turner, 2004: 152, has expressed it beautifully: ‘what the proofs prove is that in showing God to exist we have finally lost control over the meaning of “exists”.’) But if God has no proper name, how may we speak of Him? By discriminating among the innumerable names that we might use for Him. Much recent writing has given the impression that there are two kinds of theology: one kind which says things about God, using what one writer has called ‘concrete anthropomorphic imagery’, and which is good enough, apparently, for the simple-minded people who still go to church; and another, more ‘austere’, sophisticated kind, known as ‘negative’ theology, which denies the appropriateness of the things that the simple-minded say. This latter way of doing things is sometimes attributed to an esoteric tribe known as ‘mystics’.4 This, of course, is nonsense. Everything that human beings say of God, of the incomprehensible and holy mystery confessed by Christians to be creator and redeemer of the world, is said in words and images carved from the fabric of the world which the creator makes. We have no other materials to use, no other way to think, or speak, or act. In this sense, everything that is said of God, whether by way of affirmation or denial, is anthropomorphically expressed. The language that we use, the terminology that we employ, does not become less anthropomorphic, less sprung from earthly soil, by becoming more abstract, rarefied or technical. If anything, something more like the opposite is the case: the entire Bible bears witness to the fact that the imagery of the poet and the storyteller is better fitted than the abstractions of the philosopher to express the relations that obtain between the Holy One and the creation which He convenes and calls into His presence. In saying this, it is not my intention to disparage the indispensable contribution of rigorous philosophical reflection. The point is that everything we say of God, whatever our style or register of discourse, is anthropomorphically, metaphorically said, and that, perhaps paradoxically, habits of speech which, as it were, carry their metaphorical character on their sleeve may be less likely than more abstract expressions to lead us into the trap of supposing that now, at last, we are getting nearer to getting a ‘fix’ on God, to grasping ‘what God looks like’.5

4 James M. Byrne, God (2001: 69) and elsewhere; see my review in The Tablet (15 September 2001: 1300). 5 Some readers may wonder whether there are not things that may be said of God not metaphorically but analogically. Although it would take another essay to furnish warrants for the assertion, I believe that modem uses of the concept of ‘metaphor’ are capacious enough

138

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

‘Oh, I see: God is “spirit”, God is “transcendent”, God is “ineffable” – now I understand.’ Oh no you don’t! Or, at least, you are probably better set upon the road to understanding if you sing, with the psalmist, that God covers himself with light as with a garment, makes the clouds his chariot, and rides upon the wings of the wind (see Ps. 104:2–3) or, with Martin Luther, that ‘a mighty fortress is our God’. Images of strengthening and power, of sovereignty and weakness, of suffering and joy: these are good tools to take to school in quest of ever less inappropriate speech because, among other things, they remind us that to speak appropriately of God is always, at the same time, to speak appropriately of the world which God creates, and of our place and duties in that process of creation. Where creatures are concerned, it is possible to distinguish between, on the one hand, the kinds of things best thought of as what were once called ‘substances’, ‘chunky’ things, we might say, enduring over time – such as mountains, trees and rock formations, porpoises and people – and, on the other, things such as movements and events, actions and occurrences, the things we do and undergo, aspects of the ceaseless movement which constitutes our ever-changing world. Which kind does the word ‘God’, as used by Christians (who know that God is not a ‘thing’ of any kind) attempt to mention? Which is the more misleading: to speak of God as we might speak of things (including people), or as we might speak of events and movements and occurrences (such as ‘speaking’, for example)? This question can serve as a reminder that it may be well worth noticing that Thomas Aquinas (among other theologians in the past) took very seriously the suggestion that ‘the word “God” might actually be better regarded grammatically as a verb’6 rather than a noun. It is, and always has been, exceedingly difficult to speak sensibly of God. The attempt is, nevertheless, required of every Christian – in response to the one Word which God is, and which has been spoken to us. There are not now, nor have there ever been, two theologies: one ‘positive’, the other ‘negative’. The negative way, the ‘via negativa’, is simply the endless and endlessly demanding disciplining of language and imagination which we need. Newman put it well in a paper on ‘Certainty, intuition and the conceivable’, written in 1863 but unpublished in his lifetime: We can only speak of Him, whom we reason about but have not seen, in the terms of our experience. When we reflect on Him and put into words our thoughts about Him, we are forced to transfer to a new meaning ready made words, which primarily belong to objects of time and place. We are aware, while we do so, that they are inadequate, but we have the alternative of doing so, or doing nothing at all. We can only remedy their to take account of thirteenth-century distinctions between metaphorical and analogical predication. 6 Fergus Kerr, After Aquinas: Versions of Thomism (2002: 187). Recently, the Franciscan theologian Thomas Weinandy has suggested: ‘Put succinctly and boldly, the persons of the Trinity are not nouns; they are verbs and the names which designate them – Father, Son and Holy Spirit – designate the acts by which they are defined.’ (Thomas G. Weinandy, Does God Suffer?; 2000: 45–6)

Nicholas Lash

139

insufficiency by confessing it. We can do no more than put ourselves on the guard as to our own proceeding, and protest against it, while we do adhere to it. We can only set right one error of expression by another. By this method of antagonism we steady our minds, not so as to reach their object, but to point them in the right direction ... by saying and unsaying, to a positive result.7

The Changing Nature of Belief in God If what I have called the ‘primary grammar’ of the concept of God, that sense of the way the word works which most people in our culture simply take for granted, has, as I have suggested, undergone a fundamental shift or sea-change – from ‘god’ as ‘whatever it is that you worship’, whatever it is on which your heart is ultimately set, to ‘god’ as the name of a kind or class of entities of which there may or may not, in reality, be any members – then we might expect that what is meant by ‘believing in God’ has undergone a corresponding shift. And this, indeed, is what has happened; hence my heading for this section: ‘The Changing Nature of Belief in God’. ‘I believe in God.’ Every Christian says this, or something like it, every time that they perform that act of worship which is the credal confession of Christian faith. What does it mean? Consider these three statements of belief: ‘I believe in unicorns’; ‘I believe in keeping out of debt’; ‘I believe in Tony Blair’. Someone using the first of these expressions is almost certainly expressing the opinion that there are, in the real world, actual members of the class of unicorns. Most people don’t say, ‘I believe in gods’, but many people, even these days, do say, ‘I believe in God’. And I guess that, in saying this, many of them are saying something like, ‘I believe that God exists’, that God is as real as, or infinitely more real than, the other realities that there are. I cannot imagine someone saying, ‘I believe in unicorn’, in the singular. Perhaps we say ‘I believe in God’ in the singular because debate, these days, rages not between those who believe in many gods and those who believe in one, but between those who believe that there is one real god and those who believe that all gods are fictional. The trouble is, of course, that, along this track, it is very difficult to avoid falling into the trap of supposing, as I put it earlier, that ‘god’ is the name of a particular kind of thing: namely, divine things. But, if this is how the statement is understood, then, for reasons that I indicated earlier, far from being an expression of Christian believing, such as might find its place at the outset of a Christian creed, it is incompatible with Christian (and Jewish, and Islamic) faith – because particular kinds of things, whether the kinds have one or many members, are what creatures are, jostling and competing with each other for space, and interest, and survival. Let’s try my second candidate, ‘I believe in keeping out of debt’. Unlike ‘I believe in unicorns’, this is not an opinion as to a matter of fact, but rather an evaluation; its object is a policy of action, a way of living: keeping out of debt is what I ought to do. Facts and values, what ‘is’ the case and what we ‘ought’ to do, 7 John Henry Newman, The Theological Papers of John Henry Newman on Faith and Certainty (1976b: 102).

140

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

are so inextricably intertwined that sometimes, I suspect, when people say that they believe in God, they are expressing their commitment to a whole range of moral policies and attitudes which they take to be entailed by such belief. Nevertheless, the statement ‘I believe in God’, even taken as a declaration of ethical policy, is still not a Christian confession of faith. It might seem obvious that ‘I believe in Tony Blair’ is the least plausible candidate to be considered by analogy with ‘I believe in God’. It does, however, have something going for it. Whereas ‘I believe in unicorns’ merely expresses an opinion as to fact, and ‘I believe in keeping out of debt’ goes one step further by committing the speaker to a way of living, ‘I believe in Tony Blair’ takes us into quite different territory. It expresses the speaker’s trust, whether prudently or imprudently, in someone else. It thereby brings us out of the isolated world of individual opinion and preference and evaluation into the realm of personal knowledge and relationship. These puzzles about ‘believing’ have a very ancient history. In the fifth century, St Augustine gave them classical expression in distinguishing between three Latin constructions. ‘Credere Deo’, he tells us, is believing in God in the sense of believing God, believing what God says. ‘Credere Deum’ is a matter of believing God to be God, both in the sense of acknowledging that God exists and in the sense of acknowledging that the one we mention when we speak of ‘God’ is, as it were, the only real God. (The natural rendering of this, in English, would probably be ‘believing in God’ in the sense that, I have suggested, has become so problematic.) Finally, there is ‘Credere in Deum’, the expression as we have it in the Creeds; an expression with a sense of movement, of direction, of going somewhere, of ‘godwardness’, believing ‘into’ God. Here is Augustine’s account: ‘What is it, therefore, to believe in Him [credere in eum]? It is in believing to love, in believing to delight, in believing to walk towards him, and be incorporated amongst the limbs or members of his body’.8 We live in a culture in which many people, believers and nonbelievers alike, seem to think that the word ‘god’ is really quite easy to use. We have developed a dangerous kind of deafness to the wisdom of all the world’s great religious traditions – Christianity, Judaism, Islam, Upanishadic Hinduism, perhaps also some strands of Buddhism – which, having learned the hard way, have for centuries insisted that speaking appropriately of God is, while not impossible, the most difficult, the most demanding, the most dangerous thing that human speech can do, because appropriate speech brings to language appropriate relationship. But, if this is the case, and if the word ‘God’ (with a capital ‘G’) has today become so burdened with inappropriate use, why don’t we simply discard it, and speak in some other way about the holy mystery which the word misnames? After all, it is not on a three-letter word that our hearts, identities and hopes are set. The short answer, I suggest, is that the long, and complex, and conflictual history of humankind’s engagement in the educational 8 Augustine’s discussion may be found in his Commentary on John, xxix (Migne 1844–62: PL, XXXV, 1631). The somewhat free translation is my own: see Nicholas Lash, Believing Three Ways in One God (1992: 20).

Nicholas Lash

141

process of learning non-idolatrously to worship, learning wholeheartedly and without reserve to give ourselves to the truth, and flourishing, and freedom, to which we have been called, is simply too bound up with the history of the uses and misuses of this little word. However difficult it is to use appropriately, there is no other word which similarly signals that the truth and destiny and healing of the world infinitely outstrip the world’s capacities. Knowing the Unknowable God9 Nevertheless, it is not the troublesome little word ‘god’ that is the heart of the matter, but the sense of who we are, as human beings, and of how all things – the world of which we form a part – hang together. The first of two fundamental lessons to be learned through the educational practices or (as they are usually called these days) ‘religious rituals’ of such ancient schools of wisdom as Judaism, Christianity, Islam and Hinduism, is that the deepest sense of things is not contained within the narratives and structures of the world. It follows that there is no feature of the world on which we may absolutely set our hearts, which we may worship. Hence the insistence that God is not an entity or member of a class of entities; not ‘one of the items that exist within the universe’, sharing ‘the same conceptual territory as do the limited agents we are familiar with’.10 Thus, for example, the equation ‘God + the world = x’ (an equation for which pantheism gives ‘x’ the value ‘1’, while many modern western theisms and the atheisms which deny them give it the value ‘2’) is incoherent precisely because it presupposes that ‘God’ does share ‘the same conceptual territory’ as ‘the world’.11 9 Cf. David B. Burrell, Knowing the Unknowable God: Ibn-Sina, Maimonides, Aquinas (1986). 10 Archbishop Rowan Williams, ‘Analysing atheism: Unbelief and the world of faiths’, a lecture delivered in Georgetown University, Washington, DC, on 29 March 2004. I am grateful to the Archbishop for permission to quote from his lecture. 11 In circles which suppose the equation to make sense, God is often said to be a ‘supernatural’ being (whose existence atheists deny and theists affirm). Originally, the term ‘supernatural’ was used, adjectively or adverbially, to indicate the condition of creatures enabled, by God’s grace, to act beyond the capacities of their given nature. As I have often pointed out to students, if you come across a rabbit playing Mozart on the violin, you can bet your bottom dollar that that rabbit is acting supernaturally. Rabbits have not got it in them to play the violin. Moreover, things being the way they are with human sinfulness, if you come across human beings acting with consistent kindness, selflessness and generosity, the same assumption is in order. We simply have not got it in us to be that virtuous. On this account, it is possible that creatures, graced by God’s enlivening gift, may act supernaturally. God, alone, cannot be supernatural, cannot act supernaturally, for what would graciously ‘elevate’ or heal God’s ‘nature’? In time, unfortunately, people forgot all this and, having decided that all there is in the familiar world, the world which we inhabit and explore, may be lumped together under the one word ‘Nature’ (which rapidly acquired the capital initial letter), they described those who supposed that, over and above this real world of nature, there are forces and entities of some

142

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

The second fundamental lesson to be learned in the ancient schools of wisdom is that, as Hegel put it: ‘God does not offer Himself for observation.’ (Hegel 1984: 258) He was not saying that knowledge of God is impossible, but that it is not the kind of knowledge at which scientists and historians aim, as they put some feature of the world, or some event in history, under the microscope of academic scrutiny. The objects of such scrutiny are, shall we say, inert, picked up with tweezers, inspected, classified, conceptually controlled. God is not such an object. Thus it is that most of the major religious traditions of the world have sought in personal knowledge – in the knowledge that human beings acquire of themselves and of each other through networks of relationship – the least inappropriate analogy or metaphor for the character of the relations between human beings and God. Participants in the school of wisdom that is Christianity learn three things about the world, themselves, and God.12 Christians are people who have learned that all there is is not mere brute fact, uninterpretable surd, structured by random power and violence, but – in the last analysis – gift: gift given in tranquillity, and that the ending of all things is peace. To understand all things as given, as expression of the giving that is God’s own self, and the outcome of all giving to be life and harmony, is to understand what Christians mean by ‘Holy Spirit’. Learning to be a Christian is learning, through acceptance of the gift God is, to give oneself to others, and to God. Christians are also people who have learned that, notwithstanding the savagely destructive egotism with which human beings disfigure the world, all things do – in the last analysis – make good sense. The world is articulable, utterable, and human beings – the ‘speaking part’ of things – bear the responsibility of truthful speech and action. Truth is tradition-dependent, and learning how to speak the truth takes time. Moreover, the fundamental form of speech is utterance in response to God’s constituting utterance of the world. The fundamental form of speech, in other words, is prayer. To understand all things as uttered, as expressive of the utterance that is God’s own self, is to understand what Christians mean by naming God as ‘Word’: the one Word through whom all things are made and whose focal and definitive expression is Jesus Christ, the Word made flesh. Christians are, finally, people who have learned that human beings ‘come to the real truth about themselves precisely by the fact that they patiently endure and accept their knowledge that their own reality is not in their own hands’ (Rahner 1978: 43). To learn this is to reconfigure mutual dependence as, not bondage and lordship, but other, higher order, as postulating the existence of ‘supernatural’ beings, the very head or chief of which is the being which religious believers know as ‘god’ (or, by analogy with ‘Nature’, ‘God’). In other words, this fundamental shift in usage of the concept of the supernatural was, albeit unintentionally, pregnant with modem atheism. 12 Having, for most of this paper, confined myself to formal or ‘grammatical’ considerations, it seems necessary, in conclusion, to attempt some constructive account, however ludicrously telegraphic, of the Christian doctrine of God. This paper is, in fact, an expanded version of the first chapter of a book the remainder of which is devoted to this constructive task: see Nicholas Lash, Holiness, Speech and Silence (2004).

Nicholas Lash

143

friendship: friendship not only between creatures but also between creatures and the fecund generosity, creating all things out of nothing, we call ‘God’. To understand that ‘the autonomy of the creature does not grow in inverse but in direct proportion to the degree of the creature’s dependence on, and belonging to God’ (Rahner 1966: 12) is to understand what Christians mean by naming God as ‘Father’. Participants in the school of wisdom that is Christianity learn that they, and all things, are created, are lovingly created, and lovingly created into peace. Learning this entails acknowledgement of responsibility to grow in openness – through everything we say, and do, and suffer – to the all-transforming truth which we confess. Further Reading Buckley, M.J., Denying and Disclosing God: The Ambiguous Progress of Modern Atheism, New Haven, CT, and London: Yale University Press, 2004 Burrell, D.B., Freedom and Creation in Three Traditions, Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 1993 Kerr, F., After Aquinas: Versions of Thomism, London: Blackwell, 2002 Lash, N., The Beginning and the End of ‘Religion’, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996 _____ , Easter in Ordinary: Reflections on Human Experience and the Knowledge of God, Charlottesville, VA: University Press of Virginia, 1988 _____ , Holiness, Speech and Silence: Reflections on the Question of God, Aldershot and Burlington, VT: Ashgate, 2004 Rahner, K., ‘Thoughts on the possibility of belief today’, in his Theological Investigations, V, trans. K.-H. Kruger, Baltimore, MD, and London: Helicon Press and Darton, Longman & Todd, 1966, 3–22 Turner, D., The Darkness of God: Negativity in Christian Mysticism, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995

This page intentionally left blank

Chapter 8

Felicity and Fusion: Speech Act Theory and Hermeneutical Philosophy Dan R. Stiver

A number of thinkers, especially in the field of theology and biblical hermeneutics, have turned to speech act theory in order to traverse ugly hermeneutical ditches from the past and to enable interpretative advances. Nicholas Wolterstorff, Kevin Vanhoozer and Nancey Murphy are three of the most notable.1 All three have been attracted to speech act theory because it allows for more nuanced approaches in dealing, for example, with the vexed relationships between history and literature (might we say ‘fiction’?) in the canonical Christian gospels. All endorse the extension of the range of speech act theory to ‘textual acts’; in other words, to written works. All three mentioned above also conclude that this turn to speech act theory undergirds a return to the idea of authorial intent as a control for interpretative anarchy. While endorsing this basic appropriation of speech act theory, what I would like to do in this paper is to set out some significant limitations that have slipped under the radar, so to speak, which would thus, as an example, call into question the revival of authorial intent. The lens through which I will examine the strengths and weaknesses of speech act theory is continental hermeneutical philosophy. The reason for the latter is that the aforementioned speech act theorists appropriate speech act theory for its hermeneutical contributions, but they generally are critical of continental hermeneutical philosophy per se.2 In addition, as they applaud the 1 Representative books are Nicholas Wolterstorff, Divine Discourse: Philosophical Reflections on the Claim that God Speaks (1995); Kevin Vanhoozer, Is There a Meaning in This Text?: The Bible, the Reader, and the Morality of Literary Knowledge (1998); Nancey C. Murphy, Beyond Liberalism and Fundamentalism: How Modern and Postmodern Philosophy Set the Theological Agenda (1996). 2 Wolterstorff directly contrasts his ‘authorial discourse interpretation’ view with Paul Ricoeur’s ‘textual sense interpretation’, Ricoeur being a pre-eminent continental hermeneutical philosopher along with Hans-Georg Gadamer (Wolterstorff 1995: 152). Murphy contrasts her ‘Anglo-American postmodernity’ with what she considers to be relativistic deconstructive continental postmodern philosophy. See especially her Beyond Liberalism and Fundamentalism (1996) and Anglo-American Postmodernity: Philosophical Perspectives on Science, Religion, and Ethics (1997). She actually does not seem to consider the tradition of continental philosophy represented by Ricoeur and Gadamer. Vanhoozer is the exception in that he has written a book on Ricoeur (Vanhoozer 1990), appropriates continental philosophy a great deal, and sets speech act theory within a broader horizon of communicative action.

146

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

extension of spoken acts to written acts, they do not always appreciate the subtle shift in dynamics that this creates, which continental thinkers such as Paul Ricoeur and Jacques Derrida have highlighted.3 What I hope to show is that speech act theory does provide a supple framework for hermeneutics that is genuinely helpful, but its fruitfulness and its implications are limited by not drawing upon the kind of dynamics of which hermeneutical philosophy is particularly aware. First, I will briefly indicate the basic direction of this new approach of speech act theory. Second, I will probe it for some significant limitations. Third, I will explore the kind of supplement provided by continental hermeneutic philosophy that will both enable and perhaps transform the appropriation of speech act theory. New-style Speech Act Theory Wolterstorff highlighted the more recent appropriation of speech act theory in the publication of his Gifford Lectures entitled Divine Discourse. His main thesis is that speech act theory opens up in a remarkable way the possibility of regarding God as speaking that does not reduce to the act of revelation, which he regards as too limiting. In fact, he says, ‘I think now, finally, after all these centuries, contemporary speech action gives us the theoretical equipment to see why [we can say that God literally speaks]’ (Wolterstorff 1997: 30). This, of course, involves the extension of speech act theory to written works from the past that are contained in the Hebrew and Christian scriptures, as well as other written works. Speech act theory offers the flexibility of not only noting what is written but what is being done in what is written.4 A speech act may be ‘unhappy’ or ‘infelicitous’ by being false, but it may ‘misfire’ in several other ways as well.5 According to Wolterstorff, speech act theory thus points us to the manifold variety of actions in communication, such as deputizing and appropriating others’ works, which give him a vehicle by which we can understand what is traditionally called God’s inspiration of Scripture.6 He concludes that we cannot get away from the idea that God is speaking, for example – commanding, assuring, promising – through the words of Scripture. Quite apart from the complexities that arise through this idea He contrasts, however, his emphasis upon authorial intent in a similar way to Wolterstorff with continental emphases upon the text. See, for example, the chapter, ‘Undoing the reader: Contextuality and ideology’ in his Is There a Meaning in This Text? (1998: 148–95) 3 A representative text for the former is Ricoeur’s ‘The hermeneutical function of distantiation’ in his Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences (1981a: 131–44). For the latter, it is Derrida’s Of Grammatology (1974). Derrida is not usually included as a hermeneutic philosopher – and is sometimes antagonistic towards Gadamer and Ricoeur – but his own style of a hermeneutics of suspicion and emphasis on writing versus speech, along with some other themes, chimes in with broader contours of continental philosophy. 4 The landmark work is John L. Austin’s How to Do Things with Words (1975). 5 The language goes back to Austin’s work. 6 See especially Wolterstorff, Divine Discourse (1995: ch. 3).

Dan R. Stiver

147

of ‘double discourse’ (1997: 44), Wolterstorff (1995: ch. 10) also maintains that we must return to the criterion of authorial intent because speech actions could not be understood apart from the intentions of an author (whether they be human or divine!). Vanhoozer (1998: ch. 5) joins Wolterstorff at this point in insisting upon the fact that the appropriation of speech act theory necessitates the return to authorial intent as a criterion of meaning. At the same time, he also affirms speech act theory for the flexibility it brings when expanded to deal with texts such as Scripture. Nancey Murphy (1996: 124) likewise sees a necessary connection between speech act theory and authorial intent. She appropriates speech act theory as an Anglo-American postmodern account of language that transcends the dichotomy between seeing language as expressive and as representative, noting that it can be both. For all of them, speech act theory overcomes the stultifying simplicity of other views, allowing a place for questions of history and reality. It allows, for example, a place for both literary questions of genre and questions of historical context. The place of authorial intent also limits the proliferation of meaning, narrowing it to the intended speech act by the author. As Vanhoozer puts it, ‘My thesis is twofold: that texts have determinate natures, and that authors determine what these are’ (1998: 228). Limitations In an earlier article (Stiver 2001b), I pointed out how a dialogue between speech act theory and Paul Ricoeur's hermeneutical philosophy can enhance both. In terms of the limitations of speech act theory, Ricoeur provides a much broader philosophical framework, offering a hermeneutical view of the self, of the self's judgements, and of how historical and fictional judgements both involve the mimetic or productive imagination. Speech act theory is more precise in showing how historiographical conditions and literary conditions interrelate. Ricoeur is more helpful in showing that they are inherently interrelated and what kind of judgement is involved in each. Moreover, Ricoeur develops a much more elaborate hermeneutical process, a hermeneutical arc, that allows for appropriate use of critical methodologies, which speech act theory per se hardly touches. For our purposes, three related limitations of speech act theory are of concern. One is that speech act theory was generated out of conventional examples that are rather clear-cut, with the ubiquitous commands such as ‘Pass the bread, please’, or declarations such as ‘I now pronounce you husband and wife’.7 In doing so, they have explored in detailed ways the immense variety of speech acts in language and thus demonstrate the problem of the ‘descriptive fallacy’, that is, the assumption that most linguistic activity involves simple description (Austin 1975: 1, 100). Austin

7

For example, see Austin (1975), Searle (1969) and McClendon and Smith (1994).

148

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

concluded that even these descriptive statements, ‘constatives’, were a kind of speech action (52). When this paradigm was moved to include written works, things became more complex. Still, there is a tendency to think in terms of strict conventions that guide judgements of what kind of speech act is occurring, whether it is a smaller unit such as a promise or command or a larger unit such as genre and plot. What this provenance in conventions tends to miss, however, is precisely what generates hermeneutics, namely the places in written works, often from different times, places and cultures, that are immensely creative, provocative, and thus not easily domesticated in terms of any kind of common convention. For example, Ricoeur’s major work on metaphor (1977) focused upon the creativity of metaphor, its ‘semantic impertinence’ that precisely does not follow conventions. Further, understanding a Platonic work as a kind of dialogue does not go far in helping to understand what Socrates is doing, for example, in the Meno or the Euthyphro. Understanding that Luke is writing a gospel and Jesus telling a parable does not go far in discerning the meaning of the Parable of the Prodigal Son. Understanding the conventions, as far as they go, is crucial – or we might say, necessary – but not sufficient. Thus, speech act theory has tended not to connect clearly with larger issues that involve difficult matters of epistemology, larger issues of the nature of the self, and even larger issues of metaphysics. Secondly, and related, with speech act theory’s concern to show the complexity of language that we do understand, it has hardly dealt with the problems of ideology and power relations that go so far to undo and disturb communication. This complaint is not unlike Jürgen Habermas’s (1980) criticism of Hans-Georg Gadamer that Gadamer does not deal with the issue of systematically distorted communication. While others like Ricoeur and even Gadamer himself have grappled with that issue,8 there is no comparable treatment of the issue for speech act theory. It is thus not clear how critical methodologies such as source criticism and ideological criticism come into play in speech act theory. A third problem that arises from the starting-point in conventional speech acts is that the move to texts, especially ancient texts, problematizes the whole notion of the author. When focusing on an evident interaction between a speaker and a listener, as much as we may learn from it, the dynamic of figuring out what the speaker is intending to say or do is natural. As one moves to texts that are composites, often with unknown authors, multiple authors, and editors or redactors, this dynamic shifts. We may have texts, as with Aristotle, that may involve notes from him or by students at different times in his life compiled by someone, which may or may not be Aristotle, into one work. In Genesis, we apparently have multiple sources from different epochs combined in various stages into one work – by an unknown author at a time and place that is only roughly known (spanning perhaps centuries). What does it mean then to appeal to authorial intent as the means of hermeneutical control? One of the worries of Wolterstorff (1995: 89, 172–3), for example, is that if we do not 8 Paul Ricoeur, ‘Hermeneutics and the critique of ideology’ (1981d); Hans-Georg Gadamer, ‘On the scope and function of hermeneutical reflection’ (1976).

Dan R. Stiver

149

know the author’s intent, the work may be some kind of deception or even the work of a madman! The problem is that we often do not know the author, particularly in the case of much of Scripture. The implication of Wolterstorff’s concern is that we would not be able to attach any confidence to the works about whose authors and intentions we do not have some reasonable knowledge. This would play havoc, also, with something like folk tales, whose original authors are lost to the distant past. Revisions We can highlight and also attempt to supplement these limitations of speech act theory by looking at four concepts that arise out of the hermeneutical tradition: the fusion of horizons, practical wisdom, embodiment, and the hermeneutic of suspicion. The notion that any act of understanding involves a fusion of horizons is of course based on Gadamer’s thought (1993: 306). He says, ‘It is enough to say that we understand in a different way, if we understand at all’ (297). In the background is his concern with interpreting ancient texts such as those of Plato and Aristotle. The contemporary reader obviously brings a different horizon of culture, background beliefs, attitudes and expectations (to the text) than ancient philosophers. Gadamer, however, is not pessimistic about the outcome; rather, he is filled with wonder at the act of understanding, even across such a ditch of history. What he does want to say, nonetheless, is that understanding is a creative act of the fusion of these different horizons. The understanding of a reader is a new production, in part complicated and in part enriched by the history of the interpretation of that same text. In comparison with speech act theory’s rather simple examples from within a culture, this concept drawn from examples between cultures points out that neither conventions nor knowledge of author’s intentions can fix the meaning. Even having a fair idea of an author may not be able to fix intent. Think about, for instance, the meaning of Plato’s forms or Aristotle’s active intellect. In the New Testament, consider Jesus’ command not to resist an evildoer but to turn the other cheek or Paul’s reference to election and predestination, not to mention notoriously complex notions such as the Kingdom of God and of Heaven and Hell. These are highly contested notions that are also extremely rich. They are not so diffuse that one cannot have strong views, even convictions, about them, and offer significant backing for one’s views. Yet they cannot be resolved by appeal either to authorial intent or to common conventions. They point on the one hand to the significance of the interpreter’s horizon and also to the complexity of issues that can be pointed to but not necessarily explicated by conventions. The fact that common conventions can aid but not resolve an issue indicates the second hermeneutical notion that is relevant, that is, practical wisdom, or phronesis. This notion is rooted, of course, in Aristotle’s Nicomachean Ethics, but has been extended, especially by Gadamer and others, to be a basic form of intellectual

150

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

judgement in many areas.9 Aristotle conceptualized phronesis most clearly as the judgement needed to apply a general ethical rule to a particular situation, realizing that no rule can do justice to all the particulars.10 With the demise of classical foundationalism, such wisdom is also needed when decisive evidence or reasons are not forthcoming in any area, especially in determining what should be the foundations of a particular discipline or viewpoint.11 It is the kind of judgement that is rooted in who we are – in our horizon – that enables us to make judgements when the conclusions are underdetermined by the evidence. Speech act theory seems to trade on examples precisely where phronesis is not needed, where conventions establish what act is occurring. That is why appeal to the author’s intended speech act in this type of case is not too problematic: the author’s intention can be seen in the speech act itself, not in some hidden, ghostly event. When speech act theory, however, moves to large literary works that are provocative and creative, the general rules and conventions are a part of the meaning but cannot easily establish it. Plato can use a dialogical style to describe the ideal republic, but his creative approach cannot be understood just by knowing what other people have done. What he did in that speech act inevitably involves something like phronetic judgement in moving from conventions or what is generally understood to what he means that is creatively new. Ricoeur (1992: 10th Study), who expands phronesis to his concept of ‘attestation’ as one’s ability to take a life-stance in the world with others, sees it as especially dealing with one’s ethical stance and with those issues that cannot be resolved in any certain way. In speaking of attestation, he says: To my mind, attestation defines the sort of certainty that hermeneutics may claim, not only with respect to the epistemic exaltation of the cogito in Descartes, but also with respect to its humiliation in Nietzsche and its successors. Attestation may appear to require less than one and more than the other. (Ricoeur 1992: 21)

Likewise, phronesis also points to the significance of the reader, who is making the judgement, as much as to the author. A contribution of reader-response theory, which developed out of phenomenology, as did hermeneutical philosophy in general, is that 9 See especially Gadamer, Truth and Method (1993), which develops this idea as a whole, but especially 324. The Foreword to this second edition makes clear that he sees this kind of hermeneutical or phronetic understanding as applying even to the foundations of science (xxix). Also, for the universal extension of phronetic thinking as hermeneutics, see Bernstein (1985: 131–50) and Dunne (1993). 10 For example, see Aristotle’s Nicomachean Ethics, Book VI, chapter 12. Many debates have ensued about whether Aristotle meant for phronesis also to include deliberation about the ends as well as the means. In any case, as we shall see below, this is the move that many contemporary thinkers have taken. 11 For classical foundationalism, see especially Alvin Plantinga, ‘Reason and belief in God’ (1983). See William C. Placher, Unapologetic Theology: A Christian Voice in a Pluralistic Conversation (1989) for an account of how several disciplines, including not only the hard sciences but even mathematics, cannot establish their own foundational principles or axioms apart from such interpretative judgement.

Dan R. Stiver

151

the writer intends for the reader to fill in the gaps, which adds support to Gadamer’s insight that a ‘fusion of horizons’ is involved in any act of understanding. Thus not everything is written or described because the reader’s reading competency and imagination is assumed in order dynamically to produce or even create meaning. While reader-response approaches can be relativistic and virtually leave out the author altogether, they need not be and can even support a rather conservative, authororiented approach. However, with the kind of rich texts that we are considering, the role of a ‘phronetic imagination’ on the part of the reader, we might say, is crucial even in arriving at the meaning intended by the author. Like Aristotle’s sense that ethical rules cannot suffice to discern the good in a particular situation, neither can conventions suffice to discern the meaning of rich texts. As a third indicator of the elusive nature of interpretation of provocative texts, the phenomenological and hermeneutical emphasis on embodiment comes also into play. A part of anyone’s horizon, and, for that matter, anyone’s phronetic judgement involves not just drawing insightfully upon linguistic convention and specific beliefs but also upon the tacit way in which beliefs and attitudes are embodied. Contrary to much of our intellectual tradition where the body and emotions were seen as impediments to understanding, the body and emotions are ingredient in any act of understanding. Maurice Merleau-Ponty underscored that through our bodies ‘we are involved in the world and with others in an extricable tangle’.12 Our background attitudes and beliefs are embodied in deep ways that influence our ways of interacting especially with peoples and works of very different cultures. A contemporary affirmation of the value of this physical life, for example, will likely shape – and perhaps challenge – the way we approach Plato’s more negative view of the material world as well as that of many mediaevals. Ancient Greek debates about what constitutes happiness cannot be understood apart from a felt life, something which is difficult to put in words or to explicate. Our lived experience will affect how we respond to a philosopher who calls for involvement in public life or one who calls for withdrawal from public life. In any case, interpretation of a rich text involves drawing on these reservoirs of lived feeling and experience that cannot be reduced to conventions. They are a part of what constitutes our 12 Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Phenomenology of Perception (1962: 454). It is interesting to note that Ricoeur saw himself as attempting, especially in his Freedom and Nature, to ‘provide a counterpart in the practical sphere to Merleau-Ponty’s Phenomenology of Perception’ (Ricoeur 1995: 11). See my chapter (Stiver 2001a: 161–7) on the issue of embodiment in Ricoeur. To these two thinkers, we should not fail to mention Gabriel Marcel, of whom Ricoeur saw himself as a disciple. On the contemporary scene, this perspective is increasingly supported by scientific studies such as those of Antonio Damasio, Descartes’ Error: Emotion, Reason and the Human Brain (1994) and Looking for Spinoza: Joy, Sorrow and the Feeling Brain (2003). Other important works that emphasize that cognition is impossible without the body and the feelings are Martha C. Nussbaum’s Poetic Justice: The Literary Imagination and Public Life (1995) and Upheavals of Thought: The Intelligence of Emotions (2001); also George Lakoff and Mark Johnson, Philosophy in the Flesh: The Embodied Mind and Its Challenge to Western Thought (1999).

152

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

horizon and our individual phronetic judgement. Rather than being an obstacle, our emotional experience is something that enables us to understand in a deeper way. We could not express anything well without conventions, but conventions cannot capture everything, particularly creative and provocative expressions, which is what we usually are most concerned to interpret in philosophy and in theology – and what are usually most deeply rooted in embodied experience. Again, this third indicator points to the importance of the reader, in what the reader brings to the text, as much as to the author. Martha Nussbaum is instructive on this point in trying to show how attention to literature informs and shapes the judgements made on legal issues. In other words, knowing the technicalities of the law is not enough to guide the kinds of difficult decisions that judges have to make; rather, the capacity to imagine and feel how a ‘reasonable person’ in a very different situation might respond is critical. She explains this in the context of how much of our tradition has judged the emotions: The calculating intellect claims to be impartial and capable of strict numerical justice, while emotions, it alleges, are prejudiced, unduly partial to the close at hand. … [Thus] the reader of novels, taught to cherish particular characters rather than to think of the whole world, receives a moral formation subversive of justice. This we may doubt. … the abstract vision of the calculating intellect proves relatively short-sighted and undiscriminating, unless aided by the vivid and empathetic imagining of what it is really like to live a certain sort of life.13

She probes, among several cases, the way a conservative Supreme Court justice showed remarkable capacity to empathize with a female construction worker being harassed on the job (1995: 104–11). It is not difficult to imagine how a ‘calculating intellect’, often so prized in law and in philosophy (and in religion) might excel in erudite speech act analysis. The contribution that hermeneutical philosophy might be able to make to speech act theory lies in the requirement of ‘vivid and empathetic imagining’, something critical to phronesis and attestation. Such a capacity to broaden and fuse horizons is thus reminiscent of the challenge of interpreting rich texts, a similarity of textual and legal interpretation that has been deeply plumbed by hermeneutical philosophers such as Gadamer and Ricoeur.14 A final contribution of hermeneutical philosophy is the hermeneutic of suspicion. This brings a heightened sensitivity to the way speech acts can not only misfire but

13 Nussbaum 1995: 67f. Nussbaum actually frames the book around Charles Dickens’s novel, Hard Times, and the need for ‘fancy’. 14 Gadamer (1993: 307–41) draws on legal hermeneutics to make the point that application is not an optional third dimension to understanding and interpretation but is implicitly ingredient at the start. Ricoeur also argues in his hermeneutical arc that interpretation is incomplete without application, but he especially draws (1980) on the idea of a witness at a trial to develop his early understanding of attestation. See also on this point my Theology After Ricoeur (2001a: chs 2 and 7).

Dan R. Stiver

153

also be systematically distorted by ideology in covert and complex ways. Especially in the context of Ricoeur’s hermeneutical arc which allows for a dialectic between understanding and critical explanation, critical theory and methodology can be brought to bear. In the end, however, the critical moment is not necessarily the final moment but calls for a ‘post-critical’ appropriation, not apart from, but in and through, the moment of suspicion. Here, speech act theory with its analysis of conventions and structures of communication has an important, even necessary, place. However, the more explicitly developed critical dimension of hermeneutics (and continental philosophy in general) brings more attention to the place of distortion as well as to the dynamics of appropriation by the reader across horizons of culture and critique. Dietrich Bonhoeffer: An Example An example may be helpful in tying these ideas together. Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s general story is well known, and his significance is well deserved not only as a great and stimulating theologian but also as one of the best-known modern Christian martyrs. One aspect of the background to his courageous faith in resisting Nazi Germany was his brief study in New York City at Union Seminary in 1931–32, especially with Reinhold Niebuhr.15 Perhaps more important even that that, he met two friends and fellow students who seemed to have great influence upon him. One was an African– American student, Franklin Fisher, who influenced him in exploring Harlem and going to an African–American Baptist church, where Bonhoeffer participated in lively black worship. Under the preaching of Adam Clayton Powell, Sr, he also taught a Sunday School class and worked with youth clubs for six months. Some of Bonhoeffer’s most noted expressions were apparently proclaimed by Powell, such as ‘cheap grace’ and ‘world come of age’ (see Holland 2000). Bonhoeffer was so struck by this that he later would play tapes of their worship for his seminary students in Germany, telling his students that he was fulfilling a promise not to forget what he learned there (Nelson 1991). Bonhoeffer thus drank deeply of the black experience in the United States. Once he led a walkout of an American restaurant when he saw that his friend Franklin was not going to be served (Nelson 1991). Scott Holland adds: Bonhoeffer was intrigued by the music and culture of New York but he hated its racism. He became a smart and sensitive critic of American racism and this attention to racism seemed to deepen his critiques of German anti-Semitism. He discussed this problem freely with his brother Karl-Friedrich, who had studied at Harvard on a physics fellowship. KarlFriedrich concluded that the problem of racism in the United States was so terrible that he could never imagine raising a family in America. (Holland 2000)

15 Scott Holland, ‘First we take Manhattan, then we’ll take Berlin: Bonhoeffer’s New York’, Cross Currents, 50 (Fall 2000), journal online, http://search.epnet.com/direct. asp?an=3672625&db=aph, accessed 8 May 2004.

154

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

This, of course, was before Hitler had risen to power in Germany and induced his anti-Semitic madness. Another friend that Bonhoeffer made at Union was a deeply dedicated Christian pacifist named Jean Lasserre. At one point, Bonhoeffer, Fisher and Lasserre made a cross-country trip together across the US into Mexico for a conference on pacifism. Anyone aware of the distance from New York City traversing that far across the US and Mexico in the early 1930s can appreciate the concrete embodied dimension of such a trip! Lasserre reported, ‘We shared the same things and hours and hours of driving together and looking for the hotel room and making our own cooking very often. So I have seen him and known him on a very human level’ (Nelson 1991). Now what does one make of this in light of the preceding discussion? When Bonhoeffer returned to Germany and finally remained even when it led to prison and martyrdom, how did he see through the deception and distortion that so many others did not? More to the point, how did he possess the hermeneutic of suspicion to discern the systematically distorted communication that others missed? What was behind the conviction, impelling him to return to the dangers of Germany, in the following words?: I have made a mistake in coming to America. I must live through this difficult period of our national history with the Christian people of Germany. I will have no right to participate in the reconstruction of Christian life in Germany after the war if I do not share the trials of this time with my people. (Kelly 1991)

When speech acts were flying all over the place by masters of communication, calling for faithfulness to the Vaterland and to the Führer, for appreciation of Hitler’s success in overcoming devastating inflation – most did not see through it. But Bonhoeffer did. This kind of situation starkly reveals the weakness that still limits the current development of speech act theory. It is not that understanding of the dynamics of speech acts is not relevant; it is necessary, one might say, but not sufficient. The normal ways in which speech acts may misfire – grammatical mistakes, situational discrepancies, affective incongruities – are involved, but normal grasp of such errors can hardly begin to pierce the thick fog of deception and misdirection in a situation like this. It is not difficult to see how the incarnational immersion into another situation of racism, involving deep feelings in worship, friendship and extended dialogue could sensitize one in a way that other Germans lacked. This helped Bonhoeffer bring from his holistic experience another horizon to the German context. The resultant cognitive dissonance called for a kind of phronetic judgement that could not be reduced to rule-following – because there were not sufficient rules to guide him. Conversely, one can see how these hermeneutical dynamics of continental philosophy and speech act theory can work together. Understanding of the intricacies of speech and what is done with it coupled with hermeneutical resources could allow for deeper critique as well as affirmation. Presumably, Bonhoeffer had to possess all

Dan R. Stiver

155

of these tools to work his way through the ‘great masquerade of evil’ (Bonhoeffer 1967: 26). As a pacifist, Bonhoeffer was nevertheless finally drawn into the plot to assassinate Hitler, surely a plight that demanded all of the resources of judgement that he could put into play. He had to weigh his pacifist sensibilities with the appeal to protect the victimized. He first, of course, had to discern that there were victims, which was, as we know, no small feat. A hermeneutic of suspicion that can bring in other horizons and also is alert to the way ideology can undermine even the most well-regulated communication is crucial. His immersion into another experience of racism at a felt level was apparently also critical. Presumably many other factors that are hardly enumerable played a role in his unusual insight and courage to act upon his convictions. This kind of complexity seems to lie behind Aristotle’s observation that the right thing to do in a particular situation relies on the practical wisdom (phronesis) of a wise person and cannot be reduced to a universal rule. Now place such a difficult situation into the context of attempting to understand a written text from a much different time and place. How much more, rather than less, will these hermeneutical factors come into play? The extension of speech act theory from spoken language in a common horizon to textual works from quite different horizons truly brings new dimensions to the hermeneutics of written texts, but it also needs to be able to draw upon the kind of resources mentioned above that were developed specifically to address such issues. Conclusion Melding the approach of speech act theory with these categories of hermeneutical philosophy, as it were combining felicity and fusion, can add depth to the interpretative act and help to avoid the limitations that have been noted. It gives recognition to the fact that ‘text-actions’ are indeed doing many things with words, not just simply describing, and that they require a multiplex approach. At the same time, it recognizes that even understanding this dynamic does not mean that understanding is conventional, or easy, or is indisputable. It brings to interpretation a fuller recognition of the role of the reader and the reader’s horizon, which also makes it easier to understand – and deal with – how significant differences in interpretation may occur and also how interpretation is laden with issues of ideology and vested interests. It offers a wider array of methods that can be helpful in dealing with these other dynamics such as ideology critique, social–historical criticism and, not the least, the need for trained philosophical awareness of the role of presuppositions and background frameworks. With these will come awareness of the limitations of any technique (‘method’, in Gadamer’s terms) to settle or determine the meaning, no matter how well known the author. The hermeneutical approach does not rule out authors since it sees texts as human, albeit all-too-human, works, although here is a place where speech act theory can prevent the idea of texts being seen as non-human productions, an implication that has

156

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

often been drawn from continental philosophers. Most hermeneutical philosophers can affirm with speech act theorists that texts are not rootless Platonic ideas; they are intentional acts. While Ricoeur may not do full justice to this point, he expresses it well: ‘Not that we can conceive of a text without an author; the tie between the speaker and the discourse is not abolished, but distended and complicated’ (Ricoeur 1981e: 201). The focus, however, lies more on the text and perhaps even on the reader than on the author. In so far as knowledge of the author and the context of writing is helpful, it is used along with everything else. The publicness of speech and writing that hermeneutical philosophy emphasizes, however, mitigates against privileging speech over writing or relying on exact knowledge of the author’s intentions. It is not hamstrung by unknown authors such as we have in many ancient texts or by texts like the constitution of the United States that has multiple authors (whose intention counts?). Even as the new speech act theorists emphasize, inasmuch as they attempt to transcend the Romantic appeal to authorial intent, the road to meaning is paved by consideration of the text. Hermeneutical philosophy does not avoid the problem of disembodied texts by just returning to the author, however, but by rooting texts in a much broader process of human horizons, cultures, interests and readers. Hermeneutical philosophy, nevertheless, can be deepened and enriched also by the contributions of speech act theory. The divide between Anglo-American philosophy that lies behind speech act theory and continental philosophy that lies behind hermeneutical philosophy can be as wide and ugly as Lessing’s famous historical ditch. Interpreting complex texts as well as discerning complex situations such as Bonhoeffer faced require all the resources available and thus crossing this divide, in Gadamer’s terms one of the most difficult horizons to fuse. Further Reading Austin, J.L., How to Do Things with Words, eds J.O. Urmson and M. Sbisà, 2nd edn, Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1975 Gadamer, H.-G., Truth and Method, trans. J. Weinsheimer and D.G. Marshall, London: Sheed & Ward, 1993 Nussbaum, M.C., Poetic Justice: The Literary Imagination and Public Life, Boston, MA: Beacon Press, 1995 Ricoeur, P., Oneself as Another, trans. K. Blamey, Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press, 1992 Stiver, D.R., ‘Ricoeur, speech-act theory, and the Gospels as history’, in After Pentecost: Language and Biblical Interpretation, eds C. Bartholomew, C. Greene and K. Möller, Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan, 2001, 50–72 Vanhoozer, K.J., Is There a Meaning in This Text?: The Bible, the Reader, and the Morality of Literary Knowledge, Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan, 1998 Wolterstorff, N., Divine Discourse: Philosophical Reflections on the Claim that God Speaks, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995

SECTION THREE

Experience, Imagination and Mysticism While the papers of the first two sections have sought to examine the placing and shaping of human experience through the lenses of our traditions of rationality and our forms of language respectively, those in this final section reverse the process. The creative work of the human imagination in engaging with experience may in principle subvert those traditions and forms, and we should not foreclose the possibility that the human imagination may on occasion be shaped by that which transcends all cultural horizons. David Brown argues that what is often termed ‘religious experience’ tends to be systematically distorted or ‘skewed’ by contemporary models of both reason and language. In the philosophy of religion the analytic tradition of philosophy selects and interrogates such experience in terms of that tradition’s preferred models of what counts as evidence, while biblical theologians focused on the ‘otherness’ of God seek to deflect any claims for distinctive forms of experience as disclosing the transcendent by reference to the literary hermeneutics of the texts in which such experiences and claims are recorded. However, such deflection is resisted by hermeneutic interrogation of those texts themselves, and our capacity to discriminate between different types of ‘religious’ experience puts in question the favoured evidential models. The boundary between religious and ordinary experience needs to be reconfigured so that experiences of religious mystery and more standard ‘evidential’ aspects of human experience may be seen as part of a continuum. Grace Jantzen’s ‘genealogical’ interrogation into how newness enters the world sees today’s dominant western ‘rational’ narrative concerning progress, freedom and democracy as masking masculinist ideology with its roots deep in our Christian and Classical heritage. She points to aspects of our experience, such as those of birth and nurturing, that are typically marginalized by such ideologies, and seeks to use them to articulate a counter-narrative, of flourishing, desire and creativity, which does more justice both to our experience and to our potentialities. Utopian thinking may be contrasted with the ideological, and the imagination itself, through its utopian function, may have a constitutive role in helping us to rethink the nature of our social life. By listening to voices from the margins of our religious traditions, our imagination may be set free to develop a ‘poetics of transformation’ with real potentiality for transforming our self-understanding.

158

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

George Pattison takes up the distinctively linguistic deformation of our experience of otherness. Theorists such as Don Cupitt (after whose Mysticism after Modernity his contribution is named) interpret the phenomena of mysticism in cultural and linguistic terms since language ‘makes experience possible’; it is not human thought and language the mystics seek to transcend but only their specific cultural forms. Against this Pattison invokes Heidegger and Dostoevsky to argue that in interpreting events that seem to befall us as experiences of something ‘from beyond’, we may not simply be shuffling linguistic tokens but rather reflecting in language an experienced reality of that which abides in the midst of temporal change, transcending our rationally and culturally grounded conceptual structures of the self and its world.

Chapter 9

Experience Skewed David Brown

Introduction In this essay what I want to suggest is that contemporary discussion in philosophy and theology alike skews the true nature of religious experience, but ironically from quite different directions. In philosophy not only is such a distinct category of experience accepted, but also strong evidential claims made, usually on the basis of some more narrow range within it. By contrast many contemporary theologians are to be found either undervaluing or else dismissing altogether the relevance of such a distinct category either as evidence or as integral to the construction of religious belief. In saying this it should be emphasized that what I am trying to identify are prevalent tendencies in both disciplines rather than invariant practice. So far as contemporary analytic philosophy of religion is concerned, as confidence in the more traditional arguments for the existence of God has declined so has there been a corresponding rise in interest in the so-called argument from religious experience. To quote an obvious case in point, it plays the central and decisive role in Richard Swinburne’s The Existence of God (1979: 244–76). Among those more sympathetic to Alvin Plantinga’s rejection of Cartesian foundationalism, there is no need for its use in such a justifying role, since on this view faith in God is already at the centre of the web of the Christian’s beliefs and not a mere superstructure requiring some more basic belief on which to found it. Nonetheless, religious experience usually still plays a central role as illustrative, non-justifying evidence (offering what he calls ‘warrants’; Plantinga 2000: 326–53). In theory in both positions notice might be taken of all types, but in practice the focus is usually more narrow. Visions, for example, usually get short shrift in the search for certainty. In the first part of the paper I want to examine, therefore, the impact of this more narrow focus. Schleiermacher is often described as the founder of modern theology. Given that background it might seem surprising that religious experience could be anything other than central to contemporary theological discussion, for integral to Schleiermacher’s argument was the claim that experience is foundational for doctrine and not the other way round. It was an approach that was continued in the twentieth century in the writings of Karl Rahner on the Catholic side and Paul Tillich on the Protestant. But more recent writing in both communions has seen renewed rise in the suspicion of ‘religion’ and a corresponding insistence on the otherness of revelation and of God, most notably through the writings of Balthasar and Barth. In line with such ways of thinking, sustained attempts are quite commonly made to undermine any contention that great significance

160

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

attaches to a distinct category of experience called ‘religious’. In the second part of the paper I shall attempt to identify what is wrong with such strategies. The result of my investigation will be to suggest a weakening but not the elimination of a role for religious experience in justifying belief, the former (‘weakening’) implicitly rejecting the philosophical approach, the latter (‘elimination’) the theological. However, my final section will suggest that, so far from this conclusion lessening the importance of religious experience, it actually strengthens it. It is by admitting its more tentative and varied character that we can rediscover its pervasive presence in a much wider range of human experience than is at present commonly acknowledged. Within the Philosophy of Religion With so much published these days, safely identifying trends is no easy matter. The present popularity of the philosophy of religion in universities and schools means that there are a large number of introductory textbooks currently available. So one possibility is consideration of how religious experience is treated within such volumes. My survey makes no pretence to be exhaustive, but it is representative to this degree, that it includes all recent acquisitions of this kind that the catalogue system has placed together in my local university library. The two English philosophers Beverley and Brian Clack (1998: 31–7) set Richard Swinburne and C.B. Martin against one another. While adopting the same wide range as Swinburne (what might be briefly characterized as sunset, resurrection, dream, mystic union and conviction of prayerful response), they use the variety to lay great weight on Martin’s objection that all such experience seems parasitic on prior religious training. The one other book that offers the same variety is the selection offered in Charles Taliaferro’s and Paul Griffiths’s jointly edited volume (2003: 141–81), where extracts from William James, Rudolf Otto and Caroline Franks Davis all appear. Significantly, however, they are not listed under ‘Theistic Arguments’ but rather as ‘Explanations for Religion’. Brian Davies has produced two widely used introductions. One work offers an essay specially written by William Alston in which he distinguishes between experiences emerging out of one’s ordinary life experience and direct awareness of God (Davies 1998: 65–9). The term he wants to use for the latter is ‘mystical experience’ and he thinks that this can form the basis of an argument. In Davies’s other volume Martin reappears as a foil, but this time in relation to Alston rather than to Swinburne (Davies 2000: 356–89). Alston’s tactic is once more to employ the perceptual analogy. Eleonore Stump in her joint work with Michael Murray (1999: 139–49) also appeals to Alston, but this time with an extract from Teresa of Avila by way of preface. A number of features emerge. First, with Swinburne and Alston predominating there is a strong emphasis on the analogy with perception. Second, although the range varies, most interest is shown in the out–of-the-ordinary rather than the everyday. This is true even of Clack and Clack, as Martin’s objection clearly applies most forcibly to the more content-full type of experience. Other reasons may of course also be playing their part. Mystical experience would seem easier to align with ordinary

David Brown

161

vision than is something like response to prayer. In the latter the separable character of the imposed interpretative grid is much more obvious. Then again, it might be added, many mystics (such as the saints) are self-evidently closer to God, and so their evidence is of more worth. Third, the interest shown seems premised on the conviction that such experience should be taken as actual experience of a being of a specific kind, the sort Christians would call God. Thus, nowhere is consideration given to the possibility that the evidence might all be much more tentative and indeed admit of a range of attributes, not all necessarily pulling in the same direction. The prominence given in these Introductions to William Alston’s treatment of the issue makes it highly appropriate that we should focus here on his book-length contribution, Perceiving God: The Epistemology of Religious Experience (1991). In that work the analogy with ordinary sensory perception is pursued at length to draw conclusions not dissimilar from Swinburne’s principle of credulity, that a presumption exists in favour of ‘Manifestation’ or M-beliefs where the person concerned has a ‘perception’ of God present and acting upon him or her. His difference from Swinburne is, in Alston’s view, more one of emphasis, with Alston giving much more attention to the key role played by ‘socially established doxastic practices’, conventions within a particular community (in this case the Christian) about how certain experiences should be read, affecting not only the individual most directly concerned but also the ability of others within the community in question to accept such testimony.1 There is much that is excellent in Alston’s discussion. Particularly valuable is the way in which he retreats from earlier claims that such experience is ‘selfauthenticating’ or ‘ineffable’, as though such assertions could of themselves put an end to further questioning.2 If ‘ineffable’ were taken literally, no epistemic claims could be made at all since nothing would have been said either way, while the subjects of such experience themselves give the lie to any notion of the experience being self-authenticating since they themselves seek out tests for checking that their experience is indeed veridical.3 So the checks help to establish the kind of scenarios where what seems to be the case is rightly taken to be so. In this parallels can be drawn with other non-universal doxastic communities such as wine-tasters where proper procedures establish a credibility that is immediately acceptable within the community’s horizons, even if not immediately accessible to those without prior training.4 However, there are also a number of difficulties with his presentation. The first concerns the legitimacy of the perceptual analogy. As we have seen, Alston is quick

1 Alston 1991: 195. He talks of ‘minor deviations between Swinburne’s principle of credulity and our thesis’. For ‘doxastic practice’ see 146–225, especially the principle he formulates on 175. 2 For a good, more detailed critique of ineffability, see K.E. Yandell, The Epistemology of Religious Experience (1993: 61–115). 3 For ineffability, 31-2; for self-authenticating, 210-1; for tests, 201-3. 4 Alston 1991: 199; theoretical physics is given as a contrasting example.

162

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

to speak of ‘perception of God’.5 This might easily lead the reader to suppose that he has primarily in mind scenarios under which the subject ‘hears’ God’s voice or ‘sees’ a vision of some kind. As a matter of fact, Alston gives little prominence to such phenomena. That being so, it is all the more puzzling that he and Swinburne make the analogy so central to their discussion. After all, an earlier generation of philosophers had picked upon a quite different kind of analogy, the intuition of morality or beauty.6 The eclipse of the latter may reflect no more than the current decline in confidence in the objectivity of moral and aesthetic values, as well as a parallel eclipse in intuitionist approaches to how such potential knowledge might be gained. However, the change does raise a question that needs to be set against all such analogies, the degree to which they obfuscate as well as illumine. Of course, if something visual or auditory is involved that seems to have no obvious natural explanation, the move from, for example, ‘a divine voice’ to ‘perception of the divine’ appears linguistically quite natural. But where such stimuli are absent, ‘awareness’ or ‘intuition’ might well seem more appropriate terminology, and so draw one closer to the other analogy.7 Indeed, this might even be the case, where sensory stimuli do play a key role. For example, a mountain landscape that mediates religious awe does not necessarily entail that the visual elements in the former simply constitute or slide into the other. They could, but it might be more a case of the visual prompts mediating an awareness of transcendent otherness that has nothing at all to do with ‘perception’. Of course, the earlier parallel with morals and aesthetics also had its difficulties, not least in the fact that what was assumed to be a personal and interactive reality (God) was being compared to what was quite otherwise. Perhaps what such limitations in the analogies indicate is the need to take more seriously the fact that such experience is sui generis. Indeed, that is precisely what might be expected, given the claim that what is experienced is not an item in the world but the source of all that is.8 The trouble is that, until this is acknowledged, the temptation will be to fit the experience to the analogy rather than analysing it in its own right. So, significantly, already on his first page Alston has made integral to M-beliefs that ‘God is doing something vis-à-vis the subject – comforting, guiding, communicating a message, sustaining the subject in goodness, power, lovingness’. It is all the sort of thing that we can ‘see’ our fellow human beings do, but the more basic question that needs to be raised is whether the divine might not communicate presence as such without any sense of ‘doing’ at all. Another way of highlighting my concern that distortion is the inevitable result if one starts with the argument and justification rather than with the experience in

5 The phrase is introduced in the book’s very first sentence, and used repeatedly thereafter. 6 As in C.D. Broad, Religion, Philosophy and Psychical Research (1953: 190) and A.E. Taylor, ‘The vindication of religion’ (1964). 7 In terms of its Latin root, ‘intuition’ is of course connected with vision, but I take it that apart from stressing immediacy the metaphor is a dormant one. 8 Saints and demi-gods clearly fall somewhere in between.

David Brown

163

its own right is by considering the sorts of experience that Alston himself chooses to focus upon. He excludes what he takes to be the inferential or interpretative, and focuses on direct perceptions for which he is happy to use the phrase ‘mystical experience’ or ‘perception’.9 To his credit, the discussion then proceeds by offering a wide range of examples, particularly from the writings of St Teresa of Avila. But what is intriguing is that for the most part it is the experience of saints and mystics to which appeal is made, and only very occasionally the highlight of a more ordinary individual’s life. Indeed, he concedes at one point that the experiences that he has in mind are rare.10 Yet at the end of the book he suggests that ordinary Christians can be confident in building their own belief system on the pale reflections that they have in their own lives of such experiences (Alston 1991: 305–7). What is problematic in all of this is the way in which the extraordinary is exalted above the ordinary. Religious experience so described becomes exceptional for the ordinary believer, far less ever to be had by the agnostic or uncertain. But, just as different analogies for the experience have, as we have seen, assumed prominence at different points of time over the twentieth century, so there is every reason to believe what is judged normal or abnormal has very much varied over the centuries. Alston thus unwittingly contributes to the marginalization of a range of religious experience that would once have been regarded as commonplace in Europe but has now come to be seen as inferential rather than a matter of direct awareness. Thus few historians of religion would deny that what was once regarded as direct and immediate for the mediaeval peasant is now expressed much more tentatively. Yet this is not because as a people we have become more sophisticated, but simply because to make the claim in more direct terms would immediately be challenged in the sort of society we are now in. The wider ramifications of this fact are what I shall explore in the concluding section of this paper. Here I want only to stress that what from an earlier age Alston would have had to treat as direct perception might well be formulated in our own age more tentatively, but not because anything in the experience as such has necessarily changed. So, in short, the argument skews the true nature of religious experience in two key ways: first, in the narrowness of the range to which appeal is made; then, second, in failing to take account of the culture-relative way in which such experience is expressed as inferential or otherwise. There is, however, one clear sense in which that greater tentativeness is the more correct approach. As Alston himself comes close to admitting now and then, there is nothing in the experience as such that could in itself indicate what is meant by the God of philosophical theism: omniscient, omnipotent, timeless and so on.11 So

9 Alston 1991: 5. He rejects the term ‘religious experience’ (34–5) partly on the ground that it is often used to include every aspect to life where religion is concerned, including ‘thoughts, reasoning and doubts’, and partly because he wants explicitly to exclude the transcendent aspect to all experience identified by the likes of Schleiermacher and Rahner. 10 Alston 1991: 208: ‘mystical experience, except for a few choice souls, is a rare phenomenon.’ 11 For such occasional concessions, 47, 60.

164

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

the experience can at most only capture some small element in that totality. The surprise is that Alston, so far from working thereafter on that basis, actually permits the doxastic practice to build in even bigger foundations in a way that excludes the incompatible claims of other religions (1991: 255–85). Although conceding that divergence between the world religions is the most difficult issue for his case, he suggests that traditional western philosophy and theology might well work to strengthen the case for exclusion. It is an odd strategy to employ since it means that the experience can carry no significant conviction in its own right but only when set against a vast range of other suppositions. In this his approach is markedly different from another philosopher who found her ways into the surveyed Introductions, Caroline Franks Davis. Although her categorization of types of religious experience is somewhat idiosyncratic, there is no doubt that she considers a much wider range than does Alston.12 More importantly, unlike him she attempts to answer the diversity objection by trying to distinguish content and overlay. While rejecting any suggestion that language determines the form that experience takes, she does attempt to account for diversity by suggesting that a common form is often given quite different conceptualization precisely because of competing alternative traditions of descriptions (Davis 1989: 143–65, esp. 159– 60). Her suggestion is that we try to penetrate beyond these into a common core. So, for example, instead of actual perceptions of the saint or divinity concerned, visions might really be ‘religious insights conveyed in “picture” form’ or else perhaps ‘the objectified “idea-patterns” of a community’.13 Again, whereas Zaehner (1957) had attempted to distinguish a hierarchy of types of mystical experience that placed the Christian emphasis on union with the divine at the top as the most profound with Eastern absorption a poor second, Davis’s proposal is that we pay closer attention to how both might be derived from essentially the same experience. ‘Mystics very probably have the same sort of experience viz. freedom from all sense of time, space, personal identity and multiplicity which leave them with a blissful “naked awareness” of perfect unity and a sense that “this is it”, the ultimate level of reality. . . . On emerging from the experience, however, they reflexively interpret it, usually in accordance with their doctrinal set, as “union with God,” “isolation of the eternal self,” “liberation from samsara” and so on’ (Davis 1989: 178). Her suggestions are valuable, but raise two types of worry. The first is that such reconciliation is often too quick and superficial to win ready credence. Although she can quote some Buddhist scholars in her support, the idea that the Buddhist no-self and the Christian assertion of the true self are really saying the same thing cloaks a multitude of conceptual difficulties (Davis 1989: 182–6). This is not to deny that some comparisons may prove possible, but the language and forms are just so 12 Her six categories of religious experience are interpretative, quasi-sensory, revelatory, regenerative, numinous and mystical (Davis 1989: 29–65). The problem is that they do not seem even at first glance to be mutually exclusive. 13 Both options are mentioned at 156, the former explored at 170 and the latter at 217 (a suggestion of G.N.M. Tyrrell in his 1943 work [revised 1953], Apparitions).

David Brown

165

different that inevitably the task would be a highly arduous one. Again, approaching the issue from the opposite end as it were, her proposal involves not just a change in how the subjects of religious experience see themselves responding to the divine but also in how they think of the divine acting on them. Greater commonality of form may draw the different religions closer together, but the process also results in them all alike now standing further apart from the divine. In order to reconcile the accounts of saints in rival religious traditions, their apparent intimacy appears to be replaced by a uniform but distant divine reality. Yet this might be an advantage. Biblical scholarship is increasingly forcing us towards a more indirect way of understanding divine action in the creation of the scriptures and this might have to be applied elsewhere. This is an issue to which I shall return. Distance, though, is perhaps not the right word. It is only so if we focus on questions of divine action and not of divine presence. There is an intriguing passage in St Teresa where she expresses anxiety that God can only be said to be present when He is performing an act of grace: doing something. ‘I did not know that God was in all things, and, when he seemed to me to be so very present, I thought it impossible. I could not cease believing that he was there only by grace; but I could not believe that … and so I continued to be greatly distressed.’ (Teresa of Avila 1946: I, 110–11) There is palpable relief on her part when she discovers from a learned Dominican that there can indeed be presence without an accompanying action. Although currently largely ignored by contemporary philosophical theology because of its preoccupation with questions of divine will and action, as I shall suggest later, much of human religious experience may be precisely of this kind. An image of St Augustine’s may prove of help at this point. God’s relationship to the world is seen ‘as though there were sea everywhere, nothing but an infinite sea without bounds, that had within it a sponge, as large as might be but still finite, filled through and through with the water of this boundless sea’.14 What the image suggests is a God uniformly present to his creation. A key aspect of religious experience might be the ability to tap into just such a presence rather than God having to do some action over and above in order to make His presence felt. In short, then, my suggestion is that the philosopher’s concern with proof tends to skew the way in which the evidence is approached. Instead of trying to analyse and value religious experience in its own right, either through selection or reduction, those aspects are focused on that are thought to be most conducive to the argumentative task. In the process valuable points are often made, but what gets ignored as a result is the limited and tentative character of much such experience. If the alternative approach produces a wide range of divine attributes not easily reconciled, it may also bring recognition of experience much more widely disseminated than the philosopher’s focus would suggest.

14

Augustine, Confessions VII, 5 (my translation).

166

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Within Theology As I observed in the Introduction, contemporary approaches within theology are quite different. Despite the trend set by Schleiermacher and continued in theologians of the calibre of Rahner and Tillich, much more common these days is a general suspicion of appeals to experience. I shall begin with some more general remarks on the popularity of Barth and Balthasar before examining in more detail two recent attempts to undermine religious experience as a significant category of experience. For those like Barth who set biblical revelation over against religious experience, the claim would be that ‘religion’ distorts the structures of our knowledge. God needs to reorder our minds through his grace, not simply be found at the end of a search for him. I have always found this argument a false dichotomy, for what is found at the end of a search may well radically rearrange one’s understanding and so transform rather than simply confirm expectations. So divine initiative and human search need by no means be seen as essentially incompatible. But my worries run much deeper than this. Although Barth is careful to differentiate between the word of the text and the divine Word, he still relies on the old model of listening to or ‘hearing’ what God has to say. That at the very least sounds experiential, and indeed not far removed from the philosophers’ ‘perceive’. The tendency among Barth’s followers, however, is to focus instead on the literary hermeneutics of the text rather than on how it is now experienced, or might have been in terms of its original creation. Yet the latter in particular is of huge importance if continuing sense is to be given to the notion of revelation. Biblical criticism over the past two centuries has forever robbed us of the idea that the authors simply heard what God had to say through them.15 There was a much more complicated dynamic within which there was an inescapable human contribution. So biblical authority itself becomes entwined in the general question that faces all religious experience, of how its veridical character is to be maintained in the face of obvious aspects of cultural conditioning. If that admission means that the biblical text may become more like the interpretative grid that the modern believers impose on their own experience of life, at the same time there are elements within the text that pull in a quite different direction. Biblical scholars went through a period of fighting shy of taking any of the more spectacular accounts of visions and auditions as roughly literal records of what had happened. But increasingly recognition is being given to the extraordinary experiences that some of the prophets may have had, and indeed Jesus himself. Later I mention the baptism and temptations as cases in point. So here we might take the Resurrection itself. Even if the disparate character of the existing narratives might incline one to the belief that they are all narrative expressions of later convictions rather than a literal recording of events, there still remains the issue of what the

15 Still retained in Leo XIII’s encyclical Providentissimus Deus of 1893: ‘written at the dictation of the Holy Spirit’ (Spiritu sancto dictante conscripti sunt).

167

David Brown 16

first ever appearances were like, as listed by Paul. Some argue that these earlier experiences may have been more like visions of Jesus’ exaltation than what now confronts us in the Gospels.17 But, whether so or not, the point is that the question of the text itself alluding to what we would now identify as religious experience is not escaped, even where it is accepted that its present form has now more the shape of a story than an actual record of an experience. So, however high a doctrine of biblical revelation is advocated, modern biblical scholarship still precludes in more than one way disengagement from the issue of how religious experience has shaped the biblical narrative. Beyond the biblical canon, other strategies for denigrating the significance of religious experience have also been tried, and here I would like to look at two in particular, both from Cambridge professors. Both share the conviction that stress on religious experience is essentially a modern idea, and actually a distortion of the Christian tradition. As a matter of fact both are also practising Roman Catholics. So, before proceeding any further, it might be as well to bring to the fore one key element in such an objection and often quoted in its Thomist form: that since God defies human understanding, although He may account for the experiences we have, we would never be in a position to identify Him definitively as the object of our experience. He is, after all, not an item in the world.18 Certainly, it makes no sense to claim that we could ever have an experience of God in his totality. But from this nothing follows about identifying aspects of the divine, a transcendent otherness, a reassuring goodness, and so on. It is these more tentative forms that I am pleading should be treated more seriously. Nicholas Lash takes as his starting-point William James’s classic The Varieties of Religious Experience (1902). In essence his argument is that the attempt to isolate an element called ‘religious experience’ disguises the true nature of Christianity. Such stress on appropriate psychological conditions and exotic subject matter distorts the way in which the Christian God transforms all our experience, and so it is the totality that shapes belief and not some discrete, isolatable element.19 While I am inclined to agree with him in his critique of those aspects of James’s treatment, and he is of course right that there is something wrong with faith if it does not try to produce a total perspective, it does not follow from this that certain ‘experiences’ are not more truly seen as in themselves experiences of the divine (‘religious experience’) than are other aspects of our lived experience.20 The latter may also help to shape our 16 I Cor. 15:3–8. Nowhere, for instance, is the first of all (to Peter) described, although its existence is also implied by Luke, 24:34. 17 Of the kind Stephen has in Acts 7:54–6. This would help to explain the prominence given to the opening verse of Psalm 110 in the Church’s early proclamation. See further, for example, L.W. Hurtado, One God, One Lord (1988: 93–124, esp. 118). 18 Thomas Aquinas 1964–81: vols 2–3, Ia. 2.1; Ia. 12.1–4; Ia. 12.11. 19 N. Lash, Easter in Ordinary (1988: 9–83). For stress on psychological conditions, esp. 18, 46; for the exceptional and paranormal, 75–6, 79. 20 I find utterly implausible, for example, his attempt to turn Schleiermacher’s appeal to ‘feelings of absolute dependence’ into a mere Wittgensteinian rule about how the word ‘God’ should be used: 120–30, esp. 127.

168

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

view of God, but the elements of interpretative grid and inference are much more obvious. By this I do not mean that those more properly called religious experiences should, therefore, be treated as foundational for all else. The Bible, philosophy, or whatever might well be more important in guiding how one’s experience as a whole, is seen, much in the way (advocated by Lash himself) that von Hügel utilized Newman’s ‘three offices of Christ’, to produce a more balanced perspective.21 For some individuals they may be, and philosophers may want to make them so in terms of some justifying argument. But there is no necessity for any of this in what I am saying. My essential point is rather this: there are varying degrees of overlay in all experience, but with some it seems more natural to talk of an actual experience of one or more divine attribute rather than these simply functioning as part of an inferred interpretation. Taking something as an answer to prayer or believing Christ present and active in the Eucharist are structured readings in a way that a simple sense of transcendent awe in the presence of mountain landscape is not, or again the birth of a child sensed as gift rather than product. Lash describes his strategy as one of ensuring that one finds God in the ordinary and not only in the strange or spectacular. I would agree that that is where He should be sought, but in analysing experience we should not do so in a way that privileges our own religion by ignoring degrees of interpretative layer or the way in which experience can be seen as from God but without necessarily being of God. So, for example, the answered prayer may be one of also being suffused by divine love, but it may be simply an inference drawn without any accompanying experience that could be said to have God as its object. Denys Turner’s specific focus is the notion of mystical experience. In The Darkness of God he provides a subtle and highly nuanced analysis of the history of the western mystical tradition up to St John of the Cross. His argument in rough is that mystical experience has wrongly been identified as a separate form of experience, that this has only really happened in modern times, and that in terms of the history of mysticism the final stage of the mystical way was not really an experience at all but rather intended as a critique of all such experiential claims.22 Mystics had found God in the ordinary practices of their own faith (prayer, liturgy and so forth) but, following Denys’ combination of Plato’s Cave and Moses’ Ascent of Sinai, they use the language of mysticism and the apophatic tradition to call into question the adequacy of all positive and negative descriptions of God secured in this way.23 21 For discussion of Newman’s three offices of ‘prophet, priest and king’, and their adaptation in von Hügel, see Lash 1988: 136–77. Baron von Hügel was wrong in my view to go on from this to deduce that there was no such thing as ‘specifically mystical experience’: 166. 22 He concedes that John of the Cross can be read in an experiential way, and that this is still more obviously true of St Teresa: D. Turner, The Darkness of God (1995b: 177, 249– 51). For some key passages attacking experiential readings of earlier authors, 79 (Augustine), 129–33 (Bonaventure) 174–9 (Eckhart), 206, 210 (Cloud). 23 ‘Negating the negations’ with ‘everything denied and nothing abandoned’ is how Turner expresses it: 129, 272.

David Brown

169

Turner’s analysis of the various texts is careful and well argued, and he seems to me clearly right that the mystical was never intended by such authors to function on its own as though what had gone before was now seen as of no value. So modern mysticism of the kind that treats its own experiences as something self-contained and entirely independent of the community tradition is not to be seen as working under the same rules. However, while accepting these elements in his critique, there remain a number of reasons for doubting whether he is right in rejecting all talk of experience at this point. First, he makes much of the fact that the language of experience is not used until more recent times. This is a dangerous argument to employ. The nearest mediaeval equivalents may well be confined to sensory experience and not be used of the intellectual elements that culminate the mystical way, but that of course would only be true of how the language was then used and not necessarily of how we might apply the word ‘experience’ now, if asked to reflect on what was going on.24 Again, nowadays we are all conditioned to reflect much more on the subjective conditions of our experience and not just on their object; so, inevitably, earlier generations would not sound experiential in the same way as us, even if that was the true nature of their experience. Second, the images employed suggest some kind of experience. The metaphor of Moses’ journey up the mountain suggests some sort of continuity in what is being said.25 It would be odd if story is used to deny that a story can in fact be told. Likewise, the images of sight and hearing and their negation in blindness surely imply that something rather more than purely intellectual claims is at stake. Third, there is the question of evidence for what is being claimed by the mystics. Turner in a well-argued chapter seeks to make plausible the negations, but there is a serious flaw in those arguments that he fails to notice. The use of infinity to argue that God is equally distant from all positive predications is a non sequitur (1995b: 42–4). So long as discussion is confined to mathematics, all is well. Infinity is equally distant from both the finite numbers 1 and 3, and that will also apply to God where mathematical infinity is in play, for example on the question of divine power. But in an expression like ‘infinite goodness’ the qualifier surely does not work in the same way; the meaning is more like ‘good without qualification’. So I cannot see any legitimate pressure to proceed towards negation. If that was nonetheless where the presumed justification was supposed to lie, then the mystical apophatic tradition was built on a mistake. But my suspicion remains that there was also an element of experience that compelled the more positive elements to be complemented by the more negative. If so, matters would not be all that different from what I suggest pertains elsewhere, the need to realize that different and potentially conflicting aspects of experience need to be built into a whole in any argument from religious experience rather than it be 24 Turner may possibly be right that till the fourteenth century imagination and experience were linguistically cognate terms (1995b: 171), but that entails nothing about how we might now view reports of what was more intellectual and non-sensory. 25 Exodus 19 with its reference to Moses climbing into thick darkness (vs 9, 16, 18), was more important than the other visit in Exodus 32 with its vision of God’s back.

170

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

simply assumed that there is a single whole there in the first place against which all such experience should be measured. A Positive Proposal What the preceding sections have demonstrated, I would suggest, is the tendency of philosopher and theologian alike to err when it comes to the question of religious experience. One claims too much; the other too little. The philosopher’s temptation is to suppose that there are certain forms of religious experience so relatively simple and so closely analogous to perception that they may legitimately be taken in and of themselves to yield awareness of God and all that term might mean; the theologian, on the other hand, is so cautious that even the very possibility of such an experience is called into question. What is equally wrong with both alternatives is twofold: first, the tendency to absolutize, to accept the supposition that what we are dealing with is an all or nothing affair; second, the failure to appreciate the extent to which all such experience is context-relative. The two faults are of course related. Lash and Turner are of course right that stress on religious experience is modern, but that does not make the whole thing a modern invention. The modern turn to subjectivity means that we are now all far more aware of what is going on in our consciousness and so with that the quality of particular experiences. But the experiences were always there. What has changed is the focus, with the object of the experience now no longer the exclusive concern but equally its subjective conditions. An obvious parallel is human love. Modern romantic literature often gives only cursory descriptions of the beloved compared to the lengthy portrayal of the subjective dis-ease that accompanies being in love. In a similar way the subjective conditions of awe and intimacy are now used to characterize certain forms of religious experience rather than their possibly objective correlates in transcendence or immanence. But simply because the prophet Isaiah, for example, describes the relationship of the divine to the human as like that of a great bird to tiny grasshoppers far below without any corresponding mention of any experience of awe surely does not mean that none was present, only that he was part of a culture where only the conclusion mattered.26 But equally Alston errs in treating his examples as though they offered instances of direct perception of God unaffected by cultural context. As we have seen, most of his examples come from mystics who were members of religious orders, such as St Teresa of Avila. But how experience is described is a function not just of its object but also of the community in which the person is set. This can affect both the confidence with which the assertion is made and the shape which is given to its content. Thus, inevitably individuals will tend to be much more tentative in communities where they expect to be disbelieved. Equally, how the content is expressed is likely to be adapted to what is congruent with existing patterns of belief. This is not to say that

26

Isaiah 40, esp. v.22.

David Brown

171

individuals deliberately lie, but it is to say that, given a choice, for example, between intimacy and absorption into the divine, they are likely, largely unconsciously, to mould descriptions of the subjective conditions of their experience to what will meet with doctrinal approval from their hearers or readers. Philosophers and theologians alike often write as though mystical experience was the most refined and pure of all types of religious experience. By contrast, visions such as those associated with the Virgin Mary are usually viewed as the lot of the naïve, and everyday experience such as answers to prayer regarded as involving too heavy an overlay of interpretation to be seen as significant. On the last point I would agree on exclusion from consideration, not because of the overlay which I think is present in all experience but rather because I doubt whether such are appropriately described as religious experiences at all. Take a simple case. Someone desperate to get to a job interview on time offers up a desperate plea that a parking place might immediately become available. When this happens, it is taken to be an immediate answer to prayer. Irrespective of how we may view such an attitude to specific providence, all would surely agree that the experience is of God producing an effect in the world, not of God being encountered in Himself. There is perhaps a sliding scale, but nonetheless a significant difference between some event in the world being perceived to be an act of divine love and actually feeling oneself to be caught up into the divine love and care, with ‘the everlasting arms’ underneath as it were. That is why visions and mystical experience need on my view to be put together in a way that separates them from what is often called ordinary religious experience. Yet one must guard against supposing that visions necessarily involve the greater overlay. St Teresa, for example, like many others frequently identifies the presence of Christ in her mystical experiences but there were, so far as we know, no explicit visual elements, whereas at least with the Marian apparitions Mary appeared in forms recognized by the various children and others involved. Perhaps the issue can be put most directly by raising the issue of what Christ experienced at his baptism and immediately thereafter in his forty days in the wilderness. The evangelists allow for the possibility that the former was more like a subjective, mystical confirmation of his vocation, whereas with the latter the incidents are recorded as though they were objective events.27 Modern theologians often toy with the idea that it is only their adoption into story-form that has led to that conclusion, but might not the time at which Jesus lived and the intensity with which he lived have led to such objectifications?28 In countenancing that possibility, my aim is not to undermine their source in God. Rather, it is to suggest that mystical or visionary may be more

27 Matthew and Mark allow for the possibility that only Jesus saw and heard what happened at his baptism. Luke makes it a public event, while John the Evangelist records that John the Baptist was a witness: Matt. 3:13–17; Mark 1:9–11; Luke 3:21–2; John 1:32–4. 28 For some examples of biblical scholars accepting that Jesus was subject to visions: C. Rowland, The Open Heaven (1982: 358–60); M.J. Borg, Jesus: A New Vision (1987: 33–4, 43).

172

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

a matter of context than anything to do with degree of reliability. The tendency towards over-determination is there in all religious experience. For some this draws them to the conclusion that there is no more there than prior determination.29 That could of course be the case. But a more plausible analysis is that in this religious experience resembles all other experience. Thus as a rule we do not infer a particular interpretation of what some familiar individual is doing, but we simply see it that way, for example one’s wife’s love for her child in the way she washes it. Yet for all the outsider knows to the contrary the motivation could really be a concern for her own reputation as a mother. Equally, under-determination may be the appropriate verdict when comparison is made with the same scenario against a quite different backdrop. So, to give a familiar example, the English do not differentiate shades of white in types of snow, but the Inuit do. So what seems to me required in looking at religious experience is caution, not scepticism. As culture and contexts vary, so over-determination or under-determination may be the appropriate conclusion to draw, and in the modern western world it may well be the latter that in fact predominates. That may be a surprising conclusion to draw, but the sociologist Max Weber argued that experiences of religious mystery would gradually disappear from the world as rational instrumentality came increasingly to dominate modern ways of thinking,30 and in this contention he may well be right, not least because even modern-day believers often now approach matters in a similar sort of way. So, for example, church architecture is assessed exclusively in terms of how it serves the needs of the worship, and worship in its turn simply in terms of the help it offers to the worshipping community over such issues as mission or self-fulfilment. If that is the backdrop against which modern discussion is conducted, it is hardly surprising that people are only incipiently aware of the potential of worship or of the building in itself to open them up to experiences of God, and so only verbalize their own experiences tentatively, if at all. Yet for most of human history architecture was explicitly seen as offering just such a possibility, and that is why arguments were so often ferocious about what type of style was appropriate for a religious building. The point applies no less to a whole range of other aspects of culture that are now viewed largely in secular terms, ranging from place to landscape painting, from gardens to sport, from music to the human body, from meals to dance.31 29 The case is argued at length in W. Proudfoot, Religious Experience (1985). His view is that there is really no common object; ‘the terms in which the subject understands what is happening to him are constitutive of the experience’ (121). But what this ignores is the aspectival character of religious experience. Even the Christian can concede that Paul, Wesley and Schleiermacher (117) experienced quite different divine attributes, and that it is a further inference that it was the same God involved in each of the three cases. 30 He makes the point in a number of places. It is particularly focused in his notion of ‘the disenchantment of the world’, for example in his essay ‘Science as a vocation’ (1948: 129–56, esp. 155). 31 Architecture, place, pilgrimage and landscape painting are all discussed in some detail in my God and the Enchantment of Place: Reclaiming Human Experience (2004), sport

David Brown

173

It is hard for us to think ourselves back into such a world, but that does not make those earlier experiences any less real or veridical. Readers familiar with the relevant literature are hardly likely to deny that they felt real to those who experienced them. More contentious is the claim that they actually did offer experience of the divine, and so might be united with the more tentative, parallel experiences of today to offer some justification for religious belief. It is at this point that we must confront yet another way in which contemporary discussion skews the nature of religious experience. If one fault is the all-or-nothing approach, and another the failure to recognize that context inevitably affects the nature and strength of the claim, yet another is a general suspicion of mediation. The mystical is liked because it appears not to be mediated through the senses, or, if the senses are permitted, at most it is thought that this should be through perception of the natural world, since this is itself a direct creation of God. What such preferences ignore is that no experience of the divine can escape mediation and that none comes pure, as it were. Thus, as mystical writers themselves fully acknowledge, preparatory techniques both mental and physical are of the utmost importance. These would include prayer, purging one’s mind of inessentials, careful control of one’s breathing and posture, and so on. The calming of mind and body and the single-minded, integrated focus are thus not irrelevant to the experience of the divine as timeless and unitary. This is not to say that they are the same thing, since one can be had without the other. But this is no less true of experiences of divine transcendence or otherness. One can marvel at a mountain landscape without any accompanying sense of religious awe, but that awe can come no less through the mediation of the soaring quality of a great Gothic cathedral. The fact that the latter is a human artefact does not mean that it is somehow less capable of mediating an objective divine presence. On the contrary, it was built in that way with precisely this aim in mind, of encouraging a sense of divine transcendence and thus with it the possibility of the corresponding experience.32 Nor were such aims by any means unique to Gothic. Classical architecture was pursued at the Renaissance with the intention of reflecting divine order and rationality, Baroque with the aim of ‘making the miraculous manifest’ and in imitation of divine exuberance and playfulness. Nor was architecture by any means the only human artefact of this kind. One can find similar principles in activities as different as music and gardening. Islamic water gardens were intended to reflect the order and balance of Paradise, and John Evelyn and many another writer of his time and earlier in the Christian tradition saw in the ordered garden the longing to return to the innocent

and gardens more cursorily. Music and dance, food and attitude to the body are considered in its sequel, God and Grace of Body (2007). 32 The mediaeval mind would not have put it in terms of expressing divine transcendence, but implicitly the experience thereby followed, even if not explicitly sought. By the nineteenth century and neo-Gothic, however, that was also part of the overall intention.

174

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

discipline of Eden.33 The ‘landscaped’ and ‘natural’ garden movements suggest quite different philosophies, not necessarily all religious. But the point is that such variety in the human artefacts was once intended to bring out contrasting aspects of the divine that, it was believed, could only be imperfectly detected in the created order as it was. Such, for instance, is often the rationale behind the work of the more devout landscape painter. The intention was not simply to copy what the painter saw before his eye but rather so to adapt it that the viewer could then return to the scene and experience the world for what it was – suffused with the divine. Accordingly, so far from nature having priority over artefact, one might argue that the more effective mediation actually works the other way round. Since many of my examples have come from the arts, I may inadvertently have given the impression of a new sort of elitism, just as bad as I was claiming attached to exclusive focus upon mystical experience. If so, that was not my intention. I would want to claim that such experiences are to be found in ‘low’ art no less than ‘high’. Gardening, for example, is not necessarily a ‘high’ art. Again, it should be emphasized that experiences of the kind I have associated with architecture do not of themselves require detailed understanding of the principles involved in respect of a particular style. Indeed, in our own day a more likely inhibiter is the way in which so many of such places are now crowded with tourists milling around. In this respect one might contrast the feeling of secularity that so often overwhelms visitors in tourist attractions such as Westminster Abbey or York Minster with the quite different experience of individuals sitting quietly in the nave of a cathedral like Durham. So artistic forms have the potential to reach all. Nor is there any shortage of other examples more generally applicable that might be quoted. The dialogue between belonging to a place and transcending it by going elsewhere in pilgrimage is a dialectic that has found its way into all the major religions, and that is surely no accident. It speaks of the divine locating and securing the individual but also pulling him or her into something beyond; in other words, both providential care and an eternal or other-worldly destiny. Again, the once common practice of saying grace before meals was not simply a formality but spoke of thankfulness for what was seen as an unmerited ‘favour’ (the root meaning of the Greek word ‘grace’); it was after all the case that there was nothing in the person concerned that gave him or her such an entitlement while others went hungry. Similarly, the fact that, before eating, a part of the animal was once commonly offered in sacrifice to the divine has been interpreted by some anthropologists as indicating a sense that there was no right to kill; only by making the divinity complicit could the act be justified. So meals were once intimately connected with gratitude to the divine; only something beyond the world could legitimate one’s good fortune. I think the atheist would be wrong to deny that such elements are integral to the experience. However vague, for the subject they were a constitutive element, not part of some subsequent reflection. A more legitimate criticism would be that they 33 Apart from his Diary, Evelyn is best-known for Sylva with its campaign to reforest England. Throughout his writings, however, his religious attitude to horticulture is evident.

David Brown

175

simply reflect psychological longings within the subject, and not any independent objective reality that has been encountered in this way. There is no knockdown response to this upon which believers can rely. What they can do is sketch the type of God or divine existent who might make such experience possible and intelligible. If we return to Augustine’s image, what is envisaged is a God everywhere alongside His creation. What such experiences, therefore, do is, as it were, tap into an already existing presence. What is then yielded is a range of attributes that certainly suggest divinity but not sufficiently precisely to arbitrate between some of the long-standing points of contention across the religions, for example between God as personal or impersonal. Even order and rationality might simply entail something greater than personality, as Plotinus, for instance, argued. The final resolution of such issues would therefore hang on other questions, such as the status of the various religions’ claims to revelation or more general philosophical considerations. There is not the space to pursue that matter any further here. Instead, I shall end by underlining what I take to be the central contention in this essay: that contemporary discussions in philosophy and theology alike skew the true character and importance of religious experience by wrongly locating the key issue as an absolute, an allor-nothing affair. Instead, aspectival experience of the presence of the divine was once commonplace and could be so again, and it is these rather indefinite but confirming experiences that need to be treated with maximum seriousness once more. That way, religion is recognized as part of people’s ordinary way of interacting with their environment, not something that can only be justified by appeal to the exceptional.34 Further Reading Alston, W.P., Perceiving God: The Epistemology of Religious Experience, Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1991 Brown, D., God and Enchantment of Place: Reclaiming Human Experience, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004 _____ , God and Grace of Body, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2007 Davis, C.F., The Evidential Force of Religious Experience, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1989 Lash, N., Easter in Ordinary: London: SCM, 1988 Swinburne, R., The Existence of God, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1979 Turner, D., The Darkness of God: Negativity in Christian Mysticism, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995

34 In advocating a return to the ordinary, this is to support the approach of some earlier writers on religious experience such as John Oman and H.H. Farmer. The difference is in my stress on the varied content of such experience, and the need to acknowledge the way in which different divine attributes come to the fore in different types of experience.

This page intentionally left blank

Chapter 10

On Philosophers (Not) Reading History: Narrative and Utopia Grace M. Jantzen

How does newness enter the world? How can such newness disrupt the violence of (post)modernity, violence whose perpetrators often invoke the names of God? And how can philosophers of religion and theologians help to change the world rather than be reduced to ineffectual hand-wringing, or, worse, be complicit in the violence? Philosophers of religion in the Anglo-American world have traditionally held tightly to disciplinary boundaries, concerning themselves with issues of universal truth: issues of faith, belief, the nature and existence of God, immortality and so on. I have argued elsewhere (Jantzen 1998, 2004) that the pursuit of such abstractions is in fact a masculinist escape from the messy realities of life. In this article, rather than repeat that critique, I wish to show that in order to be effective in helping to change the world, it is necessary for thinkers to transcend disciplinary boundaries, moving beyond ideas of universals and engaging with the concrete narratives of individuals and cultures. Function and Narrative There have been efforts to explain violence itself by seeing it as a universal and identifying its essence: the exertion of force (de Vries 2002: 1), or the making of boundaries (Schwartz 1997: 88), or mimetic rivalry (Girard 1977, 1996). There is, however, a fundamental objection that undercuts all such definitions together, an objection drawn from the work of Michel Foucault. One of the most significant aspects of Foucault’s intellectual legacy is his persistent questioning of the very idea of essence. Foucault’s strategy was to develop ‘a systematic scepticism with respect to all anthropological universals’, a scepticism that was fostered by ‘interrogating them in their historical constitution’ (Foucault 1994: 317). In his own work he applied this strategy to rationality, discipline, sexuality and so on to undermine the idea of a universal fixed essence for each of these categories. What was needed instead, as he showed, was an account of how each of these functioned through time, changing in different historical and cultural contexts. Although Foucault did not apply his strategy to the idea of death and violence, it is not difficult to see that these ideas, too, have varied; they have a history, a narrative which underlies and

178

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

frames our present conception.1 What are the forms which violence – in particular religious violence – has taken in the West? How has it functioned? And where are the resources for alternatives? Foucault used the terminology of genealogy or archaeology of a concept, excavating its layers to show how its sediments continue to underlie present thought. I shall in addition use the idea of narrative, especially as it has been developed in the work of Hannah Arendt and Adriana Cavarero. Narrative is a particularly useful concept here for three reasons. First, while maintaining the Foucauldian idea of genealogy, it widens the approach so that the changing function of violence is seen within the broader historical trajectory. Second, narrative cannot escape the dimension of gender, an aspect which Foucault’s genealogies much too readily ignored. Third, Judaism and Christianity, the religions that have shaped the West, are themselves explicitly rooted in narratives and emphasize to their adherents the importance of remembering and retelling these narratives. The idea of narrative has not been uncontested in contemporary thought. Jean-François Lyotard famously defined the ‘postmodern as incredulity toward metanarratives’, whether metaphysical, political or economic (Lyotard 1984: xxiv). Any totalizing discourse, any narrative that subsumes everything within its grand scheme, must be suspect, since by its very nature it allows nothing to stand against it. What we need is not a grand theory of everything, but rather an alertness to those things that would call our metanarratives into question: our search must be for instabilities, for the alien, the marginal and the foreign, which discomfort us in our too easily unchallenged scheme of things. I suggest, however, that narrative as I shall be exploring it is not a grand scheme of things in Lyotard’s sense; neither is it uncontested. On the contrary, ever and again the choice of violence can be seen as precisely that: a choice, which could have been made otherwise. There are resources of resistance; and they come, often, from the marginal and the foreign to destabilize received certainties just as Lyotard hoped. Identities are forged, for individuals and for societies, by the narratives we assume about ourselves. We can be more or less explicitly aware of these narratives; we can all too easily bury unwelcome aspects of them in our unconscious. Yet the stories are there all the same, framing our sense of ourselves and one another and shaping the ways in which we act. We have stories whether we like them or not. Our choice is not about whether we have stories, but about whether we become conscious of them and choose how they shall shape our future.

Narrative Identity Who are you? Who am I? Who are we – as a group, a society, a nation? To answer any of those questions requires not reflection on abstract ideas like ‘the Meaning of Life’ but a story, which at an individual level involves a name, parents, a place and 1

I discussed this in relation to death in Jantzen 2004: 29–34.

Grace M. Jantzen

179

time of birth, and an account of the trajectory of the life of the individual from then until now. Adriana Cavarero, in her important book Relating Narratives (2000), has shown how significant our personal narratives are to our identity. Our selfhood is inextricable from the story that can be told of that self. Without effort or intention, every time and in every circumstance, we perceive ourselves and others as unique beings whose identity is narratable in a life-story. Each one of us knows that who we meet always has a unique story. And this is true even if we meet them for the first time without knowing their story at all. (Cavarero 2000: 33)

Ever since Plato, philosophy has been immersed in the question of what ‘man’ is – and has seldom bothered much about woman. In our actual lives, however, we are far more concerned with who we are, ourselves, and also the people we meet: the unique, unrepeatable and always gendered selfhood of each of us. As Hannah Arendt was fond of insisting, it is not ‘Man’ – not the universal – who inhabits the earth, but individual, unique, fragile men and women (Arendt 1958: 7).2 Although philosophy has concerned itself with the universal ‘Man’, and sought to provide an ontology or define the essence of this ‘featherless biped’, Arendt argues that human reality, whether individual or social, cannot be understood by appeal to such universals. Take for example Oedipus, when faced with the riddle of the Sphinx. Which animal is it, the Sphinx asked, who goes first on four legs, then two, and at last three? ‘Man!’, Oedipus triumphantly replied, remembering infancy, maturity, and crippled old age. But clever as he was, this solution, this idea of Man, did not tell him what he needed to know about himself as an individual man, and thus did not save him from the disaster of murdering his father and marrying his mother. For him to ‘know himself’, as Greek philosophers were fond of exhorting, he needed to know more than universals. He needed to know his own story: crucially, he needed to know the story beginning with his birth. It is the narratable life-story, beginning with birth and continuing with all the specificity and irreplacability of the individual life, which provides meaning and locates an individual in the understanding of herself and others. Nor is this an optional extra. As is vividly illustrated in the case of Oedipus, one’s actions flow out of the life-story one tells about oneself – with disastrous consequences if that story is mistaken at crucial points.3 Oedipus’ need for a story shows, as well, the centrality of memory for personal identity, and the importance that the memory be accurate. As Cavarero says, We are all familiar with the narrative work of memory, which, in a totally involuntary way, continues to tell us our own personal story. Every human being, without even wanting to know it, is aware of being a narratable self – immersed in the spontaneous auto-narration of memory. (Cavarero 2000: 33)

2 1995. 3

Though her account cries out for it, Arendt had little to say about gender. Cf. Honig The example of Oedipus is central to the discussion in Cavarero 2000.

180

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

This is the case even when, as in the story of Oedipus, the auto-narration is in fact false. How we live, what we choose to do, depends on the memory we have of ourselves. Moreover, it now becomes clear that for some of these memories we are dependent upon others. This is paradigmatically true in relation to birth, as the story of Oedipus again shows. We cannot remember our own birth, and yet who we are, the story we tell about ourselves in the ‘auto-narration of memory’, cannot start without it. Philosophers in modernity have been acutely aware of the significance of memory in relation to personal identity, but they have seldom paid attention either to birth or to the need for the memories of others to intersect with and contribute to one’s own. John Locke, in his example of the prince and the cobbler (Locke 1959: Book II, ch. 27, paras 15/17 [vol. I, p. 457]), suggested that if the ‘soul’ of each were to inhabit the body of the other – if, that is, the cobbler woke up one morning with all the prince’s memories, and vice versa – then the prince and the cobbler would actually have turned into each other. The cobbler would live in the prince’s body and in the prince’s palace; and although he would look like the prince he would be the cobbler and know himself as such, remembering the cobbler’s life-story as his own. The same would be true for the prince. Though now he would be greeted by the neighbours of the hovel in which he found himself living – since he now had the cobbler’s body and appearance – he would be gravely affronted by his circumstances and their coarse familiarity as altogether unbefitting to the prince which he knew himself to be. Locke’s account of memory has been subjected to many sorts of scrutiny, especially in relation to the importance of the body for personal identity. Most often, however, it has been the isolated individual who has been in focus, the prince and/or the cobbler, not the wider community with which each of their lives intersects. But what if Locke’s tale were told not from the perspective of the prince or the cobbler but from the point of view of their parents, spouse and children? Who would the cobbler’s mother consider to be her son: the man whose body she had known since his infancy or the man who remembered the bedtime stories she used to tell? Which man would the children call ‘Daddy’: the one they now lived with and who looked like their father, even though he now seemed not to know them, or the one who knew all about them but whose body they had never seen before? Which man would the princess royal be willing to sleep with, the man whose body she knew intimately but who seemed to have gone off his head with silly ideas about shoemaking, or the man who looked like a cobbler, but who, like Odysseus with Penelope, could remember the bed they had shared? Who would be chosen to sire the royal line? Whichever way we answer these questions, it is obvious that Locke’s story is vastly more complicated than he himself saw: indeed, it is perhaps ultimately incoherent. What the questions also make clear, however, is the way in which our identity, our narratable self, is interlocked not only with our gendered body and its history (think of the additional complexities if one of Locke’s protagonists had been female) but also with the memories and narratable selves of others. Ultimately, it is

Grace M. Jantzen

181

the collection of intersecting narratives that forms the history of a group or society or nation. As Hannah Arendt says, That every individual life between birth and death can eventually be told as a story with beginning and end is the prepolitical and prehistorical condition of history, the great story without beginning and end. … History ultimately becomes the storybook of mankind. (Arendt 1958: 184)

Just as philosophers have sought to define an essence of ‘Man’, so also they have tried to ascertain the ‘Meaning of History’. But if Arendt is right that history is ‘the storybook of mankind’, then the philosophical understanding of history cannot properly be detached from the intersecting stories of those selves. Cavarero goes so far as to say that ‘since it results from the interweaving of individual stories, the great History of humanity is nothing but the book of single stories’ (Cavarero 2000: 124). This I think overstates the case: history involves not just the accumulation of stories but also includes attempts at interpreting them and making sense of their interaction. Nevertheless, Cavarero is certainly right to insist that it is ultimately upon the stories of narratable selves that historical accounts must stand or fall. Philosophers can generate universals in abstraction, but in so far as we hope to understand the world and the society which we inhabit, let alone offer constructive interventions, we cannot dispense with actual life-stories, the narratives of individuals and their intersections. Stories can be told in more than one way, of course. Each of us chooses not only what aspects of our individual stories we share with others but also, at least to some extent, what aspects of our own stories we remember and what we forget or repress. There are deliberate falsifications and fabrications as well as sincere but misguided interpretations and selections of events. A narrative is not ‘true’ in the sense of being a complete recital of facts nor in the sense of being the only possible interpretation (or even the best possible interpretation) of those facts; it is nevertheless the story which is continued or modified as its trajectory moves onwards. Narrative is therefore as much about the future as it is about the past. The history we (rightly or wrongly) claim as our own has an afterlife; its patterns repeat themselves. As Pierre Bourdieu put it in his development of the idea of the habitus, history reproduces itself on the basis of history (Bourdieu 1990: 56). If this is so, then in so far as violence is built into the religious self-understanding of the West, this narrative has shaped western identity and been acted out in repeated patterns of escalating force. And as in individual stories, there are within that narrative suggestions for a counter-narrative which need to be lifted up so that we may be empowered for change. Narrative and Western Religious Identity To begin with the obvious, the Bible itself is a book of stories, a sequence of narratives large and small which together make up the larger narrative of the early Israelites. Most children in the West learn Bible stories: the creation of the world, Noah’s flood,

182

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Abraham and Isaac, Jonah and the whale. There are longer accounts, too, such as the chronicles of the lives and reigns of kings. To what extent any of these stories are (or even purport to be) accurate history is a matter of continuing dispute, but they have been taken as the auto-narrative of the Israelites. There are of course also other ingredients in the Hebrew Bible – psalms, proverbs, legal codes – yet even these fall within the context of the overarching narrative and would make little sense without it (Alter 1981; Gunn and Fewell 1993). The detail must be omitted here, but even a cursory glance shows how that narrative had a profound afterlife which has profoundly shaped western consciousness. The biblical idea of being the chosen people was taken up by the Christian church, basing itself on the violent ‘sacrifice’ of Christ; and the self-identity of christendom is grounded in the narratives of the New Testament and the doctrinal teaching which bases itself upon them. Again, this is not an argument for the veracity of either the stories or the dogmas but an observation of the centrality of narrative to the selfidentity of christendom and a recognition of the way narrative lives on and frames subsequent belief and practice. The Eucharist, for instance, cannot be understood in terms of abstract or universal dogma, but rather is a perfect example of how one narrative is embedded in another, and also extends it. Its idea of a ‘new covenant’ could not be understood were it not for the story of the original covenant which shaped the identity of the Israelites. Similarly, the notion of Jesus as ‘sacrifice’ or ‘Lamb of God’ is part of the afterlife of the narratives of Abraham’s sacrifice of Isaac and the rituals of blood sacrifice in the history attributed to ancient Israel. Without these prior narratives of sacrifice, Jesus’ death could not have been interpreted in the terms that have become familiar; yet that very interpretation also reshaped the narrative and extended its afterlife into christendom and beyond. The narratives of christendom and of the Hebrew Bible are different in important respects from the narratives of classical civilization, but they combined with them to form the self-identity of the West. I have shown elsewhere (Jantzen 2004) how the Romans appropriated for themselves the Greek narratives of heroism, especially the Homeric epics, so that for example Vergil portrayed Augustus Caesar as descended from the gods through the heroic Trojan line. This narrative became part of the ideology of Roman greatness, and served as justification for empire. Romans – at least upper-class Romans – saw themselves as superior to barbarians, a superiority massively reinforced when it was combined with the idea held by christendom of being the specially chosen people of God, the Church as the ark of salvation which would bear its adherents to heaven while the rest of the world was damned. Whatever cruelties or injustices Christians visited upon the peoples they conquered or colonized, they could represent themselves as bringing a generous mission to people less fortunate than themselves, civilizing them in this world and saving them from damnation in the next. The Roman Empire, duly christianized, became a crucial part of the narrative of the West. It lived on in repeated patterns of the Holy Roman Empire, the Spanish and Napoleonic and British Empires, and now the American Empire. All of these styled themselves at least in part on christianized narratives of Rome. Since that narrative was deeply invested in gendered violence,

Grace M. Jantzen

183

it is not surprising that its afterlife is a history of violent repetitions. Masculinity was represented in Roman thought as paradigmatically active killing – penetration by penis or by sword. In christendom this combined in sometimes uneasy patterns with ideas of violent martyrdom and sacrifice, real and rhetorical, and the practices of holy war on heretics and infidels: the gendered violence of the narratives has an afterlife which continues to structure the West until this day. Now, it might be thought that the power of this violent narrative of identity would lose its grip in secular modernity. With the deliberate separation of Church and State in the American Constitution, and the sharp decline of the churches of Europe, surely biblical narratives of covenant, chosenness and holy war can no longer be used to justify political or military action? I would argue, however, that discounting the role of biblical narratives is misguided for two reasons. In the first place, it has become apparent that religion plays a much larger role in western political thinking in the twenty-first century than had previously been acknowledged, especially in the USA where no politician can afford to ignore the power of the religious right and where every presidential address ends with ‘God bless America’. In American interventions from Nicaragua to Iraq it is obvious in both action and rhetoric that America considers herself to be superior, not only militarily, which she obviously is, but also morally and politically, which is much less obvious. Any means may be used to preserve her way of life and impose ‘democracy’ and ‘freedom’ (to say nothing of global capitalism) on others: indeed, it is her vocation to do so. The vocabulary of ‘vocation’ or ‘calling’ comes easily to presidential lips, a vocabulary that implies a divine call to a chosen people. Although British and European political leaders would use such overtly religious language less glibly, they too appeal to notions of trust and moral obligation, and easily assume the superiority of western democracy and culture over that of others. This points to a second reason why it is important to take biblical stories and ideas as fundamental even to the ostensibly secular identity of the West. As John Gray has argued, modernity itself is founded upon the religious idea of salvation. The prevailing idea of what it means to be modern is a post-Christian myth. Christians have always held that there is only one path to salvation, that it is disclosed in history and that it is open to all. … Worshipping one God, Christians have always believed that only one way of life can be right. (Gray 2003: 103)

Gray points out that Eastern religions such as Hinduism or Buddhism do not seek for a meaning in history: salvation does not occur in time or history but rather is liberation from it. In the modern West, however, history itself is construed as ‘progress’, a secular variant of ‘salvation history’; and the West considers itself farthest along that road of modernity, which should come to all nations as they continue to ‘develop’. There is therefore in western nations a secular faith, inherited from the Christian idea of salvation, that ‘as the rest of the world absorbs science and becomes modern, it is bound to become secular, enlightened and peaceful – as, contrary to all evidence, they imagine themselves to be’ (Gray 2003: 118). The Christian idea of salvation from sin was transformed, partly through its absorption of Greek philosophical concepts,

184

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

into the idea of salvation from finitude. Once release from finitude was envisaged, then scientists, politicians and economists could rely on the religious mythology that informs the half-unconscious auto-narrative of the West to support their drive for progress and development. To suppose that because the modern West is secular it is no longer influenced by biblical narratives is therefore to misunderstand the character and basis of secular modernity. Narrative and Resources for Change The auto-narrative of the West, steeped as it is in biblical stories and the classical world, is thus an auto-narrative deeply invested in gendered death-dealing. War and killing are marks of masculinity: men follow the Lord of Hosts to battle, literal or spiritual, while women are passive and accept suffering and sacrifice. Mimetic desire as analysed by René Girard is a powerful account of the spiral of violence of the West and its fixation on death; far too much of the history of the West can be told in terms of necrophilic longings premised upon a lack which is filled by violence and mastery on the part of men, and the sacrifice and submission of women. It can easily be seen, however, that not all desire is mimetic or premised upon a lack. In particular, creativity, and the desire it expresses, must be both innovative, not merely mimetic, and require something other than lack. To paint a picture or write a book, unless it is merely derivative, involves having new ideas; moreover, it cannot be done just because someone else has done so and I desire to do the same. The desire to be creative, to bring something new into the world out of the overflowing fullness of resources, is at least as important as mimetic desire, though it has received far less scholarly attention. But how is this creative desire to be understood, and how can it be channelled to generate resources for change? I suggest that it is once again to narrative that we can look as a place to begin the investigation. In any story of a self, we assume that it has a beginning and has (or will have) an end: birth and death. Our auto-narratives begin with our parents and our birth, even though the story of our birth (and ultimately also our death) can only be told by somebody else. Moreover although it is inevitable that each of us will die, it would be perverse – or sick – to tell the story of our lives as though death were its whole focus or meaning. The lives that we live and the narratives we tell of those lives are full of actions and events that are done and experienced with the resources that we have from birth and have developed since then. It is paradigmatically with the birth of a child that newness comes into the world: new possibilities of choice and action, imagination and creativity. Birth and death are the events that begin and end each human life; natality and mortality are the philosophical categories that take their bearings from these events. As I have argued elsewhere, western philosophy has been much preoccupied with mortality, defining the meaning of life by reference to its temporal finitude, the fact that it must end. Yet it is with natality, with the possibility of new resources and ideas flowing out of fullness of creative desire,

Grace M. Jantzen

185

from which hope can be drawn. This is as true at the level of society as it is for the meaning of individual lives. It follows that the narrative of the West can be told in more than one way. Full of wars and violence as the West has been, it has also been full of love and beauty and creativity. A history that concentrates on violence and war is like a life-story that places the focus of meaning upon death. Death is significant, to be sure, and not to be ignored; but birth, too, is part of the story; and it is with birth, with creativity, that newness can enter the world. Natality is that which offers the possibility of fresh starts, new and creative approaches that can subvert violence and destruction. It is therefore crucial, in developing resources for change, that we look not only at the narratives of mortality, war and violence, where mimetic desire as lack spirals into destruction, but also at narratives of natality and creativity, expressions of beauty and newness. Moreover, natality cannot be thought of without body and gender: the body of the mother and the sexed newcomer to whom she gives birth and whose life-story begins in the web of relationships anchored in the mother. A focus on mortality can ignore gender. It can look away from the body, as it has through centuries of christendom, and concentrate instead on an immortal soul. It can treat the self as an atomistic individual, unconnected with others, since it is after all possible to die alone. But no one can be born alone: a focus on natality must recognize the narratable self in interconnection with other selves, each of whom is as unique and irreplaceable as itself. Once we begin to tell stories of the self and stories of culture in a way that takes natality seriously, another shift occurs. It becomes obvious that the metaphor of salvation which has dominated western history (both sacred and secular) is indeed a metaphor, and one that fits snugly with a focus on mortality. Salvation connotes rescue from an intolerable situation, not a change in the situation itself. It is a rescue that is effected by someone outside, not brought about by the one in peril. It bespeaks atomistic individualism, just as does mortality: one individual can be miraculously ‘saved’ while everyone else is destroyed. Christendom is full of such stories, from Noah’s flood to the book of Revelation, where hand-picked individuals rejoice in heavenly bliss while the rest of the world is swallowed up in damnation. The body, and especially its unruly sexuality, has often been seen as a hindrance to salvation: it is the soul that is saved, on some accounts by escaping the body, on others by effecting the body’s transformation. It is hardly surprising, therefore, that in a religious rhetoric that focuses on mortality and salvation, the body has been suspect, and women – sexually attractive, embodied, birth-giving – represented as inferior to the male. If, however, we begin with birth and use the category of natality as a frame of reference, then the metaphor that comes to mind is not ‘salvation’ but ‘flourishing’ as a garden or a plant flourishes and flowers. Unlike salvation, which could be granted to one individual alone, flourishing (like natality) implies interconnection in a web of life, a web in which each contributes to the well-being of the other in a circle of interdependence (as plants, bees, birds, rain and the earth itself need one another to

186

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

flourish). If there is something amiss, it must be put right: a single individual cannot flourish while leaving an intolerable situation as it is. Nor does flourishing require miraculous rescue from the outside. Provided that conditions are right, flourishing is natural; it comes from within, from the resources of life growing into fullness. It is therefore vitally reliant upon the body, and upon nourishment and reproduction. Working from the metaphor of flourishing one would never minimize the importance of the body, gender, or the maternal; and the misogyny which has plagued christendom would have no place. The metaphor of flourishing has an important place for death as the natural end of life, but it does not allow the idea that it is death which gives life its meaning and significance. The metaphor of flourishing has a place in biblical writings, but it is very largely displaced in christendom by the metaphor of salvation, to such an extent that flourishing may now seem like a novel concept and salvation as literal doctrine, not a metaphor at all. In the narrative of the West, the focus on mortality and the metaphor of salvation have given rise to an ideology of dominance and the technologies and practices of violence, while natality, creativity, beauty and flourishing have been suppressed or ignored. But this does not mean that they do not exist. Just as the narratives we tell of our individual lives select some things and omit others, depending on the purposes for which we tell them, so also the religious narratives of the Bible and of christendom select and omit, depending on the storyteller and the context in which they were written. The Bible is after all not a single book, even though the christendom of the West has chosen to present it as if it were, by enclosing it within a single set of covers, with uniform typeface and consecutive pagination. It is a whole collection of literature written by authors with conflicting agendas and to audiences with varying needs. Hence ‘the biblical canon should not be understood as the product of a peaceful consensus, but as the result of protracted struggles for authority between competing communities’ (Schwartz 1997: 146), a process that continues through its whole afterlife until the present. It is within the fissures and ambiguities of narrative, I suggest, that effective history is found, a history that renounces the complacency of ideology and looks instead for the resources that can help to bring about change. So long as our auto-narratives, individual or collective, try to focus on universals, and reject the disruptions presented by particularity with its invitations to think and act otherwise, we shall repeat the patterns established in that narrative. On the other hand, if we accept the invitation to destabilize this auto-narrative, then I suggest that we can discover openings which lead to resources for change. I shall discuss two such openings, beginning with the negative. The Power of the Negative for Change A philosopher who expended much effort in theorizing the significance of the negative and its role in bringing about change was G.W.F. Hegel (see especially his Phenomenology of Spirit). Hegel is often caricatured as a philosopher of totality: one form of life or consciousness meets its opposite, and in the conflict a new third form

Grace M. Jantzen

187

emerges, only to meet its opposite in turn in a stately waltz of the Absolute through time. There is something in this caricature; certainly in the Phenomenology Hegel appears to be charting the advance of (human? German?) spirit in terms of such encounters. The detail has been endlessly discussed. However, it is much more interesting for my purposes to ask about how Hegel understood the role of opposition or the negative in such encounters, the dynamism of the negative which makes it a resource for change. Here we return to the idea of desire as lack. In Hegel’s terms, consciousness sees itself over against what it is not, what it does not have. This gives rise to desire, a desire which works to fill the lack. By working through this lack towards fulfilment desire acts as a powerful dynamic of change. Judith Butler, in her analysis of the role of desire in Hegel’s thought, says: Conceived as a lack, a being-without, desire initially signifies negativity; as the pursuit of substance, desire thus implicitly raises the question of whether human negativity, that which constitutes its ontological difference, can be resolved into an encompassing network of being. Human desire articulates the subject’s relationship to that which is not itself, that which is different, strange, novel, awaited, absent, lost. (Butler 1999: 9)

Desire as negativity is thus vital as the dynamic of change. Both Hegel and Butler write in abstract terms; it is easiest to conceive of their ‘subject’ as an individual human consciousness. But it is not hard to see how this theory is concretely instantiated in relation to the ambiguities of narrative and effective history. As the individual or collective subject becomes conscious of the fissures and disruptions, comes to recognize the complacent ideology of traditional history for what it is, and hears the voices from the margins of what might have been but is not, the subject comes to desire this negative. Desire for what one is not can of course be destructive and violent, as Girard showed in his account of mimetic rivalry. The example that springs most readily to mind in relation to Hegel is his account of lordship and bondage, where two subjects desire recognition from one another and engage in a struggle to the death in order to achieve it. While the importance of this aspect of desire as lack could hardly be overstated, however, it is not the whole account. Desire can also, after all, be for what is good, what is creative, that is experienced as a lack or a negative by the desiring subject. Thus negation is not merely a principle of destruction but also a principle of creativity. Judith Butler says, The negative is also human freedom, human desire, the possibility to create anew; the nothingness to which human life had been consigned was thus at once the possibility of its renewal. The nonactual is at once the entire realm of possibility. The negative showed itself in Hegelian terms not merely as death, but as a sustained possibility of becoming. (Butler 1999: 62)

Neither Butler nor Hegel writes in terms of narrative, but it is clear that the account of the creative role of the negative can be applied. When the ambiguities and fissures

188

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

of effective history disrupt the traditional story, glimpses appear of what it is not, its negative; and these begin to show themselves as possibilities of what might be. I shall argue in a moment that unless there is also desire that overflows, desire not premised upon a lack, then these negatives on their own can lead at best to partial transformation, at worst to mere reversal: the old slave becomes the new master but the system of slavery is not overcome. Nevertheless, the negative, and desire for what is not, is of enormous importance in the development of narrative identity. Yearning for peace instead of violence, generosity rather than greed, flourishing rather than dereliction, is indispensable for the creation of a better future, even though this yearning, so long as it is based on a negative, is as yet yearning only for the mirror image of what is undesirable. Sometimes, indeed, confronting the negative as negative is all that is possible in a concrete situation. Jean-Paul Sartre famously recognized that there are times when the only freedom left to an individual or a group is the freedom to say no. The power to refuse an intolerable state of affairs is a terrible final freedom in a situation where such resistance comes at the price of one’s life; but nevertheless it remains open, and in the context of Nazi occupation and the resistance movement within which Sartre wrote, this freedom of resistance, the ultimate negative, was embraced, often with great heroism. If it was not within their power to bring about a better world, they could at least refuse to be party to the evils of the regime that was being imposed upon them. They could say no. The negative is thus crucial as part of the dynamic for change, and should not be passed over too quickly. Hegel writes of ‘tarrying with the negative’, ‘looking the negative in the face’ (Hegel 1977: 19, emphasis mine), not treating it merely as nothing or false or of no importance. It is important to confront the violence and death-dealing of western self-identity in all its dimensions if we are to develop resources for change. Only by facing up to and tarrying with the negative in our individual and collective auto-narratives will the yearning for change grow. If we turn too quickly away from it, do not come to terms with it as that which has made us what we are, then our efforts at change are likely to be mere repetitions. As Paul Ricoeur once said, ‘If we want to be instructed by events, then we must not be in a hurry to solve them’ (Ricoeur 1965: 247). To jump quickly from an immediate crisis to a ‘solution’ without confronting the ambiguities of the history which forms the context in which the crisis occurs is to risk repetition and escalation, history reproducing itself on the basis of history. Thus if in our present context we hope to offer constructive suggestions for nonviolent alternatives to the conflicts that are tearing the world apart in the name of God, we must take the time to study the genealogy of religious violence in the West. The goal of such study is threefold. First, it will make us aware of the complex ways in which religion, gender and violence have been interlocked in the history of the West. Second, it will increase yearning for an alternative, desire for the ‘negative’ of this destructive pattern. Third, by raising up the counter-narratives and dissonances, listening to the voices from the margins, we will find clues for how it could have been different, how we might learn to think otherwise and bring about change for the better.

Grace M. Jantzen

189

Thinking Utopia This third goal, however, already indicates that though it is essential to tarry with the negative and not pass over it too quickly, ultimately the negative is not good enough. Though the negative can be dynamic, fostering desire for change, the desire that is premised on lack will still always be desire for the polar opposite of the situation perceived as negative: master and slave will reverse positions. If change is to be truly transformative rather than simply the antithesis of the present (like the negative of a photograph), then the negative is not enough. It is at this point that creativity enters, the desire to bring about something new, out of overflowing abundance, not out of lack, and aiming towards flourishing rather than destruction. In political terms, the vision for positive change has been presented as utopia. Utopia literally means ‘no place’: it does not exist and perhaps never could. It is the place outside the auto-narrative of the community, extra-territorial, that calls traditional history into question and reveals other possibilities. From this ‘no place’ an exterior glance is cast on our reality, which suddenly looks strange, nothing more being taken for granted. The field of the possible is now open beyond that of the actual; it is a field, therefore, for alternative ways of living. (Ricoeur 1986: 16)

Paul Ricoeur, who wrote these words, contrasts utopia with ideology. Ideology can (with qualifications) be seen as the auto-narrative of traditional history, the complacent story (in the West) of progress, freedom and democracy, ideas often treated as universals. The exterior, the outside, the place on the margins, problematizes this complacency; but it is also the place from which real alternatives can be imagined. May we not say then that the imagination itself – through its utopian function – has a constitutive role in helping us rethink the nature of our social life? Is not utopia – this leap outside – the way in which we radically rethink what is family, what is consumption, what is authority, what is religion, and so on? Does not the fantasy of an alternative society and its exteriorization ‘nowhere’ work as one of the most formidable contestations of what is? (Ricoeur 1986: 16)

Any theoretical account of how this ‘leap outside’ is to be achieved is about as useful as a theoretical account of any sort of leap, or indeed any sport or skill. One does not learn to run or jump or play an instrument by reading books about it, but by practice; and if that practice is guided by a skilled coach or teacher it is all the more likely to produce good results. In the effort to find an ‘exterior’ place from which the ‘contestation of what is’ can get a purchase, it is no help to generate more abstractions. Nevertheless, we need not work in a vacuum: there are excellent guides among many groups who have been marginalized whether because of gender, race, colonization, disability, or any of the other ways of not being the normative white heterosexual affluent male. Teresa de Lauretis, discussing how feminism has learned to represent gender otherwise, writes of the ‘exterior’ place like this (using ‘utopia’ here in a negative sense):

190

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology That ‘elsewhere’ is not some mythic distant past or some utopian future history: it is the elsewhere of history here and now, the blind spots, the space-off, of its representations. I think of it as spaces in the margins of hegemonic discourses, social spaces carved in the interstices of institutions and in the chinks and cracks of the power-knowledge apparati. (de Lauretis 1987: 25).

There are, de Lauretis says, spaces that exist and that can be discerned in ‘counterpractices and new forms of community’ (26). By attending to these ‘chinks and cracks’, listening to the voices from the margins of the biblical texts and the history of religion in the West (and being aware that many voices have been silenced altogether), there are resources for imagining and working towards newness. The creativity of imagination empowered by desire for newness is inspired by the counter-narratives and alternative perspectives of exteriority, and guided by values of natality and flourishing. It is this imagination that is set free by attentiveness to the life and beauty that emerges ever and again as contrasted with the sordid violence that structures the narrative of the West, and develops a poetics of transformation. In concrete terms, what is required is a painstaking genealogy not only of the religious violence that has formed the West but also of the voices of resistance, beauty and hope. Only by reading history can philosophers of religion be effective in helping to bring newness into the world. Further Reading Arendt, H., The Human Condition, Chicago, IL, and London: University of Chicago Press, 1958 Cavarero, A., Relating Narratives: Storytelling and Selfhood, trans. Paul A. Kottman, London and New York: Routledge, 2000 Gray, J., Al Queda and What it Means to be Modern, London: Faber and Faber, 2003 Jantzen, G.M., Becoming Divine: Towards a Feminist Philosophy of Religion, Manchester and Bloomington, IN: Manchester University Press, and Indiana University Press, 1998 _____ , Foundations of Violence: Death and the Displacement of Beauty, Volume One, London and New York: Routledge, 2004 Schwartz, R.M., The Curse of Cain: The Violent Legacy of Monotheism, Chicago, IL, and London: University of Chicago Press, 1997

Chapter 11

What To Say: Reflections on Mysticism after Modernity George Pattison

I Whatever its virtues, the word ‘mystical’ also covers a multitude of philosophical sins. Many recent – and, for that matter, not so recent – commentators see it as especially delinquent in respect of its entanglement in some basic confusions about the interrelationship between language, experience and selfhood. One thing that is especially striking about such critics is that they represent a range of otherwise disparate ideological positions yet are united in their resistance to the idea that the ambiguous, evasive or paradoxical language of ‘the mystics’ is to be understood as the mirroring in language of an extra-linguistic experience in which the normally reliable structures of the self and its world were suspended or even obliterated. A classic statement of this earlier view was made by Dom Cuthbert Butler in his 1922 study Western Mysticism. Here Butler wrote that It is well to warn the reader that much of the language used will appear hardly intelligible, and may even give rise to doubts as to the mental balance of some of the writers. It has to be asserted strongly that the great mystics were not religiously mad; nor were they pious dreamers: far from it – they were, most of them, peculiarly sane and strong men and women, who have left their mark, many of them, for good in history. The obscurity and apparent extravagance of their language is due to their courage in struggling with the barriers and limitations of human thought and language in order to describe in some fashion what they experienced in the height of the mystic state. (Butler 1960: 67)

Even apparently heretical statements of a pantheistic kind, identifying God and the world or God and the soul, are, Dom Cuthbert believed, to be ascribed to the difficulties of this translation. An early paradigm of what has since become a near-consensus among many philosophers of religion was the 1978 essay by Steven T. Katz, ‘Language, epistemology and mysticism’. Katz was by no means dismissive of the possibility of mystical experience, but he did object to a number of claims typically made by or on behalf of those who reported such experiences. Especially, he took issue with the then prevalent view that there was a single core ‘experience’ underlying the dazzling variety of mystical writings, utterances and phenomena. Such a view perpetuated a naïve – and certainly pre-(late)Wittgensteinian – understanding of the relationship

192

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

between language and experience. Experiences are not something that go on in a kind of silent parallel universe and then get translated, more or less successfully, into words. Experiences only occur as experiences, as human experiences, as our experiences, because they occur in a context framed by the beliefs, values and intentions embedded in the universal medium of self-conscious life: language. ‘Whereof we cannot speak, thereof we must keep silent’1 – these closing words of Wittgenstein’s Tractatus, though often referred to as ‘mystical’, can be taken in a sense, a sense provided by the later Wittgenstein himself, as profoundly antimystical: for where language has nothing to contribute, then there is nothing for us to talk about. Only what has its place within language can be regarded as worthy of discussion. Katz stated what he calls ‘the single epistemological assumption’ behind his essay in the following terms: There are NO pure (i.e. unmediated) experiences. Neither mystical experience nor more ordinary forms of experience give any indication, or any grounds for believing that they are unmediated. That is to say, all experience is processed through, organized by, and makes itself available to us in extremely complex epistemological ways. The notion of unmediated experience seems, if not self-contradictory, at best empty. (Katz 1978: 26)

As becomes clear in the remainder of Katz’s essay, the most important of the complex epistemological ways in which experience is always already mediated is language. As he goes on to say, ‘The Christian mystic usually says that what he experiences is “union with God”. The Hindu mystic says that his experience is one in which his individual self is identical with Brahman or the Universal Self.’ (29) By this, Katz does not mean to say that mystical experiences don’t happen, but simply that they don’t happen outside the structures of interpretation given in, with and under linguistic form. If we want to understand what’s going on in mystical experience, then, we should not try to familiarize ourselves with that ineffable pre-linguistic dimension of which the mystic seems to speak; we should simply try to understand, precisely, what the mystic says. There is not ‘a’ mystic experience, but a Hindu experience and a Christian experience, and, within each of these, a multitude of more specific experiences that speak to and out of the more specific linguistic and cultural coordinates of the experiencer. Although Katz does not subscribe to the basic philosophical assumptions of phenomenology (in fact, he makes a point of telling us that he is ‘no great admirer’ of phenomenology), he does find some value in what he takes to be the phenomenological concept of intentionality. In the context of language this means that no word or linguistic unit is at any stage to be found floating around without any intended reference whatsoever: consciousness is always to be found related to some ‘datum as meant’, that is, an intentional aim at ‘some specific meaning or meaningful content’ (Katz 1978: 63). The mystics’ words about the ineffability of what they have experienced are, perhaps despite appearances, always understandable in terms of the 1

Author’s preferred translation [eds].

George Pattison

193

total discourse within which the peak moments of their rhetorical self-presentation are set. The broad features of Katz’s approach, as described, have since acquired something like normative status in wide reaches of contemporary Anglo-American philosophy of religion, even, as previously indicated, being common to widely divergent ideological tendencies. Thus, on the one hand, George A. Lindbeck has privileged what he calls the cultural–linguistic model of religious truth over what he sees as its main current rivals, the experiential–expressivist and cognitive models. On Lindbeck’s account religious symbols and doctrines are neither a means of expressing pre-theological experience nor assertions about independent metaphysical or empirical states of affairs. Rather, they are to be understood in terms of the whole cultural ‘code’ to which they belong. Although language has a special place in the structure of cultural encoding, Lindbeck notes that symbolic action, such as liturgy, must also be included here. However, as he puts it, ‘the most easily pictured of the contrasts between a cultural–linguistic model of religion and an experiential– expressive one is that the former reverses the relation of the inner and the outer. Instead of deriving external features of a religion from inner experience, it is the inner experiences which are viewed as derivative’ (Lindbeck 1984: 34). Rather than gesture, ritual and word being attempts to express or to communicate the immediacy of some pre-symbolic experience, experiences are to be understood as generated and shaped by symbolic systems. If Lindbeck’s position offers a subtle defence of existing religious cultural– linguistic systems (that is, Churches), it is the moments of rupture and transformation in these systems that most engages the British philosopher of religion Don Cupitt, not least with regard to what he regards as the meaning of ‘mysticism after modernity’. Cupitt sees mysticism as a feature of those periods in history when the foundations of reigning religious orthodoxies began to crumble and radical figures were setting out in search of something new. In these terms, as Cupitt puts it, ‘This suggests a certain proportionality: the mystics were in the same sort of position relative to the culture of their time as the various New Age and other counter-cultural movements are in relation to the violent upheavals of our own time.’ (Cupitt 1998: 108) Yet, like Katz and Lindbeck, Cupitt agrees that whatever the mystic is taken as doing, it is something done in and as language: ‘The mystic’s task then is to overcome the contradictions of orthodoxy and create religious happiness. This is a task for a writer. You can’t first experience religious happiness and then transcribe it into words, because writing produces experience, writing forms and produces experience, writing makes experience possible.’ (114) The characteristic dislocations of mystical discourse are therefore seen as arising from the tension between what Cupitt sees as two distinct vocabularies, the one being ‘the mythological and poetical language of the Scriptures, of worship and preaching and popular belief’, the other being ‘the official “high” language in which the limits of permissible belief and practice are laid down, orthodoxy is defined, and the faith is systematized’ (118). The ‘strange ways’ in which mystics use language are therefore part of an attempt ‘to recreate religious freedom and a spirit of levity, within a tradition that has become a cruel

194

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

and alienating power-structure’ (120). The mystics are not to be seen as fumbling desperately for words but, in a sense, as virtuosi of language, drawing attention to the inconsistencies of the given cultural–linguistic systems that define the given religious landscape and projecting new and unrealized possibilities for the future. It is not ‘human thought and language’ as such that the mystics are seeking to transcend, but always and only a culturally specific form of human thought and language. It is perhaps a not dissimilar sense for mysticism as a very specific kind of language (rather than a kind of experience) that leads Denys Turner to assert that, in fact, ‘modern interpretation has invented “mysticism” and that we persist in reading back the terms of that conception upon a stock of mediaeval authorities who knew of no such thing – or, when they knew of it, decisively rejected it’ (1995b: 7). Within the modern period – indeed, from the fourteenth century onwards – Turner suggests that the categories of ‘theologian’ and ‘mystic’ are to all intents and purposes mutually exclusive. Whatever Christian theology is or should be about, it is not the modern invention of some transcultural mystical experience. One of my aims in this paper is to contest this consensus. In doing so, however, I am not denying that important insights have been registered and that the kinds of positions I have just summarized impose a certain conscientiousness in acknowledging the enormous complexity of the kinds of cultural data being offered in mystical texts. The tendency of historians of religion or comparative religionists to group what can now be seen as widely diverse cultural and textual materials into catch-all categories such as ‘mystical experience’ could often lead to a flattening out rather than an enriching of understanding – although, arguably, in its own time and place the ‘invention’ of mysticism by nineteenth-century theorists (if that is what actually happened) did draw attention to much that would otherwise have been neglected. Without the impetus given by a William James, an Evelyn Underhill or a Dom Cuthbert Butler texts and contexts that now call for very different interpretation from their own would have continued to be unread and unstudied. Yet my chief aim is not really to call for ‘two cheers’ for these earlier writers on mysticism, still less to seek to reinstate their leading idea of ‘a’ mystical experience, outside and beyond all cultural relativity. Perhaps it is more to question some of the assumptions about language and about the relationship between language and experience and what is going on in mystical experience that seem to be shared – despite all their differences – by Katz, Lindbeck, Cupitt and many others. There will be two main foci to my discussion. The first is provided by the meditations on language found in the later Heidegger. I shall then seek to relate these to the representation of religious experience in some of the writings of Dostoevsky. Heidegger is, in one perspective, a challenging choice of interlocutor, since he would seem to be the ancestor of one strand of our current pan-logism, that is, the view that there is nothing outside language. Certainly, language is absolutely pivotal to both early and late Heidegger, and, in the later Heidegger at least, it would seem questionable whether there is or can be a genuinely human moment or experience that is not always already mediated by language. Even if, for Heidegger, the form of language that is given greatest weight is the perhaps exceptional word of the

George Pattison

195

poet, it is in the speaking of this word that the world becomes open and that we, its speakers and auditors, are granted access to something that abides in the midst of what is otherwise the sheer meaningless flux of temporal becoming. In no other way, it seems, do or can we become human, apart from the way in which our humanity is opened up in, by and as language. II A convenient presentation of Heidegger’s approach is found in his lecture ‘The Principle of Identity’. Much of his argument has now been incorporated into the stock-in-trade of the philosophy of religion in the continental tradition. Nevertheless, precisely because many of his expressions are so extensively traded in the contemporary knowledge-market, where one is tempted to say that they are often used merely as slogans or lapel badges, it is worthwhile reminding ourselves how Heidegger himself arrived at and used them. Heidegger sets out to consider the contemporary significance of the principle of identity, conventionally summarized in the formula A=A. As he proceeds to interpret this formula, Heidegger discovers in it a further layer: that A is not understood here simply as A being equal or equivalent to A, but as A being A. A=A means A is A. This doesn’t seem to get us very much further, until Heidegger turns to a Parmenidean fragment, translated by Kirk and Raven as ‘for the same thing can be thought as can be’.2 Glossing this saying, Heidegger interprets it as a statement of the belonging together of man (the one who thinks) and Being. He argues that for most of the western philosophical tradition (and, for Heidegger, this invariably includes philosophical theism) this has been understood primarily in terms of the ‘togetherness’ of thinking and Being. In other words, the truth of thinking is determined by its sameness – its identity – with what is. To speak truthfully is to state what is the case. Speaking, logos, truth is determined by its conformity to what is, to Being or, more precisely, to the particular being under consideration whose ‘being’ is assumed to be comprised in and constituted by its identity with itself. Language is merely the instrument by which the selfsameness of the object being thought is enabled to appear in thought, as itself. This assumption, Heidegger claims, is one of the basic principles of western European thinking and of western science and technology. For even though science and technology do not waste time on such an abstract idea as the principle of identity, they nevertheless assume it – otherwise, Heidegger says, ‘science could not be sure in advance of the identity of its object, it could not be what it is’ (ID 26). But this also applies to humanistic science. Thus, in relation to the theory of mysticism, we could say that the approach of James, Butler and other earlier theorists of the kind criticized by Katz was predicated on the principle of identity in that it assumed that there was a ‘being’ – even if only a psychological being or entity – that provided the determining 2 Martin Heidegger, Identity and Difference (1969: 269). Further references are given as ID in the text.

196

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

and self-identical measure of theory. The mystical experience – irrespective of the objectivity of its deliverances about supernatural beings – was the ‘thing itself’ that made any scientific study of the phenomenon of mysticism possible. Heidegger does not directly attempt to refute this principle. What he does instead is to sketch an alternative approach, which, he hints (and explores more fully elsewhere), is attentive to dimensions of the Parmenidean saying that have passed unnoticed in the course of western philosophical history. Instead of focusing on the ‘togetherness’ of thought and being, he suggests, let us try to think instead in terms of the ‘belonging’ aspect of the phrase ‘the belonging together of man and Being’. If we do this, Heidegger argues, a quite different view emerges. This view is not – as what one might call ‘pop-Heideggerianism’ would have it – simply an alternative to the view that finds its supreme expression in science and technology. For the view offered by the focus on belonging is, as Heidegger will say, even to be glimpsed in the enframing that he regards as the operative principle of technology (ID 38). If this enframing sets up and disposes the world in such a way as to allow only what can be scientifically known and technologically acted upon to count as reality – thereby, however unknowingly, giving effect to the principle of identity – it also reveals, however obscurely, that there is a fundamental belonging in the relationship between humankind and Being. In terms of the modern world’s scientific self-understanding, we cannot be (that is, live) otherwise than as denizens of the reality that science and technology enframe. We cannot escape the world and there is nothing in the world that is not, in principle, knowable by us. Even in our modern alienation from the world, we recognize and, indeed, proclaim that we belong fundamentally to it. Yet, in insisting that only what appears within the frame of science and technology can count as real, the modern world excludes aspects of the belonging together of humankind and Being that also merit attention. So dominant is the frame of science and technology, however, that we can only get to see these other aspects by taking what, from the scientific point of view, must appear like a leap into the irrational dark. Heidegger, however, sees it as a leap ‘into the realm from which man and Being have already reached each other in their active nature [Wesen], since both are mutually appropriated, extended as a gift, one to the other’ (ID 33). In other words, where the representational thinking that is characteristic of philosophy, science and technology sees Being in terms of the ‘reality’ to which thought has to conform (even when, as with ‘the mystical experience’, that reality is itself a mental event), the leap takes us into a realm where it is simply not necessary to worry about establishing a connection between thought and Being because they are each experienced in their inalienable mutual coinherence. Thought never is without Being, being never is without thought. Heidegger speaks here of a ‘realm, vibrating within itself’ (ID 37) – ‘vibrating’ in that there is no final fact, thing or reality to which meaning could be reduced and, equally, no final logical requirement to which Being would have to answer to count as true. In his idea of ‘the event of appropriation’ he therefore seeks to stress both that this is an ‘event’, something that

George Pattison

197

happens, and an ‘act of appropriation’ in which we, as human subjects, are fully engaged and active.3 Crucial here is the question of language. To think of appropriating as the event of appropriation means to contribute to this self-vibrating realm. Thinking receives the tools for this self-suspended structure from language. For language is the most delicate and thus the most susceptible vibration holding everything within the suspended structure of the appropriation. We dwell in the appropriation inasmuch as our active nature [Wesen] is given over to language. (ID 37– 8)

Language reveals Being as being open to language. Being ‘is’ as a linguistic ‘happening’ and only as such is it thinkable. This may sound like, but is very far from being, a repetition of the view that we have no access to Being apart from language and that, therefore, Being ‘is’ only what it is in and as language (which would be the position of the post-Wittgensteinian philosophers of religion previously discussed). In a Heideggerian perspective it would be more accurate to say instead that Being ‘is’ also as it is in language – and language ‘is’ (that is, functions as meaningful discourse) also as it is a revelation of what is given to us in and by Being. In this connection there is a very deliberate acoustic metaphor in Heidegger’s emphasis on the ‘belonging’ of humankind and Being, since the German word incorporates the everyday word for ‘hearing’ (Ge-hören, where hören means ‘to hear’). Language-users do not ‘construct’ meaning, but derive it from the manner in which they listen or attend to Being. Language itself arises as the form that such listening and attention take in human existence. Moreover, even though all language is likely to contain some trace, however distorted or diminished, of its original belonging-together with Being, some forms of language express this in greater measure than others – and, for Heidegger, it is above all the poet who speaks the Word that most resonates with the vibrancy of this belonging-together. Where language is most true to its own essence, then, in this poetic attention to the resonance of Being within it, it is not undisciplined – but its discipline is that of poetic utterance rather than scientific statement.

3 The phrase ‘event of appropriation’ is used here – unsatisfactorily – to translate Heidegger’s term Ereignis. At one level, this is a very ordinary word translatable as ‘event’ or ‘occurrence’ and perfectly comprehensible to the person on the street. However, Heidegger also makes us attentive to the word ‘eigen’, buried, as it were, within Er-eignis. This is related to another famous Heideggerian term, Eigentlichkeit, conventionally translated as ‘authenticity’. Eigen relates to what is one’s own, thus ‘appropriation’. Ereignis thus signals that what happens when we understand something is both an event, something that happens to us and an event in which we make what we understand our own. ‘Appropriation’ is, however, an unfortunate term if it is allowed to have connotations of making one’s own in the sense of ownership or even theft, since it is central to Heidegger’s idea that the understanding that arises in the event of appropriation is not something we, as it were, ‘take’, but something that is given to us.

198

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

How might these Heideggerian reflections be fruitful for the understanding of mysticism in modernity? Several different paths lie open, in fact. One of these – probably the path most travelled in the reception of Heidegger – would go back a step and remind us, rightly, that everything Heidegger says about language and the event of appropriation has to be understood in the context of what he has said in earlier works about the manifestation of metaphysical nothingness in the phenomenon of anxiety. As he had famously argued in his 1929 inaugural lecture in Freiburg University, anxiety is a state in which ‘beings as a whole slip away’ (Heidegger 1978: 103). Where scientific rationality presents a world in which everything is as it is for some reason and some kind of explanation is always required of any would-be truth-claim, anxiety makes us see the world as ultimately groundless. This, Heidegger held, was not simply the subjective anxiety analysed by Kierkegaard. It was, instead, the recognition that the ‘world’ constructed according to the worldview of modern science and technology was just that – a construction. This worldview is capable of explaining much – but not everything. There is a point in our experience at which it explains, simply, nothing. Against such a background the event of appropriation appears as an original occurrence of Being that ‘nothing’ precedes, ‘nothing’ explains, and ‘nothing’ serves to ground. We cannot understand it by tracing its cause, only by interpreting it. This seems to open up far-reaching possibilities for setting in motion a dialogue between Heidegger and East Asian, especially Buddhist, thought. Here too there seems to be an insistence on an absolute experience of nothingness as the sole ground of any important religious truth. Moreover, Heidegger’s thought can help us to see how such an experience, while in itself entirely indeterminate with regard to any conceptual content, may – must – nevertheless, qua human experience, be appropriated by us in the form of a determinate structure of meaning, as a word, a work of art or a ritual action. This could also lead to reflection on the possibility of a ‘pure experience’, an immediate experience of the content-less ‘nothing’ that is the ground of all experience. And this might further be brought into connection with some aspects of postmodern religious speculation.4 The exploration of such connections is certainly not excluded by the less-travelled path I now intend to take. In turning to Dostoevsky I do not rule out the possibility that what we read concerning mystical experience in the writing of Dostoevsky is susceptible of being harmonized with certain currents in Buddhism, nor that this might be done in the spirit of Heidegger – but to demonstrate such connections would take us far beyond the limits of the present subject. Where the enquiry into an experience of nothingness that might be taken as the common ground of Buddhist enlightenment and the Heideggerian event of appropriation seems to lead to a moment of pure experience, abstracted from 4 This line of interpreting Heidegger is especially associated with the Kyoto School of philosophy, in such representatives as Nishida Kitaro, Nishitani Keiji and Abe Masao. For my own approach to this see Pattison, Agnosis: Theology in the Void (1996), especially chapter 4.

George Pattison

199

conceptual or cultural determination, the writings of Dostoevsky, so characteristically dense in dramatic, psychological and sociological detail, work with materials that seem already to be over-determined. The air of a Dostoevsky scene is thick with argument, the clash of opposing perspectives, and the interplay of personal, political and religious agendas, both open and concealed. We are, it seems, a long way from the ‘emptiness’ of Buddhist experience and from the purity of attention that Heidegger’s poetic word seems to require of its listeners if they are to hear in it the voice of Being. Precisely on this point, however, lies the challenge that Dostoevsky might be taken as mounting in relation to Heidegger. For is it beyond dispute – as Heidegger appears to think it is – that the sole occurrence of language capable of recalling us to an awareness of Being is found in the poetic word? The word of the novelist – I suggest – deserves no less than the word of the poet to be taken into account at this point. It is, of course, a very different word, not least when the novelist is Dostoevsky. For where the poetic word of Heidegger’s own favoured poet, Friedrich Hölderlin, speaks to us from beyond the orbit of the scientific–technological worldview, invoking the lost kinship of mortals and gods in the dawn of history, the novelist – here Dostoevsky – speaks to us out of the very experience of modernity in all its dirty, grey detail. Moreover, where the poet speaks most poetically as a single voice, as bearing the word in all its primal purity, what the novelist gives us is a strife of voices, a polyphony that, in the case of Dostoevsky, often sounds more like a cacophony. If this reflects the novelist’s determination to be true to our actual experience of modernity, it might also seem to mark him out as being too entangled in that same modernity to be capable of speaking a word that might signal the advent of other possibilities. Having incarnated himself so deeply in his age, is the novelist still capable of looking beyond it? These questions suggest that what will come out of reading Dostoevsky will not be simply an illustration of the Heideggerian idea of the event of appropriation. On the contrary, it will in certain respects challenge that idea and look to transform it. At the same time, as I hope to show, Heidegger’s thought provides a way of seeing the philosophical interest of what is going on in Dostoevsky’s text. Here, of course, that interest is focused on the question concerning mystical experience and whether or how such experiences are pre-determined by the linguistic and cultural framework inhabited by those who enjoy them. It is, then, to the issue of mystical experience in Dostoevsky that we now turn. III For much of the twentieth century Dostoevsky’s presence in the philosophy of religion was largely as having created, in the person of Ivan Karamazov, a voice for the protest of atheist humanism that, in the era of totalitarianism and the Holocaust, seemed almost unanswerable. Having depicted a succession of actual crimes of extraordinary cruelty committed against children, Ivan goes on to argue that no

200

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

possible future happiness could ever make up for what those children suffered. Even if their tormented mothers should come to accept what had happened and to forgive the tormentors, Ivan will not do so. Oh, Alyosha, I’m not blaspheming! I do understand how the universe will tremble when all in heaven and under the earth merge into one voice of praise, and all that lives and has lived cries out: ‘Just art thou, O Lord, for thy ways are revealed!’ Oh, yes, when the mother and the torturer whose hounds tore her son to pieces embrace each other, and all three cry out with tears: ‘Just art thou, O Lord’, then of course the crown of knowledge will have come and everything be explained. But there is a hitch: that is what I cannot accept.5

Ivan fully realizes that this refusal scarcely counts as an argument: it is, to think in Nietzschean terms, an act of valuation – what Ivan does is to value the suffering of children above any explanation as to the ultimate purpose of the universe. In the face of such suffering, the question ‘Why?’ simply cannot be answered. As he goes on to say, ‘I’d rather remain with my unrequited suffering and my unquenched indignation, even if I am wrong’ (BK 245). But perhaps Ivan is also saying something more: it is not just that he refuses any explanation, ‘the crown of knowledge’, perhaps he is also, implicitly, refusing any possible compensatory experience, any compensatory joy that could overwhelm and transform the memory of suffering. The possibility of such a joy seems to be at issue in an anecdote that, later in the novel, the Devil himself (or, at least, a hallucinated exteriorization of Ivan’s unconscious ‘Devil’) recounts to Ivan (although, as we learn, it was really an anecdote that Ivan himself had made up as a seventeen-year-old schoolboy). The story concerns a Russian nihilist who, obviously, didn’t believe in life after death and, we may infer, would have held views similar to those expressed by Ivan in his tirade against any possible theodicy. Yet, when this nihilist dies, he wakes up on the ‘other side’ where, in the darkness, he learns (we are not told exactly how) that if he walks a quadrillion kilometres, then the gates of paradise will be opened to him. Refusing to accept the whole scenario as being ‘against his convictions’, he simply lies there for nearly a thousand years. Then, for whatever reason, he gets up and sets out on what we are told is more than a billion years’ walk. Finally, he arrives, the doors of paradise are opened and ‘before he had even been there two seconds, he exclaimed that for those two seconds it would be worth walking not just a quadrillion kilometres, but a quadrillion quadrillion, even raised to the quadrillionth power! In short, he sang “Hosannah” and oversweetened it so much that some persons there, of a nobler cast of mind, did not even want to shake hands with him at first… ’ (BK 644). Here the issue seems not to be the ‘explanation’ that Ivan refuses in his moment of protest, but something more immediate, a simple experience of a joy beyond all 5 Dostoevsky, The Brothers Karamazov (1992: 244). Further references are given as BK in the text.

George Pattison

201

possible measure. Such a joy does not refute but it overturns the nihilist’s previously held convictions. Could it even overturn Ivan’s valuation of the suffering of children as higher than the eschatological harmony of the world-order? If so, is it then Ivan’s own subconscious that provides the only possible answer to his ‘rebellion’ – an answer that ‘works’ only in so far as it is not an explanation, ‘the crown of knowledge’, but the experience of ultimate joy itself, joy so great that it allows for no counter-argument? The question is nicely poised since, given that the anecdote about the nihilist was composed by his younger self, it does not seem to have prevented the development of Ivan’s own protest. Even in its own terms, it is no theoretical answer, and the nihilist is not ‘persuaded’ until the moment he enters paradise. In any case, the very absurdity of the scene, in which a rather coarse, stupid and garrulous hallucination talks theology with the tormented Ivan, underlines Dostoevsky’s awareness that there can be no direct communication of such a possibility. At the same time, the idea that a genuinely lived experience of such joy may, even in this life, be available to us is suggested by the experience of Alyosha, the youngest Karamazov brother, in the aftermath of the death of his mentor, the elder Zosima. Alyosha has been keeping watch by the elder’s body and, falling asleep during the reading of the Gospel story of the wedding at Cana of Galilee, where Christ turned water into wine, he had dreamed (or seen?) the elder Zosima himself, mingling with the crowds at the wedding and gesturing to Christ himself, ‘our Sun’. Rushing out, Alyosha has a moment of rapture in which earth and heaven seem to merge. Throwing himself to the ground he weeps, watering the ground with his tears, as we are told. What was he weeping for? Oh, in his rapture he wept even for the stars that shone on him from the abyss, and ‘he was not ashamed of this ecstasy’. It was as if threads from all those innumerable worlds of God all came together in his soul, and it was trembling all over, ‘touching other worlds’. He wanted to forgive everyone and for everything, and to ask forgiveness, oh, not for himself but for all and for everything, ‘as others are asking for me’ rang again in his soul. But with each moment he felt clearly and almost tangibly something as firm and immovable as this heavenly vault descend into his soul … ‘Something visited my soul in that hour,’ he would say afterwards… (BK 362–3).

This plainly has several of the classic features of religious experience, not least regarding both Dostoevsky’s and Alyosha’s reticence concerning ‘what’ it was that entered his soul. Whatever happened in that moment was a matter of ‘as if’, of rapture, of ecstasy and of ‘something’ that is not named. On a straight reading of the novel – and perhaps on a deeper reading too – this passage is pointing us towards the singular status of Alyosha as a potential representative of an exemplary Christian life in the world. This experience presents a kind of existential warrant for this exemplary status. One who experiences existence in such a direct, total and honest way, we feel, already belongs to another world from that of the lies, self-deceits and rationalizations in which so many of the other characters seem to live. Yet even here, Dostoevsky leaves much unsaid. After all, the whole context allows us to see Alyosha as being simply overwrought and it is

202

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

therefore possible to interpret his experience as no more than a kind of hysteria, irrespective of whatever he might have made of it himself. Nor is it clear as to whether this experience has any clear transcendent meaning. Are its cosmic dimensions – the stars and the earth – emphasized to the exclusion of a relation to the transcendent God of Christianity or is this experience meant to give a human and cosmic ‘seal’ to the Christian vision of the heavenly wedding feast that precedes it? That Dostoevsky refrains from giving clear answers is consistent with the treatment of religious experience elsewhere in his authorship. ‘A Little Boy at Christ’s Christmas Tree’ and ‘The Dream of a Ridiculous Man’ from his Diary of a Writer both include accounts of visionary experiences of other worlds, the former of the heavenly world to come, the latter of a prelapsarian earthly paradise. Yet, as with Alyosha’s dream of Cana of Galilee, it is emphasized both that these are merely dreams or visions and, in any case, doubly mediated by virtue of the fact that they are, simply, fictions. ‘Why did I invent such a story, one that conforms so little to an ordinary, reasonable diary?’, Dostoevsky (1984: 172) asks himself and his readers at the conclusion of ‘A Little Boy at Christ’s Christmas Tree’, inserting a tone of irony that rescues the story from mere sentimentality. But perhaps the most pointed treatment of the issue is in The Idiot, in the buildup to one of the eponymous idiot’s epileptic attacks. Here he himself reflects on the nature and significance of his experiences in those moments: there was a stage in it just before the fit itself (if the fit occurred while he was awake), when suddenly, amidst the sadness, the darkness of soul, the pressure, his brain would momentarily catch fire, as it were, and all his life’s forces would be strained at once in an extraordinary impulse. The sense of life, of self-awareness, increased nearly tenfold in these moments, which flashed by like lightning. His mind, his heart were lit up with an extraordinary light, all his agitation, all his doubts, all his worries were as if placated at once, resolved in a sort of sublime tranquillity, filled with serene, harmonious joy, and hope, and filled with reason and ultimate cause. But these moments, these glimpses were still only a presentiment of that ultimate second (never more than a second) from which the fit itself began. (Dostoevsky 2001: 225–6)

Prince Myshkin, the ‘idiot’, himself considers that these illuminations may be no more than a reflex of his illness, the subjective reflex of a physiological cause. At the same time, as he says to another character: ‘at that moment I was somehow able to understand the extraordinary phrase that time shall be no more. Probably’, he added, smiling, ‘it’s the same second in which the jug of water overturned by the epileptic Muhammad did not have time to spill, while he had time during the same second to survey all the dwellings of Allah.’ (2001: 227)

Neither Myshkin nor the reader has any final grounds for saying that this is ‘merely’ a pathological condition or that it is a moment of mystical vision. It is entirely ambiguous. From the point of view of those who believe that mystical experience is inseparable from and perhaps even a product of the language in which it is described,

George Pattison

203

Myshkin’s dilemma about his own experience – and Dostoevsky’s way of using religious experience in his novels as a whole – may thus seem to reflect or to articulate the distinctive crisis of religious experience in the era of radical early modernity. In this historical and cultural moment, traditional claims and legends concerning the visionary experiences of the saints found themselves scrutinized, explained and explained away by new, science-based reductionist philosophies of life, philosophies in which all experience would, ultimately, be explicable in terms of physiological and biological causes. If the ‘explanations’ offered by the Russian nihilists of the 1860s and onwards were, in scientific terms, crude and mechanistic in comparison with the explanations offered by our contemporary science, the basic question has been sharpened rather than otherwise by such scientific advance. This seems to leave us with what may be stated as two alternative positions or, arguably, two facets of one basic position. On the one hand, religious experience (and, along with religious experience the whole panoply of religious beliefs and practices) are revealed as ‘nothing but’ the manifestation of more fundamental, scientifically explicable processes. On the other hand, religious experience is seen as ‘religious’ simply and solely in so far as it is ‘constructed’ by culture and language as religious. In neither perspective is there anything in the primary, immediate experience itself that requires us to find it ‘religious’ or to see it as the revelation of some kind of religious truth about God or about other, heavenly, worlds. Dostoevsky, qua novelist, seems to have accepted that he can do no more than to describe how his characters experienced their moments of greatest visionary fulfilment and joy, and, in doing so, he makes it clear that what those moments ‘really’ were is beyond the ability of any third party to decide. In fact it is beyond the characters’ own ability so to decide, since, while Alyosha remains clear that ‘something’ visited his soul, Prince Myshkin cannot even be sure of that. Yet if the experience itself, in its pre-verbal bliss, does not determine how it is to be understood, we may at the very least say that such experiences as those of Alyosha and Myshkin call for interpretation. If whatever language they – or we – are to use to describe these experiences will inevitably reflect the given possibilities of our language, that language itself seems here to be held hostage to ‘something’ that didn’t itself originate in language or, to put it in more philosophical terms, the intentionality embodied in language points beyond itself to the matter that language ‘means’ or ‘intends’. And there is a further point. Dostoevsky is not simply reiterating the conventional hesitations and paradoxes of those who have sought to describe mystical experiences in words. It is not as if, in Dostoevsky, we have a mystic struggling to put his experience into words, peppering his account with ‘as ifs’ and ‘so to speaks’ or insisting on the ineffability of what has been disclosed to him. What we read in Dostoevsky is the depiction of characters who, caught between the demands of experience and the fragmentation of religious discourse into mystical and reductionist dimensions, can no longer know whether they have even had a ‘mystical’ experience but who, nevertheless, remain convinced that what they have experienced must have some large and even total significance for how they think and feel and act. As in other

204

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

areas of Dostoevsky’s writing, language itself, its figures of speech, its concealments and evasions is openly problematized: here is something – how are we to speak of it? What we do in and with language may decide whether such experiences come to be called or are allowed to be called ‘mystical’, but language itself – in the fractured polyphony of often discordant voices that is the verbal texture of a Dostoevsky novel – doesn’t exist otherwise than as the persistent questioning of how such experiences are rightly to be named. IV These remarks return us to Heidegger and to the question concerning the philosophical interpretation of claims regarding mystical experience. Starting with the view of Katz, Lindbeck and others that the interpretation of whatever it is that happens in mystical experience is always going to be determined by the cultural and linguistic presuppositions that we – experiencers and interpreters alike – bring to it, we saw how Heidegger argued for an understanding of language that does not, as these commentators do, presuppose the separation of language and Being. Rather, Heidegger insists, language in its deepest roots belongs together with Being. In other words, language essentially happens in and as the way in which we are attentive to the presence of Being. This does not mean that experience arrives accompanied by an authorized interpretation, but it does mean that how we interpret experience in language is not just a matter of linguistic conventions. If that is, in fact, all our interpretation amounts to, then this is a sign that we have fallen into linguistically and experientially impoverished times. That, of course, is just what Heidegger thinks has happened to us. Under the hegemony of the age of technology language has, typically, lost its original connection to Being and Being itself has withdrawn from the realm defined by our public, reified language. All is not lost, however, since there remains one privileged form of language in which it is still possible for the voice of Being to reach us: the language of poetry. In learning to hear the word of the poet and to submit ourselves to it we have a real possibility of hearing again the voice of Being, in, with and under the distortions it suffers at the hands of modernity. In this essay, I have deviated from Heidegger in one important respect. Instead of turning to the poet, I have turned to the novelist and, I suggest, this offers us a different – though perhaps complementary – picture. For our relation to the word of the novelist is very different from the kind of relation to the poetic word called for by Heidegger. We do not simply listen to the novelist. It is, indeed, impossible in the case of a novelist such as Dostoevsky simply to attend to or to submit to his word, since that word reaches us as a complex, fractured and polyphonic word that requires our own engagement in the argument set in motion by the novel. Yet the torn and complex fabric of the Dostoevskian text, a fabric that so accurately rehearses the experience of modernity itself, is not closed to the possibility of experiences that seem to come from beyond the frontiers of our present cultural horizons.

George Pattison

205

Qua novelist, Dostoevsky does not claim to have identified a pure, transcultural experience. Whatever we experience, including even the extraordinary visions of a Myshkin, only becomes real for us in so far as it enters into the way in which it is appropriated in language. There is no question here of getting behind language or of somehow putting language aside. Yet neither does language impose itself on experience. Language and experience belong together. For the novelist, however, this very inseparability makes it impossible to speak a pure word concerning experience: the meaning of experience is always problematic and the shape of language is always being worked on by experience. If the exalted word of the poet prophetically calls us to turn away from a society that has fallen under the power of enframing, the word of the novelist comes to us as the word of one citizen to another. Yet, precisely as citizens of the age of science and technology, we remain free to contest the worldview of our age, and, in the present case, free to explore the meaning of those events that seem to befall us, in the midst of the world, as experiences of something ‘from beyond’. In such exploration, we are not simply shuffling the pack of our linguistic tokens; we are struggling to attend to the truth of Being itself. Further Reading On Heidegger Caputo, J.D., The Mystical Element in Heidegger’s Thought, Athens, OH: Ohio University Press, 1978 Kovacs, G., The Question of God in Heidegger’s Phenomenology, Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press, 1990 Parkes G. (ed.), Heidegger and Asian Thought, Honolulu, HW: University of Hawaii Press, 1987 Pattison, G., Routledge Philosophy Guidebook to the Later Heidegger, London: Routledge, 2000 On Dostoevsky Bakhtin, M., Problems of Dostoevsky’s Poetics, trans. C. Emerson, Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press, 1984 Jones, M., Dostoevsky and the Dynamics of Christian Experience, London: Anthem Press, 2005 Pattison, G., and Thompson, D. (eds), Dostoevsky and the Christian Tradition, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2001

This page intentionally left blank

Bibliography Abrams, M.H. (1972) ‘What’s the use of theorizing about the arts?’, in In Search of Literary Theory, ed. M.W. Bloomfield, Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 2–54 Adams, R.M. (1996) ‘Reflections on analytical philosophical theology’, in Wainwright (1996), 79–87 Agamben, G. (1993) The Coming Community, trans. M. Hardt, Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press _____ (1998) Homo Sacer: Sovereign Power and Bare Life, trans. Daniel HellerRoazen, Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press Albert, H. (1985) Treatise on Critical Reason, Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press Alston, W.P. (1991) Perceiving God: The Epistemology of Religious Experience, Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press Alter, R. (1981) The Art of Biblical Narrative, New York: Basic Books Andrews, J.H. (2001) ‘Introduction: Meaning, knowledge and power in the map philosophy of J. B. Harley’, in J.B. Harley, The New Nature of Maps: Essays in the History of Cartography, Baltimore, MD, and London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2–32 Arendt, H. (1958) The Human Condition, Chicago, IL, and London: University of Chicago Press Aristotle (1908–52) The Works of Aristotle translated into English, ed. W.D. Ross, 12 vols, Oxford: Clarendon Press _____ (1993) De Anima: Books II and III with passages from Book I, trans. D.W. Hamlyn, Oxford: Clarendon Press Arnold, M. (1979) The Poems of Matthew Arnold, 2nd edn, eds K. & M. Allott, New York: Longman Audi, R. (ed.) (1999) The Cambridge Dictionary of Philosophy, 2nd edn, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Augustine (1979) Expositions on the Book of Psalms, trans. A.C. Coxe, vol. VIII of A Select Library of the Nicene and Post-Nicene Fathers of the Christian Church, ed. P. Schaff, Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans _____ (1992) Confessions, trans. H. Chadwick, Oxford: Oxford University Press Austin, J.L. (1961) ‘Other minds’, in his Philosophical Papers, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 44–84 _____ (1975) How to Do Things with Words, 2nd edn, eds J.O. Urmson and M. Sbisà, Cambridge MA: Harvard University Press Bacon, F. (1868) Novum Organum, in vol. IV of The Works of Francis Bacon, eds J. Spedding, R.L. Ellis and D.D. Heath, London: Longman & Co.

208

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Badiou, A. (2005) ‘The adventure of French philosophy’, New Left Review, 35 (Sept./Oct.), 67–77 Baillie, J., and Martin, H. (eds) (1937) Revelation, London: Faber & Faber Bakhtin, M.M. (1984) Problems of Dostoevsky’s Poetics, trans. C. Emerson, Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press _____ (1986) ‘Response to a question from the Novy Mir editorial staff’, in Speech Genres & Other Late Essays, trans. V.W. McGee, Austin, TX: University of Texas Press, 1–9 Balthasar, H.U. von (1988) Theo-drama: Theological Dramatic Theory, vol. 1 Prolegomena, San Francisco, CA: Ignatius Press Barr, J. (1987) ‘Words for love in Biblical Greek’, in The Glory of Christ in the New Testament, eds L.D. Hurst and T. Wright, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 3–18 Barth, K. (1975) Church Dogmatics, vol. 1, Part One, trans. G. Bromiley, Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark _____ (1986) ‘Philosophy and theology’, in The Way of Theology in Karl Barth: Essays and Comments, eds H.M. Rumscheidt, Allison Park, PA: Pickwick, 79– 96 Bass, D.C. (2002) ‘Introduction’, in Practicing Theology: Beliefs and Practices in Christian Life, eds D. Bass and M. Volf, Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 1–9 Beiser, F.C. (2006) ‘Moral faith and the highest good’, in The Cambridge Companion to Kant and Modern Philosophy, ed. P. Guyer, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press’, 588–629 Bénichou, P. (1948) Morales du grand siècle, Paris: Gallimard (trans. by E. Hughes as Man and Ethics, New York: Anchor Books, 1971) Berger, P.L. (1969) The Sacred Canopy: Elements of a Sociological Theory of Religion, New York: Doubleday Bernstein, R.J. (1985) Beyond Objectivism and Relativism: Science, Hermeneutics, and Praxis, Philadelphia, PA: University of Philadelphia Press Bonhoeffer, D. (1967) Letters and Papers from Prison, 3rd edn, ed. E. Bethge,New York: Macmillan Borg, M.J. (1987) Jesus: A New Vision, San Francisco, CA: Harper & Row Bourdieu, P. (1990) The Logic of Practice, trans. R. Nice, Cambridge: Polity Press Broad, C.D. (1953) Religion, Philosophy and Psychical Research, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul Brontë, E. (1965) Wuthering Heights, Harmondsworth: Penguin Books Brooke, J.H. (1991) Science and Religion: Some Historical Perspectives, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press _____ (2001) Of Scientists and their Gods, Oxford: Oxford University Press Brooke, J.H., and Cantor, G. (eds) (2000) Reconstructing Nature: The Engagement of Science and Religion, New York: Oxford University Press Brown, D. (2004) God and the Enchantment of Place: Reclaiming Human Experience, Oxford: Oxford University Press _____ (2007) God and Grace of Body, Oxford: Oxford University Press Bruce, S. (1995) Religion in Modern Britain, Oxford: Oxford University Press

Bibliography

209

_____ (2002) God is Dead: Secularization in the West, Oxford: Blackwell Buber, M. (1937) I and Thou, trans. R. Gregor Smith, Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark Buckley, J.J., and Yeago, D.S. (2001) ‘Introduction’, in their Knowing the Triune God: The Work of the Spirit in the Practices of the Church, Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 1–20 Buckley, M.J. (1987) At the Origins of Modern Atheism, New Haven, CT, and London: Yale University Press _____ (2004) Denying and Disclosing God: The Ambiguous Progress of Modern Atheism, New Haven, CT, and London: Yale University Press Burrell, D.B. (1986) Knowing the Unknowable God: Ibn-Sina, Maimonides, Aquinas, Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press _____ (1993) Freedom and Creation in Three Traditions, Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press Butler, D.C. (1960) Western Mysticism: The Teaching of SS Augustine, Gregory and Bernard on Contemplation and the Contemplative Life, 2nd edn, London: Arrow Books Butler, J. (1999) Subjects of Desire: Hegelian Reflections in Twentieth Century France, New York: Columbia University Press _____ (2005) ‘Merleau-Ponty and the touch of Malebranche’, in The Cambridge Companion to Merleau-Ponty, eds T. Carmen and M.B.N. Hansen, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 181–205 Byrne, J.M. (2001) God, London: Continuum Byrne, P. (1979) ‘Kant’s moral proof for the existence of God’, Scottish Journal of Theology, 32, 333–43 Calvin, J. (1961) Institutes of the Christian Religion, trans. F.L. Battles, ed. J.T. McNeill, vols XX–XXI of The Library of Christian Classics, London: SCM Canlis, J. (2004) ‘Calvin, Osiander and participation in God’, International Journal of Systematic Theology, 6, 169–84 Capra, F. (1975) The Tao of Physics, New York: Random House Caputo, J.D. (1978) The Mystical Element in Heidegger’s Thought, Athens, OH: Ohio University Press Cavarero, A. (2000) Relating Narratives: Storytelling and Selfhood, trans. P.A. Kottman, London and New York: Routledge Chrétien, J.-L. (2000) ‘The wounded word: The phenomenology of prayer’, in Phenomenology and the ‘Theological Turn’, eds Janicaud et al. (2000), 147–75 _____ (2004) ‘Body and touch’, in his The Call and the Response, trans. A.A. Davenport, New York: Fordham University Press, 83–131 Clack, B., and Clack, B.R. (1998) The Philosophy of Religion: A Critical Introduction, Oxford: Polity Press Clayton, P. (1989) Explanation from Physics to Theology: An Essay in Rationality and Religion, New Haven, CT: Yale University Press _____ (1997) God and Contemporary Science, Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press

210

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

_____ (2004) Mind and Emergence: From Quantum to Consciousness, Oxford: Oxford University Press Coady, C.A.J. (1992) Testimony: A Philosophical Study, Oxford: Clarendon Press Collini, S. (1999) English Pasts: Essays in History and Culture, Oxford: Oxford University Press Critchley, S. (1998) ‘Introduction: What is continental philosophy?’, in A Companion to Continental Philosophy, eds S. Critchley and W.R. Schroeder, Oxford: Blackwell, 1–17 Crites, S. (1989) ‘The narrative quality of experience’, in Why Narrative?, eds S. Hauerwas and L.G. Jones, Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 65–88 Cross, R. (2002) The Metaphysics of the Incarnation: Thomas Aquinas to Duns Scotus, Oxford: Oxford University Press Cupitt, D. (1998) Mysticism after Modernity, Oxford: Blackwell Damasio, A.R. (1994) Descartes’ Error: Emotion, Reason and the Human Brain, New York: G. P. Putnam’s Sons _____ (2003) Looking for Spinoza: Joy, Sorrow and the Feeling Brain, London: Heinemann Davidovich, A. (1993) Religion as a Province of Meaning: The Kantian Foundations of Modern Theology, Minneapolis, MN: Fortress Press Davies, B. (ed.) (1998) Philosophy of Religion: A Guide to the Subject, London: Continuum _____ (2000) Philosophy of Religion: A Guide and Anthology, Oxford: Oxford University Press Davis, C.F. (1989) The Evidential Force of Religious Experience, Oxford: Clarendon Press de Lauretis, T. (1987) Technologies of Gender: Essays on Theory, Film and Fiction, Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press Denèfle, S. (1997) Sociologie de la secularisation, Paris and Montreal: L’Harmattan Derrida, J. (1974) Of Grammatology, trans. G.C. Spivak, Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press _____ (1982) Margins of Philosophy, trans. A. Bass, Brighton: Harvester Despland, M. (1973) Kant on History and Religion, Montreal: McGill-Queen’s University Press de Vries, H. (2002) Religion and Violence: Philosophical Perspectives from Kant to Derrida, Baltimore, MD, and London: Johns Hopkins University Press Dilthey, W. (1976) ‘The development of hermeneutics’, in Dilthey: Selected Writings, ed. H. Rickman, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 246–63 Dorling, D., and Fairbairn, D. (1997) Mapping: Ways of Representing the World, Harlow: Pearson Dostoevsky, F.M. (1984) The Diary of a Writer, trans. B. Brasol, Haslemere: Tanmead _____ (1992) The Brothers Karamazov, trans R. Pevear and L. Volokhonsky, London: Vintage

Bibliography

211

_____ (2001) The Idiot, trans R. Pevear and L. Volokhonsky, London: Granta Dumontier, P. (1953) Saint Bernard et la Bible, Paris: Desclée, de Brouwer. Dunne, J. (1993) Back to the Rough Ground: ‘Phronesis’ and ‘Techne’ in Modern Philosophy and in Aristotle, Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press Durkheim, E. (1989) Suicide: A Study in Sociology, trans J.A. Spaulding and G. Simpson, London: Routledge _____ (1994) ‘Suicide and the birth rate’, in Emile Durkheim’s Le Suicide: One Hundred Years Later, ed. D. Lester, Philadelphia, PA: Charles Press [1888], 115– 32 Evans, C.S. (1996) ‘On taking God seriously: Philosophy of religion in the APA and AAR’, in Wainwright (1996), 59–70 Febvre, L. (1982) The Problem of Unbelief in the Sixteenth Century: The Religion of Rabelais, trans. B. Gottlieb, Cambridge MA, and London: Harvard University Press Feyerabend, P. (1975) Against Method: Outline of an Anarchistic Theory of Knowledge, London: Verso Firestone, C.L. (1999) ‘Kant and religion: Conflict or compromise?’, Religious Studies, 35, 151–71 _____ (2000) ‘Kant’s two perspectives on the theological task’, International Journal of Systematic Theology, 2(1), 63–78 _____ (2006) ‘Making sense out of tradition: Theology and conflict in Kant’s philosophy of religion’, in Firestone and Palmquist (2006), 141–56 Firestone, C.L., and Palmquist, S.R. (eds) (2006) Kant and the New Philosophy of Religion, Indianapolis, IN: Indiana University Press Ford, D.F. (1989) ‘Tragedy and atonement’, in Christ, Ethics and Tragedy: Essays in Honour of Donald MacKinnon, ed. K. Surin, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 117–30 Foucault, M. (1982) ‘The order of discourse’, in Untying the Text, ed. R. Young, London and Boston, MA: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 48–78 _____ (1994) ‘Foucault, Michel, 1926 – ’ (by ‘Maurice Florence’, now known to be substantially Michel Foucault), trans. C. Porter, in The Cambridge Companion to Foucault, ed. G. Gutting, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 314–19 Frazer, J.G. (1993) The Golden Bough: A Study in Magic and Religion, Ware: Wordsworth Editions Freeland, C. (1992) ‘Aristotle on the sense of touch’, in Nussbaum and Rorty (1992), 227–48 Frei, H. (1974) The Identity of Jesus: The Hermeneutical Bases of Dogmatic Theology, New Haven, CT: Yale University Press Frost, R. (1995) Collected Poems, Prose and Plays, New York: Library of America Furley, D.J. (1994) ‘Self-movers’, in Self-Motion From Aristotle to Newton, eds M.L. Gill and J.G. Lennox, Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 3–14 Gadamer, H.-G. (1976) ‘On the scope and function of hermeneutical reflection’, in Philosophical Hermeneutics, ed. D.E. Linge, Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, 18–43

212

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

_____ (1993) Truth and Method, 2nd rev. edn, trans. J. Weinsheimer and D.G. Marshall, London: Sheed & Ward Galbraith, E.C. (1996) Kant and Theology: Was Kant a Closet Theologian?, San Francisco, CA: International Scholars Publications Gay, P. (1977) The Enlightenment, An Interpretation, Volume 1: The Rise of Modern Paganism, New York: Norton Geertz, C. (1973) The Interpretation of Cultures, New York: Basic Books _____ (2000) Available Light: Anthropological Reflections on Philosophical Topics, Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press Gibbard, A. (1990) Wise Choices, Apt Feelings: A Theory of Normative Judgement, Oxford: Clarendon Press Giddens, A. (1976) New Rules of Sociological Method, London: Hutchinson Girard, R. (1977) Violence and the Sacred, trans. P. Gregory, Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press _____ (1996) The Girard Reader, ed. James G. Williams, New York: Crossroad Gould, S.J. (1999) Rocks of Ages: Science and Religion in the Fullness of Life, New York: Ballantine Gray, J. (2003) Al Queda and What it Means to be Modern, London: Faber and Faber Gregory of Nyssa (1960) Gregorii Nysseni in Canticum Canticorum, eds W. Jaeger and H. Langerbeck, Leiden: Brill _____ (1979) ‘On “Not three Gods”’, in Select Writings and Letters of Gregory, Bishop of Nyssa, trans. W. Moore and H Wilson, Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 331–6 Grenz, S., and Franke, J. (2001) Beyond Foundationalism: Shaping Theology in a Postmodern Context, Louisville, KY: Westminster John Knox Press Grice, H.P. (1989) ‘Logic and conversation’, in his Studies in the Way of Words, Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 22–40 Guarino, T. (1993) ‘Between foundationalism and nihilism: Is phronesis the via media for theology?’, Theological Studies, 54, 37–54 Gunn, D., and Fewell, D.N. (1993) Narrative in the Hebrew Bible, Oxford: Oxford University Press Gunton, C. (1996) ‘Indispensable opponent: The relations of systematic theology and the philosophy of religion’, Neue Zeitschrift für Systematische Theologie und Religionsphilosophie, 38, 298–306 Habermas, J. (1980) ‘The hermeneutic claim to universality’, in Contemporary Hermeneutics: Hermeneutics as Method, Philosophy, and Critique, ed. J. Bleicher, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 181–211 Hare, J.E. (1996) The Moral Gap: Kantian Ethics, Human Limits, and God’s Assistance, Oxford: Clarendon Press _____ (1999) ‘Augustine, Kant, and the moral gap’, in The Augustinian Tradition, ed. G.B. Matthews, Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, 251–62 _____ (2006) ‘Kant on the rational instability of atheism’, in Firestone and Palmquist (2006), 62–78

Bibliography

213

Harris, H.A., and Insole, C.J. (2005) ‘Verdicts on analytical philosophy of religion’, in Faith and Philosophical Analysis: The Impact of Analytical Philosophy on the Philosophy of Religion, eds H.A. Harris and C.J. Insole, Aldershot: Ashgate, 1–20 Hauerwas, S., and Jones, L.G. (eds) (1989) Why Narrative? Readings in Narrative Theology, Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans Hawking, S.W. (1988) A Brief History of Time, London: Bantam Press Hegel, G.W.F. (1969) Hegel’s Science of Logic, trans. A.V. Miller, London and New York: George Allen & Unwin and Humanities Press _____ (1977) Phenomenology of Spirit, trans. A.V. Miller, Oxford: Clarendon Press _____ (1984) Lectures on the Philosophy of Religion. I, ed. Peter C. Hodgson, Berkeley, CA: University of California Press Heidegger, M. (1956) ‘What is metaphysics?’ (includes the ‘Postscript’ not available in Heidegger 1978), in Existence and Being, trans. W. Brock, London: Vision Press, 355–92 _____ (1962) Being and Time, trans. J. Macquarrie and E. Robinson, Oxford: Blackwell _____ (1969) Identity and Difference, trans. Joan Stambaugh New York: Harper and Row _____ (1978) ‘What is metaphysics?’, in Basic Writings, ed. David Krell, London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 91–112 Hiley, D.R., Bohman, J.F., and Shusterman, R. (eds) (1991) ‘Introduction’, in their The Interpretive Turn: Philosophy, Science, Culture, Ithaca, NY, and London: Cornell University Press, 1–14 Holland, S. (2000) ‘First we take Manhattan, then we’ll take Berlin: Bonhoeffer’s New York’, Cross Currents, 50 (Fall), journal online at http://search.epnet.com/ direct.asp?an=3672625&db=aph, accessed 8 May 2004 Honderich, T. (ed.) (1995) The Oxford Companion to Philosophy, Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press Honig, B. (1995) ‘Toward an agonistic feminism: Hannah Arendt and the politics of identity’, in her Feminist Interpretations of Hannah Arendt, University Park, PA: Pennsylvania State University Press, 135–66 Hume, D. (1998) An Enquiry Concerning the Principles of Morals, ed. T.L. Beauchamp, Oxford: Oxford University Press Hurtado, L.W. (1988) One God, One Lord, Philadelphia, PA: Fortress Press Husserl, E. (1931) Ideas: General Introduction to Pure Phenomenology, trans. W.R. Boyce Gibson, London and New York: Allen & Unwin and Humanities Press _____ (1970a) The Crisis of European Sciences and Transcendental Phenomenology, trans. D. Carr, Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press _____ (1970b) Logical Investigations, 2nd edn, trans. J.N. Findlay, 2 vols, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul _____ (1999) The Idea of Phenomenology, trans. L. Hardy, Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic

214

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Jacobs, N. (2006) ‘Kant’s prototypical theology’, in Firestone and Palmquist (2006), 124–40 James, W. (1902) The Varieties of Religious Experience: A Study in Human Nature, London and New York: Longmans, Green & Co. Janicaud, D. et al. (2000) Phenomenology and the ‘Theological Turn’: The French Debate, trans. B.G. Prusak, New York: Fordham University Press Jantzen, G.M. (1998) Becoming Divine: Towards a Feminist Philosophy of Religion, Manchester and Bloomington, IN: Manchester University Press and Indiana University Press _____ (2004) Foundations of Violence: Death and the Displacement of Beauty, Volume One, London and New York: Routledge Jenson, R.W. (1997) Systematic Theology, vol. 1 of The Triune God, Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press John Damascene (1973) De Fide Orthodoxa, in Schriften des Johannes von Damaskos, ed. B. Kotter, vol. 2, Berlin: Walter de Gruyter Jones, M. (2005) Dostoevsky and the Dynamics of Christian Experience, London: Anthem Press Jones, R.A. (1999) The Development of Durkheim’s Social Realism, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Joyce, J. (1968) Ulysses, Harmondsworth: Penguin Twentieth Century Classics Kant, I. (1952) The Critique of Judgement, trans. J.C. Meredith, Oxford: Clarendon Press _____ (1958) Critique of Pure Reason, trans. N. Kemp Smith, London: Macmillan _____ (1993–2004) The Cambridge Edition of the Works of Immanuel Kant, eds P. Guyer and A.W. Wood, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Kasper, W. (2000) The God of Jesus Christ, trans. M.J. O’Connell, New York: Crossroad Katz, D. (1925) Der Aufbau der Tastwelt, Leipzig: J. A. Barth Katz, S.T. (1978) ‘Language, epistemology and mysticism’, in his Mysticism and Philosophical Analysis, London, Sheldon Press, 22–74 Kekes, J. (1980) The Nature of Philosophy, Totowa, NJ: Rowman and Littlefield Kelly, G.B. (1991) ‘The life and death of a modern martyr’, Christian History, 10(4), journal online at http://search.epnet.com/direct.asp?an=9604290995&db=aph, accessed 13 May 2004 Kerr, F. (2002) After Aquinas: Versions of Thomism, London: Blackwell Kierkegaard, S. (1940) ‘On the difference between a genius and an apostle’, in The Present Age and Two Minor Ethico-religious Treatises, eds W. Lowrie and A. Druanda, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 137–63 Kirk, G.S. and Raven J.E. (eds) (1960) The Presocratic Philosophers: A Critical History with a Selection of Texts, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Kosman, L.S.A. (1969) ‘Aristotle’s definition of motion’, Phronesis, 14, 40–62 Kovacs, G. (1990) The Question of God in Heidegger’s Phenomenology, Evanston, IL: Midwestern University Press

Bibliography

215

Kuhn, T. (1970) The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press Laird, M. (2002) ‘Under Solomon’s tutelage: The education of desire in Homilies on the Song of Songs’, Modern Theology, 18(4), 507–26 Lakatos, I. (1970) ‘Falsification and the methodology of scientific research programmes’, in Criticism and the Growth of Knowledge, eds I. Lakatos and A. Musgrave, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 91–196 Lakoff, G., and Johnson, M. (1999) Philosophy in the Flesh: The Embodied Mind and Its Challenge to Western Thought, New York: Basic Books Lash, N. (1979) Theology On Dover Beach, London: Darton, Longman and Todd _____ (1986) ‘Performing the scriptures’, in his Theology on the Way to Emmaus, London: SCM, 37–46 _____ (1988) Easter in Ordinary: Reflections on Human Experience and the Knowledge of God, London and Charlottesville, VA: SCM and University Press of Virginia _____ (1992) Believing Three Ways in One God, London: SCM _____ (1996) The Beginning and the End of ‘Religion’, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press _____ (2004) Holiness, Speech and Silence: Reflections on the Question of God, Aldershot and Burlington, VT: Ashgate Lessing, G.E. (1956) Lessing’s Theological Writings, trans. H Chadwick, London: Adam & Charles Black Levinas, E. (1989) ‘Ethics as first philosophy’, in The Levinas Reader, ed. S. Hand, Oxford: Blackwell, 75–87 Lewontin, R.C. (1997) ‘Billions and billions of demons’, review of Carl Sagan, The Demon-Haunted World: Science as a Candle in the Dark’, in New York Review of Books, (44)1, 9 January, 28–32 Lindbeck, G.A. (1984) The Nature of Doctrine: Religion and Theology in a Postliberal Age, Philadelphia, PA, and London: Westminster Press and SPCK Lindberg, D.C., and Numbers, R.L. (eds) (1986) God and Nature: Historical Essays on the Encounter between Christianity and Science, Berkeley, CA: University of California Press _____ (2003) When Science and Christianity Meet, Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press Lipner, J. (1994) The Hindus: Their Religious Beliefs and Practices, London: Routledge Loades, A. (2005) ‘Philosophy of religion: Its relation to theology’, in Faith and Philosophical Analysis: The Impact of Analytical Philosophy on the Philosophy of Religion, eds H.A. Harris and C.J. Insole, Aldershot: Ashgate, 136–47 Locke, J. (1698) Two Treatises of Government, London: Black Swan _____ (1959) An Essay Concerning Human Understanding, ed. A.C. Fraser, 2 vols, New York: Dover Press _____ (2000) Some Thoughts Concerning Education, eds J.W. & J.S. Yolton, Oxford: Clarendon Press

216

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Lowe, W. (1996) ‘Two types of philosophy of religion’, in Wainwright (1996), 29– 37 Ludlow, M. (2000) Universal Salvation: Eschatology in the Thought of Gregory of Nyssa and Karl Rahner, Oxford: Oxford University Press Luntley, M. (1999) Contemporary Philosophy of Thought: Truth, World, Content, Oxford: Blackwell Lyotard, J.-F. (1984) The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge, trans. G. Bennington and B. Massumi, Manchester and Minneapolis, MN: Manchester University Press and University of Minnesota Press MacEachren, A.M. (2004) How Maps Work: Representation, Visualization, and Design, New York and London: Guilford Press MacIntyre, A. (1988) Whose Justice? Which Rationality?, London: Duckworth _____ (1989) ‘Epistemological crises, dramatic narrative, and the philosophy of science’, in Why Narrative? Readings in Narrative Theology, eds S. Hauerwas and L.G. Jones, Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 138–57 MacKinnon, D.M. (1968) Borderlands of Theology and Other Essays, London: Lutterworth Press _____ (1979) Explorations in Theology 5, London: SCM _____ (1987) Themes in Theology: The Three-fold Cord, Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark Mandry, C. (2004) ‘The relationship between philosophy and theology in the recent work of Paul Ricoeur’, in Memory, Narrativity, Self and the Challenge to Think God, eds M. Junker-Kenny and P. Kenny, Münster: Lit Verlag, 63–77 Mariña, J. (1997) ‘Kant on grace: A reply to his critics’, Religious Studies, 33(4), 379–400 Marion, J.-L. (1977) L’idol et la distance, Paris: Grasset _____ (1991a) Dieu sans l’être, Paris: Presses Universitaires de France _____ (1991b) God without Being, translation of the above by T.A. Carlson, Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press _____ (1998) Reduction and Givenness: Investigations of Husserl, Heidegger, and Phenomenology, trans. T.A. Carlson, Evanston IL: Northwestern University Press _____ (2002) Being Given: Toward a Phenomenology of Givenness, trans. J.L. Kosky, Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press Marshall, B.D. (2000) Trinity and Truth, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press McClendon, Jr., J.W., and Smith, J.M. (1994) Convictions: Defusing Religious Relativism, rev. edn, Valley Forge, PA: Trinity Press McGrath, A.E. (1990) The Genesis of Doctrine: A Study in the Foundation of Doctrinal Criticism, Oxford: Blackwell _____ (2002) A Scientific Theology, vol. 2, Reality, Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans Merleau-Ponty, M. (1962) Phenomenology of Perception, trans. C. Smith, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul _____ (1964) The Primacy of Perception, ed. J.M. Edie, Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press

Bibliography

217

_____ (1968) The Visible and the Invisible, trans. A. Lingis, ed. C. Lefort, Evanston IL: Northwestern University Press Michalson, Jr, G.E. (1999) Kant and the Problem of God, Oxford: Blackwell Migne, J.-P. (1844–62) Patrologia Latina, 222 vols, Paris: Excudebatur apud Migne Milbank, J. (2001) ‘The soul of reciprocity part two: Reciprocity granted’, Modern Theology, 17(4), 485–507 Milbank, J., and Pickstock, C. (2001) ‘Truth and touch’, in their Truth in Aquinas, London: Routledge, 60–87 Moore, A. (2003) Realism and Christian Faith: God, Grammar, and Meaning, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Morrison, K. (2000) Review of Robert Alun Jones, The Development of Durkheim’s Social Realism, in Canadian Journal of Sociology Online (March–April), at http:// www.arts.ualberta.ca/cjscopy/reviews/durkheim.html, accessed 24 February 2005 Moule, C.D.F. (1982) ‘The borderlands of ontology in the New Testament’, in The Philosophical Frontiers of Christian Theology: Essays presented to D. M. MacKinnon, eds B. Hebblethwaite and S. Sutherland, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1–11 Murphy, N.C. (1996) Beyond Liberalism and Fundamentalism: How Modern and Postmodern Philosophy Set the Theological Agenda, Valley Forge, PA: Trinity Press International _____ (1997) Anglo-American Postmodernity: Philosophical Perspectives on Science, Religion, and Ethics, Boulder, CO: Westview Press Nelson, F.B. (1991) ‘Friends he met in America’, Christian History, 10(4), journal online at http://search.epnet.com/direct.asp?an=9604291003&db=aph, accessed 5 May 2004 Newman, J.H. (1976a) The Letters and Diaries of John Henry Newman, vol XXX, eds C.S. Dessain and T. Gomall, SJ, Oxford: Clarendon Press _____ (1976b) The Theological Papers of John Henry Newman on Faith and Certainty, eds H.M. de Achaval, SJ, and D. Holmes, Oxford: Clarendon Press Nietzsche, F. (1968) Basic Writings of Nietzsche, trans. W. Kaufmann, New York: Modern Library _____ (1969a) Thus Spoke Zarathustra: A Book for Everyone and No One, trans. R.J. Hollingdale, Harmondsworth: Penguin Books _____ (1969b) Selected Letters of Friedrich Nietzsche, trans. C. Middleton, Chicago, IL: Chicago University Press _____ (1974) The Gay Science, trans. W. Kaufmann, New York: Vintage Books _____ (1982) Daybreak: Thoughts on the Prejudices of Morality, trans. R.J. Hollingdale, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press _____ (1997) Twilight of the Idols, trans. R. Polt, Indianapolis, IN, and Cambridge: Hackett _____ (2001) The Gay Science, trans. J. Nauckhoff, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press

218

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Nussbaum, M.C. (1989) ‘Narrative emotions: Beckett’s genealogy’, in Why Narrative? Readings in Narrative Theology, eds S. Hauerwas and L.G. Jones, Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 216–48 _____ (1990) Love’s Knowledge: Essays on Philosophy and Literature, Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press _____ (1995) Poetic Justice: The Literary Imagination and Public Life, Boston, MA: Beacon Press _____ (2001) Upheavals of Thought: The Intelligence of Emotions, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Nussbaum, M.C., and Rorty, A.O.(eds) (1992) Essays on Aristotle’s De Anima, Oxford: Clarendon Press Nygren, A. (1982) Agape and Eros, trans. P.S. Watson, London: SPCK Oliver, S. (2005) Philosophy, God and Motion, London: Routledge Origen (1936) On First Principles, trans. G.W. Butterworth, London: SPCK _____ (1953) Contra Celsum, trans. H. Chadwick, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press _____ (1957) Commentary on the Song of Songs, trans. N.P. Lawson, New York: Paulist Press International Osborne, C. (1994) Eros Unveiled: Plato and the God of Love, Oxford: Clarendon Press Owen, G.E.L. (1979) ‘Logic and metaphysics in some earlier works of Aristotle’, in Articles on Aristotle, vol. 3, Metaphysics, eds J. Barnes, M. Schofield and R. Sorabji, London: Duckworth, 13–32 Parkes, G. (ed.) (1987) Heidegger and Asian Thought, Honolulu, HI: University of Hawaii Press Pascal, B. (1966) Pensées, trans. A.J. Krailsheimer, Harmondsworth: Penguin Pattison, G. (1996) Agnosis: Theology in the Void, Basingstoke, PalgraveMacmillan _____ (2000) Routledge Philosophy Guidebook to the Later Heidegger, London: Routledge Pattison, G., and Thompson, D.(eds) (2001) Dostoevsky and the Christian Tradition, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Peacocke, A. (1993) Theology for a Scientific Age: Being and Becoming – Natural, Divine, and Human, enlarged edn, London: SCM _____ (2001) Paths from Science Towards God: The End of All Our Exploring, Oxford: Oneworld Pears, D.F. (1987–88) The False Prison: A Study of the Development of Wittgenstein’s Philosophy, 2 vols, Oxford: Clarendon Press Peirce, C.S. (1934) Collected Papers of Charles Sanders Peirce, vol. v, Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press Placher, W.C. (1989) Unapologetic Theology: A Christian Voice in a Pluralistic Conversation, Louisville, KY: Westminster John Knox

Bibliography

219

Plantinga, A. (1983) ‘Reason and belief in God’, in Faith and Rationality: Reason and Belief in God, eds A. Plantinga and N. Wolterstorff, Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 16–93 _____ (2000) Warranted Christian Belief, New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press Plato (1963) The Collected Dialogues of Plato, Including the Letters, eds E. Hamilton and H. Cairns, New York: Bollingen Foundation Pocock, J. (1999) Barbarism and Religion: The Enlightenments of Edward Gibbon, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Popper, K.R. (1969) Conjectures and Refutations: The Growth of Scientific Knowledge, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul _____ (1980) The Logic of Scientific Discovery, 2nd edn, London: Hutchinson Prado, C.G. (ed.) (2003) A House Divided: Comparing Analytic and Continental Philosophy, Amherst, NY: Humanity Books Price, H.H. (1969) Belief, London: Allen & Unwin Priest, S. (1998) Merleau-Ponty, London: Routledge Proudfoot, W. (1985) Religious Experience, Berkeley, CA: University of California Press _____ (1996) ‘Theistic argument and edifying discourse’, in Wainwright (1996), 71–7 Quinn, P.L. (1996) ‘The cultural anthropology of philosophy and religion’, in Wainwright (1996), 47–57 Rahner, K. (1966) ‘Thoughts on the possibility of belief today’, in his Theological Investigations, V, trans. K.-H. Kruger, Baltimore, MD, and London: Helicon Press and Darton, Longman & Todd, 3–22 _____ (1978) Foundations of Christian Faith: An Introduction to the Idea of Christianity, trans. W.V. Dych, London and New York: Darton, Longman & Todd and Seabury Press Ramsey, F.P. (1931) The Foundations of Mathematics and other Logical Essays, ed. R.B. Braithwaite, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul Reardon, B.M.G. (1988) Kant as Philosophical Theologian, London: Macmillan Richardson, W.M., and Wildman, W.J. (1996) Religion and Science: History, Method, Dialogue, New York and London: Routledge Ricoeur, P. (1965) History and Truth, trans. C.A. Kebley, Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press _____ (1969) The Symbolism of Evil, trans. E. Buchanan, Boston, MA: Beacon Press _____ (1974) The Conflict of Interpretations: Essays in Hermeneutics, ed. D. Ihde, Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press _____ (1977) The Rule of Metaphor: Multi-Disciplinary Studies of the Creation of Meaning in Language, trans. R. Czerny, K. McLaughlin and J. Costello, Toronto, Ont.: University of Toronto Press

220

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

_____ (1980) ‘The hermeneutics of testimony’, trans. D. Stewart and C.E. Reagan, in Essays on Biblical Interpretation, ed. L.S. Mudge, Philadelphia, PA: Fortress Press, 119–54 _____ (1981a) Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences: Essays on Language, Action and Interpretation, trans. J.B. Thompson, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press _____ (1981b) ‘What is a text? Explanation and understanding’, in his Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences (1981a), 145–64 ____ (1981c) ‘The narrative function’, in his Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences (1981a), 275–96 _____ (1981d) ‘Hermeneutics and the critique of ideology’, in his Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences (1981a), 63–100 _____ (1981e) ‘The model of the text: Meaningful action considered as a text’, in his Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences (1981a), 197–221 _____ (1984) Time and Narrative, vol. 1, trans. K. McLaughlin and D. Pellauer, Chicago, IL, and London: University of Chicago Press _____ (1986) Lectures on Ideology and Utopia, ed. George H. Taylor, New York: Columbia University Press _____ (1988) Time and Narrative, vol. 3, trans. K. Blamey and D. Pellauer, Chicago, IL, and London: University of Chicago Press _____ (1991a) ‘Life in quest of narrative’ and ‘Narrative identity’, in On Paul Ricoeur: Narrative and Interpretation, ed. D. Wood, London: Routledge, 20–33 and 188–99 _____ (1991b) ‘Philosophical hermeneutics and biblical hermeneutics’, in From Text to Action: Essays in Hermeneutics, II, trans. K. Blamey and J.B. Thompson, London: Athlone Press, 89–101 _____ (1992) Oneself as Another, trans. K. Blamey, Chicago, IL, and London: University of Chicago Press _____ (1995) ‘Intellectual autobiography’, trans. K. Blamey, in The Philosophy of Paul Ricoeur, ed. L.E. Hahn, vol. 22, Library of Living Philosophers, Chicago, IL: Open Court, 3–53 _____ (2000) ‘Experience and language in religious discourse’, in Janicaud et al. (2000), 127–46 _____ (2005) The Course of Recognition, trans. D. Pellauer, Cambridge, MA, and London: Harvard University Press Rist, J.M. (1964) Eros and Psyche: Studies in Plato, Plotinus, and Origen, Toronto, Ont.: University of Toronto Press Roberts, R. (1989) ‘Theological rhetoric and moral passion in the light of MacKinnon’s “Barth”’, in Christ, Ethics and Tragedy: Essays in Honour of Donald MacKinnon, ed. K. Surin, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1–14 Rorty, R. (1980) Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature, Oxford: Blackwell _____ (1982) Consequences of Pragmatism, Brighton: Harvester ____ (2003) ‘Analytic and conversational philosophy’, in Prado (2003), 17–32 Ross, J.F. (1981) Portraying Analogy, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press

Bibliography

221

Rossi, P.J. (2006) ‘Reading Kant through theological spectacles’, in Firestone and Palmquist (2006), 107–23 Rowland, C. (1982) The Open Heaven, New York: Crossroads Ryle, G. (1949) The Concept of Mind, London: Hutchinson Sandbothe, M. (2003) ‘Davidson and Rorty on truth: Reshaping analytic philosophy for a transcontinental conversation’, in Prado (2003), 235–58 Sartre, J.-P. (1967) Words, trans. I. Clephane, Harmondsworth: Penguin Schwartz, R.M. (1997) The Curse of Cain: The Violent Legacy of Monotheism, Chicago, IL, and London: Chicago University Press Searle, J.R. (1969) Speech Acts: An Essay in the Philosophy of Language, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Sennett, R. (1996) Flesh and Stone: The Body and the City in Western Civilization, New York: Norton Shakespeare, W. (1982) Hamlet, ed. H. Jenkins, Arden Edition, London and New York: Methuen Shields, C. (1993) ‘Some recent approaches to Aristotle’s De Anima’, in Aristotle: De Anima, trans. D.W. Hamlyn, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 157–81 Stiver, D.R. (2001a) Theology After Ricoeur: New Directions in Hermeneutical Theology, Louisville, KY: Westminster John Knox _____ (2001b) ‘Ricoeur, speech-act theory, and the Gospels as history’, in After Pentecost: Language and Biblical Interpretation, eds C. Bartholomew, C. Greene and K. Möller, Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan, 50–72 Stump, E., and Murray, M.J. (eds) (1999) Philosophy of Religion: The Big Questions, Oxford: Blackwell Sussman, D. (2005) ‘Kantian forgiveness’, Kant-Studien, 96(1), 85–107 Swinburne, R. (1979) The Existence of God, Oxford: Clarendon Press Taliaferro, C., and Griffiths, P.J. (2003) Philosophy of Religion: An Anthology, Oxford: Blackwell Taylor, A.E. (1964) ‘The vindication of religion’, in The Existence of God: Readings, ed. J. Hick, New York: Macmillan, 153–64 Taylor, C. (1985) ‘Self-interpreting animals’, in his Philosophical Papers: Volume 1, Human Agency and Language, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press _____ (1989) Sources of the Self: The Making of the Modern Identity, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press _____ (1991) ‘The dialogical self’, in Hiley et al. (1991), 304–14 _____ (1995) Philosophical Arguments, Cambridge, MA, and London: Harvard University Press _____ (2000) ‘The immanent Counter-Enlightenment’, in Canadian Political Philosophy: Contemporary Reflections, eds R. Beiner and W. Norman, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 583–603 Teresa of Avila (1946) Complete Works of Saint Teresa, ed. E. Allison Peers, London: Sheed & Ward Thiselton, A. (1980) The Two Horizons, Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans

222

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Thomas Aquinas (1964–81) Summa Theologiae, trans. T. Gilby et al., 60 vols, London and New York: Blackfriars, Eyre & Spottiswoode and McGraw-Hill _____ (1975) Summa Contra Gentiles, trans. C.J. O’Neil, Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press _____ (1994) Commentary on Aristotle’s De Anima, rev. edn, trans. K. Foster, OP, and S. Humphries, OP, Notre Dame: Dumb Ox Books Thucydides (1954) History of the Peloponnesian War, trans. Rex Warner, London: Penguin Tillich, P. (1959) ‘The two types of philosophy of religion’, in his Theology of Culture, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 10–29 _____ (1967) Perspectives on 19th and 20th Century Protestant Theology, ed. Carl E. Braaten, New York: Harper & Row Torrance, T.F. (1969) Theological Science, London: Oxford University Press _____ (1980) The Ground and Grammar of Theology, Charlottesville, VA: University Press of Virginia Tracy, D. (1994) ‘Theology and the many faces of postmodernity’, Theology Today, 51, 104–14 Turner, D. (1995a) Eros and Allegory: Medieval Exegesis of the Song of Songs, Kalamazoo, MI, and Spencer, MA: Cistercian Publications _____ (1995b) The Darkness of God: Negativity in Christian Mysticism, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press _____ (2004) ‘On denying the right God: Aquinas on atheism and idolatry’, Modern Theology, 20(1), 141–61 Tyrrell, G.N.M. (1953) Apparitions, rev. edn, London: Duckworth Unger, P. (1984) Philosophical Relativity, Oxford: Blackwell Vanhoozer, K.J. (1990) Biblical Narrative in the Philosophy of Paul Ricoeur: A study in Hermeneutics and Theology, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press _____ (1991) ‘Christ and concept: Doing theology and the “ministry” of philosophy’, in Doing Theology in Today’s World, eds J.D. Woodbridge and T.E. McComiskey, Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan, 99–156 _____ (1998) Is There a Meaning in This Text?: The Bible, the Reader, and the Morality of Literary Knowledge, Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan _____ (1999) ‘The trials of truth: Mission, martyrdom, and the epistemology of the Cross’, in To Stake a Claim: Mission and the Western Crisis of Knowledge, eds J.A. Kirk and K.J. Vanhoozer, Maryknoll, NY: Orbis, 120–56 _____ (2005a) The Drama of Doctrine: A Canonical–linguistic Approach to Christian Theology, Louisville, KY: Westminster John Knox _____ (ed.) (2005b) Dictionary for Theological Interpretation of the Bible, Grand Rapids, MI, and London: Baker and SPCK Vickers, S. (2001) Miss Garnet’s Angel, London: HarperCollins Wainwright, W.J. (ed.) (1996) God, Philosophy and Academic Culture: A Discussion between Scholars in the AAR and the APA, Atlanta, GA: Scholars Press Walsh, W.H. (1963) Metaphysics, New York: Harcourt, Brace & World

Bibliography

223

Warner, M. (1989) Philosophical Finesse: Studies in the Art of Rational Persuasion, Oxford: Clarendon Press Watson, F. (2000) Agape, Eros, Gender: Towards a Pauline Sexual Ethic, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Webb, C.C.J. (1926) Kant’s Philosophy of Religion, Oxford: Clarendon Press Weber, M. (1948) ‘Science as a vocation’, in From Max Weber, eds H.H. Gerth and C. Wright Mills, London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 129–56 Weinandy, T.G. (2000) Does God Suffer?, Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press Williams, R. (1990) The Wound of Knowledge, London: Darton, Longman & Todd _____ (1995) ‘Between politics and metaphysics’, Modern Theology, 11, 3–22 _____ (2002) ‘Is it the same God? Reflections on continuity and identity in religious language’, in The Possibilities of Sense, ed. J. Whittaker, Basingstoke: Palgrave, 204–18 Wisdom, J. (1953) Philosophy and Psycho-Analysis, Oxford: Blackwell _____ (1991) Proof and Explanation, Lanham, MD: University Press of America Wittgenstein, L. (1955) Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus, trans. C. K. Ogden, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul _____ (1958) Philosophical Investigations, trans. G.E.M. Anscombe, eds G.E.M. Anscombe and R. Rhees, Oxford: Blackwell _____ (1961) Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus, trans D.F. Pears and B.F. McGuiness, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul _____ (1969) On Certainty, trans D. Paul and G.E.M. Anscombe, eds G.E.M. Anscombe and G.H. von Wright, Oxford: Blackwell _____ (1979) Remarks on Frazer’s ‘Golden Bough’, trans A.C. Miles and R. Rhees, ed. R.Rhees, Retford: Brynmill Wolterstorff, N. (1995) Divine Discourse: Philosophical Reflections on the Claim that God Speaks, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press _____ (1996a) ‘Between the pincers of increased diversity and supposed irrationality’, in Wainwright (1996), 13–20 _____ (1996b) ‘The travail of theology in the modern academy’, in The Future of Theology: Essays in Honor of Jürgen Moltmann, ed. M. Volf, Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 35–46 _____ (1997) ‘The importance of hermeneutics for a Christian worldview’, in Disciplining Hermeneutics: Interpretation in Christian Perspective, ed. R. Ludin, Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 25–48 _____ (2000) ‘Analytic philosophy of religion: Retrospect and prospect’, in Perspectives in Contemporary Philosophy of Religion, eds T. Lehtonen and T. Koistene, Helsinki: Luther-Agricola-Society, 152–70 _____ (2005) ‘To theologians: From one who cares about theology but is not one of you’, Theological Education, 40, 79–92 Wood, A.W. (1970) Kant’s Moral Religion, Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press Wordsworth, W. (1969) Poetical Works, eds T. Hutchinson and E. de Selincourt, Oxford: Oxford University Press

224

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Wrathall, M.A. (ed.) (2003) Religion after Metaphysics, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Wright. T.R. (1988) Theology and Literature, Oxford: Blackwell Yandell, K.E. (1993) The Epistemology of Religious Experience, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press Zaehner, R.C. (1957) Mysticism Sacred and Profane, Oxford: Clarendon Press

Index

abduction 22 see also inference Abraham 18, 31, 33, 182 Abrams, M. H. 24 Adams, Robert 37, 47 aesthetics 2, 4, 6, 78, 82, 89–90, 96, 105, 108, 162, 172, 174, 198 Agamben, Giorgio 118n, 125 agency 8, 10, 17, 19, 28, 39, 40–41, 45, 50, 51, 59, 61, 65, 69, 95, 96, 118, 122, 125, 141, 155–6, 165 Albert, Hans 93 Albertus Magnus 111n Alston, William 160–64, 170 Alter, Robert 182 analogy 1, 23, 28, 96, 116, 134, 137–8n, 160–63 Andrews, J. H. 47n, 48n Anselm of Canterbury, St 19, 136 apophatic tradition, see via negativa Aquinas, Thomas, see Thomas Aquinas, St Arendt, Hannah 178, 179, 181 Aristotle 1, 4, 5, 10, 19, 20, 23, 25, 44, 111–14, 116–19, 148, 149–51, 155 Arnold, Matthew 68 asceticism 27, 70 atheism 3, 26, 58, 65, 67–8, 73, 77, 85, 94, 129, 134, 135, 141–2, 174, 199 Audi, Robert 39n Augustine of Hippo, St 17–18, 20, 21, 26, 27, 86–7, 115, 116, 126, 140, 165, 168n, 175 Austin, John L. 15, 17, 146n, 147–8 Bacon, Francis 93 Badiou, Alain 36–7, 39–41, 44, 47 Baillie, John 35n Bakhtin, Mikhail 36n, 53, 205 Balthasar, Hans Urs von 45–6, 159, 166 Barr, James 114–15n Barth, Karl 33, 34–5, 52, 93, 100n, 159, 166 Bass, Dorothy C. 40 Being 10–11, 33, 52, 105, 195–9, 204–5

Beiser, Frederick C. 86n belief 2, 3–4, 5, 11, 15–19, 21–22, 29, 32, 34, 35n, 37–9, 45, 47, 49, 57–8, 62–76, 78, 82–90, 96, 101–2, 106, 109, 127, 129, 131, 134, 135, 139–42, 149, 150n, 151, 159, 161–3, 165–8, 170, 172–5, 177, 182, 183, 192, 193, 200, 203; see also faith; epistemology Bénichou, Paul 70 Berger, Peter L. 76 Bernard of Clairvaux, St 115 Bernstein, Richard J. 150n Bible, the (also biblical; Scripture) 5, 6, 9, 11, 15, 16–17, 20–21, 22, 26–8, 29, 31–2, 33, 35, 37, 40, 41–2, 46–50, 52, 58, 64–5, 88–9, 114n, 115, 124–5, 129, 130, 137, 145–7, 148, 149, 157, 165, 166–8, 171, 181–4, 186, 190, 193 biblical references 5, 6, 9, 15–16, 17, 18, 19–20, 31–2, 34, 51–2, 119, 124–5, 132, 136–7, 138, 148, 149, 167, 169n, 170, 171, 181–2, 185, 201 birth 8–9, 91–2, 157, 168, 179–81, 184–6, 190 Blake, William 108 body, the 8, 9–10, 12, 21, 46, 56, Ch. 6 passim, 140, 151–2, 172–3, 180, 185–6, 201; see also incarnation Bonhoeffer, Dietrich 153–6 Borg, Marcus J. 171n boundaries Introduction passim, 18, 29, 32–5, 36–8, 41, 43–4, 47, 50–51, 53, 55, 77–9, 87, 89–90, Ch. 5 passim, 105–6, 127, 145, 149, 156, 157, 177 Bourdieu, Pierre 181 Brague, Rémi 111n Broad, C. D. 162n Brontë, Emily 122 Brooke, John Hedley 93n Brown, David vii, 6, 7, 10, 157, Ch. 9

226

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Bruce, Steve 70n, 76 Buber, Martin 127 Buckley, James J. 40–41 Buckley, Michael J. 134n, 143 Buddhism 140, 164–5, 183, 198–9 Bultmann, Rudolf 42 Burrell, David B. 141n, 143 Butler, Dom Cuthbert 191, 194, 195 Butler, Judith 109n, 187 Byrne, James M. 137n Byrne, Peter 85 Cajetan, Thomas de Vio 111n Calasso, Roberto 75 Calvin, John 51, 93 Canlis, Julie 51 Cantor, Geoffrey 93n Capra, Fritjov 99n Caputo, John D. 205 Cavarero, Adriana 178–9, 181 Chenu, Marie-Dominique 109 Chrétien, Jean-Louis 105n, 108, 110, 111n, 117n, 118n, 119, 120n, 121n Christ, see Jesus Christianity 3, 4, 6, 7, 12, 15, 16–18, 21–2, 28, 29, Ch. 2 passim, 58, 62n, 64–5, 67–8, 71–5, 80, 87–8, 91–4, 100, 109, 111, 114–17, 124, Ch. 7 passim, 145–6, 153–4, 157, 159, 161, 164–5, 167, 172n, 173–4, 178, 181–4, 186, 192–4, 200–202 christology 31–2, 50–51, 87–8, 124–5 Church, the 9, 12, 15, 26, 27, 33, 40–41, 46, 48, 88, 93, 131, 153, 172, 182–3, 193 Cicero 122 Clack, Beverley 160 Clack, Brian R. 160 Clausewitz, Carl von 93 Clayton, Philip vii, 2, 6–7, 55–6, Ch. 5 Coady, C. A. J. 34 Collini, Stefan 65n Columbus, Christopher 132 Comte, Auguste 71 concepts (also conceptualization) 1–4, 7–8, 9–13, 17–19, 23, 26, 28, 31–4, 36–53, 55–6, 57, 59–60, 62n, 69, 73, 74, 77, Ch. 4 passim, 96–7, 99, 105, 107, 111, 115, 117, 123–4, 127, Ch.

7 passim, 149–53, 156, 158, 164–5, 177–8, 183–4, 186–90, 192, 194, 195–9, 204–5 contemplation 10, 18, 21, 43, 82–3, 89, 117–18, 123–4 content, theory of 8 Copernicus, Nicolaus 36 Creation, the 33, 46, 50, 51, 52–3, 100, 122, 124, 131, 134, 137–8, 142–3, 165, 173, 175, 181 creativity 5, 9, 53, 115, 148–52, 157, 177, 184–90 Creeds, the 27, 139–40 Critchley, Simon 38, 40, 44–5 Crites, Stephen 39 Cross, Richard 31 culture 3, 4, 5–6, 7, 9, 11, 13, 19, 21–2, 24–5, 36–9, 40–41, 47–8, 53, 55, 57, 58, 60, 64, 70–75, 94, 96–7, 100–101, 108, 130–31, 133–6, 139, 140, 148–9, 151, 153, 156, 157–8, 163, 166, 170, 172, 177, 183, 185, 192–4, 199, 203–5; see also western culture Cupitt, Don 158, 193–4 Damasio, Antonio 151n Danto, Arthur 98 Darwin, Charles 49, 64–5, 91–2 Davies, Brian 160 Davis, Caroline Franks 160, 164–5 Dawkins, Richard 64, 66 death 9, 17, 51, 67, 177, 178n, 181, 182, 184–6, 187–8, 200, 201 ‘death of God’ 57, 62, 65, 67–70, 71n, 74–5, 109 Defoe, Daniel 25, 28 deism 73–4, 77–8, 85 de Lauretis, Teresa 189–90 de Lubac, Henri 109 Denèfle, Sylvette 71 Dennett, Daniel 64 Denys (the Pseudo-Areopagite), see PseudoDionysius Derrida, Jacques 23–4, 25, 26, 38, 44, 94, 107, 146 Descartes, René (also Cartesian) 18, 21, 23, 24, 29, 37, 61, 111, 124, 150, 151n, 159

Index desire 9–10, 25, 45, 63, 64, 70, 72, 111, 113–18, 121–2, 125–6, 157, 184–5, 187–90 Despland, Michel 82 de Vries, Hent 177 dialectic 1, 3, 13, 20–21, 24–5, 34, 124, 153, 174, 186–7 Dickens, Charles 152n Dilthey, Wilhelm 26, 97 doctrine 8, 9, 28, 40, 46–51, 52–3, 85, 88–9, 106, 109, 142n, 159, 167, 186, 193 Dostoevsky, Fyodor M. 10–11, 67, 158, 194, 198–205 drama 7–8, 10, 11, 13, 31, 32, 43–53, 130, 199 Dumontier, Pierre 115n Dunne, Joseph 150n Durkheim, Emile 91–2 Edelman, Gerald 97n education 112, 115, 131, 135, 140–43 Eliot, T. S. 35n emotion 11, 19, 21, 23, 29, 46, 74, 82–3, 96, 107–8, 115, 124–5, 151–2, 154, 167n, 174 Enlightenment, the 36, 63, 73, 75, 78, 116n epistemology 6, 12, 15–19, 29, 33–4, 36, 38, 40, 41, 46, 47–9, 53, 59–62, 64, 74–5, 79, 88, 93–4, 109–110, 113, 117, 123–4, 148, 150, 160–4, 191–2; see also belief; knowledge eros, see love eschatology 34–5, 51, 115n, 125, 149, 182, 185, 200–202 eternity (also eternal) 17, 31, 34–5, 43, 51, 90, 124, 135, 164, 173, 174, 202 ethics (also morality) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 12, 19, 25–6, 34, 40, 43–6, 49–50, 53, 61–75, Ch. 4 passim, 113, 139–40, 150–52, 162, 183 Evans, C. Stephen 38 Evelyn, John 173–4 evidence 6, 22, 66, 69, 72, 91, 150, 157, 159, 161–5, 169 existential 18, 31, 36, 42, 80, 201 experience 3, 6, 9, 10–11, 12–13, 18–23, 24–5, 27, 33, 34–5, 37–8, 39, 42, 52, 55–6, 58–9, 61–3, 66, 71n, 82–3, 84, 88, 92, 101, 107, 109–110, 112–113,

227

115, 118–23, 125, 127, 130, 138, 151–2, 153–5, 157–8, Ch. 9 passim, 184, 187, Ch. 11 passim explanation 3–4, 16–17, 20, 22, 33, 53, 58, 59, 63, 64–7, 70, 71n, 91–3, 95–6, 99, 108–9, 110, 133–4, 136, 153, 160, 162, 177, 198, 200–201, 203 faith 1–4, 7, 11–13, 16–18, 20, 26, 29, 31, 36, 37, 42, 44, 46–7, 49, 55, 64–8, Ch. 4 passim, 93, 106, 119, 131, 139–41, 153, 159,167, 168, 177, 183, 193; see also belief Farmer, Herbert H. 175n Febvre, Lucien 58n feminism 8, 22, 27, 41, 133, 189 Feuerbach, Ludwig 33 Fewell, Danna Nolan 182 Feyerabend, Paul 22, 99n Feynman, Richard 97n Firestone, Chris L. vii, 1, 4–5, 11, 55, Ch. 4 Fisher, Franklin 153–4 flourishing 9, 67–8, 70, 73, 141, 157, 185–90 Ford, David F. 43n Foucault, Michel 34, 71, 116n, 177–8 Frazer, Sir James 27 freedom social and political 8, 69–70, 89, 134, 157, 183, 188, 189, 193–4 spiritual and of the will 24, 32, 34, 78, 81, 84, 87–8, 89, 115, 131, 141, 157, 164, 183, 187, 190, 193–4 Freeland, Cynthia 116n, 118n Frei, Hans 40 Freud, Sigmund 70 Frost, Robert 91, 94, 95, 98, 101–2 Furley, David 112n Gadamer, Hans-Georg 5, 24–5, 44, 145–6n, 148–51, 152, 155–6 Galilei, Galileo 91 Gay, Peter 75 Geach, Peter 31 Geertz, Clifford 96–8, 100 gender 9, 178–80, 182–6, 188–9 Gibbard, Allan 29 Gibbon, Edward 72, 73, 75 Giddens, Anthony 96

228

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Girard, René 177, 184, 187 Gnosticism 16–17, 52 God 2, 3–4, 5, 6, 7–9, 10, 12, 15–20, 26–8, Chs 2, 3 & 4 passim, 91–3, 98, 100, 107–10, 114n, 116–17, 119, 122–3, 124–6, 127, Ch. 7 passim, 146–7, 149, 157, Ch. 9 passim, 177, 182–4, 188, 191–2, 199, 200–203 Gödel’s Theorem 133n Gould, Stephen J. 99 grace, divine 18, 34, 86–7, 90, 141n, 153, 165, 166 Gray, John 183 Gregory of Nyssa, St 18, 110, 114n, 115, 124–5 Gregory Palamas, St 18 Green, Ronald 82 Grenz, Stanley 51 Grice, Paul 28 Griffiths, Paul 160 Guarino, Thomas 48 Gunn, David 182 Gunton, Colin 35n, 52–3 Habermas, Jürgen 148 Hamlet 32, 52 Hamlyn, D. W. 111n, 114n Handel, George Frideric 15 Hare, John 83, 86n Harley, J. B. 48n Harris, Harriet 37, 42n Hauerwas, Stanley 39 Hawking, Stephen 133n heart, the 7, 15, 20–21, 43, 85, 131, 134, 139, 140–41, 202; see also will Hegel, G. W. F. 1, 38, 106, 124, 136, 142, 186–8 Heidegger, Martin 5, 10–11, 21, 23, 27, 33, 38, 44, 57, 60–61, 75, 105, 107, 120, 136, 158, 194–9, 204–5 Helena, St 132 Henry, Michel 126 hermeneutics 5–7, 11, 12, 13, 19, 22, 23, 24–7, 29, 38n, 41–5, 49, 51, 53, 88, 95–8, 106–10, 127, Ch. 8 passim, 157, 166, 204–5; see also interpretation Hick, John 89 Hiley, David 36n, 41, 43

Hinduism 129, 135, 140, 141, 183, 192 history 2, 3, 5, 8–9, 12, 22–3, 27, 29, 32, 33, 36, 38–42, 49–52, 55, Ch. 3 passim, 89–90, 93, 98–9, 108, 132–4, 142, 145, 147, 149, 163, 172, 177–8, 181–3, 186–90, 193 Hitler, Adolf 154–5 Holbein, Hans 67 Hölderlin, Friedrich 11, 199 Holland, Scott 153 Holy Spirit, the 26, 34, 40, 46, 50–51, 89, 108, 138n, 142, 166n Honderich, Ted 39n Honig, Bonnie 179n hope 9, 15–16, 21, 45, 70, 78, 80, 82–3, 85, 87–9, 184–6, 188–90, 202 Hume, David 22, 23, 61, 72, 73–4, 99 Hurtado, Larry 167n Husserl, Edmund 9, 10, 45, 56, 61, 105–10, 118, 124 identity moral, religious and/or social 3, 8–9, 12, 39, 40, 51, 61–2, 69, 96, 178, 181–4, 188 personal 39, 45, 61–2, 69, 96, 120, 164, 178–81 principle of 195–6 ideology 8–9, 66, 108, 148, 152–5, 157, 182–4, 186–7, 189 imagination 3, 5, 7–9, 11, 23, 31, 36, 46, 73, 110, 111, 113–14, 117–18, 127, 129–33, 138, 147, 150–52, 157, 169n, 184, 189–90 incarnation (also human embodiment) 10, 12, 18, 21, 31, 46, 52, 56, 107, 109–126, 151, 156 individualism 8–9, 59–62, 69, 72, 74, 86–7, 125, 185–6 inference 17, 19, 20–22, 24, 28, 55, 59–61, 96, 110, 117, 119, 163, 168, 172 intellect, the 19, 42, 82, 117–18, 149, 152 intention (author’s) 5–6, 25–7, 145–52, 155–6, 166, 169, 186 interpretation 4–7, 9, 11, 13, 17–19, 23–9, 37, 40, 41–50, 56, 62n, Ch. 4 passim, 95–8, 107–9, 110, 113, 118–20, 127, Ch. 8 passim, 157–8,

Index Ch. 9 passim, 181–2, 192–4, 198, 201–5; see also hermeneutics Isaiah 20, 170 Islam 4, 100, 129, 134, 139–41, 173 Jacobs, Nathan 86–7 James, William 160, 167, 194, 195 Janicaud, Dominique 105–7 Jantzen, Grace M. vii, 7, 8–9, 157, Ch. 10 Jennens, Charles 15 Jenson, Robert W. 40 Jesus (also Christ) 6, 9, 10, 18, 31–5, 40, 42–3, 45–6, 49–53, 67, 87–90, 109, 119, 124–6, 131, 142, 148, 149, 166–7, 168, 171, 182, 201–2 Job 15–17, 19–20, 23, 27 John Damascene, St 111–12 John of the Cross, St 168 John the Baptist, St 171n John the Evangelist, St 17, 27, 124, 171n Johnson, Mark 151n Jones, Robert Alun 92n Joyce, James 2, 52–3 Judaism 4, 31, 100, 129, 134, 139, 140, 141, 178 Jung, Carl 101 Kant, Immanuel 1, 3, 4–5, 7, 11–13, 16, 18, 29, 31–2, 33–4, 36–8, 39, 51, 55, Ch. 4 passim, 105, 107, 117, 136 Kasper, Walter 33 Katz, David 119 Katz, Steven 191–4, 195, 204 Kaufman, Gordon 89 Keiji, Nishitani 198n Kekes, John 44 Kelly, Geffrey B. 154 Kepler, Johannes 91 Kerr, Fergus 128n Kierkegaard, Søren 18, 28, 33–4, 198 Kirk, G. S. 195 Kitaro, Nishida 198n knowledge 1–2, 4, 10, 11–13, 15–19, 29, 33–4, 36–8, 40, 45, 55, 59–61, 69, 71, Ch. 4 passim, 97–8, 112–13, 115–16, 119–20, 123–4, 140, 141–3, 162, 166, 179, 196; see also epistemology Kosman, L. S. A. 111n

229

Kuhn, Thomas 22, 95, 99 Kyoto School 198n Lacan, Jacques 117n Laird, Martin 115n Lakatos, Imre 22 Lakoff, George 151n language 1, 2, 4, 5–8, 10–13, 22, 23–29, 31– 2, 37–9, 41–3, 46, 47–8, 107, Sect. 2 passim, 157–8, 164–5, 168–9, 183, Ch. 11 passim; see also meaning Laplace, Pierre 92n Lash, Nicholas vii, 3–4, 7, 8, 46, 127, Ch. 7, 167–8, 170 Lasserre, Jean 154 legal (theory and reasoning) 11, 23, 29, 41, 152 Leo XIII 166n Lessing, Gotthold 2, 156 Levinas, Emmanuel 34, 43n, 105–7, 110 Lewontin, Richard 63 Lindbeck, George A. 41, 47–8, 193–4, 204 Lindberg, David 93n Lipner, Julius 135n literature 2, 4, 6, 10–11, 24–6, 29, 31–2, 36n, 38–42, 43–5, 66, 78, 122, 125, 129, 137, 145, 147, 150, 152, 166, 170, 186, 193, 194–5, 197, 199–205; see also poetry Loades, Ann 37n Locke, John 39, 61, 72–3, 180 logic 17–24, 37–9, 41, 55, 96, 99, 110, 125, 127, 195–7 see also inference Logos, the (also Word) 10, 18, 34, 35, 37, 46, 51, 89, 105, 110, 119, 124–6, 131, 138, 142, 166, 197 logos 16, 17, 19, 25, 111n, 195 Lonergan, Bernard 89 love (also eros) 7, 10, 17–18, 51, 114–18, 121, 125, 132–3, 140, 168, 170, 171–2, 185 Lowe, Walter 38–9 Ludlow, Morwenna 115n Luntley, Michael 8 Luther, Martin 93, 138 Lyotard, Jean-François 178 MacEachren, Alan 47n MacIntyre, Alasdair 39–40

230

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

MacKinnon, Donald 31–2, 36, 43, 46, 47, 50–51, 53 Madonna (Ciccone) 63 Malebranche, Nicholas 109 Mandry, Christoph 45 mapping 2, 7–8, 11, 12, 36, 47–9 Marcel, Gabriel 151n Mariña, Jacqueline 86 Marion, Jean-Luc 33, 75n, 105–6, 110, 123 Marshall, Bruce 53 Martin, C. B. 160–61 Marx, Karl 75 Mary, the Virgin 171 Masao, Abe 198n materialism 3, 63–7, 71n McClendon, James 147n McGrath, Alister 40, 50, 100n meaning 1, 2, 3–4, 5, 10–11, 23–8, 39, 41–5, 47, 63, 78, 82–3, 85, 94–5, 96–7, 99–100, 107–8, 110, 118–19, Sect. 2 passim, 169, 178–9, 181, 183–6, 192–3, 195–8, 203, 204–5; see also language Merleau-Ponty, Maurice 60, 105, 107–8, 109–11, 113, 118, 120–26, 151 metaphor 9, 12, 23–4, 28, 47, 129, 137–8, 148, 169, 185–6 metaphysics 4, 10–11, 22, 26, 31–3, 37, 38, 47–53, 69, 71, Ch. 4 passim, 92–5, 99, 105–6, 109–10, 117, 124n, 136, 148, 177, 179, 187, 195–9, 204–5 Milbank, John 117n Mill, John Stuart 75 miracle (also providence) 62n, 63, 65, 67, 72–3, 91–2, 121n, 171, 173, 174, 185–6 Modernism 2 modernity 3–4, 7, 11, 12, 19, 21, 33, 40, 46, Ch. 3 passim, 91–4, 98–100, 127, 133–6, 158, 159, 163, 166–70, 172, 177, 180, 183–4, 193, 194, 196, 198–9, 203, 204–5 Moore, Andrew 33 morality, see ethics Morrison, Ken 92 Moses 26, 136–7, 168–9 Moule, C. D. F. 31–2 Muhammad 202; see also Islam Murphy, Nancey 145, 147

Murray, Michael 160 music 2, 15, 153, 172–3 Myshkin, Prince 202–3, 205 mysticism 2, 10–11, 109–10, 137, 158, 160–61, 163–5, 168–71, 173–4, Ch. 11 passim Narcissus 121n narrative (also story) 3–5, 7–11, 12–13, 23, 27, 28, 36n, 39–40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 48, 52–3, 55–6, Ch. 3 passim, 126, 129–30, 133–4, 137, 141, 152, 157, 166–7, 169, 171 Ch. 10 passim, 199–205 Nelson, F. Burton 153–4 Newman, John Henry 130, 135, 138–9, 168 Newton, Sir Isaac 91–2, 112n Nicodemus 5 Niebuhr, Reinhold 153 Nietzsche, Friedrich 2, 8, 10, 11, 22–3, 29, 38, 62n, 67–8, 74–5, 105, 109, 150, 200 normativity (also values) 19, 29, 46, 60–61, 62–5, 67–75, 78, 81–5, 90, 96, 99, 100, 134–5, 140–43, 151, Ch. 10 passim, 200 Numbers, Ronald 93n Nussbaum, Martha C. 40, 43, 111n, 151n, 152 Nygren, Anders 114n objectivity 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 47–50, 53, Ch. 3 passim, Ch. 5 passim, 105–9, 118–20, 125, 145–53, 155–6, 160–65, 170–75, 177–8, 189–90, 191–7, 204–5 Oedipus 179–80 Oliver, Simon 112n Olympias 108 Oman, John 175n ontology 10–11, 31–3, 47, 51, 52, 92, 105–6, 109–10, 113, 117, 179, 187, 195–9, 204–5 Origen 114, 119, 124 Osborne, Catherine 114n Othello 66–7 Otto, Rudolf 160 Owen, G. E. L. 1

Index Palmquist Stephen 79, 82 pantheism 18, 141, 191 Parmenides 195–6 particularity 5, 8, 23, 31–2, 38–46, 51–2, 149–52, 177–81, 186 Pascal, Blaise 11, 18, 21–3, 24, 25, 27, 29, 33 Pattison, George viii, 10–11, 158, Ch. 11 Paul, St 17, 35, 51, 53, 125, 149, 167, 172n Peacocke, Arthur 50 Pears, David 2 Peirce, Charles Sanders 22 Pelagianism 18, 86–7 Perikles 116 phenomenology 3, 9–10, 21, 38, 56, Ch. 6 passim, 150–51, 192 philosophy Introduction passim, 18, 21, 22, 23–4, 29, Ch. 2 passim, 56, 60–62, Ch. 4 passim, 93, 94, 95, 105–8, 111, 116, 127, 136–7, Ch. 8 passim, 157, 159–65, 170–71, 175, Ch. 10 passim, 191–3, 195–6, 203, 204 phronesis (also practical wisdom) 5, 7, 11, 19, 25, 43–9, 52–3, 149–52, 154–5 Pickstock, Catherine 117n picture 3, 9, 24, 58–61, 71, 129, 193, 204 Pius IX 68 Placher, William 150n Plantinga, Alvin 38, 150n, 159 Plato (also Platonic; Platonists) 15–16, 17– 18, 32, 35n, 43, 51, 86, 112n, 114, 116, 148–50, 151, 156, 168, 179 Plotinus 175 Pocock, John 73n poetry (also poetics) 4, 11, 32, 43, 78, 82, 125, 137, 157, 190, 193, 194–5, 197–9, 204–5; see also literature Poland, partition of, 12–13 Popper, Sir Karl 99n postmodernity 48, 94–5, 133, 145n, 147, 177–8, 198 Powell, Adam Clayton 153 practical wisdom, see phronesis practice 7–9, 13, 24, 28, 36, 38, 40–41, 43, 44, 49, 60–61, 135, 141, 161, 164, 168, 174, 183, 186, 189–90 pragmatism 24, 47–9, 51 prayer 4, 6, 51, 123, 131, 136, 142, 160–61, 168, 171, 173; see also worship

231

presence 10, 18, 19–20, 26, 117, 124–5, 137, 161–2, 165, 171, 173, 175, 204–5 Price, H. H. 16 Priest, Stephen 107n progress 3, 8–9, 12, 22, 40, 55, 68, 67–75, 88, 92, 98–9, 130, 157, 183–4, 189 Proudfoot, Wayne 38–9, 172n providence, see miracle Pseudo-Dionysius 115, 168 Quinn, Philip 37, 39, 40 Rahner, Karl 89, 142–3, 159, 163n, 166 Ramsey, Frank 2 Raven J. E. 195 reader, the 2, 5, 13, 19–20, 21, 25–6, 28, 42, 130, 145–6n, 149–53, 155–6, 202 realism 8, 23–4, 31, 38, 46, 47–51, 59–62, 77–8, 80, 85, 89–90, 109, 196 reason 1–5, 7, 11–13, 16, 19–23, 24–5, 29, 33–4, 35–41, 44, 46, 47, 55–6, 64–9, 71–4, Ch. 4 passim, 95–6, 99, 102, 106, 107, 114, 116–17, 130, 138, 149–53, 157–8, 161, 165, 172, 173, 175, 177, 198 redemption 15, 46–7, 49, 50, 52, 88, 134, 137; see also salvation Reformation, the 39, 71, 73 relativism 5, 21, 25, 27, 41, 145n, 151 religion 3–7, 9, 10–13, 15–16, 18, 20, 21–3, 28–9, 34, 35n, 38–9, 42, 47–8, 52, 55–6, Chs 3 & 4 passim, 93–5, 98–102, 108–10, 124n, 130, 135–6, 140–42, 152, 157, Ch. 9 passim, 177–8, 181–4, 185–6, 188–90, 191, 193–4, 198, 201–3 Renan, Ernest 71 representation 9, 41, 47–8, 49, 59–60, 96–7, 107–8, 112, 119, 123–4, 147, 189–90, 196 Resurrection, the 28, 32, 42, 51, 92, 166–7 revelation 12, 21, 33–5, 46, 48, 50, 71, 72, 73, 89, 100, 107, 110, 121n, 130, 146, 159, 164n, 166–7, 175, 185, 197, 200, 203 rhetoric 11, 13, 20, 23–4, 183, 185, 192–3

232

Transcending Boundaries in Philosophy and Theology

Ricoeur, Paul 5, 25, 27, 37, 39–40, 41n, 42, 45, 49, 51, 107–8, 145n, 146, 147–8, 150–53, 156, 188–9 Rist, John 114n Roberts, Richard 53 Rorty, Amélie Oksenberg 111n Rorty, Richard 22, 24, 29, 37, 47 Ross, James 28 Rossi, Philip 86 Rowland, Christopher 171n Ryle, Gilbert 20, 23 Sagan, Carl 63, 66 salvation 9, 12, 62n, 67, 125, 182–6; see also redemption Sandbothe, Mike 38n Sartre, Jean-Paul 26, 188 Saussure, Ferdinand de 25 Schleiermacher, Friedrich 159, 163n, 166, 167n, 172n Schnizler, Arthur 113 scholasticism 1, 37, 137–8n Schwartz, Regina 177, 186 science 3, 4, 6–7, 12–13, 18–19, 22, 25, 37, 38, 41, 44, 50n, 55–6, 60, 62n, 63– 71, 74, 75, Ch. 5 passim, 106, 107, 126, 130, 133, 136, 142, 150n, 151n, 172, 183–4, 195–9, 203, 204–5 Scripture, see Bible Searle, John 147n secularity 3–4, 9, 12, 55, Ch. 3 passim, 106, 130, 135, 172, 174, 183–4, 185 self 8, 9, 18, 21, 40, 41, 45, 60–61, 65, 72, 96, 97–8, 100, 108, 114n, 121, 125, 132–3, 135, 136, 142, 147–8, 157, 158, 164–5, 178–81, 184–5, 191–2; see also subject Sennett, Richard 116n Shakespeare, William 16, 32, 43, 52, 66 Shields, Christopher 111n sin 19, 74–5, 141n, 183–4 Smith, James 147n society (also the social) 3, 7–8, 12, 33, 38–9, 40–41, 48, 58, 60–62, 65, 67–9, 71–6, 91–2, 95–7, 100–101, 113, 116, 125, 135, 154, 157, 161, 163, 172, 178–9, 181–4, 185, 188, 189–90, 196, 204–5 Socrates 16, 34, 35, 148

Solinus, Julius 122 speech acts 5, 25, 127, Ch. 8 passim Spinosa, Charles 75 Spinoza, Benedict de 23–4, 83, 121n spiritual 3, 10, 18, 59, 65, 68, 69, 75, 114n, 116–17, 184 spirituality 17, 18, 63 Stanislavski, Konstantin 44 Star Trek 115 Stiver, Dan R. viii, 2, 5–6, 7, 11, 127, Ch. 8 Stravinsky, Igor 2 Stump, Eleonore 160 Suarez, Francisco de 111n subject (also subjectivity) 3, 7–9, 11, 13, 17–19, 36–7, 41, 42, 43–5, 49, 60– 62, 96, 100, 110, 112–13, 115, 123, 161–2, 165, 169–71, 172n, 174–5, 187–8, 197–8, 202; see also self subtraction story 7, 12, 57, 62, 69–70 Sussman, David 86n Swinburne, Richard 159–62 Taliaferro, Charles 160 Taylor, A. E. 162n Taylor, Charles viii, 3–4, 5, 7, 8, 12, 55, Ch. 3, 97n, 107 Teresa of Avila, St 160, 163, 165, 168n, 170–71 Tertullian 122 testimony 34, 62n, 67, 161 texts 2, 5–6, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 23–9, 37–42, 48, Ch. 8 passim, 157, 166–7, 190, 194, 204 theism 3, 33, 37–9, 58, 75, 83, 93, 100, 135, 141, 163–4, 195 theology Introduction passim, 17–19, 29, Ch. 2 passim, 56, 72, 75, 77, Ch. 4 passim, 92–3, 95, 98–102, 106–10, 114–26, 127, 130–31, 136–8, 145, 152, 155, 157, 159–60, 166–71, 175, 177, 194, 198 Thiselton, Anthony 42 Thomas Aquinas, St (also Thomism) 18, 33, 89, 111, 116–17, 122–3, 124, 136, 137, 138, 167 Thucydides 116n Tillich, Paul 52, 89, 159, 166 time (also temporality) 27, 31, 33, 36, 39–40, 46, 51, 65, 78, 84, 109, 133n,

Index 138, 155, 158, 164, 173, 177–9, 183, 184, 187, 195, 202 Tocqueville, Alexis de 74 Torrance, Thomas 100n touch, sense of 10, 56, 109, 111–26 Tracy, David 40 Trinity, doctrine of the 33, 40, 46, 50–51, 119, 138n, 142–3 truth (also truths) 2, 4, 16, 17–18, 20, 23–5, 26, 31, Ch. 2 passim, 62n, 77, 84, 89, 90, 106, 129–30, 131, 141, 142–3, 177, 179, 181, 193, 195, 196, 198, 203, 205 Turner, Denys 115n, 137, 168–70, 194 Tyrrell, G. N. M. 164n Underhill, Evelyn 194 understanding Introduction passim, 19, 21, 23–4, 27–8, 32, 35, 37, 40, 42, 43–53, 55, 59–60, 69, 74, 77–8, 89, 98, 102, 111–12, 116–17, 124–6, 129, 131, 133, 138, 142–3, 146, 148, 149–53, 154–6, 157, 167, 179, 181, 194, 196–8, 204–5 Unger, Peter 21 utopia 8, 75, 157, 189–90 values, see normativity Vanhoozer, Kevin. J. viii, 3, 6, 7–8, 9, 10, 11, 12, Ch. 2, 127, 145–7 Van Til, Cornelius 93 Vergil 182 verificationism 37, 94, 99, 109, 110 via negativa (also apophatic tradition) 18, 137–8, 168–9 Vickers, Salley 129 Voltaire (Arouet, François-Marie) 72, 74 von Hügel, Baron Friedrich 168 Wainwright, William J. 38 Walsh, W. H. 50n Ward, Graham viii, 3, 9–10, 56, Ch. 6 Warner, Martin viii, 11, Ch. 1 Watson, Francis 40 Webb, Clement 81–2

233

Weber, Max 58, 96, 172 Weil, Simone 20 Weinandy, Thomas 138n Wesley, John 74, 172n West, the (also western culture) 3, 8–9, 55, 57, 69, 73, 94, 98, 130–31, 133, 135, 141, 157, 164, 168, 172, 178, 181–6, 188–90, 191, 195–6 will, the 7, 11, 19–23, 29, 43, 46, 72–3, 85, 86, 118; see also heart Williams, Rowan 17, 18, 27, 49, 141n wisdom 19–20, 31, 35, 42n, 44, 49–50, 53, 131, 140–43, practical wisdom, see phronesis Wisdom, John 23 Wittgenstein, Ludwig 2, 4, 9, 21, 27, 58–9, 107, 113, 120, 131, 167n, 191–2, 197 Wolterstorff, Nicholas 33, 38, 39–40, 42, 145–7, 148–9 Wood, Allen 79 Word, the, see Logos Wordsworth, William 42 world, the 2, 3–4, 6, 8, 13, 21, Ch. 2 passim, 55, 57, 60–61, 63, 65–8, 72, 78–9, 82–3, 84–5, Chs 5, 6 & 7 passim, 150–52, 157–8, 162, 165, 167, 171, 172, 173–4, 177, 181, 182, 183, 184–5, 188, 190, 191, 195–6, 198, 200, 205 world structures 3–8, 10–13, 55, Ch. 3 passim worship 4, 27, 108, 127, 129–30, 134–6, 139, 141, 153–4, 172, 183, 193; see also prayer Wrathall, Mark ix, 76n Wright. T. R. 32 Yandell, Keith 161n Yeago, David S. 40–41 Zaehner, R. C. 164 Zarathustra 8 Žižek, Slavoj 117n Zoroastrianism 94